`8 HN0_1ph MNu3@`  @`! O%`')+-/1 O5`79;=?A C@oGIKMOQ S@U`WY[]_a c@e`gikmo/s@u`y{} @` @ ` @ ` @ ` @ ` ǀ ɠ @ ` ׀  /@o@`!Aa  Aa!!#A%a')+-/1!3A5a79;=?A!CAEaGIKMOQ!SAUaWY[]_a!cAeagikmo/sAuawy{}!Aa!Aa!Aa!Aa!Aaǁɡ!Oaׁ١!Aa!Aa " B b  !"!B!b!!!!!"!""#B"%b"'")"+"-"/#1"#3B#o#7#9#;#=#?$A"$CB$Eb$G$I$K$M$O%Q"%SB%Ub%W%Y%[%]%_&a"&cB&eb&g&i&k&m&o'q"'sB'ub'w'y'{'}'("(B(b((((()")B)b))/))*"*B*b*****+"+B+b+++++,",B,b,ǂ,ɢ,,,-"-B-b-ׂ-٢---.".B.b...../"/B/b/////0#0c00 0 0 01#1C1c111112!#2#C2%c2'2)2@`  @`! O%`')+-/1 O5`79;=?A C@oGIKMOQ S@U`WY[]_a c@e`gikmo/s@u`y{} @` @ ` @ ` @ ` @ ` ǀ ɠ @ ` ׀  /@o@`!Aa  Aa!!#A%a')+-/1!3A5a79;=?A!CAEaGIKMOQ!SAUaWY[]_a!cAeagikmo/sAuawy{}!Aa!Aa!Aa!Aa!Aaǁɡ!Oaׁ١!Aa!Aa " B b  !"!B!b!!!!!"!""#B"%b"'")"+"-"/#1"#3B#o#7#9#;#=#?$A"$CB$Eb$G$I$K$M$O%Q"%SB%Ub%W%Y%[%]%_&a"&cB&eb&g&i&k&m&o'q"'sB'ub'w'y'{'}'("(B(b((((()")B)b))/))*"*B*b*****+"+B+b+++++,",B,b,ǂ,ɢ,,,-"-B-b-ׂ-٢---.".B.b...../"/B/b/////0#0c00 0 0 01#1C1c111112!#2#C2%c2'2)2QUIZPLUSSWRh@TAI_PAN SWR#F>TAUCEII SWR3_DTERRAMEXSWR E)UMS_1 SWRLJUMS_2 SWRwlALADIN SWRX(AUTO HARRIER1SWR,sKIDGLOVESWR[(LOOM SWR_LUST SWRB VIP_MAN1SWRxzVIP_MAN2SWRqVIP_MAN3SWR}VIP_MAN5SWRS5VIP_MAN4SWRFSIM SWR*< QUIZPLUS INTRODUCTION: QuizPlus is a system for Computer Assisted Instruction (CAI) on the Atari St. Using your own lesson files, QuizPlus presents tutorial screens, multiple choice quiz questions and pictures. The student uses the mouse to progress through the lesson - no typing input is required. QuizPlus teaching disks are created by placing the QuizPlus program onto disks with teaching or quiz files you've modified to work with the program. Simple commands within the lesson file's text control how QuizPlus presents the lesson. QuizPlus can load and display DEGAS-format graphic materials for use in the lessons - but you don't need DEGAS to use the program. QuizPlus includes a special lesson editor for making changes in a lesson file, but you'll need your own word processor to create the lessons. If you plan to create graphics, you'll need your own graphics program, capable of saving graphics to disk in DEGAS-format. Many educational files will be available from other users of QuizPlus, through our QuizShare program. Return the disk registration card to receive periodic lists of available teaching disks. THE QUIZPLUS DISK: Make a backup copy of QuizPlus before you begin working with the program. The disk is not copy-protected. Your QuizPlus master disk contains 3 versions of the QuizPlus lesson- administering module: 1) QUIZPLUS.PRG, the basic quiz/tutorial administering program, 2) QPACC.PRG, a version which allows the use of desk accessories (such as a calculator) by the student, and 3) QPEDIT.PRG, through which instructor edits and "fine tunes" the appearance of his lesson on the QuizPlus screen. Resource files for these programs are identified by the ".RSC" extender, and must be included on the teaching disks. Those files whose names end with "M" are the monochrome versions. QuizPlus is constantly being improved to increase its usefulness. Any features not discussed fully in the manual will be found in the "READ_ME" file. The master disk contains demo files, and the picture files used by them, plus the menu-text file for these demo lessons. If you'd like, you can now boot the QuizPlus disk and view the demo lessons before proceeding. HOW QUIZPLUS WORKS: As QuizPlus starts, it reads from a file called "MENU.TXT" which contains descriptive titles for up to 10 lesson text files. It centers the titles in menu boxes, and the student clicks on his choice with the mouse. QuizPlus reads the lesson text file into memory (pictures aren't loaded in until they are needed). The content of the text file tells QuizPlus how it is to be processed. If a text line starts with the "$" symbol, it's assumed to be a command, and is acted on. If the line isn't a command (or parameters that follow a command), it's written to the screen. While QuizPlus is running, your lesson file will be presented as a series of screens, as directed by program flow commands. For example, the command $QUIZ tells QuizPlus to set up a multiple choice question screen. $Wait and $END are also program-flow control commands - A $Wait in the lesson text file tells QuizPlus to stop printing text and wait for the user to do something. For example, on the $QUIZ screen, it waits for the user to click the mouse on an answer box. If a command requires that further information be given, it is entered on the line immediately following the command, or appended to the command by "|". For example, after the $QUIZ command, QuizPlus expects the correct answer as the very next input. The exact syntax and options are discussed below. Text material can be altered in its screen appearance by the use of text style commands. These commands can be added together for special effects. For example, $res|$large|$center|Hello" will yield a large red "Hello" centered on the screen. QuizPlus will have to access certain files during execution. First is the MENU.TXT file, which contains the 10 lines you want to appear as lesson titles in the menu. Following a choice of lessons by the user, QuizPlus loads a lesson file. These lesson files must be named LESSON1 to LESSON10, with the number corresponding to the position of the lesson title in the menu - first through tenth. If your lesson file specifies that pictures should be loaded for display, QuizPlus looks for the picture name, appending the filename extender (.PC1, .PC2, .PC3) itself depending on screen resolution. Your lesson file therefore should contain the name of the file at the appropriate place (see below) without the extender, yet the picture file must be on disk with the proper filename extender. Animation commands control picture animation, although only one type of animation is possible at a time. By now, you should have worked through the sample files. You saw the contents of the MENU.TXT file centered on the menu page, and selected your choice. QuizPlus loaded the text of a "LESSON#" file, and presented you with a mix of text, question, and picture screens. The multiple-choice functions, and the fancy text you saw, were all controlled by simple "$" commands embedded in the text file. You can examine these files with a word processor to see how these effects were created. CREATING A QUIZPLUS DISK: Exit the QuizPlus program back to desktop. Note the LESSON# files, and the MENU.TXT file. Note the program modules and find the corresponding monochrome and color resource (.RSC) files. Put the QuizPlus Editor module (QPEDIT.PRG), plus the appropriate resource file (QPEDITC.RSC, or QPEDITM.RSC for monochrome), on a black formatted diskette. Transfer or save your favorite desktop environment to the disk, along with any desk accessories. Using a word processor, edit or create your "LESSON#" files, plus a MENU.TXT file, and save them to disk as below, keeping a backup file in word-processing mode to guard against disaster. Transfer any DEGAS-format pictures used by your files onto the disk, with the original filename extenders (.PC1, .PC2). Following this initial transfer of files, you're ready to begin final editing and debugging of your lesson files (see below). MAKING THE TUTORIAL/QUIZ FILES: You can now create teaching files, or modify existing quiz or tutorial material, for use with QuizPlus. Using a text processor capable of saving to disk in printed ASCII form, you create your educational lesson. One of the most useful features of QuizPlus is the ability to quickly convert an existing text file (an old test, for example) into CAI. Each lesson text file with its embedded commands should be saved under the name LESSON1...LESSON10. LESSON1 should be the file you want to appear first in the QuizPlus menu, LESSON2 the second, and so on. You'll create a MENU.TXT file later which provides full descriptive titles for each of these lessons. The total length of the lesson file is limited to 25000 characters. The word processing file must be saved in printed ASCII format for use by QuizPlus. This means each single line will contain a carriage return at the end, just as if it were being sent in "hex" form to the printer. Any commands must occupy the leftmost print position (left margin of 0). There must be no formatting or control codes within the text. Most word processors have an "ASCII-save" or "print to disk" function to accomplish this. EXAMPLES OF SAVING IN ASCII FORMAT: In 1st Word, save the file twice, once in word processing (WP) mode with the .DOC extender, and then again with WP mode switched off using the LESSON1,2,3 filename. You'll appreciate the value of saving the .DOC file when you need to make major additions or corrections and re-format. With STwriter, save your file with the .STW extender, then PRINT the file to disk using a left margin of 0, right margin of 60 to 75, top margin of 0, and bottom margin of 0. Rely on the "$Margin[n]" command to create left text margins. CREATING THE MENU.TXT FILE: The MENU.TXT file provides the lesson titles as you want them to appear on the menu screen. Most educators prefer this menu method over simple filenames. QuizPlus will read your lesson titles, and center them in the menu boxes. Each QuizPlus teaching disk must have its own MENU.TXT file. Create the MENU.TXT file with your word processor. List the descriptive titles of your teaching files on 10 separate lines, with each line corresponding to the LESSON file number. In other words, the title for LESSON3 should appear on the 3rd line of the MENU.TXT file. You should type as many titles as you have "LESSON#" files on disk (you needn't enter 10 full lines). Like the lesson files, the MENU.TXT file should be saved in ASCII format. FINAL EDITING: After putting your lesson files and pictures on disk with the MENU.TXT file, final editting can begin. The QPedit program allows you to flip back and forth between the line editor and the quiz program, making changes and instantly seeing the results. Use of the editor is discussed in greater detail elsewhere. Progress from screen to screen through your lesson, clicking on "start" in the edit menu bar to make changes when you see something you don't like. After making your change in the text of the file, click on "exit" to go on, starting with the screen you just edited. As you finish the file, or exit to the menu, you can save the edited file. When you're satisfied with all LESSON files on the disk, remove the QPedit program and .RSC file from your teaching disk. (You don't want your students editing your lessons during their educational sessions.) Transfer QUIZPLUS.PRG and its resource file (QUIZPLUS.RSC or QUIZPLUM.RSC for monochrome) to the disk. If your files require the student to use desk accessories, use the QPACC files. Your educational disk is ready to use. QUIZPLUS COMMANDS: QuizPlus commands are embedded within the text of the lesson file. They're recognized by QuizPlus by the "$" in front of them. The commands are of 2 general types: lesson control, and text formatting. Lesson control commands direct the flow and form of the lesson. Text formatting commands change the size, shape, color, or location of text. In addition, there are 2 commands that control the animation of pictures. Commands are all preceded by "$" and must be placed flush with the left margin. Alternatively, the "|" character (found above the reverse slash "\" on the ST keyboard) substitutes for RETURN to stack commands on the same line. So each "$" command must either be at the left margin (following a RETURN) or must follow a "|" (which substitutes for RETURN). For brevity, the first two letters of any command can substitute for that command. For example, the line: $gr|$|a|$sk|$ce||Title||$ca will cause QuizPlus to skip one line, place a green, skewed, large "Title" in the center of the page, skip a line, then revert to default regular black text. LESSON CONTROL COMMANDS: Since QuizPlus presents the lesson as a series of screens, the first command given specifies the type of screen to set up. Each must be prefaced by a dollar sign as shown and must be placed at the leftmost position (with the "$" occupying the first character position). The commands may be either capital or small letters. Capital letters are recommended so you can easily distinguish the start of a screen in the lesson file. Some of the screen setup commands must be followed immediately (on the next line or after a "|") by further information as below. The other lesson control commands are $wait and $END. You lesson file will be a screen setup command, text, and $wait, repeated in sequence, then terminated by a $END at the end of the file. SCREEN FORMAT COMMANDS: $TEXT Text-only screen. $QUIZ Multiple-choice screen. a The correct answer. $PICTURE Load and display picture. picture1 Picture filename without extender (.PC1, .PC2, .PC3) $TPIC Text screen, picture for reference. picture1 Picture filename, without extender. $QPIC Multiple choice screen, reference picture. picture1 Picture filename, without extender. a The correct answer. OTHER CONTROL COMMANDS: $Wait Wait for student input, then process. $END Give student score, return to menu. The correct answer and the name of the picture file nay be in either capital or small letters. They must be found on the line(s) immediately following the screen format command (at the leftmost edge), or separated from the command by "|". Specifications for pictures are discussed under "$PICTURE", below. CONTROL COMMAND DETAILS: $TEXT A bordered text screen is set up, ready to receive the following lines of text. Next, Previous, and Menu option buttons are placed automatically at the bottom of the page. The Picture button is shaded to indicate that it's inactive. On encountering a $wait command, QuizPlus waits for the user to click on an option button before proceeding. $QUIZ A screen of text for a multiple choice question is presented, with answer buttons A, B, C, D, and E at the bottom. Previous and Menu buttons are provided, with a shadowed (inactive) Picture button. At the $wait command, QuizPlus will allow the student to answer the question. An incorrect response requires the user to select another answer button. Only the first attempt to answer the question in counted towards the student's score. The $QUIZ command must be followed immediately by the letter of the correct answer, separated only by the carriage return of "|" character. Example: $QUIZ|b $PICTURE A picture is displayed. A click of the right mouse button continues. There is no "Previous" function on the $PICTURE screen, so the user cannot "back up" past this screen. It therefore divides a lesson into discrete parts. The name of a picture file (including those used with $TPIC and $QPIC) can be anything allowed by the computer (up to 8 characters). Do not type the filename extender (.PC1, .PC2, .PC3) as these will be automatically appended. The picture files on the disk, however, must be named using the correct extenders as provided by DEGAS or DEGAS Elite. Compressed-format pictures are recommended to save disk space. The low and medium-resolution pictures both require a color monitor. The program will automatically search for either resolution (.PC1 or .PC2) if you have a color monitor, changing the screen resolution as needed when the picture is displayed. High-resolution pictures require a monochrome monitor for display. The program automatically looks for high-res picture files (.PC3) if you are operating a monochrome system. Note that if the picture name is the same as the last one used, the file is not reloaded from disk so as to save time. The $PICTURE command must be followed immediately by the picture filename, without extender. The picture name may be on the next line in the leftmost position, or separated from the command by the "|" character. Example: $PICTURE|picture4 $TPIC A screen of tutorial text is shown, with Next, Previous, Picture, and Menu buttons. Clicking the left mouse button on the Picture button displays a picture. Clicking the right mouse button returns to the text screen. The student may go back and forth between picture and text as many times as necessary. The $TPIC command must be followed immediately by the picture filename, written without extender, either immediately following $TPIC on the next line, or separated from $TPIC by "|". Example: $TPIC|diagram2 $QPIC The screen is set up for a multiple choice question, with answer buttons A, B, C, D, and E, plus Previous, Picture, and Menu. As with the Text-Picture combination, clicking the left mouse button on the Picture button displays a picture. Pressing the right mouse button returns to the question text. As with the $QUIZ screen, only the first user response counts towards the score. The $QPIC command must be followed by: first, the picture filename without extender, then second, the letter of the correct answer. Both items must be either flush with the left margin following the carriage return, or separated from $QPIC and from each other by the "|" character. Example: $QPIC|diagram5|d $WAIT In order to signal the program to stop displaying text and wait for the student's response, the command $wait is given. This, too, must be flush with the left margin following the printable text material, or following a "|" character. QuizPlus will automatically process the student's input according to the type of screen in the previous lesson control command. For example, to give a quiz question (correct answer = b) with a diagram named "DIAGRAM.PC1" for reference, you type: #QPIC|diagram|b blah,blah,blah thing in the diagram a. totally wrong b. right $wait That's all there is to it. You just divide your text material up into digestable chunks between a screen setup command and a $wait command. $END The lesson file should be ended with the command $END. Be sure to precede $END with $Wait so the last screen will await student response. TEXT FORMATTING COMMANDS: After the screen-type command and any required accompanying information, the text to be presented is given. This text may be centered or justified or marginated as permitted by the word processor, or the centering and margins can be accomplished through text formatting commands. Otherwise, the appearance on the presentation screen will be essentially the same as that shown on the word processing screen (with the exception of large or outlined text). The amount of text allowed on any single screen is 75 characters wide by 19 lines down. To estimate the screen position of large text, assume it to be twice the size of normal text. Remember the $center command can save you the trouble of estimating the location of centered titles or subtitles for any type size. Commands can be given to change the color, size, and style of text within the screen presentation. These changes are most conveniently made from line to line, but can be made within a line using the $nonewline command as shown below. Location: $Margin[n] Set left text margin to "n" $Center Center the next text line. $NoNewLine($No) Cancels carriage return. | Substitutes for RETURN. Color changes: $Black Change text color to black. $Red Change text color to red. $Green Change text color to green. Size changes: $Large Change text size to twice normal. $Small Change text size to normal. Style changes: $Thickened Change text to thickened style. $Light Change text to light style. $Skewed Change text to skewed or italic. $Underlined Change text to underlined style. $Outlined Change text to outlined style. Normal black text: $Cancel Change text to black, normal style. As with lesson control commands, the "$" of the command must be either flush with the left margin, or following the "|" character. As a convenience, the short form for any of the commands is "$" plus the first two letters of the command. Commands may be in either capital or small letters. Text formatting commands may be added together to achieve different effects. For example, "$un|$lil|$th" will yield underlined, light, thick text. The $cancel command is useful for resetting the text to normal after multiple changes. TEXT COMMAND DETAILS: $Margin[n] sets a left margin for all text lines printed following the command. The brackets must be included. For example, $Margin[5] will cause 5 blank spaces to appear before each line of following text, until another $Margin command changes the margin. Default is $Margin[0]. $Margin[n] is a more convenient method of establishing margins on the QuizPlus screen than formatting the margin with your word processor (remember your "$" commands must be flush with the left margin). $Center The $center command centers the next string of printable text. It must be used for every line for which centering is required. $Center doesn't center text appended to the same line by the $nonewline command. For example, in the line: $ce|$no|The |$re|$la|$no|RED|$bl|$no| Wagon "The " will be centered, then the big red "RED" will follow (off center). You can, however, center these "hybrid"lines by experimenting with the QPedit editor, either by spacing the text out without the $center command, or using the $center command but appending spaces after the text (to allow for the additional text). $NoNewLine The $NoNewLine command ($no) holds QuizPlus on the same line, allowing mixing type styles and colors on the same line. In effect, it cancels the carriage return or "|" character. For example, when QuizPlus encounters the line: The word|$re|$no|RED|$ca|$no| is red| it will print a single line "The word RED is red|" with "RED" in red letters. Providing the text will all fit on a line 75 characters wide, several style and color changes can be made in one line of text. | The "|" character substitutes anywhere a carriage return would normally be used, such as after a command. However, it will not cause a "line feed" on the text processing screen (or the QPedit editor) and therefore makes the text more readable when several commands are "stacked". It can also be used to skip lines. For example: $bl|||$la|$ce|HELLO!|$ca|||Next line. will skip 3 lines, print a big black "HELLO!" then skip 3 lines and print "Next line." $Black, $Red, $Green The color commands change the text to 1 of 3 user- defined colors. Black, Red, and Green are the defaults. While using QPedit, the screen appearance may be easily changed by adjusting the colors with the control panel desk accessory until the effects are pleasing, then saving the desktop after exiting QPedit. Changing the colors for the text screens will not affect the colors in the pictures. $Large, $Outlined, $Thickened, $Skewed Use of the large command may affect the performance of other style commands. For example, large outlined text will overwrite itself unless you space between the characters. Large text used at the top of a screen should have a blank line before it so as not to overwrite the top screen border. Test the effects of the $skewed command, because it may overwrite adjacent letters in a word when combined with other style or size commands. Spacing between adjacent letters should fix it. This editing is best done using the QPedit program. $Cancel The $cancel command changes the text style to black, small, normal font. It does not cancel a $Margin[n] command. ANIMATION COMMANDS: QuizPlus allows a limited form of animation, based on color cycling, to be used in the pictures presented. Since it is based on color cycling, the animation is limited to low resolution color pictures for the most part, although limited use could be made in medium and high resolution pictures. The pictures need not be saved with animation turned on to be animated by QuizPlus. Two commands relate to animation, and, if used, must be given before each picture is shown: $animate[start color #][end color #][time] $oscillate $Animate[c1][c2][t] $Animate causes the first color specified [c1] to be replaced by successive colors, up to the second color specified [c2]. The third parameter is the time between switching colors, [t]. After reaching the second color, the process begins again with the first color. Following the $animate command, the start color, end color, and time interval are placed in brackets as shown. The colors are identified by number, and the start color number must always be less than the end color number. The color numbers are those shown across the top of the DEGAS or DEGAS Elite program screens, and run (left to right) from 0 to 15 in low resolution. The interval [t] must be from 1 to 1000 milliseconds. For example, the command "$animate[11][14][100]" would rotate the colors form the 11th pallete box to the 14th pallete box (on the DEGAS menu screen) with a delay of 100 milliseconds between switches. With a little planning, the same picture file can be used several times, with different animation each time. For example, a 6-color picture in low resolution would leave 9 color boxes which can be alternated between grey and black. Using each grey box, an arrow is placed pointing to a part of a diagram. But before saving the picture, the grey is changed to white. Each $animate command would give the number of a formerly grey box, and a black box adjacent to it. The result is a picture which, using different $animate commands, shows a blinking black arrow which can point to any of 5 different parts of the picture. $Oscillate The $oscillate command can only be used after the $animate command has set up the animation. It changes the type of color cycling from unidirectional to oscillating, i.e. it cycles the colors up then down rather than continuously up. For example of the use of both commands to show a working bellows diagram accessible through a text screen would be: $TPIC|bellows|$animate[5][8][50]|$oscillate blah,blah,blah see the diagram, blah $wait The oscillating diagram for this picture might be created as follows: For a 4 frame animation, choose 4 colors that are not used in the rest of the picture, i.e. 5,6,7,8. Draw each frame with a different color in numerical sequence and with no overlaps. Then change color 5 to the chosen animation color (say red) and the other 3 colors to the background color (usually white). During animation the color red will cycle through colors 5,6,7 and 8 over and over again, lighting up the frame drawings in sequence. The interval number (try 200 initially) controls the speed of the animation. e.g. 5, , , , , 6, , , , , 7, , , , , 8, 5, , , , , 6, , , etc. With the command $oscillate the colors oscillate up then down. e.g. 5, , , , , 6, , , , , 7, , , , , 8, , , 7, , , 6, , , 5, , , , , 6, , , etc. For a flashing light effect use only 2 colors with sufficient contrast between them. A "theatre marguee" light chasing effect can also be achieved using only 2 colors, and drawing lines with equal segments of each color alternating along the length of the line. DEGAS Elite users can test their animations using the cycling command built into that program. THE QUIZPLUS EDITOR INTRODUCTION: The QuizPlus Editor is an elementary editor for Lesson files. It is not meant for lesson file composition, which is better done on a text processor. This editor is for final composition of lesson files, where adjustments to the appearance of the lesson screen presentation may be made conveniently, without having to jump back and forth between text processor and QuizPlus. The QuizPlus Editor is capable of accepting all changes to the lesson files, even to the extent of changing the type of screen presented, but in such cases the changes will not be apparent until the user steps back one screen (using the PREVIOUS button), and then forward again (using the NEXT button). As a minimum the lesson file must begin with a $Command for a screen type (e.g. $TEXT), and end with a $WAIT followed by a $END. Saving the edited lesson file is optional, via a dialogue box, so that the user is not irrevocably committed to losing the original lesson file. It's a good practice to keep backup copies of the lesson files in case the newly edited lesson file proves to be unsatisfactory. During the preview mode, the QuizPlus Editor functions almost identically to the QuizPlus presentation program, except that a menu bar is accessible. The user review the lesson much as a student, but has access to desk accessories (such as the Control Accessory for adjusting screen colors) under the DESK menu, and the editor under the EDIT menu. From the initial menu screen, the user picks a lesson to preview. The previewer will see the same screens, and be required to respond in the same way as the student. When the presentation is judged to need changes, just click on "Start" in the EDIT menu to enter the editor. The lesson file text is displayed on the edit screen, starting with the screen setup command for the last screen displayed. Clicking on the "Exit" box returns to the QuizPlus program. EDITING LESSONS: The editing dialogue displays the text of the lesson file as it appears to the QuizPlus program. Note that all lines end with a CR (Carriage Return character). The CR determines the length of the line and if omitted a maximum length of 75 characters is assumed. Only 1 line at a time is editable; the top line surrounded by the box. A moveable cursor is represented by highlighting the character that it is on. MAJOR EDITING OPERATIONS: The buttons on the editor dialogue allow major operations of the QuizPlus Editor with the mouse, as well as the keyboard. Use whichever is most convenient. The editing functions available are as follows. Exit the Editor - Left Click on the EXIT button. Or Shift Key plus Return Key. Move up 1 line - Left Click on ARROW UP button. Or press Arrow Up key. (for 5 Lines hold down Shift Key) Move down 1 line - Click on ARROW DOWN button. Or press Arrow Down Key. (for 5 lines press Shift Key) Insert New Line - Left click on INSERT LINE button. Or Shift Key plus Insert key. Delete the Line - Left Click on DELETE LINE button. Or Shift Key plus Delete Key. MINOR OPERATIONS: These operations include the actual editing of the characters in a line, and are only available from the keyboard. Insert Key - Toggle between insert mode and replace (typeover) mode. A message bar below text shows which mode is active. Arrow Right Key - Move cursor one character right. Arrow Left key - Move cursor one character left. Esc Key - Empty the line of text. Delete Key - Delete character under cursor & move the rest of the line up. Backspace Key - Delete character left of the cursor and move the rest of of the line up. Undo Key - Return the line of text to its original. Only works after Minor Operations, will not work after a Major Operation. Return Key - Places a CR (Carriage Return). Only used for a CR deleted by mistake. All lines must end in a CR. SOFTWARE presents yet another DR.J doc TAI-PAN PLAYING THE GAME The year is 1841, and traders are sailing the waters of the far east in search of wealth beyond their wildest dreams. The Chinese call these men Tai-Pan--Supreme Leaders--and the greatest of them is THE TAI-PAN. Your goal is to become the TAI-PAN, but it won't be easy. You've been stranded in a foreign port with no ship, no crew, and no money...not even enough to buy yourself a decent meal at the inn. Luckily, you stumble across a benefactor who agrees to a short-term loan. You quickly buy a ship, hire a crew, purchase goods and supplies, and set sail, looking for profit and adventure. Threatened by typhoons and pirates at sea, you finally arrive in port to do a little honest trading...only to be swindled out of all your money by the proprietor of the local gambling den! Looks like you'll have to turn to pirating yourself, or at least smuggling; Jin-qua wants his money back in six months, and you know he means business. You'll have to be clever (and ruthless) to succeed in this world of unscrupulous traders and cutthroats. Acquire wealth and status as you strive to become the most power Merchant Prince of the all: THE TAI-PAN. GAME CONTROL When the title screen appears, you will be asked to select either a joystick or a mouse as your control device. Press 1 (for mouse) or 2 (for joystick) to make your selection. If using a mouse, the left button is your fire button. Adjust the volume using the volume control on your monitor. TOWN You enter the game penniless...no money, no ships, no assets. You begin in town and must wander around, looking for a friendly benefactor who will lend you $300,000; enough to buy and equip a ship, get a crew, and purchase goods to trade. The money lent to you must be repaid within 6 months, or your benefactor loses face...and you lose your head. The screen consists of a game area on top with icons shown below. Move your control forward, back, left or right to move in the corresponding direction. To enter a building, position yourself slightly to the right of the doorway and move your control forward. Press the space bar to move to the icon selection area (mouse users may also use the right button to do this). Use the control to center the "hook" over the icon you want. (NOTE: the tip of the hook must be in the center of the icon.) Press the fire button to select that icon. Press the space bar to return to the game without making a selection. Once business has been transacted, press the fire button to go back outside. Press F1 to view two status "scrolls": press once to check your current supply of money and goods; press again to see the date, number of weapons, crew and rations. Press again to return to the game. Press F2 to see a list of current market prices. Press again to return to the game. SHIP Once you have raised a loan, you must go to the Bank and buy a ship. You will be given three choices: Lorcha $150,000. A smuggler's ship (fast). Cargo space=10 units, 2 cannons, 7 crew (minimum). Clipper $250,000. A standard trader's ship (moderate speed). Cargo space=30 units, 4 cannons, 12 crew (minimum). Frigate $400,000. A gunship, used by pirates (slow). Cargo space=30 units, 8 cannons, 24 crew (minimum). Your choice of ship should be determined by the type of activity you plan to pursue. If you want to smuggle contraband, then the swift Lorcha is your best choice. If you wish to trade peacefully (apart from the odd indescretion), you should choose the Clipper. If you decide to try your hand at pirating you'll need the extra fire power of the Frigate. CREW After purchasing your ship, you must get a crew. Crew members can either be hired (from the Inn), or press-ganged (if you want to conserve money). A paid crew is liable to be more loyal to you than a forced crew. To be successful at press-ganging you should use a truncheon (you'll find one on the road), and only attempt it on exhausted men or drunks. Press-ganged men will be taken to your ship automatically, provided you don't already have a full crew. If you attempt to press-gang a fit man he will probably fight back or call the Bannermen, and you'll end up spending 30 days in jail. If you're arrested three times you'll be beheaded. CARGO Once your crew has been assembled you must buy provisions, arms, and trade goods at various locations around town. Since everything you buy will take up cargo space, make your purchases wisely. Buying 10 rolls of silk might seem like a good idea in Canton, but try feeding your crew with it two weeks out to sea! SAILING When your cargo hold is full you must find your ship and set sail. once on board, point your ship out to sea and raise your sails; with any luck the wind will be at your back. If you had the foresight to purchase a map and a telescope in town, you may select these icons to help you locate your position and scan the horizon for other ships. Your ship's forward movement is controlled entirely by wind and sail height, and you cannot sail backwards or sideways. Moving your control left will make the ship turn counterclockwise; moving it right will make it turn clockwise. By alternating these movements you can control the direction your ship will sail. If you accidentally sail too close to land your sails will be automatically lowered. To get back out to sea you must point your ship directly away form the land and raise your sails again. The screen consists of a game area on top with icons shown below. Joystick users should press the fire button to move to the icon selection area; mouse users must press the right mouse button. NOTE: The right-most icon shows current wind direction and cannot be selected on the ST. Use the mouse or joystick to center the "hook" over the icon you want and press the fire button quickly to select that icon. Press fire again to return to the game area. FOOD SUPPLIES Sailors eat a lot, and your crew is no exception. They will expect to be fed throughout the journey, so make sure you have enough rations on hand to last a while. After selection the FEED CREW icon you will be presented with a menu listing your current food stocks and crew numbers; choose the level of rations you wish to issue. To maintain stamina levels your crew should be fully fed. If you have underestimated your travelling time it may be necessary to give reduced rations towards the end of a journey; however, a hungry crew is more likely to mutiny. Since food has a tendency to spoil quickly at sea, leftover rations are thrown overboard at the end of each journey. Don't forget to re-stock your supply before you leave port. SHIPPING ROUTES Shipping Routes are marked on the map; using them allows you to reach your destination more quickly. You may only access a shipping route if there are no storms or other ships in the area. When you cross an available route you will be shown your location on the map and given the choice of sailing in either direction. Press the fire button when the direction you want to take is flashing. Note whether the route follows the coast or crosses the sea. Routes along the coast are slower, but safer (there's less chance of meeting pirates). If you wish to trade further afield you'll have to accept the dangers of the open sea. On shipping routes, speed is controlled by sail height only. The weather becomes a factor at certain times of the year, so check the calendar before choosing your course. When following a shipping route, time passes more quickly; if the weather changes or a ship enters the area, you will be returned to real time. To leave a shipping route, exit the MAP option. ISLANDS Sail into islands to deposit contraband that may not be accepted in certain ports. You may also meet smugglers there to arrange larger deals. COMBAT AND BOARDING For well-established traders with a streak of larceny, pirating offers the chance of quick--if risky--profits. If your lookout spots a likely target ship in the vicinity, prepare for battle! Select the COMBAT icon to attack; in a moment you'll be given a view of the enemy ship from behind one of your cannons. If you have more than one cannon on a side, move the control left or right to choose the cannon you wish to fire. Moving forward or back controls the elevation of the selected cannon. When your target is in the line of fire, press the fire button to shoot. As this shot travels you will be able to prepare a second cannon (if you have another on that side) for a breadside of cannon fire. If the ship moves out of range, press the ESC key to return to the sailing screen so you can maneuver back into firing range. Select the COMBAT icon once more to resume the attack. Try not to destroy the enemy ship; if you are successful in taking it over it will be added to your fleet. You can board the vessel once it stops of its own accord or is dasabled. When preparing to board, press the ESC key to return to the sailing screen so you can maneuver your ship alongside. To board the enemy ship, move to the icon selection area and center the "hook" over the BOARDING icon; then press the fire button quickly to select that icon. (If you aren't close enough, selection this icon will have no effect.) BATTLE In battle, you have your choice of two weapons: a sword or a musket. Swords cannot be lost and are best for hand-to-hand combat; muskets are good for long-range attacks and can be used as long as there is musket shot. During a fight, each crew member of the opposing ship is representative of that ship's crew. Similarly, you represent the members of your crew. As you fight you will lose stamina (represented by the bar on the screen); if you have not fed your men properly it will show in their stamina ratings. Each time the stamina runs out you lose a life. Lose too many lives and you will be unable to sail your own ship. Kill too many crew members from the opposing ship and there may not be enough left to sail that ship for you. It pays to be merciful...a captured crew will be loyal to you if you spare their lives! When you capture a ship intact, its assets and worth become your property and you may command it to go to port. (A ship sent to port may be lost in bad weather or attacked by another ship--a risk you have to take.) If you have severly damaged the ship or killed too many crew members for it to sail, you may still offload the cargo (and anything else you can carry) onto your ship. You also run the risk of being attacked by other ships; they can shoot at you, or pull alongside and attempt to board. During an attack you must try to kill as many of the enemy as possible. Eliminate a major part of their crew and they will be repelled and leave. Let them overrun your ship, and you've had it. If you have only one ship the game will end; if you own more than one ship a random element ofluck ("Joss") will decide whether you survive...or not. Press the space bar to move to the icon selection area. Use the mouse or joystick to center the "hook" over the icon you want and press the fire button to select that icon (you must have bought swords, muskets and ammunition in town). Press the fire button to use the weapon you select. Move your man around by moving your control device forward, back, left or right. If by some stroke of bad luck you are being defeated on an enemy ship, you can abandon the attack and retreat to your own ship by selecting the ABANDON BATTLE icon. PORT To enter a port, sail into any one of the harbors you see on the screen. Once in port you must find the warehouse and bank to trade the goods and ships you have acquired on your voyage. If you have more than one ship in port, you will be able to choose the ship you wish to sail next and send the others out to sea on your behalf. They will trade in legitimate cargo and their purchases and sales will be debited and credited to your account. Even if you do not send the ships to sea, their crews will continue to cost you wages and food...so send them out to earn their keep! GAMBLING While in town you may stumble across a gambling den. The game represents a race between 6 mythical Chinese beings: Deer, Horse, Fish, Cow, Sheep and Dragon. Tiles at the top of the screen will rotate and stop randomly. Each time they stop a tile is added to one of the creatures' stacks. Odds are given on each of the creatures gaining enough tiles to win the race. The first stack to reach 10 tiles wins. When you enter the den you will be asked if you wish to play; if you agree, you will be asked to place a bet and choose a creature. After making your selections, press fire to start the race. Winnings are credited to your account. If you agree to another game you will be asked to choose again. If you decline you will be placed outside the building. SMUGGLERS You may discover a smugglers' den, or be approached by smugglers within the towns. Smuggling and trading in contraband is very dangerous, but also very profitable. If the police catch you with contraband you will be imprisoned and your goods forfeited. Smugglers prices for buying and selling will vary at each port. You can look up the going rate for contraband by pressing F2. STATUS When you end the game (either by choice or by getting killed or press- ganged), you will be informed of your final status. This is determined by your assets at the time: Slave-Drunk-Bankrupt-Peasant-Cabin Boy-Oarsman (below $100,000) Rigger ($100,000)-Deckhand ($150,000)-Lookout ($200,000) Steersman ($300,000)-Cadet ($350,000)-2nd Mate ($400,000) 1st Mate ($500,000)-Captain ($600,000)-Shipowner ($750,000) Trader ($1,000,000)-Merchant ($2,000,000) Master Merchant ($4,000,000)-Merchant Prince ($5,000,000) TAI-PAN ($6,000,000) SAVING A GAME Select the SAVE/LOAD icon; you will then be given the option of choosing Save, Load or Cancel. Highlight your choice and follow the on- screen instructions. (You must have a formatted disk available to save a game.) To load a saved game, select the SAVE/LOAD icon and follow the on-screen instructions. PLAYING HINTS 1. Your first ship should be a Lorcha; otherwise you will be unable to buy goods to trade, and your only alternative would be pirating. 2. If you do not purchase a map and a telescope, certain options will not be open to you and sailing will be difficult. 3. If you decide to partake of the port delights, remember that getting drunk or exhausted makes you susceptible to press-ganging (which would end the game)> 4. By mapping the layout of each port, you'll be able to find your way around more easily on your next visit. 5. To be able to save a game, you must be in port. 6. At the beginning there will be quite a few ships in your vicinity; this will affect your ability to take shipping routes, and increase the likelihood of combat. 7. At certain points in the game you will need to answer questions: You will use either the keyboard or your control device to answer, depending on the format of the question. When using the keyboard, type Y or N (for yes or not), or type in an amount; then press Return. When using your control device, highlight the option you want and press the fire button. 8. Depending on choices you make, Tai-Pan can be played as a game of trading, adventure, or fast-paced action...or a combination of all three. Software Presents TAU-CETI THE LOST STAR COLONY PLAYING THE GAME GAME SEQUENCE An abandoned space colony near Tau Ceti has been taken over by robot warriors run amok. Earth is pushing to recolonize the planet, but all previous attempts to overcome the robots have failed. It has been determined that a single highly skilled pilot would have a better chance to successfully slip through the unstable defense system than a whole squadron of pilots. Your mission is to disable the robots by shutting down the damaged defense system controlled by the Main Central Reactor. You must collect and assemble the reactor rod pieces located throughout the colony's many cities. After assembling the rods, go to the Main Central Reactor in the capital city of Centralis. Put the reactor rods in place before the radiation becomes too much for you. You will be flying a highly sophisticated skimmer (so named for its low flying maneuverability). The skimmer has been outfitted with a 4-way view screen, a computer and a complete control panel. Special features will help you navigate the planet's unusual landscape. Infra-red sights will help guide you in dangerous night battles, which occur often due to the short days. Use the ship's specialized directional indicators to get a bearing on a city's layout and to locate the nearest jump pads. The skimmer is equipped with a limited supply of weapons and fuel. If you run out of any supplies or sustain any damage, return to a supply center or the landing craft to resupply or refuel your ship. GAME CONTROL JOYSTICK CONTROLS UP Forward Increase Speed DOWN Decrease Speed LEFT Left RIGHT Right KEYBOARD CONTROLS (used in flight) S Increase speed X Decrease speed O Move to the left P Move to the right H Increase altitude G Decrease altitude L Land on planet surface J Use approaching a Jump Pad to transport to other cities Space Fire laser cannon Bar I Infra-red viewer enables you to see in darkness F Send up flare for temporary illumination M Fire missile A Fire antimissile R Status, for checking ship's condition V Select viewer to see forward, rear, left and right - Set scanner for long or short range scanner INSTRUMENTS AND DISPLAYS After you load the program, start the game by pressing the space bar or the fire button on the joystick. The game begins with the skimmer docked in the landing craft's airlock. The screen is split up into three main parts: the view screen (now showing the interior of the airlock), the computer readout at the bottom of the screen and the information display area. THE COMPUTER The computer is operational only while docked in certain buildings or after you have landed on the planet's surface. The computer readout also serves as a message and warning screen. Type HELP to get a list of the available commands (listed below). To return to the view of the airlock, type LOOK. COMPUTER COMMANDS Help Lists the commands available. Launch Launches the skimmer from airlocks. Look Shows the view inside buildings and airlocks, and provides information on any useful object that might be there. Status Displays damage and progress report. Equip Allows access to repair, refueling and rearming facilities when docked in certain buildings. Map The computer will display a map of the planet and provide information about the cities. Use the mouse to move the cursor around the map; press the button to obtain information about a city. Rods Displays the reactor rod pieces you have collected. Use the mouse to manipulate the rod pieces for assembly. Reactor Gives access to the reactor room when docked at the main Central Reactor in Centralis. Library Enables entry to the library facilities when docked in a city library. Pad Allows you to type progress notes for future references. New Pad Gives you a new notepad and erases existing notes. Save Saves the current game being played. Follow the on- screen prompts for complete instructions. Load Loads a game from disk. follow the on-screen prompts for complete instructions. Name Type in the pilot's name. You can also change an existing name. Keys Allows you to edit the key commands used in flight mode. Select the command you wish to edit, and type in the desired letter or key. Mouse may be used during flight mode by selecting left, right, up and down arrow buttons when redefining keys. The mouse works best when used for left and right movements only. Pause Freezes the game. Press the space bar or fire button to resume. Wait Time out from the game for 5 minutes. Quit Abandons the game without saving. Score Gives the number or rods collected and assembled, and the number of robots destroyed. Sights On/Off Turns the sights on and off. Dir displays a list of the games saved to disk. Timevault Allows access to any unopened timevaults loaded on your ship. Joystick Enables the use of a joystick Inventory Displays a list of collected objects loaded on your ship. CONTROL PANEL The control panel, on the right side of the screen, contains many instruments necessary for navigation and combat. Radar Scanner Shows a long or short range view of the area. Your ship is always at the center of the screen. Objects in the area appear as blinking dots on the scanner. Game Displays Located above the Radar Scanner. Displays game time elapsed, current location and view direction. Information Located to the left of the radar scanner. Compass Indicators provides heading direction. Target indicator notifies you when object is in the gun sights. Tracking indicator warns you when the enemy has you in its sights. Infra-red indicator shows whether infra-red is on or off. Ship Status Located below the Information Indicators. Provides information on altitude, speed, fuel and equipment status. Directional Lower right of the screen. When the vertical line is Indicators centered in the top indicator, you are headed toward the nearest building. When the vertical line is centered in the lower indicator, you are headed toward the nearest jump pad (the inter-city transportation system). The lower directional indicator is used to locate your landing craft while in the city of Reema. FLYING YOUR SHIP You begin your mission in the city of Reema. Before you take off, it would be a good idea to take a look at the map to plan your mission. The map will also provide information on which cities are connected via jump pads. You are not able to fly the skimmer to other cities, due to the great distances between them. You must use the jump pads to travel between cities. To go to a city north of your current location, head toward the jump pad to the north. You will also be able to find out which cities are heavily guarded and might contain supply centers. Type LAUNCH to exit the airlock. If you are using a joystick, maneuver the ship through the landscape forward, left or right. Pull back on the joystick to reduce your speed. When speed is reduced to zero, the skimmer is able to hover. If you are not using a joystick, use the keyboard controls to fly your ship. You must use the keyboard controls to implement features such as the status report or the infra-red sights. As you are flying, use the compass on the control panel to guide you through the planet's landscape. To see what is behind you or to your left or right, type V to change the view. Use the lower directional indicator to guide you to the jump pads. ROBOTS AND BUILDINGS When an object is in the gun sights on your viewer, the target information panel will notify you that it is within target range. You can either shoot with your laser cannon (by pressing the fire button or the space bar) or you can fire a missile by typing M. Since you are equipped with a limited number of missiles, you should conserve them and use only when necessary. Most robots can be destroyed by using the laser cannon. If you are being tracked, the tracking indicator will warn you in plenty of time to either outrun your opponent or shoot at him first. If a robot has launched a missile at you, a warning message will appear on the message screen. Robots Robots have various forms. The most common look like tall poles and move slowly. Hunters These are hovering robots that appear on the horizon and move in quickly for the surprise attack. Mines They are located primarily in the distant cities and go undetected by the skimmer's warning system. They can detonate easily; approach them cautiously and destroy them with your laser. Sand Hoppers These usually appear around jump pads. Go slowly between cities and don't come out shooting. There are also a variety of building and radar towers. Destroy the radar towers which inform the robot warriors of your location. Some buildings (such as reactors and airlocks) should not be destroyed; they might contain parts of the rods you are to collect or might provide necessary supplies. Dock into an airlock slowly. If you approach too swiftly, you risk damage or destruction. Landing Craft The landing craft will remain in the city of Reema. You can return anytime to refuel or repair your ship. Radar Towers Tall spires with flashing lights that track your location and relay information on your position to the warrior robots. Jump Pads These low, flat structures with a tower to the side are used to travel between cities. Refer to the computer's map for information on which cities are connected via the jump pads. Approach the jump pads slowly. As you fly over the jump pad, type J to be transported to next city. Domes/Spheres These are abandoned buildings from the former colony. Some may have short range lasers, so don't get too close. Supply Centers Use the Civilian Supply Center to refuel and repair your ship. The Military Supply Center will rearm your ship. At certain Military Supply Centers, you may find other useful equipment. In Preema, for instance, you will also find an extra reserve shield and an experimental missile. Reactor These buildings contain the rod pieces necessary to shut Substations down the Main Central Reactor. Main Central Located in the capital city, Centralis, you must place Reactor the rods in the reactor room to disable the defense system. Because of the dangers of radiation, you should get out of the reactor room as soon as the rods are in place. COMBAT Because of your skimmer's speed and maneuverability, you will have the advantage in most combat situations. Robots are notoriously slow and generally do not shoot at you until you are at close range. However, some cities (those that contain buildings with valuable equipment or rod pieces) are heavily guarded. Robots tend to collect around jump pads and the airlocks of buildings. Your best defense, when caught in these situations, is to keep shooting until the area is clear of robots. Listed below are the weapons and defense systems available to you. Lasers Your lasers are good for shooting down most things. However, they tend to overheat easily when used for long periods of time. The lasers work more effectively at close range and robots tend not to be very quick, so it's best to destroy them as they approach. Other objects such as spheres, domes and mines are best to destroy at long range. Missiles These are best for close range fighting and when you want to make sure you hit your target. However, certain robots are equipped with AMM's (Anti-Missile Missile) and will defend themselves against missile attack. AMMs The message screen will notify you if a robot has fired (Anti-Missile a missile at you. Respond by either shooting down the Missiles) missile (they move slowly) or using an AMM to destroy the missile. If you are in the midst of close range fighting, you might want to use AMMs to protect yourself. Infra-Red A day (or "Spin" as they're known on the planet) lasts 12 Sights Earth minutes; therefore, night will fall quickly and often during your mission. Objects on the screen are shaded and when night approaches, they will become difficult to see. When using infra-red sights, objects will seem blurry. Flares Use when your infra-red sights are damaged or when in heavy night fighting--it will temporarily light up the area and get rid of the infra-red blurriness. Shields Your defense shields can wear down quickly, especially during heavy fighting. To replenish your shields and avoid burning them out, wait outside the city away from attackers. If you pick up the reserve shield in the Military supply center at Preema, you will be able to use that one should your first one burn out. REPAIRS Damage can be sustained during heavy fighting or by running into buildings. If your skimmer requires repair, return to the landing craft or a supply center to repair your ship. Once inside the airlock, type EQUIP and a list of repair functions will appear. Select the items you wish to repair. DISABLING THE MAIN CENTRAL REACTOR Battling the robot warriors may be hard enough, but you must also find the reactor pieces and assemble the cooling rods that will shut down the Main Central Reactor. REACTOR RODS The rod pieces are located in Reactor Substations throughout the colony's many cities. There are 40 rod pieces to assemble into 20 complete rods. Once you are docked in a Reactor Substation, the message screen will notify you of any rod pieces in the building. They will automatically be loaded onto your ship. Type RODS to display the rod pieces. To assemble the rods, pick up a rod piece by positioning the cursor over the rod piece and pressing the fire button. Place the rod piece in one of the circular pods by moving the rod piece over the pod and pressing the fire button. Find its mate and place it in the same pod. You might need to rotate the pieces to fit them together. To do this, place a rod piece in a pod. Position the cursor over one of the direction arrows on the screen, and press the fire button. Now, you can pick up its mate and assemble the rod. THE MAIN CENTRAL REACTOR If you have succeeded in finding and assembling the rod pieces, your next destination is Centralis. Centralis is heavily guarded, so go slowly. You do not have to have all of the rods assembled to go to Centralis. Once you have several rods assembled, you might want to go to Centralis to deposit those rods first, and then continue your mission. After docking in the Main Central Reactor, type REACTOR to gain access to the reactor room. The rods will automatically be placed in the reactor room. Don't stay in the reactor room too long; there are dangerously high levels of radiation in there. Once all the rods are in place, the damaged defense system will be shut down and the colony will have been saved. TIPS *Head for the city's center to find any buildings, such as reactor substations or supply centers. After you have collected any reactor rods and supplies in the city, work your way to the outskirts and towards the jump pads to go to the next city on your list. *To avoid being tracked by the enemy's radar, move slowly and shoot at close range. Destroy radar towers located near the city's center. *Plan your strategy before you launch, and keep a list of objectives and information (such as jump pad and supply center locations) on your note pad. *Use your 4-way viewer often. Maybe these disks should be called DR.J Doc Disks, 'coz here's yet another offering from our good friend DR.J (U.S.A.). TERRAMEX ....and there we have it, gentlemen", concluded Count Darnit. "Eyestrain disappeared 20 years ago when the scientific world pooh-poohed his idea of a giant asteroid colliding with the Earth. Now the asteroid has appeared and only Eyestrain can destroy it. We have to find him!" "Ow long 'ave we?" asked Henri Beaucoup, fierce gallic eyes flashing. The most famous duelist in France, he once killed a man for asking him directions. "I am an onion seller, not an atlas!" he explained. His prowess on the unicycle, a legend. "Not long, Henri" conceded Darnit, "hours at most!" "Sticky wicket? What?" chuckled Wilbur Fortisque-Smithe, laconically lighting a small cigar. The truest opening bowler to every play for England until the controversial 'Jawline' tour of Australia always found the humour in a situation. "We must act quickly, Darnit" agreed Wu Pong the fanatical martial artist from Japan. "As a flash", roared Big John Caine, the grizzly wrestler for America with what amounted to wit for him. He was gazing at the 11 cameras suspended around Wu Pongs neck. "But where do ve start?", Hans Krusche, the meticulous German brought the conversation back to reality. "Ve haf no idea where he is!" "Not so, Hans", smiled Darnit. "Eyestrain was last seen in a high mountainous plain - fiercely hostile to human survival. Prehistoric birds, acid rain, poisonous snakes and horrible mutations, presumably created by Eyestrain himself. One man, unequipped may just be able to persuade the Professor to save the Earth. There was a moment of silence, and then with the courage born of a thousand close scrapes the intrepid adventurers all spoke at once. ....vital Test Match you see, night before on Thursday! ....'ave to oversee ze onion crop, otherwise..... ....never been one to trust a parachute, and my spurs are still being re- chromed.... ....international Origami Championship in Tokyo. ....Marching display and duelling scar contest. Darnit smiled. "Well someone has to go...or we're all dead anyway! So have we a volunteer, or do we draw lots? THE ADVENTURE Your volunteer selected, he and his party of bearers must move around the landscape and try to find Professor Eyestrain. Eyestrain will then ask for various items from your bearers in order to create an Asteroid deflector. Woe betide you if you miss anything. You can collect previously abandoned items from other expeditions by walking over them. Once held by a bearer you can easily use the article whenever you need to. Each character has a key item which he will need to complete the mission. Your character will obey all your instructions, even stupid ones, although this may lead to some head shaking. When stuck the character may have a bright idea about which item to use or then again he may not. It'a a race against time. Asteroid Time. And if, 'Asteroid Time', then it's running out fast. DISK LOADING INSTRUCTIONS Insert disk into drive and turn on computer. The disk will then load and run. CONTROL KEYS Left Z Right X Up P Down L Jump Space Bearers Left 1 Bearers Right 2 Swap Object S Think T Abort Ctrl/ESC OBJECTS unicycle bellows secret formula anti radiation pins flashgun cannon switch cup of tea cricket ball vacuum cleaner red button energy crystal spurs flute battery balloon beer barrel silver lining coat hanger gunpowder umbrella spring trampoline silver cross party manifesto acme expanding atomic pile bucket bridge Software Presents Part 1 of the UMS Docs Thanks once again to DR.J (U.S.A.) THE UNIVERSAL MILITARY SIMULATOR By Rainbird Software FORWARD Originally, the "Universal Military Simulator" was just the working title for a very unusual piece of software. That was about 15,000 lines of computer code ago. Simply put, the program you just purchased will simulate a conflict between any two opposing forces, from history or fantasy, displayed on a three dimensional battlefield that can be viewed from any perspective, while you zoom in on the action, command the smallest unit and change any variable. Of course there's more. The Design Map section will help you create three dimensional maps of anything you wish: battlefields, D & D worlds, castles or maps for reports. If you're out of ideas UMS will even randomly generate maps for you. The Create Army section will allow you to design armies of any description. The Universal Military Simulator comes with 18 pre-defined unit types, from charioteers to armored cavalry. If that isn't enough you can create "wildcard units" with the characteristics you wish. The Create Scenario function will help you put any two armies together on any battlefield. Literally, any two armies. It is possible, for example. to simulate a conflict between Alexander and Napoleon with their respective troops on the fields of Gettysburg. Again, your imagination is the only limitation. UMS also possesses a unique Artificial Intelligence that "perceives" opposing armies as geometric shapes and interconnecting lines of force while individual fighting units are maneuvered as a cohesive army striving towards a common goal. Furthermore the 14 actual variables evaluated by UMS to resolve combat may be viewed by the user after all hostile contacts thereby eliminating "the fog of war" that other wargames hide behind. Over seven years in the making, the Universal Military Simulator is as revolutionary as it is evolutionary. UMS will certainly be the standard that all wargames are measured by for many years to come. CHAPTER I - GETTING STARTED THE MAIN MENU The Universal Military Simulator consists of four sections that help the user create new maps, design armies, create new battle scenarios and run battle simulations. These sections are accessed from the main menu that first appears after running the program. To select a section, position the arrow cursor over the desired box and click the left mouse button once. To terminate the program select QUIT. You will be returned to the GEM desktop. To create new armies, or to edit an army that has been previously saved to disk, select DESIGN ARMY. The Universal Military Simulator contains a powerful three-dimensional typographical design tool that is accessed by selecting DESIGN MAP. This function is not limited to creating battlefields, but may be used to design maps of all kinds including fantasy worlds from role-playing games and computer text adventures. CREATE SCENARIO allows the user to place two armies from any time period together on a field of battle. There are virtually no restrictions and the combinations are nearly infinite. Selecting RUN SIMULATION allows the user to participate as the Universal Military Simulator's Artificial Intelligence routines supervise the conflict. The user may play against the program, against another human opponent, or even influence the computer's decisions while viewing the battlefield in complete 3-D. CHAPTER II - RUNNING A SIMULATION THE SELECTION SIMULATION MENU The Universal Military Simulator disk contains five battle simulations. They are: ARBELA, the battle that decided the conquest of Asia Minor, fought in 331 B.C. between Alexander the Great and Darius of Persia; HASTINGS, the great clash of the Medieval Ages between two claimants to the English throne in 1066; MARSTON MOOR where Oliver Cromwell saved the young Parliament's Army; WATERLOO, the last card played from the Emperor Napoleon's hand and GETTYSBURG, where General Robert E. Lee's Confederate Army of Northern Virginia reached their highwater mark under the summer Pennsylvanian skies of 1863. To select a scenario click the left mouse button once over the desired simulation. Other scenarios from Universal Military Simulator Scenario Disks, or user created scenarios, may be read from disk by selecting the READ SCENARIO FROM DISK option. After clicking the left mouse button once over this option a dialog box will appear requesting that the user specify a disk drive by clicking the left mouse button once over the appropriate drive box. Two floppy disks and two hard drives are supported. Double click the left mouse button over the desired file. Selecting CANCEL returns to the last menu. THE BATTLEFIELD WINDOW The Universal Military Simulator take full advantage of the GEM capabilities of the Atari ST. The battlefield window contains drop-down menus (discussed in detail in the following pages), a close box located in the upper lefthand corner of the window, and dialog boxes that appear throughout the simulation to receive user input. At the bottom of the window two status lines are displayed that indicate the current three-dimensional perspective, the current simulation time (in military time) and the present 'active army' or side that is currently capable of receiving commands and firing weapons. Clicking the left mouse button once inside the close box will end the simulation after the program has confirmed the user's intentions. THE SCENARIO PHASES The RUN SIMULATION section is divided into two phases: the ISSUE COMMAND PHASE in which orders are given by the user to all desired units of both armies and which is terminated by selecting END COMMAND PHASE from the drop- down menu or by pressing the letter Q on the keyboard; and the MOVEMENT/ BATTLE PHASE. At the end of the COMMAND PHASE the user is requested, through a series of dialog boxes, to select the desired computer battle logic. (For more information see the Battle Logic section in this chapter.) The MOVEMENT/BATTLE phase is divided into eight equal segments. Selecting NEXT SEGMENT from the drop-down menus, or pressing the letter N on the keyboard will advance the scenario time and update the battlefield. After the MOVEMENT/BATTLE phase is completed the COMMAND PHASE is repeated. THE DROP-DOWN BATTLEFIELD MENU Located at the top of the battlefield GEM window are six drop-down menus. All functions of the Universal Military Simulator may be accessed through these menus. Many functions may also be activated by a corresponding keystroke. The left most menu, FILENAMES, when selected, displays the actual filenames used for storing the maps, scenario and armies for the current simulation. This information is quite helpful when editing a scenario. Three-dimensional viewing perspective is controlled by the drop- down menus underneath NORMAL and ZOOM IN. Moving the mouse over any of the titles above the window will cause the drop down menu to appear. Clicking the left mouse button over a highlighted item will cause the map to be redrawn within the battlefield window from the perspective selected. Selecting NORTH, for example, will create a map drawn from the point of view of someone south of the battlefield looking North. Selecting a perspective from the ZOOM IN menu will draw a map with a corresponding close in aerial perspective. The EXTREME ZOOM IN menu controls highly magnified viewing of a selected areas. Selecting the item EXTREME ZOOM IN under the menu heading will create a flashing 10 grid point by 10 grid point box. (Color monitors will also show woods and unit directions arrows in reverse.) This flashing square is under the control of the mouse. Any directional change of the mouse will be immediately copied by the flashing grid. Clicking the left mouse button will cause the map area beneath the grid to be greatly magnified. Clicking the right mouse button will cancel this function and restore the map. After EXTREME ZOOM IN has been activated the enlarged area may be scrolled by either selecting the desired direction from the drop-down menu or by pressing the four cursor arrow keys on th right hand side of the keyboard. Pressing and holding an arrow key will cause the screen to scroll continuously in indicated direction until the border of the map is encountered. (IMPORTANT: to avoid confusion only movement arrows that begin and end within the zoomed in area are displayed.) AUTOMATIC ZOOM works like a toggle switch and may be turned on or off. When AUTOMATIC ZOOM is enabled the computer will automatically zoom in on any important activity on the battlefield during the simulation. A check mark (tick) indicates that the function is on. The BATTLE menu contains many of the functions required to fully utilize the Universal Military Simulator. Selecting ISSUE COMMANDS TO UNITS either from the drop-down menu or by pressing the space bar on the keyboard will allow the user to give specific commands to each unit on the battlefield. This function is discussed in complete detail in the following pages. SWITCH SIDES is used in conjunction with ISSUE COMMANDS to select which army is currently active or capable of receiving commands. This 'active' side is shown in the display at the bottom of the battlefield window. SWITCH SIDES is also used in conjunction with FIRE RANGED WEAPONS to select firing targets. Again, the 'active', or firing, army is displayed at the bottom of the window. Selecting END COMMAND PHASE, either from the menu or by pressing Q on the keyboard signals the program that the user has moved all desired units. See the Battle Logic section in this chapter for complete information. The FIRE RANGED WEAPONS function (which becomes operational after selecting the END COMMAND PHASE) allows the user to fire units with long range capabilities. This is discussed later in this chapter under Combat. The SAVE SIMULATION function is activated from either the drop-down menu or by pressing the letter S from the keyboard. After entering the desired filename, select the drive for storage by clicking the left mouse button over the appropriate letter box. To restore a saved simulation use the READ FROM DISK option on the previous menu. All simulation files end with the .SIM extension. A hard copy print out of the battlefield window may be obtained by selecting PRINT MAP from the drop-down menu or by pressing P on the keyboard. The Universal Military Simulator supports both the Atari 1280 line format or Epson 960 dots per inch format. Select the desired format by clicking the left mouse button over the appropriate box. The user may also add one line of text at the top of the printout. After hard copy printout has been 'formatted' using this function, additional screen prints may be made at any time throughout the program by pressing the ALT and HELP keys simultaneously. The ORDER OF BATTLE command will display all units currently within an army. If the display continues for more that one screen, pressing the left mouse button will show the next page of units; pressing the right mouse button will cancel the display and return the user to the simulation. The DISPLAY OPTIONS MENU allows the user to control the features that are displayed on the battlefield map. The options are 'toggle switches' and may be turned either on or off. A check mark indicates that the option is active. The options are: BATTLE MARKERS, which indicate points where hostile contact between units has occured, MOVEMENT ARROWS, which indicate the future movement of all units, TOWNS & LANDMARKS that mark points of interest on the battlefield, WHITE FLAGS and BLACK FLAGS which will hide from view one or both armies, and FAST DISPLAY MODE. When FAST DISPLAY MODE has been toggled on, the Universal Military Simulator will only briefly display contact between hostile units and computer-controlled long range fire. This considerably speeds up the viewing time of a simulation. For more information see the section on Combat later in this chapter. DEMONSTRATION MODE Selecting DEMONSTRATION MODE instructs the Universal Military Simulator to take over all army command functions and viewing perspectives. To activate DEMONSTRATION MODE press the CONTROL key and the letter D on the keyboard simultaneously. A warning box will appear to confirm this choice. DEMONSTRATION MODE can be activated at any time during any simulation, including user-designed simulations. The five simulations that come with the Universal Military Simulator, however, will automatically receive special instructions to recreate the actual battles. These battles will follow the guidelines as described in Appendix A. ISSUE COMMANDS All units participating in a scenario may be given specific commands that control the unit's movement and status. The ISSUE COMMANDS function is activated either from the drop-down menu or by pressing the keyboard space bar. After selecting this option the COMMAND BOX appears and the active unit's vital information is displayed along the left hand side of the battlefield window. A copy of the unit's flag is also displayed surrounded by the eight compass directions. If AUTOMATIC ZOOM has previously been selected the area immediately around the active unit will be enlarged. To move a unit either click the left mouse button over the desired compass direction box or position the mouse cross-hairs over the intersection point on the map. Units move from adjacent point to another. To scroll the map (when in EXTREME ZOOM) click the left mouse button over the appropriate arrow key in the lower right hand corner of the battlefield window. NEXT UNIT and LAST UNIT will de-activate the current unit and activate another unit for commands. Pressing the right mouse button will also advance to the next unit. QUIT erases the COMMAND BOX. If AUTOMATIC ZOOM has previously been selected the map will be redrawn to that last full perspective selected. A unit may also be ordered to assume one of the following statuses: MANEUVER (which allows for maximum movement but leaves the unit vulnerable to attack and defense), ATTACK (which reduces a unit's mobility but greatly increases its value in battle), DEFEND (which halts all further movement by the unit but increases the unit's ability to withstand attack), and RESERVE (the unit may not move, and is vulnerable to attack; however the unit's morale factor will be increased after one full eight segment movement phase). BATTLE LOGIC To access the Universal Simulator's Battle Logic, select END COMMAND PHASE after all desired units and commands have been made. The Universal Military Simulator may be instructed to assume command of either one or both armies or run in a 'supervisory' mode and simply referee the simulation and decide the outcome of contact between hostile units. The first dialog box that appears after selecting END COMMAND PHASE requests that the user assign commanders for both the black and white armies. If both armies are placed under HUMAN COMMAND the Universal Military Simulator will not request any further information and will activate the MOVEMENT PHASE. Selecting either NEXT SEGMENT from the drop-down menu or pressing the letter N on the keyboard will 'step' the units on the battlefield to their ordered positions and increase the time appropriately. If, however, either army is placed under COMPUTER CONTROL the Universal Military Simulator will display a series of dialog boxes requesting specific instructions, or limitations, for the command of those forces. The BATTLE LOGIC dialog box is now displayed. Any one of the following options may be selected: ALLOW COMPUTER TO DECIDE STRATEGY (the computer will make the decision to attack or defend after analyzing over 10 factors per unit in both armies), FORCE COMPUTER TO ATTACK (the computer will decide and execute the attack with the greatest probability of success), FORCE COMPUTER TO DEFEND (the computer will not attack but will assume the defensive, and, if possible, move units to a more secure position), LEFT FLANK, RIGHT FLANK, ATTACK IN CENTER and DOUBLE ENVELOPMENT require the Universal Military Simulator to execute the desired attack plan. LEFT FLANK and RIGHT FLANK attacks may also be supported by the opposite half if the army. Dialog boxes are displayed to receive user input. Click the left mouse button over CONTINUE, or press RETURN on the keyboard, to continue. CANCEL de-activates the BATTLE LOGIC and allows the user to give orders to units. IMPORTANT: The Universal Military Simulator's Battle Logic will not move units that have already received commands from the user. This allows for the movement of some specific units while the rest will receive computer orders. COMBAT Combat occurs during the MOVEMENT PHASE when units from opposing armies move onto adjacent points. Some units have long range weapons (artillery, armor and archers, for example) and can enter into combat at greater distances. See the Fire Ranged Weapons section in this chapter for details. When combat occurs the two opposing units flash. If AUTOMATIC ZOOM has previously been selected the area immediately surrounding the combat will be greatly enlarged. If FAST DISPLAY MODE had previously been selected the units will flash 20 times and the results of combat calculated. No combat results will be displayed, however, and the Universal Military Simulator will continue moving units and updating the battlefield map as previous. If FAST DISPLAY MODE had not been previously selected the two hostile units will continue to flash until the right mouse button is pressed. The vital statistics of each unit and the combat results are now displayed on the screen. Clicking the left mouse button in SEE EQUATION box will display the values and equation used by the Universal Military Simulator to determine this particular combat result. Starting with the original unit strength, eight different modifiers are evaluated. NOTE: A retreat path is calculated for the losing unit, and displayed. FIRE RANGED WEAPONS The FIRE RANGED WEAPONS routine is activated from either the drop-down menu or by pressing F on the keyboard. It is only active during the MOVEMENT/BATTLE PHASE. If both armies are under COMPUTER CONTROL the Universal Military Simulator will make all Ranged Weapon firing decisions. The army capable of receiving firing instructions is indicated in the display at the bottom of the battlefield window. The active army may be changed by selecting SWITCH SIDES from the drop-down menu. If AUTOMATIC ZOOM has previously been selected, the area directly surrounding the active unit will be greatly magnified. IMPORTANT: do not use the AUTOMATIC ZOOM function when issuing firing orders to units with a firing range of greater than five; it may be impossible to select the desired targets. The FIRE RANGED WEAPONS box is now displayed. Clicking the left mouse button over the NEXT UNIT or LAST UNIT will de-activate the current unit and activate the next appropriate unit in the army. Only units capable or ranged weapon fire will be activated. To select a target, locate the mouse cross-hairs over the grid-point where the enemy unit is located and press the left mouse button. An arrow is drawn and the results are displayed at the bottom of the screen. This function may be repeated until all units under HUMAN CONTROL have fired. A unit may fire only once per movement segment, or a total of eight times per MOVEMENT/BATTLE PHASE. ANALYSIS OF BATTLE TO DATE & FINAL BATTLE ANALYSIS At the end of the MOVEMENT/BATTLE PHASE the ANALYSIS OF BATTLE TO DATE screen is displayed showing an updated casualty and battle report. After clicking the left mouse button in the CONTINUE box a message is displayed indicating that the COMMAND PHASE is again active. When the simulation has reached the previously designated end time, or when all units from either army have been eliminated, the FINAL BATTLE ANALYSIS screen is displayed. A hard copy of all units, from both armies and the last unit strengths may be printed if desired. The user may return to the Battlefield Window or to the MAIN MENU by clicking the left mouse button over the desired box. CHAPTER III - CREATING NEW ARMIES THE UNIT SELECTION MENU The UNIT SELECTION MENU is displayed after selecting the DESIGN ARMY option from the MAIN MENU and either selecting an old army to edit or entering a new army name and pressing RETURN. Clicking the left mouse button over CANCEL will return the user to the MAIN MENU. This section of the Universal Military Simulator allows the user to create new armies for use in simulations, or to modify existing armies. Selecting QUIT from the UNIT SELECTION MENU will return the user to the MAIN MENU. A previously created army may be loaded and edited by clicking the left mouse button over the LOAD box. The user is requested to select a drive. The Universal Military Simulator supports two floppy disk drives and two hard drives. Double click the left mouse button over the desired filename. Selecting CANCEL will return the user to the UNIT SELECTION MENU. To save an army to disk click the left mouse button over the SAVE box. Enter the filename and click the left mouse button over the desired drive. All Universal Military Simulator filenames end with the .ARM file extension. Selecting CANCEL will return the user to the UNIT SELECTION MENU without saving the army file to disk. To enter a new unit to an army click the left mouse button over the desire flag. ENTERING A UNIT'S VITAL STATISTICS The Universal Military simulator stores a great deal of data on each unit used in a simulation. Some items (morale, status, location, marching orders) are acquired during a simulation, or at the time the scenario is created (see the chapter on Creating a Scenario for details). The rest is entered at the time that the unit is created. Enter all items requested at this time. To change a unit's efficiency click the left mouse button over the box containing the desired rating. Click the left mouse button over CANCEL to return to the UNIT SELECTION MENU without saving the unit. To advance to the next line press either TAB or position the mouse cursor over the desired line and click the left mouse button once. After all data has been entered, click the left mouse button over CONTINUE. If the user has neglected to enter all necessary data the Universal Military Simulator will display a gentle error message and return to this screen. The entire army's ORDER OF BATTLE is now displayed. If there are more units within the army than can be displayed on one screen, pressing the left mouse button will continue to the next screen. Pressing the right mouse button will cancel the display and return to the UNIT SELECTION MENU. ORDER OF BATTLE An army's ORDER OF BATTLE is a graphic depiction of each unit within that army and the accompanying vital statistics. The ORDER OF BATTLE function may be activated from the drop-down menu in the BATTLEFIELD WINDOW, from the UNIT SELECTION MENU or automatically after a unit has been created. Pressing the left mouse button will continue the display; pressing the right mouse button will cancel the display and return to the previous activity. The ORDER OF BATTLE is continuously updated during a simulation and reflects the current unit strengths. EDITING A UNIT Selecting EDIT UNIT from the UNIT SELECTION MENU allows the user to change the vital statistics of a previously created unit. Clicking the left mouse button over the NEXT UNIT or LAST UNIT boxes will de-activate the current unit and replace it with the requested unit. Selecting CANCEL will return to the SELECT UNIT MENU. A unit may be removed from the army's ORDER OF BATTLE by clicking the left mouse button in the DELETE UNIT box. The Universal Military simulator will request confirmation before removing the unit. Unless the deleted unit had been previously stored to disk it will now be irretrievably lost. Click the left mouse button over EDIT UNIT to change any of the vital statistics. The window will now display all current statistics of the unit and they may be edited using the method described on the previous page. Selecting CANCEL will return the user to the previous menu without storing any edited statistics. Select CONTINUE to keep the data for the edited unit. CREATING A WILDCARD UNIT An army may contain up to six 'wildcard' or user-defined units in addition to the 18 pre-defined units. A wildcard unit may be any type that the user needs or can invent. A wildcard unit may be defined, for example, as a squadron of B-52 bombers, a wizard, or an air cavalry company. The only limitations to a wildcard unit is the user's imagination. A wildcard is selected from the UNIT SELECTION MENU in the normal manner by clicking the left mouse button over the desired unit. Enter the UNIT TYPE data from the keyboard. To enter the UNIT VALUE data either press TAB or click the left mouse button over the field. The UNIT VALUE is a rating of the firepower of this unit type. Some of the default unit values are: Unit Type Unit Value -------------------------------------- Light Infantry .75 Heavy Infantry 1.0 Archers 2.75 Knights 4.5 Armor 15.5 Once a wildcard's values have been defined, all subsequent units of this type will automatically acquire them. It is only necessary to define a wildcard's values once. Each army may have six different wildcards; consequently a scenario may contain 12 wildcards (six wildcards each from two armies). An army may be created entirely from wildcards. CHAPTER IV - CREATING NEW MAPS THE DESIGN MAP WINDOW The Universal Military Simulator contains a powerful three-dimensional mapping utility that is accessed from the MAIN MENU by clicking the left mouse button over the DESIGN MAP box. The user may create virtually any map from history, fiction, adventure or fantasy. These maps may be used as a battlefield within the universal Military Simulator and role-playing adventures. The filename of the map currently being designed is displayed near the top of the window. Clicking the left mouse button in the upper left hand corner CLOSE BOX will end the map designing function. The current three- dimensional perspective is displayed at the bottom of the window. A series of drop-down menus are at the top of the window and are activated by moving the mouse cursor over the titles and clicking the left mouse button over the desired item. Many of the drop-down menu functions may also be activated by an appropriate keypress. THE DESIGN MAP DROP-DOWN MENUS Clicking the left mouse button over the NEW MAP item will erase the current map. The filename displayed at the top of the window will be the default NEW MAP. All Universal Military Simulator map files end with the extension .MAP. Sixteen different perspectives amy be selected with the options underneath the NORMAL and ZOOM IN titles. Selecting Northeast, for example, will cause the map to be redrawn from the viewer perspective of someone southwest of the map looking northeast. Selecting EXTREME ZOOM will cause a flashing 10 grid point by 10 grid point box that is controlled by the movement of the mouse. Pressing the left mouse button will cause the highlighted area to be greatly magnified. Pressing the right mouse button will cancel the EXTREME ZOOM function. Selecting PRINT or pressing the letter P on the keyboard allows the user to obtain a hard copy printout of the current map and perspective. The Universal Military Simulator supports both the Atari 1280 D.P.I printer and the Epson standard of 960 D.P.I. Select the desired format by clicking the left mouse button over the appropriate box. The user may also add one line of text at the top of the printout. After hard copy printout has been 'formatted' using this function, additional screen prints may be made at any time throughout the program by pressing the ALT and HELP keys simultaneously. A previously created map that has been stored to disk may be edited by using the LOAD MAP function selected from either the drop-down menu or by pressing the letter L on the keyboard. A map may be stored on disk by selecting SAVE MAP from the menu or pressing S on the keyboard. both functions support ata (organised in bit planes) Structure of the Icon Bank Offset Meaning 0 Icon Bank ID code ($28091960) 4 Number of icons in bank 6 Start of data for icon 1. This is 84 bytes long, and uses the same format as the LINE-A sprites. 92 Start of data for icon 2.... Structure of the Music Bank Offset Meaning 0 Music Bank ID code ($13490157) 4 Offset from start of the bank to music numhe left mouse button over the desired window. All highlighted grid points will receive the selected landscape feature. When entering a landmark, click the left mouse button over the text line of the desired landmark type, enter text and press RETURN when done. THE RANDOM MAP FUNCTION Random maps can be generated by selecting this function from the drop-down menu. Hills, Ridges, Depressions and Forests can all be computer generated. For each item either enter a minimum and maximum number of select RANDOM for a completely random number of features. CLUMPING controls the way that the features appear on the map. A very low number will create a scattered pattern, higher numbers create a more ordered landscape. The default value is three. Calculating time is proportional to the complexity of the map. If OVERLAY is off (default) the old map is erased before a new one is generated. When OVERPLAY is on (highlighted) the old map is not destroyed, but overlayed with a new random map. SELECTING TOWNS & LANDMARKS The Landmarks, Cities and Towns menu is reached from the Topographical Menu. To select the desired landmark type, click the left mouse button to the left of the desired landmark inside the editable text field. Use the keyboard to enter any seven letter name and press RETURN when done. Landmarks have no importance other than a historical one during a battle simulation. A map may contain 30 different landmarks. CHAPTER V - CREATING & EDITING SCENARIOS THE EDIT SCENARIO WINDOW Scenarios are created, or edited, by assigning the unit displayed in the upper left hand box to a map grid point location. This location is selected by clicking the left mouse button over a map grid point. A message above the box indicates whether this unit currently has a location on the map. The unit in the box may be changed by either pressing the right mouse button, selecting NEXT UNIT or LAST UNIT from the drop-down menu or by pressing the keyboard letters N or L. Perspective may be changed selecting the desired view from either the NORMAL or ZOOM IN menus. Selecting EXTREME ZOOM IN will cause a flashing 10 x 10 grid on the map that is controlled by the mouse. Pressing the left mouse button will greatly enlarge the area underneath the flashing box; pressing the right mouse button will cancel this function. Select SAVE SIMULATION or press the letter S on the keyboard to save a simulation to disk. Enter the filename (the .SIM extension will be added for you) and click the left mouse button over the desired disk drive. Selecting CANCEL will end this function without saving to disk. The Simulation Time and the Long Ranged Weapon data may be edited by selecting EDIT TIME/RANGES from the drop-down menu. Click the left mouse button in the CLOSE BOX in the upper left hand corner to end this function. EDITING SCENARIO INFORMATION The starting time of the simulation, end time, the length of segments, and the message that appears at the top of the Battlefield Window are entered by clicking the left mouse button over the appropriate text field and entering the data from the keyboard. Pressing ESC clears the line; TAB advances to the next line. If an old simulation is being edited, the current information is displayed in the text field. Click the left mouse button over CONTINUE when done. A gentle reminder will be displayed if the fields are incorrectly entered or left blank and the user will be returned to this menu to correct the data. EDITING RANGED WEAPON DATA Some units may possess long range weapons capability (they are able to fire at units that are not on adjacent grid points). These units are Archers, Catapults, Field Artillery, Horse Artillery, Armor, or Wildcard Units. To enter a range click the left mouse button over the desired text field, press BACKSPACE if necessary, and enter the data. If a wildcard unit had been previously defined, its type will also be displayed. The maximum effective range is 50 grid points. APPENDIX A RECREATING HISTORY WITH THE UNIVERSAL MILITARY SIMULATOR ARBELA To accurately recreate the battle of Arbela, place the White Army (Darius) under Computer Control and select FORCE COMPUTER TO DEFEND. Place the Black Army (Alexander) under Computer Control and select RIGHT FLANK ATTACK with the SUPPORT WITH LEFT FLANK option. This is necessary because Alexander's forces are outnumbered by almost a two to one margin and The Universal Military Simulator's Battle Logic will not attack at such odds. After about two hours of simulation time have elapsed switch the White Army to ALLOW COMPUTER TO DECIDE STRATEGY. A general melee will ensue now (both sides completely controlled by the Universal Military Simulator) that quite accurately reflects that fateful day in 331 B.C. Best viewing perspectives: For the first hour or two of simulation time select NORTHWEST ZOOM IN or NORTHEAST ZOOM IN and turn off the AUTOMATIC ZOOM function. It is also advisable to put the Universal Military simulator in FAST MODE. Within the first three hours of combat over 125 individual battle will erupt and watching them all in detail can become a bit tiring. HASTINGS Place both armies under complete computer control by selecting ALLOW COMPUTER TO DECIDE STRATEGY and step back to 1066. The best viewing perspective for the first two or three simulation hours is NORTHEAST ZOOM IN. Remember it is quite possible for the Normans (Black Army) to utterly destroy the defending Saxons on the hill and only achieve a marginal victory (the type of victory is decided on a comparison of the percentage of casualties for both armies - if the Normans suffer many casualties they could win the battle and still lose the war). The armies have been accurately recreated. To even up the play-balance (at the expense of historical accuracy) use the EDIT ARMY function to give the Saxons another 2000 peasants. Then place them in position using the EDIT SCENARIO function. MARSTON MOOR Put the White Army (Royalist) under Computer Control and select FORCE COMPUTER TO DEFEND while the Black Army (Parliament) is ordered to execute a DOUBLE ENVELOPMENT. All of the Zoom In perspectives offer an excellent aerial view of the battlefield. To see the Universal Military Simulator's Battle Logic in action, place both armies in ALLOW COMPUTER TO DECIDE STRATEGY mode and watch how the Black Army threads its way through the intervening ditch to attack the Royalist forces. WATERLOO The Universal Military Simulator is not aware of the Emperor Napoleon's precarious political position and consequently must be instructed to attack the seemingly impregnable positions of the Anglo-Allies by placing the Black Army (French) under Computer Control and selecting FORCE COMPUTER TO ATTACK. Leave the AUTOMATIC ZOOM on and let the Universal Military Simulator highlight the action as it develops. To create a more equal play balance - and to increase Napoleon's chances of winning at Waterloo - use the EDIT ARMY function to add the French Corps described in Appendix B. GETTYSBURG As at Waterloo, the political consequences of victory for the smaller army greatly outweighed sound strategic thinking. Robert E. Lee and the Confederate Army must win at Gettysburg even though they are outnumbered by the Union Army. To recreate Gettysburg, place the Union (White Army) under Computer Control and select FORCE COMPUTER TO DEFEND. The confederates should be assigned to FORCE COMPUTER TO ATTACK. There are a number of exciting perspectives of the Gettysburg battlefield including ZOOM IN NORTH, ZOOM IN SOUTH, and ZOOM IN NORTHEAST. To increase the Confederate odds of victory add J.E.B. Stuart's cavalry corps as shown in Appendix B.rsal Military Simulator highlight the action as it develops. To create a more equal play balance - and to increase Napoleon's chances of winning at Waterloo - use the EDIT ARMY function to add the French Corps described in Appendix B. GETTYSBURG As at Waterloo, the political consequences of victory for the smaller army greatly outweighe`X*o$|B?< NA/@ L&JY(JY,|@: gtae `6xva|fb4`ahd6adda`eraBRB`aNex6<aPf6DV6a"J!Q`f Nuxrtf BQ2RAISAfNurtf BQNua6t`v `}9/Y2u\Qo*pQ/HNNyd6:ʢTSʺmSMʢN BAp8\dmt)ШШB@h]qP&D\Sdh] mt)Z"Лh]RAsI<AsPD:Bdh] mt)аל$4]p' :Xadddd;QdYuȰd8#ۈH0;P;ZaX#`#hp2;Sx;[p#(0;T1;\80Tⶽ</!R""*!‰'IV>ъTW$ D^ 6s ×D&Z,`.D/z22*PSS(cҾ8y3d6b*T,&J\CމLFH 5p/gr<&_EԽ焿"8aK&,#>^ufx>D,>8;,TmTTTTmTTTTmTTTTmTTTTBha8##(080H#PX`0h#px>#D1E$L(L<"#C:"#E!l5B~\HܖuffO YɦP"2qg'!B kA6!1d7^! b|^C"O! eZ ?ObWNB^ D^2<21( C086H1P CX`h1p Cx3XNu@/&l b\69VJ/4<΍؉]5H1ѴCs*K\E lpB'z&I&s/LP6$̠6Hmlma000cЃDuhp`0ˇ0`5k° uTG%S|:"N4FxHHHߛ1LGCz^׋%Bp44V(~e4&#t?r 6Bàag^L[k˱(0|8}H1PX1`h1px1FGWӎ3"E"HBCSm+:4Pn$q{| 2#3YV` qRQd[9MnfbD`̲]e4\KF IRh#ѲS.؉ϖ\ʰ/?(R8t-1$$z)"f")QO+FF:Ί |4~%V!H @NA\0j(c yG(d*j+#Wak4S=@P3PL<̑ .8K0?b2]'u8>jUzq5`x$Yz}sʮ~'cQI.4S&B#@b:GQBgP>/,.%+l+Ez*1:|'Ic{r@4^L?b/M5Ndr~w/A |9  1\T^tp-%쪔Rlxc np26P| |0,ȗO<4L]/.DL-0`q!`"aVpb}.l$CE ="a\OV"K,A }1Ftx)L1 R/P/PL4ǠHH>m?/a,Nub.rx2Κ:]GF5KBNO9H0BXQȥW ؙQPbd$b' Q9 Z1x { +R9#HPaKM^# 2g# L#0$"0D.0$05N1~a2ba;a<NV=x>A?RFJcBBGCh2FD*pbg$P#">.rN"X g0 9@`,,]Jqt)B0>i x-JXZ"ܡt+nHE!IrN RaؼR!/"&YT: @z: T{R*:/H XίN\8re'XY_1 "J$ī &At ,S>sn^' P `ÍY HV?)нOR*= a/.1 Ҭ>riG4V:/7bKc8;4,SU"K w0y1I{c\"a$&&6j # XEfy9t$ 2>_>C(1*>]9,9.G9kc9x~ѡfм䜶,j9#~XH*ӱ$)L$ʐhL0dY9NŲ ;R",MD"hbx0µ-pb:RxHS<oB( }0,.| 0hvSZӨ mr8:<>H]EFG,:d̀ &NֆևLe^:<03S{ÈF TeF fUtIʦ# zyr{f+1$:>sLmD]H#PR >4QTSDFUgꢭ\EhLG-ii╧``jʣvsYr3FNdj%N9f (F0h<2v%x&"l6*lD4_l,R8 MX^vÓWnRT^/L@,_3Ɔs8.S2MUvıg0q$\|Ǔh"X`&LgI`bɄ, -Q3(0 Fc<Ɩh;pNaj(%(~TB;]iT`9$pTѤ+O(ZVjVUƈTB H`2fgHRT2Z|^.Pɗ ^ U,`%:-e/ABZÔ UP/DR6QQk1L aZ:z4S~%DjS%XZ%n.#ȌY<%t9Ŕ#Du)zKD@֑CT1N^av/e~b,J1 CĔ1; \lŠ|F5`T(D5EJf/  FhDEpD u95 F GZ0Ga\0FV0EaP0Jɗ>42(696>6nBBlDDlFFlHHlJJlLLlNNlPPlRRlTTlVVlXXlZZl\\l^^l`Vbbfddffffh0jj0ll0nn0pp0rr0tt0vv0xx0zz0||0~~0ﻂ #hv Software Presents Part 2 of the UMS Docs Thanks once again to DR.J (U.S.A.) UNIVERSAL MILITARY SIMULATOR SCENARIO HANDBOOK ARBELA 1 October 331 B.C. Alexander - Darius In 334 B.C. Alexander the Great, son of Philip of Macedon, turned his victorious horsemen and phalanxes east across the Hellespont and boiled into Asia Minor to destroy the outposts of the empire of Darius III, commander of the mightiest army on the face of the earth. Within two years Alexander had isolated the Persian fleets in the Mediterranean and the Aegean by capturing all the seaports from present day Turkey to Egypt and securing his lines of communications back to his base in Macedonia. In the process Tyre, the home port of the Persian navy, was reduced to rubble after an extended siege and its inhabitants sold off as slaves. By April, 331 B.C. Alexander, after spurning Darius' peace offer of 10,000 gold talents ($300 million dollars), all of the Persian Empire west of the Euphrates and the hand of the princess royale, was prepared to march east and take it all, anyway. Darius, with his infantry from Afghanistan, Bokhara, Khiva and Tibet, Kurdish horsemen, Bactrian cavalry including ancestors of the legendary Sikh warriors, scythe wheeled chariots and war elephants waited for him on the plains of Gaugamela, 20 miles from Arbela (about 18 miles northeast of present day Mosul, Iraq). Persian engineers had meticulously prepared the ground, leveling it flat to allow the war chariots to strike out unimpeded. On September 25, Macedonian cavalry on reconnaissance discovered the position of the great Imperial army. Alexander, knowing that Darius was waiting for him on prepared ground, called a halt in his eastward march and made camp to rest his troops. After four days Alexander called his men to arms and approached the Persian hosts. On the night of September 30/ October 1, Alexander crossed a slight rise that had previously hidden the two armies from direct observation of each other. There Alexander conducted a first hand reconnaisance of the ground and mistakenly concluded that the suspiciously smooth san concealed great pitfalls dug to entrap his cavalry. He immediately called a council of war. A number of Alexander's officers voted for a night assault. But Alexander replied that he, "would not filch a victory and that Alexander must conquer openly and fairly". It was a wise choice for the army of Darius was wide awake and waiting for the Macedonian under the cloak of night. Indeed, while Alexander's men rested for the next day's fight, the Persian army remained drawn up in line of battle under arms. The dawn would find them greatly fatigued. The positions of the forces that faced each other on the Plain of Gaugamela 2318 years ago (1987) are precisely known and accurately portrayed in the simulation because Darius' own Order of Battle and maps fell into Macedonian hands after Arbela. These, along with the positions of Alexander's troops, were copied into the journals of Aristobulus, a division commander in Alexander's army, and later re-copied by Arrian. In the center of the Persian lines stood Darius, surrounded by the Royal Kinsman whose privilege it was to guard the body of the Emperor. Flanking the Kinsman were the last contingents of Greek mercenaries that had managed to earlier survive the crushing defeat given them by Alexander at Issus in 333 B.C. In advance were the Royal Squadron supported by Mardian archers. 200 war chariots were spread across the front in three groups and in the vanguard stood 15 elephants with their handlers and firing platforms. The flanks were supported by great masses of heavy cavalry while the bulk of the Persian army was composed of infantry levies from the satropys and fiefdoms of Darius' empire. Across the plains Alexander had arrayed his smaller army with particular care to protect his flanks. With forces inferior in number having to cross terrain prepared in advance by his enemy, Alexander's greatest fears were that Darius would overlap his lines, and pour cavalry around his flanks in a double envelopment while his ponderous war elephants would trample the famed Macedonian phalanx. To counter this quite likely series of events, Alexander took a number of precautions: first, he left a mass of Thracian infantry in the center some distance behind the phalanx (Alexander is credited with inventing the tactical reserve); second he positioned both flanks at a 45 degree angle from the main battle line; and lastly, after he stationed the eight troops of the royal horse-guard with himself on the right, he removed all chance of a Persian attack by striking first in an oblique attack on Darius' left flank. The Macedonian phalanx, composed of six brigades of 3000 men each, started off with its goal the extreme left flanks of Darius' Bactrian cavalry. Traveling behind the 18,000 foot-soldiers rode Alexander and his famed Companions. Darius stared in horror as he realized that Alexander was not advancing straight ahead as he had planned. Having made no contingency plans the best Darius was able to improvise was to send his Persian, Daan, Bactrian and Scythian cavalry against the approaching Macedonians. Alexander had prepared for this and now ordered his horsemen, previously screened by the phalanx, to engage the enemy. A sharp cavalry fight ensued with the Macedonians getting the worst of it at first. However, the issue was never in doubt as Alexander's reserves were close by while the Persian cavalry was engaged far in front of their lines. After he spent all of the cavalry on his left with little observed effect, Darius ordered his chariots to dash across the plain and route the Macedonian phalanx. Alexander, having prepared for this, sent forth his archers who cut down horses and drivers a 100 hards before they reached their intended target. The Persian horsemen that were able to reform after the initial defeat now wheeled about and attempted to swarm around the Macedonian right. Again Alexander countered this by detaching squadrons from the Royal horse-guard. Darius now stripped his center of all mobile troops and threw them into the maelstrom that was quickly enveloping his left flank. In so doing, a large gap appeared in the Persian line that Alexander was quick to exploit with his personal guard. Meanwhile, the Macedonian phalanx, moved inexorably towards the Persians. Though only the left half of the Persian troops had been engaged and the right still stood firm, panic began to engulf the center at the approach of the phalanx. When a thrown javelin killed Darius' personal chariot driver he abandoned his troops, mounted a swift horse, fled toward Arbela, and left his army leaderless like a great writhing beast with a head wound. The outcome of the battle had now been decided but a great deal of killing was still to be done. Almost as if in a reflexive motion the Persian right under the command of Mazaeus struck out at the unsupported Macedonian left commanded by Parmenio. Greatly outnumbered Parmenio's wing gave ground until the Persians fell upon the Thracian rearguard and began to sack the Macedonian camp. Alexander, seeing the chaos on his left, abandoning his pursuit of Darius, and wheeling the royal horse guard ran to the support of Parmenio. A less vicious fight ensued where 60 of Alexander's personal guard and three generals fell at the king's side. Only a few Persians escaped with their lives. Alexander's victory was complete. A bridge across the river Lycus created a bottleneck for the fleeing Persians and the pursuing Macedonian cavalry mercilessly struck down the remnants of Darius' army. Three days later Alexander triumphantly entered Babylon as the lord and master of the "oldest seat of earthly empire". ORDER OF BATTLE --------------------------------------------------------------------------- The Macedonians Alexander the Great commanding The Phalanx troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- Taxis 1 Coenus 2,500 Taxis 1 Taxis 2 Perdiccas 2,500 Taxis 2 Taxis 3 Meleager 2,500 Taxis 3 Taxis 4 Polysperchon 2,500 Taxis 4 Taxis 6 Craterus 2,500 Taxis 6 The Cavalry troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- Mercenary Cavalry Menidas 600 Mrchary Paeonian Cavalry Ariston 459 Paeonia Scouts Aretes 459 Scouts Greek Cavalry Erigyius 384 Greek Thessalian Cavalry Philippus 2,020 Thessal Mercenary Cavalry Andromachus 400 Merc 2 Greek Cavalry Coeranus 320 Greek Odrysian Cavalry Agathon 342 Odrysia The Companions - Philotas commanding troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- The Royal Squadron Cleitus 300 Cleitus Glaucius 253 Glaucis Ariston 253 Ariston Sopolis 253 Sopolis Heracleides 253 Hrcldes Demetrias 253 Demetrs Meleager 253 Mleager Hegelochus 253 Heglchs Other Units troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- Mercenary Infantry Cleander 6,700 Merc 1 Merc 2 Merc 3 Macedonian Archers Brison 500 Macedon Half Agrianians Attalus 500 Agrian Thracian Javelineers Balacrus 1,000 Thracia Cretan Archers 500 Cretan Hypaspists Nicanor 3,000 Hypas 1 Hypas 2 Thracian Infantry Sitalis 5,500 Thrac 1 Thrac 2 THE PERSIANS Darius III Colomannus commanding The Cavalry troops # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- Special Bactrian Cavalry 1,000 Spe Bac Special Scythian Cavalry 2,000 Spe Scv Bactrian Cavalry 8,000 Bactr 1 Bactr 2 Bactr 3 Bactr 4 Daan Cavalry 1,000 Daan Arachotian Cavalry 1,000 Arachot Susian Cavalry 1,000 Susian Cadusian Cavalry 1,000 Cadusia Indian Cavalry 1,000 Indian Sacesinian Cavalry 1,000 Sacesin Albanian Cavalry 1,000 Albania Hyrcanian Cavalry 1,000 Hyrcani Tapurian Cavalry 1,000 Tapuria Sacan Cavalry 1,000 Sacan Median Cavalry 1,000 Median Mesopotamian Cavalry 1,000 Mesopot Assyrian Cavalry 1,000 Assyria Armenian Cavalry 1,000 Armenia Cappadocian Cavalry 1,000 Cappadc Persian Cavalry 5,000 Persia 1 Persia 2 The Infantry troops # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- Greek Mercenary 2,000 Greek Phrygia 1,000 Phrygri Cilicia 1,000 Cylicia Colchian 1,000 Colchia Babylonian 1,000 Babylon Cossaean 1,000 Cossae Uxian 1,000 Uxian Carmanian 1,000 Carman Chorasmian 1,000 Chroash Arian 1,000 Arian Gedrosian 1,000 Gedrosh Oxydracae 1,000 Oxydrac Sogdiana 1,000 Sogdian Paraetacene 1,000 Paraeta Assaceni 1,000 Assacen Aspasi 1,000 Aspasi Paropamisadae 1,000 Paropah Gandhara 1,000 Cathaei Drangiana 1,000 Drangia Ariaspae 1,000 Ariaspa Oreitae 1,000 Oreitae Arabian 1,000 Arabian Eqyptian 1,000 Egypt Lycaonia 1,000 Lycaon Pamphylian 1,000 Pamphyl Bithynian 1,000 Bithyni Lydian 1,000 Lydian Lycian 1,000 Lycian Arbelitis 1,000 Arbelit Ethiopian 1,000 Ethopia The Special Units troops # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- Scythe Wheeled Chariots 200 1st 2nd 3rd War Elephants 15 Royal Royal Foot Guard 1,000 Royal Royal Horse Guard 1,000 Royal This Order of Battle was prepared from research, and with the kind assistance, of Charles Pierce. It is reprinted with his permission. HASTINGS 14 October 1066 Harold - William Harold Godwinson, elected King of England as successor to Edward the Confessor on January 5, 1066 was between a rock and a hard place. The rock was the Norse king, Harald Hardrada, considered the finest military leader of the 11th century and pretender to the English throne. The hard place was William, Duke of Normandy, another contender for the monarchy. Within 10 months both of Harold's opponents would invade his kingdom; Hardrada from the north, William from the south, each at the head of a large, professional army and Harold's first mis-step would be his last. The first to attack, in September, were the Norwegians, joined by Harold's traitorous brother, Tostig, who had been promised the Earldom of Northumbria after Haradrada's conquest of England. Harold, with his Housecarls (3,000 professional soldiers armed with double-handed axe, long shields, helm and knee-length chain mail) rushed north to intercept the Norsemen. As Harold raced up Ermine Street (the ancient road stretching from London past Lincoln and York to the far north) he collected his shire levies (known as The Fyrd). These levies were comprised of free men that owed a feudal due of two months military service per year. Though often well ed by their local thanes the Fyrd was armed with an odd assortment of spears, axes, stone slings, javelins and scythes. On September 20, before Harold and his army were able to arrive with reinforcements, the Norsemen soundly defeated the Earls of Mercia and Northumbria at Fulford, just south of York. In a lightning march Harold reached the now victorious Hardrada and immediately attacked him on September 25 at Stamford Bridge which crossed the river Derwent. A vicious, desperate battle ensued stretching from dawn to dusk, that ultimately ended with the deaths of Hardrada and the would-be Earl of Northumbria, Tostig, and the complete route of the Norsemen. Three days later, William Duke of Normandy, landed at Pevensey, in the south of England at the head of 1,000 boatloads of troops and began devastating the countryside. On October 2, word reached Harold of William's invasion and with his surviving Housecarls he turned about and rode hard back down Ermine Street, calling for fresh levies along the way. The Fyrd was ordered to rendezvous at a prominent hoar apple tree which stood just south of the ancient forest of Andredswealk, 60 miles southeast of London. Harold arrived on the evening of October 13/14 with most of his troops stretched out along the road behind him. William and the Normans spent the night resting in camp at Hastings. The narration of Robert Wace, a Norman poet, continues the next morning as William addressed his troops, " 'For God's sake spare not; strike hard at the beginning; stay not to take spoil; all the booty shall be in common, and there will be plenty for everyone. There will be no safety in asking quarter or in flight; the English will never love or spare a Norman. Felons they were, and felons they are; false they were and false they will be. Show not weakness towards them, for they will have no pity on you. Neither the coward for running well, nor the bold man for smiting well, will be the better liked by the English, nor will any be the more spared on either account. You may fly to the sea, but you can fly not further.' "...Then all went to their tents, and armed themselves as they best might; and the duke was very busy, giving every one his orders; and he was courteous to all the vassals, giving away many arms and horses to them... Then he crossed himself, and straightway took his hauberk, stooped his head, and put it on aright, and laced his helmet, and girt on his sword, which a varlet brought him. Then the duke called for his good horse - a better could not be found. It had been sent him by a King of Spain, out of very great friendship. Neither arms nor the press of fighting men did it fear, if its lord spurred it on. "...The barons, and knights, and men-at-arms were all now armed; the foot- soldiers were well-equipped, each bearing bow and sword; on their heads were caps, and to their feet were bound buskins. Some had good hides which they had bound round their bodies; and many wee clad in frocks and had quivers and bows hung to their girdles. The knights had hauberks and swords, boots of steel and shining helmets; shields at their necks, and in their hands lances. And all had their cognizances, so that each might know his fellow, and Norman might not strike Norman, nor Frenchman kill his countryman by mistake. Those on foot led the way, with serried ranks, bearing their bows. The knights rode next, supporting the archers from behind. "Harold had summoned his men, earls, barons and vavasours, from the castles and the cities, from the ports, the villages, and boroughs. The peasants were also called together from the villages, bearing such arms as they found; clubs and great picks, iron forks and stakes... The English had built up a fence before them with their shields, and with ash and other wood, and had well joined and wattled in the whole work, so as not to leave even a crevice. "Meanwhile the Normans appeared advancing over the ridge of a rising ground (Telham hill); and the first division of their troops moved onwards along the hill and across a valley. And presently another division, still larger, came in sight, close following upon the first, and they were led towards another part of the field, forming together as the first body had done. "And while Harold saw and examined them, and was pointing them out to Gurth (his brother), a fresh company came in sight, covering all the plain, and in the midst of them was raised the standard that came from Rome (William's standard was sent by the Pope). Near it was the duke, and the best men and greatest strength of the army were there. "...The Normans brought on three divisions of their army to attack at different places. They set out in three companies, and in three companies did they fight. "As soon as the two armies were in full view of each other, great noise and tumult arose. You might hear the sound of many trumpets, of bugles, and of horns; and then you might see men ranging themselves in line, lifting their shields, raising their lances, bending their bows, handling their arrows, ready for assault and defense. "...Then Taillefer, who sang right well, rode mounted on a swift horse, before the duke, singing of Charlemagne and of Roland and of Oliver, and the peers who died in Roncescalles. And when they drew night to the English, 'A boon, sire! cried Taillefer; 'I have long served you, and you owe me for all such service. Today, so please, you shall repay it. I ask as my guerdon and beseech you for it earnestly, that you will allow me to strike the first blow in the battle!' And the duke answered, 'I grant it.' Then Taillefer put his horse to a gallop, charging before all the rest, and struck an Englishman dead, driving his lance below the breast into his body, and stretching him upon the ground. Then he drew his sword, and struck another, crying out, 'Come on! What do ye, sirs? lay on, lay on!' At the second blow he struck, the English pushed forward, and surrounded and slew him. Forthwith arose the noise and cry of war, and on either side the people put themselves in motion. "The Normans moved on to the assault, and the English defended themselves well. Some were striking, others urging onwards; all were bold, and cast aside fear. And now, behold, that battle was gathered, whereof the fame is yet mighty. "Loud and far resounded the bray of the horns; and the shocks of the lances, the mighty strokes of maces, and the quick clashing of swords. One while the Englishmen rushed on, another while they fell back; one while the men from over seas charged onwards, and again at other times retreated. "...When the English fall, the Normans shout. Each side taunts and defies the other, yet neither knoweth what the other saith; and the Normans say the English bark, because they understand not their speech. "...The Normans press on the assault, and the English defend their post well; they pierce the hauberks, and cleave the shields, receive and return mighty blows. Again, some press forwards; others yield, and thus in various ways the struggle proceeds. In the plain was a fosse, which the Normans had now behind them, having passed it in the fight without regarding it. But the English charged and drove the Normans before them till they made them fall back upon their fosse, overthrowing into it horses and men. Many were to be seen falling therin, rolling one over the other, with their faces to the earth, and unable to rise. Many of the English, also, whom the Normans drew down along with them, died there. At no time during the day's battle did so many Normans die as perished in that fosse. So those said who saw the dead. "...Then Duke William's brother, Odo, the good priest, the bishop of Bayeux, galloped up and said to them, 'Stand fast! stand fast! be quiet and move not! fear nother, for if God please we shall conquer yet.' So they took courage, and rested where they were; and Odo returned galloping back to where the battle was most fierce, and was of great service on that day. He had put a hauberk on, over a white aube; wide in the body, with the sleeve tight, and sat on a white horse, so that all might recognize him. In his hand he held a mace, and wherever he saw most need he held up and stationed the knights, and often urged them on to assault and strike the enemy. "From nine o'clock in the morning, when the combat began till three o'clock came, the battle was up and down, this way and that, and no one knew who would conquer and win the land. Both sides stood so firm and fought so well, that no one could guess which would prevail. The Norman archers with their bows shot thickly upon the English; but they covered themselves with their shields, so that the arrows could no reach their bodies, nor do any mischief, how true so ever was their aim, or however well they shot. Then the Normans determined to shoot their arrows upwards into the air, so that they might fall on their enemy's heads, and strike their faces. The archers adopted this scheme, and shot up int o the air towards the English; and the arrows in falling struck their heads and faces, and put out the eyes of many; and all feared to open their eyes, or leave their faces unguarded. "The arrows now flew thicker than rain before the wind; fast sped the shafts the English called 'wibetes". Then it was that an arrow, that had thus been shot upwards, struck Harold above his right eye, and put it out. In his agony he drew the arrow and threw it away, breaking it with his hands; and the pain to his head was so great, that he leaned upon his shield. "...The Normans saw that the English defended themselves well, and were so strong in their position that they could do little against them. So they consulted together privily, and arranged to draw off, and pretend to flee, till the English should pursue and scatter themselves over the field; for they saw that if they could once get their enemy to break their ranks, they might be attacked and discomfited much more easily. As they had said, so they did. The Normans by little and little fled, the English following them. As the one fell back, the other pressed after; and when the Frenchmen retreated, the English thought and cried out, that the men of France fled, and would never return. "...The Normans were playing their part well, when an English knight came rushing up, having in his company a hundred men, furnished with various arms. He wielded a northern hatchet, and with the blade a full foot long; and was well armed after his manner, being tall, bold, and of noble carriage. In the front of the battle where the Normans thronged most, he came bounding on swifter than the stag, many Normans falling before him and his company. He rushed straight upon a Norman who was armed and riding on a war-horse, and tried with his hatchet of steel to cleave his helmet; but the blow miscarried, and the sharp blade glanced down before the saddle- bow, driving through the horse's neck down to the ground, so that both horse and master fell together to the earth. "I know not whether the Englishman struck another blow; but the Normans who saw the stroke were astonished, and about to abandon the assault, when Roger de Montgomeri came galloping up, with his lance set, and heeding no the long-handled axe, which the Englishmen wielded aloft, struck him down, and left him stretched upon the ground. Then Roger cried out, 'Frenchmen, strike! the day is ours!' And again a fierce melee was to be seen, with many a blow of lance and sword; the English still defending themselves, killing the horses and cleaving the shields. "...And now might be heard the loud clang and cry of battle, and the clashing of lances. The English stood firm in their barricades, and shivered the lances, beating them into pieces with their bills and maces. The Normans drew their swords, and hewed down the barricades, and the English in great trouble fell back upon their standard, where were collected the maimed and wounded. "...Duke William pressed close upon the English with his lance; striving hard to reach the standard with the great troop he led; and seeking earnestly for Harold, on whose account the whole war was. The Normans followed their lord, and pressed around him; they ply their blows upon the English; and those defend themselves stoutly, striving hard with their enemies, returning blow for blow. "...Loud was now the clamour, and great the slaughter; many a soul then quitted the body it inhabited. The living marched over the heaps of dead, and each side was wearing of striking. He charged on who could, and he who could no longer strike still pushed forward. The strong struggled with the strong; some failed, others triumphed; the cowards fell back, the brave pressed on; and sad was his fate who fell in the midst, for he had little chance of rising again; and many in truth fell, who never rose at all, being crushed under the throng. "And now the Normans pressed on so far, that at last they had reached the standard. There Harold had remained, defending himself to the utmost; but he was sorely wounded in his eye by the arrow, and suffered grievous pain form the blow. An armed man came in the throng of battle, and struck him on the ventaille on his helmet, and beat him to the ground; and as he sought to recover himself, a knight beat him down again, striking him on the thick of his thigh down to the bone. "...The standard was beaten down, the golden standard was taken, and Harold and the best of his friends were slain; but there was so much eagerness, and throng of so many around, seeking to kill him, that I know not who it was that slew him. "The English were in great trouble at having lost their king, and at the duke having conquered and beat down the standard; but they still fought on and defended themselves long, and in fact till the day drew to a close. Then it clearly appeared to all that the standard was lost, and the news had spread throughout the army that Harold for certain was dead; and all saw that there was no longer any hope, so they left the field, and those fled who could. "William fought well; and many an assault did he lead, many a blow did he give, and many receive, and many fell dead under has hand. Two horses were killed under him, and he took a third at time of need, so that he fell not to the ground; and he lost not a drop of blood. But whatever any one did, and whoever lived or died, this is certain, that William conquered..." So ends the narration of Robert Wace and with it Anglo-Saxon rule over England. ORDER OF BATTLE --------------------------------------------------------------------------- The English King Harold commanding The House-carls (flagnames) Carls 1, Carls 2, Carls 3, Carls 4, Carls 5, Carls 6 The Fyrd (flagnames) Fyrd 1, Fyrd 2, Fyrd 3, Fyrd 4, Fyrd 5, Fyrd 6, Fyrd 7, Fyrd 8 The Normans Duke William commanding (flagnames) Norman1, Norman2, Norman3, Norman1, Norman2, Norman3, Norman1, Norman2 The Bretons (flagnames) Breton1, Breton2, Breton1, Breton2, Breton3, Breton1, Breton2 The Allies (flagnames) Allies1, Allies2, Allies1, Allies2, Allies3, Allies1, Allies2 MARSTON MOOR 2 July 1644 Parliament - Charles I After two years of chess-like opening maneuvers the English Civil War had come to that inevitable mid-game point where the first great clash was to take place. The Royalist army, under the command of Prince Rupert, son of the Elector Palatine, needed a major decisive victory over the Parliamentarian forces if Charles I was to maintain any hope of every regaining control over England. The Royalist forces, the weaker of the two opponents, were further hampered by a lack of supplies that a blockading English navy loyal to Parliament kept from crossing the Channel. June, 1644 found five armies in the fields of York; two Royalist (one under Newcastle besieged at York, the other under Rupert marching to his aid) and three Parliamentarian (those under Manchester, Fairfax and Leven leading the Scottish allies). Upon Rupert's approach the parliamentarian forces, wary of being trapped between the besieged and the rescuers, drew off. Six days of maneuvering led the five armies to the wet rye fields of Marston Moor seven miles west of York city. Since the War of the Roses no two larger armies had faced each other on English soil. Rupert's forces were arrayed on the mile and a half long moor facing south across a drainage ditch stretching between the villages of Tockwith and Long Marston where the combined Parliamentary-Scottish armies stood with their backs to the 150 foot hill. Both armies filled the center of their lines with masses of pikemen while cavalry guarded the flanks. The Royalist right wing was composed to two lines of three regiments each; the first under Lord Byron, the second under Lord Molineux, Sir John Urry (also Hurry), second-in-command under Byron, placed companies of musketeers between the cavalry squadrons. Rupert's personal cavalry regiment, the finest in the army, was stationed echeloned in the right rear. The center was composed of three masses of infantry; Rupert's Bluecoats, Newcastle's Whitecoats and Byron's foot. Posted directly behind the center was a tactical reserve of approximately 1,000 of Rupert's Life-guards. On the Royalist left Sir Charles Lucas commanded the front three regiments; Sir Richard Dacres the back three; all under the direction of Lord Goring. Across the ditch the Parliament-Scottish army was similarly stationed. Their left, commanded by Cromwell, consisted of three lines; the first two comprised of cavalry from the eastern association, the last of David Leslie's Scottish regiments. The left center was held by manchester's three brigades of foot under Lawrence Crawford; the center consisted of two brigades of Yorkshire foot and three Scottish brigades all under the command of Lord Fairfax. The main body of Scottish infantry under Lieutenant-General William Baillie was stationed to the right of center while the right flank was held by 2,000 cavalry troopers under Sir Thomas Fairfax with three regiments of Scottish horse in reserve. The better part of the day had been spent uinder a sky of desultory thunderclouds. By seven o'clock Rupert had become convinced that any chance of battle had passed for the day and gave the order for his men to stand down and prepare the evening meals. It was now the moment that Cromwell and Leven - well aware of the long midsummer days and pending full moon - had been waiting for. The battle opened with Cromwell's horsemen, the Ironsides, charging down the slopes by Tockwith towards Rupert's right flank. Rupert responded by removing his own cavalry regiment from their reserve position and ordered them to attack the Parliamentary horse. While Colonel Fritzel's (or Fraser) dragoons engaged the Royal horse, the Ironsides plunged on into the mass of Byron's cavalry and in the words of Cromwell's scout-master, "scattered them like dust". However, as Byron's horse broke and fled, they revealed Molyneux and the Royalist second line counter-attacking. Cromwell's attack splintered and dissipated like surf on the breakers before them. While the Ironside's second line was still crossing the ditch, the first line was turning around and beginning a retreat. A pistol ball grazed Cromwell's neck and the muzzle flash blinded his eyes. Route seemed imminent when David Leslie's 800 Scottish horse appeared to attack the Royalist right flank. The fleeing first line of the Ironsides steadied and then was wheeled about by the still dazed Cromwell. The momentum changed again and the Royalist horse dashed in panic for Wilstrop Woods, hotly pursued by Leslie's Scots. Panic enveloped the Royalist right as all fled to the road to York. Rupert barely escaped with his own life; a fate not shared by his poodle, Boy. However, the further east that one traveled from Cromwell's great victory on the left the greater Parliament's troubles became. The nearest mass of infantry, Crawford's pikemen in the left-center, were driving Byron's regiment of foot before them. But, in Parliament's center, Lord Fairfax's foot had been stopped cold by the Royalist's Whitecoats and put to a route that also rolled up his reserve of two brigades of Scots. Next in the Parliament line came Baillie's Scots, whose left flank was now completely exposed due to Fairfax's defeat. The left-most regiments of Buccleuch and Loudon were caught up in the route of the center while the right-most regiments of Lindsay and Maitland stood firm against three charges of Lord Goring's Royalist horse and took Sir Charles Lucas Prisoner. On the extreme right all was chaos. An irresistible Royalist cavalry charge swept Sir Thomas Fairfax's cavalry before them; only the Scottish regiments of Dahousie and Eglinton making a stand. Fairfax, sporting a sword wound on his cheek, removed the white Parliament badge from his hat and snuck through the Royalist lines to rejoin Manchester in the center. Meanwhile, the Parliamentary generals, Lord Fairfax and Leven, fled the battlefield while elements of Goring's horse looted the Parliamentary baggage camp. By 8:30, Cromwell on the left had advanced as far north as Goring had to the south. The two armies were engaged in a macabre "pas de deux" with the pivot point five beleaguered Scottish regiments in the center. The battle, and ultimately the fate of Charles I, hung on that point. Cromwell, in practical command of the most cohesive fighting force left in the Parliamentary army, ordered a wheel in line eastward and southward. Now, curiously, the positions of the two armies were almost the exact opposite of where they had been but one and a half hours earlier; with Cromwell charging south against the Royalist Whitecoats who had turned about to face north. While the Scots pushed north against the Royalist center and Baillie hung on for dear life against Goring, the Ironsides attacked the previously victorious Royal horse en flank. The Whitecoats were pushed, herded and forced back yard by yard, surrounded on all sides; and refusing to surrender were slaughtered almost to a man. It was 10 o'clock before the Parliamentarian victory was complete. The Royalist army of Newcastle had ceased to exist. Within two weeks York surrendered to the victors of Marston Moor and the north of England was lost forever to Charles I. ORDER OF BATTLE -------------------------------------------------------------------------- The Royalist Army Prince Rupert commanding The Right Wing - Lord Byron commanding troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- Under Lord Molyneux Leveson 250 Leveson Lord Molineux 300 Milineu Tyldesly 250 Tyldesl Under Lord Byron Sir John Urry 250 Urry Lord Byron 450 Byron Vaughan 400 Vaughan Independent Rupert's Horse 500 Rupert Musketeers 500 Musket1 Trevor 400 Trevor Tuke 200 Tuke The Center - Lord James Eythin commanding troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- Lord Byron's Foot 3,125 Byron Byron Warren Warren Tyldesly Tyldesl Rupert's Bluecoats 3,125 Broughton Brghton Cheater Cheater Erneley & Gibson Erneley Tillier Tillier Chisenal Chisenl Newcastle's Whitecoats Mackworth 3,000 White 1 White 2 White 3 Rupert's Life-guards 140 Lifegrd Widdington 400 Widding Blakeston 400 Blakest Derbyshire Foot 220 Derby The Left - Lord George Goring commanding troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- Under Lord Goring Frescheville 160 Fresch Eyre 225 Eyre Langdale 700 Langdle Musketeers 500 Musket2 Under Sir Richard Dacres Sir Charles Lucas 400 Lucas Sir Richard Dacres 400 Dacres The Parliamentarian-Scottish Army Under the joint command of Manchester; Fairfax and leven The Left - Under the command of Oliver Cromwell troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- Ironsides Oliver Cromwell 1,250 Iron 1 Iron 2 Manchester's Horse 1,100 Manches Fraser's Dragoons 500 Fraser Under David Leslie Leslie 975 Leslie Kirkoudbright 500 Kirkoud Balcarres 475 Balcarr The Center - Under the command of Lord Fairfax troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- Under Major-General Crawford Manchester's Foot 3,000 Manch 1 Manch 2 Manch 3 Yester 700 Yester Livingstone 650 Livings Coupar 650 Coupar Dunfermline 650 Dunferm Lord Fairfax' Foot 3,000 Frfax 1 Frfax 2 Frfax 3 Scottish Infantry under Lt. Gen. Baillie Rae 750 Rae Hamilton 750 Hamiltn Maitland 750 Maitlnd Crawford-Lindsay 750 Crawfrd Under Lumsden Kilhead 750 Kilhead Cassillis 750 Cassill Buccleuch 750 Buccleu Loudon 750 Loudon In Reserve Erskine 750 Erskine Dudhope 750 Dudhope The Right - under the command of Sir Thomas Fairfax troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- Sir Thomas Fairfax 2,000 Frfax 1 Frfax 2 Lambert 1,250 Lambert Lord Dalhousie's Horse 750 Dalhous Lord Eglinton's Horse 750 Eglinth Balgonie 750 Balgoni WATERLOO 18 June 1815 Wellington - Napoleon As Napoleon, returning from exile on Elba, stepped off the gangplank at Cannes on March 1, 1815 a clock started ticking that would end 110 days later on the hills 12 miles south of Brussels near a hamlet called Waterloo. There were 90 days left on that timepiece when the Emperor triumphantly returned to Paris at the head of a mob of cheering civilians and old veterans from his many campaigns. The days had dwindled to 16 by the time Napoleon had reorganized and re-equipped his armies and gave them what would be their last marching orders. After detaching 78,660 troops to cover the frontiers and suppress Royalist revolt, the 115,500 man Armee du Nord remained as Napoleon's striking arm against the 800,000 soldiers of the English, Dutch, Austrian, Belgian, Prussian and Russian allies. Obviously, the Emperor's only chance was to strike first and defeat the individual armies in detail before they could unite by mid-July for the impending invasion of France. On June 14, Napoleon was poised to march northeast and drive a wedge between the Anglo- Dutch army under the Duke of Wellington concentrating at Quatre Bras, and marshal Blucher's Prussians scattered to the southeast. The next day Napoleon forced a crossing of the Sambre after a stiff resistance from the Prussian I Corps and split the Armee du Nord into three groups. The left wind under Ney was ordered to advance to the North and push any Anglo-Allied units encountered down the Quatre Bras-Brussels road while Napoleon and Grouchy would crush the Prussians at Ligny and Sombreffe. The battle against Blucher was joined at 2:30 on the afternoon of June 16. Three and one-half hours later the Prussiahn army was retreating leaving 17,000 casualties on the field while another 10,000 Prussians and Saxons deserted. Napoleon returned to his headquarters at Fleurus that night convinced that the Prussian army had been utterly destroyed. This was the Emperor's last and perhaps, greatest error, because Blucher and the Prussians would return 48 hours later; just in time to hear that clock started earlier on the docks at Cannes strike its final chime. Marshal Grouchy, with 33,000 men of the III Corps, IV Corps and part of the Cavalry Reserve, was assigned the task of hurrying the defeated Prussians down the road to Wavre and away from any juncture with Wellington. Napoleon, with the 72,000 men of the Armee du Nord remaining, turned northwest to Quatre Bras and then north towards Waterloo. After a series of superb maneuvers, Wellington had extricated the Anglo- Allied army from Quatre Bras and stationed them some nine miles north on the last ridge line before Brussels with his back to a great forest, the Bois de Soignes. Years later, from St. Helena, Napoleon would criticize the British commander for placing his troops in a position that offered no retreat. Then again, the duke would have have no need to retreat. A hard rain fell that night drenching the quarter of a million soldiers scattered about the plains and hills of south Belgium. In the east Grouchy had already lost contact with the Prussians he was pursuing. Before dawn Wellington would receive a note from Blucher promising the arrival of a Prussian corps that day. At 1:00 a.m. the Emperor Napoleon left his bivouac and walked the line of the Imperial Guard stopping to share a soldier's simple meal and to stare at the fires of his enemies that dotted the northern skyline. At 2:30 he sent a group of staff officers to examine distant sounds that might indicate troop movements. They returned an hour later and reported that Wellington was still in place. Napoleon went to seep at dawn only to be awakened an hour later with news that the skies were clearing. That morning, after breakfast with his staff and senior officers, Napoleon declared, "The enemy army is numerically superior to ours by almost a quarter; yet, we have no less than 90 percent of the chances in our favor, and not 10 against us." His orders for a scheduled assault at 9:00 a.m. were twice delayed as troops slogged through the mud and artillery officers requested more time to push and shove their field pieces into position. At 11:00 a.m. Napoleon postponed the infantry attack to 1:30 p.m. and ordered it to be preceded by a massive artillery barrage. The Emperor's optimism notwithstanding, the Armee du Nord had a very difficult task ahead. The enemy that confronted them was firmly established on a ridge line overlooking the Mont St. Jean plateau. On the Anglo-Allied right was a marshy area now turned quagmire by last night's rains. Their left extended past the French right and terminated on a commanding elevation behind which were stationed ample reinforcements. Though Napoleon possessed a mighty striking force it was confined within a box 6,000 yards in width and 4,500 yards in depth. With the enemy a short 1,000 yards away precious little room was left for maneuver of finesse. Napoleon's tactics were as simple as his options were few. Flank attacks on the extreme left or the extreme right were not advisable; the former because any success on the French left would simply push the Anglo-Allied army closer to the approaching Prussians while the later plan called for the French to descend from the Mt. St. Jean plateau, expose the Waterloo- Quatre Bras road, descend into a valley and storm a ridge. Furthermore, any advance on Wellington's right would have met with a sharp counterattack from units he stationed as far west as Hal for that express purpose. Instead Napoleon opted for one massive blow to be delivered by d'Erlon's First Corps preceded by Prince Jerome's feint at Hougomont on the left and a torrential artillery barrage from the massed cannons of the First, Second and Sixth Corps. The French batteries opened up at 11:30 a.m. and received only scattered counter-battery fire in return. With Pire's lancers in support, the men of the II Corps rushed the country estate known as the Chateau de Goumont (Hougomont). The thick walls of the courtyard and buildings provided the Nassauer, Hanoverian, 1st, 2nd (Coldstream) and 3rd Guards defenders with a ready-made fortress. Napoleon's feint which had been intended to draw troops from the Anglo-Allied center to reinforce their beleaguered right had only the opposite effect. Indeed, the 2,000 defenders had successfully repelled numerous attacks by the French II Corps that outnumbered them by over ten to one. Certainly a large part of the blame for failure on the left belonged to the Emperor's brother, Jerome, who three his men at the resolutely defended chateau one brigade at a time. At 1:00 p.m. Marshal Ney, who had been assigned the command of the main attack, sent word to Napoleon that the I Corps was now in position. Before the Emperor gave the command to start the pre-assault barrage, however, a captured non-commissioned officer from the 2nd Regiment of Silesia was brought to him. The hussar was caught bearing a communication from Blucher to Wellington announcing the arrival in the east of the first Prussian corps on the field. There were now a scant ten hours left on that Imperial timepiece. Undaunted, Napoleon swung two light cavalry divisions eastward to observe any signs of an approaching enemy and moved the VI Corps to a position to defend the right. He also dashed off an urgent message to the missing Grouchy that concluded, "A letter just intercepted indicates that General Bulow is going to attack our right flank. We think that we can see this corps on the heights of St. Lambert. Do not lose one moment, therefore, in coming closer to us, in joining us and in crushing Bulow, whom you will catch red-handed." By the time Grouchy could receive this communique at 7:00 p.m. at Wavre, the Armee du Nord would have been crushed out of existence on the plateau of Mt. St. Jean. With the Emperor's signal the 78 guns opened up at a range of 500 yards. Most of Bylandt's Dutch-Belgian brigade that had the misfortune to be on the southern face of the ridge were blasted, maimed, mutilated and terrorized. At 1:45 p.m. with the cry of Vive l"Empereur! screamed from the throats of d'Erlon's I Corps the advance began. On the left flank Jerome renewed his efforts to force an entry into Hougomont. The path of the attack crossed two valleys and an intermediary ridgeline. The last half-mile lay inside the crescent of the Anglo-Allied artillery's overlapping fields of fire. The initial assault pushed the defenders out of an advanced position in a sandpit near the ridge crest and though they made an orderly retreat, their exodus caused a panic among Bylandt's troops which ceased to exist as a fighting unit for the rest of the engagement. It was at this moment, when it seemed that the Emperor's breakfast prognostications wee about to come true, that General Picton gave the command, "UP! At them!" and the Kempt brigade lept as one man from the ground on the reverse side of the Ohain ridge and poured a volley into the French at 40 yard's range. Then the English fixed bayonets and raced down the slopes into the shocked columns of d'Erlon's corps. The forward ridge slope was awash in attacks and counterattacks that sputtered and flared fitfully until the epic charge of Ponsonby leading the Union and Household Brigades tore into the French and decided the issue. The Greys, with the cry, "Scotland for ever!" leaped from their support positions and chased the remnants of French attack back across the valley and up to the very cannon line on the next ridge. In the melee that followed the counterattack by Martique's and Bro's cavalry, Lord Ponsonby was run through by a lance and the British attack was turned and sent back across the valley. Both armies now returned to their exact positions held two hours earlier and regrouped. On the left nothing had been or would be accomplished by the French at Hougomont. Napoleon's diversion had no effect save depriving the army of the service of Reille's II Corps for the duration of the battle. Indeed, had Hougomont fallen to the French little tactical advantage would have been achieved because the main part of the British right line was situated in depth on the ridgeline to the north. Napoleon now ordered Ney to resume the attack in the center and on the right. Mistaking groups of wounded and prisoners that filed back through the Forest of Soignes as the start of an Anglo-Allied retreat, Ney called for a massive cavalry assault preceded by another bombardment from the great French battery. With the heavy cavalry on the right and the light horse on the left Ney personally led the charge back up the slops of Mt. St. Jean. There, waiting for them on the plateau, were the 5,000 English and German dragoons and hussars, Brunswick Black Lancers and Dutch and Belgian carabiners under the command of Lord Uxbridge. From Napoleon's vantage point at La Belle Alliance the attack seemed to be on the verge of a breakthrough and he committed Kellerman and the last of the cavalry reserve - save the 800 troops of General Blancard. Stationed behind Uxbridge's cavalry were the famed British squares interspersed with field batteries. The gunners would fire their pieces until, with the French cavalry charging down on them and less than 50 yards away, they would race inside the protection of the squares. The typical square was composed of 500 men, four ranks deep; 60 feet square that bristled with bayonets and fired devastating volleys at close range. Wellington coolly commanded his troops from within the 73rd's square. While the fighting on the plateau had become a brutal massacre of the French cavalry, the van of the Prussian army began to press the French Imperial Guard on Napoleon's extreme right at Plancenoit. By 6:30 p.m. the French were outnumbered three to one and the scales continued to tip in the favor of the Prussians as new corps arrived. At this point the battle was already lost for napoleon for even if the Armee du Nord could blast a hole in Wellington's line it lacked sufficient strength to exploit a breakthrough. Furthermore the Prussian army was now threatening to sever Napoleon's line of retreat south back to Quatre Bras. In an exceptionally pointless last effort Napoleon ordered the remaining 11 Guard battalions to follow him north for another, and final, assault on the plateau of Mt. St. Jean. South of La Haye Sainte the Emperor turned his Guard over to ney who had already had four horses shot from under him in the last three hours. Again a French attacking force struck off across the valley to mount the ridge. As they neared the top, Maitland's 1st Guards Brigade which had been lying in wait on the reverse slope of the ridge, rose with Wellington's command, "Stand up Guards! Make ready! Fire!" and just that quickly 300 French Guardsmen fell. A survivor of Maitland's brigade said, "We formed a line four deep, the first rank kneeling, the second also firing, the third and fourth loading and handling on to the front, and kept us such a continuous fire into the mass of heaped up Grenadiers...and this was the bouquet to all slaughter!" Anglo-Allied artillery cut great swaths in the attacking columns while fresh troops counterattacked their flanks. All was over and to the never before head cry of, "La Garde recule!" the survivors streamed back down the plateau for the last time. Now Wellington and Blucher called for a general attack all along the line and the Allied cavalry was let loose to run down the fleeing French. The Emperor Napoleon was placed within a Guard's square and escorted from the field. Remnants of the Armee du Nord fought delaying actions with the Prussians that allowed portions of the defeated army to escape south. Field-Marshal Blucher assembled his officers and ordered them to commence an "annihilating pursuit." His orders were carried out as the pursuing Prussians, refusing to give quarter, massacred at least 5,000 men of Reille's corps on the road to Genappe. The time was now 11:00 p.m. and the sands had run out of the Emperor's clock. ORDER OF BATTLE -------------------------------------------------------------------------- Anglo-Allied Army Field Marshall the Duke of Wellington commanding ---------------------------------------- I Corps His Royal Highness the Prince of Orange commanding troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- 1st Corps Artillery Lt-Col Adye 1 Corps Lt-Col Williamson Maj von Opstal Maj van der Smissen 1st Division - Major General Cooke 1st British Brigade Maj-Gen Maitland 1,997 Maitlnd 2nd British Brigade Maj-Gen Sir John Byng 2,064 Byng 3rd Division - Lt-Gen Sir Charles Alten 5th British Brigade Maj-Gen Sir Colin Halkett 2,254 Halkett 2nd King's German Legion Col von Ompteda 1,527 Ompteda 1st Hanoverian Maj-Gen Count Brigade Kielmansegge 3,189 Kielman 2nd Dutch-Belgian Division - Lt-Gen Baron de Perponcher 1st Brigade Maj-Gen Count de Bylandt 3,233 Bylandt 2nd Brigade Prince Bernhard of Saxe-Weimar 4,300 Bernhrd 3rd Dutch-Belgian Division - Lt-Gen Baron Chasse 1st Brigade Maj-Gen Ditmers 3,088 Ditmers 2nd Brigade Maj-Gen D'Aumbreme 3,581 D'Aumbr II Corps Lt-Gen Lord Hill commanding troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 Corps Artillery Lt-Col Gold 2 Corps Lt-Col Hawker 2nd Division - Lt-Gen Sir H. Clinton 3rd British Brigade Maj-Gen Adam 2,625 Adam 1st Brigade King's German Legion Col du Plat 1,758 Du Plat 3rd Hanoverian Brig Col Halkett 2,454 3rd Han troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- 4th Division - Lt-Gen Sir Charles Colville 4th Brigade Col Mitchell 1,767 Mitchel 6th British Brigade Maj-Gen Johnstone 2,396 Johnstn 6th Hanoverian Brig Maj-Gen Sir James Lyon 3,049 Lyon 1st Dutch-Belgian Division - Lt-Gen Stedmann 1st Brigade Maj-Gen Hauw 3,109 Hauw 2nd Brigade Maj-Gen Eerens 3,280 Eerens Dutch-Belgian Indian Brigade Lt-Gen Anthing 3,583 Anthing Reserves Reserve Artillery Maj Heisse 1,225 Reserve Lt-Col Brouckmann Maj Mahn 5th Division - Lt-Gen Sir Thomas Picton 8th British Brigade Maj-Gen Sir James Kempt 2,471 Kempt 9th British Brigade Maj-Gen Sir James Pack 2,471 Pack 5th Hanoverian Brig Col von Vincke 2,514 Vincke 6th Division - Lt-Gen Hon. Sir L. Cole 10th British Brigade Maj-Gen Sir John Lambert 2,567 Lambert 4th Hanoverian Brig Col Best 2,582 Best Brunswick Corps - H.S.H The Duke of Brunswick Advanced Guard Battalion Maj Von Rauschenplatt 672 Adv Grd Light Brigade Lt-Col von Buttlar 2,688 Light Line Brigade Lt-Col von Specht 2,016 Line Nassau Contingent - General von Kruse 2,880 Kruse Cavalry Corps Lt-Gen the Earl of Uxbridge commanding troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- British and King's German Legion 1st Brigade Maj-Gen Lord E. Somerset 1,286 Somerst 2nd Brigade Maj-Gen Sir W. Ponsonby 1,181 Ponsnby 3rd Brigade Maj-Gen Sir W. Dornberg 1,268 Dornbrg 4th Brigade Maj-Gen Sir J. Vandeleur 1,171 Vndelur 5th Brigade Maj-Gen Sir Colq. Grant 1,336 Grant 6th Brigade Maj-Gen Sir H. Vivian 1,279 Vivian Horse Artillery (Six batteries) 1,275 Hrs Art troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- Hanoverian 1st Brigade Col von Estorff 1,682 Estorff Brunswick Cavalry 922 Brnswck Dutch Belgian 1st Brigade Maj-Gen Trip 1,237 Trip 2nd Brigade Maj-Gen de Ghigny 1,086 Ghigny 3rd Brigade Maj-Gen van Merien 1,082 Merien -------------------------------------------------------------------------- Armee du Nord Emperor Napoleon Bonaparte commanding ------------------------------------------ Imperial Guard - Marshall Mortier, Duke of Treviso troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- Imperial Guard Lt-Gen Desvaux de Artillery St. Meurice 3,175 Imp Grd Imperial Guard Cavalry Lt-Gen Lefebvre-Desnouettes Lt-Gen Guyot 3,590 Imp Grd 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th Grenadiers Lt-Gen Friant Lt-Gen Roguet 4,377 Grnandr 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th Chasseurs Lt-Gen Morand Lt-Gen Michel 3,970 Chsseur 1st, 3rd Tirailleurs Lt-Gen Duheame 2,255 Trlleur 1st, 3rd voltigeurs Lt-Gen Barrois 2,775 Vltgeur I Corps d'Armee - Lt-Gen Count D'Erlon commanding 1 Corps Artillery 1,066 1 Corps 1st Division Lt-Gen Alix 4,100 I Inf 2nd Division Lt-Gen Baron Donzelot 4,050 II Inf 3rd Division Lt-Gen Baron Marcognet 4,175 III Inf 4th Division Lt-Gen Count Durutte 3,775 IV Inf 1st Cavalry Division Lt-Gen Baron Jaquinot 1,400 I Cav II Corps d'Armee - Lt-Gen Count Reille commanding 2nd Corps Artillery 1,385 2 Corps 5th Division Lt-Gen Baron Bachelu 4,775 V Inf 6th Division Prince Jerome Napoleon 5,550 VI Inf 7th Division Lt-Gen Count Girard 4,875 VII Inf 9th Division Lt-Gen Count Foy 4,975 IX Inf 2nd Cavalry Division Lt-Gen Baron Pire 1,729 II Div VI Corps d'Armee - Lt-Gen Count Lobau commanding 6th Corps Artillery 743 6 Corps 19th Division Lt-Gen Baron Simmer 2,275 IXX Inf 20th Division Lt-Gen Baron Jeannin 2,575 XX Inf Reserve Cavalry - Marshal Grouchy commanding Reserve Horse Artillery 1,185 Reserve 3rd Corps Lt-Gen Kellerman 3,245 3 Corps 4th Corps Lt-Gen Milhaud 2,556 4 Corps Strengths taken from D. Gardener & Dorsay's "Quatre Bras, Ligny and Waterloo", London 1882, W. Silborne's War in France and Belgium as corrected by Colonel Charles C. Chesney's "Waterloo Lectures: a Study of the Campaign of 1815", London 1868, and Colonel Jean-Baptiste Charra's "Histoire de la Campagne de 1815": Waterloo, Brussels, 1851 as cited as references in "Yours to Reason Why; Decision in Battle" by William Seymour, St. Martin's Press, 175 Fifth Avenue, New York, N.Y. 1982 pp. 292-298. N.B. The entire Prussian army and the right wing of the Armee du Nord has been removed from this Order of Battle and The Universal Military Simulator Waterloo scenario in the interest of play balance. Neither the Prussians nor Grouchy's forces made an appearance on the battlefield until after the issue had been well decided. GETTYSBURG 1-3 July 1863 Meade - Lee After defeating the Union Army of the Potomac under the command of Major General Joseph Hooker at Chancelorsville, Virginia (April 28 - May 5, 1863) General Robert Edward lee knew that he had perhaps one last chance to bring the war to the North and restore European confidence in a viable Confederate States of America. The American Civil War, now in its second year, had seen a string of brilliant Southern defensive victories - First Bull Run, The Seven Days, Second Bull Run, Frederiscksburg, and now the most crushing Union defeat, Chancelorsville - but Lee's only previous attempt at invasion, Antietam, had ended in disaster. Now, as Union Major General U.S. Grant held confederate Lt. General Pemberton's army and the key to the Mississippi River in the bag at besieged Vicksburg, and the Union Navy had all but blockaded the southern cotton industry out of the European market, Lee must strike a decisive blow into the heart of the North. On June 9, 1863, screened by General 'Jeb' Stuart's cavalry, Lee's Army of Northern Virginia started north on its journey that would ultimately end at the high water mark at Gettysburg, Pennsylvania. The Army of the Potomac left its bivouac under the orders of General Hooker but would arrive in Pennsylvania with a new commander: Major General George Gordon Meade. President Abraham Lincoln, disgusted by Hooker's ineptitude at Chancelorsville, had made Meade "The hard luck army's" fifth commanding general in two year's time following a tradition of firing losers in search of a winning general. Meade would be the Army of the Potomac's last commander. In his General Orders 67, issued on June 28, a scant three days before the great conflict that awaited them, Meade wrote, "The country looks to this army to relieve it from the devastation and disgrace of a foreign invasion." July 1, 1863, found both armies scattered about southern Pennsylvania with their respective commanders' having only a vague notion of their opponent's positions. Ironically, the Confederate forces were arrayed north and west of the Union troops. The three-day battle would begin at 5:00 a.m., Wednesday, July 1 (the first day of the fiscal year - many regimental officers were still busy completing their payrolls) when units of Archer's Brigade, Heth's Division, A.P. Hill's III Corps of the Army of Northern Virginia began receiving withering volleys from Union cavalry pickets of Gamble's brigade stationed west of MacPherson's Ridge. First brigade commanders, then division commanders and finally corps commanders of both sides issued urgent orders for reinforcements as the conflagration consumed more troops and more senior field officers. By the end of the first day's fighting five successive Union generals had been in command. Daylight, Thursday July 2, saw 68,000 Union troops stretched along a fish- hook shaped series of hills and ridges south and east of Gettysburg facing Lee's 60,000. The northeastern-most point on the line was Culp's Hill where after the battle two brothers, one who fought with Meade, the other with Lee, would be found, both dead and only a few scant yards from the farm on the hill where they grew up. The Union line extended west to Cemetary Hill, where artillery batteries dug emplacements among the graves and then curved south to Cemetary Ridge; a north-south chain of hillocks that ended in the twin Round Tops. Bbig Round Top was by far the commanding peak on the battlefield, but was thickly wooded and unsuitable for troops or artillery. Its sister, Little Round Top, had recently been deforested and would become the southern anchor of the Union line. Currently, however, the only troops on its summit were a small observation and signal station. Lee's army ran along the perimeter of the Unio fish-hook extending over six miles from Longstreet's I Corps in the south to Ewell's II Corps on the northeast. Meade, in a textbook case of the use of interior lines, could pace a short two miles from Sickle's III Corps on the left to Slocum's XII Corps on the right. Against the advice of Longstreet who counseled a defensive battle, Lee had decided to force the Union left and roll up Meade's line while advancing north. Furthermore, Ewell on the extreme left was to attack Culp's Hill when he heard the sound of Longstreet's pre- assault artillery barrage six miles away. It was a plan doomed to failure that almost succeeded due to the incompetence of a tragicomedic Union Maj General; Dan Sickles, who would later be elected to the Congress of the United States, invent the temporary insanity plea to win his acquital after murdering his wife's lover, and in later years often visit the Smithsonian Institute to view the amputated leg that he would lose this day at Gettysburg. Against orders and traditional military dictums, Sickles had stationed the two divisions of the III Corps a half mile in front of the rest of the Union line in a peach orchard and in a boulder strewn area known as the Devil's Den. At 3:30 p.m., the first opening salvos from the Confederate batteries alerted Meade to trouble on his left. He arrived and watched in horror as Longstreet's attack began to crumple the III Corps and the wounded and terrified streamed to the rear. At this moment Brigadier General Gouverneur K. Warren, Meade's Chief of Engineers, realized that Little Round Top was "the key to the Union position" and on his own initiative ordered two brigades and a battery from the newly arrive V Corps to race to the summit. They arrived as the Confederates were still scaling the western slopes and flung themselves into a vicious hand-to-hand fight that left both Union brigade dead. Four hours later Longstreet's Corps, now in possession of the peach orchard and the Devil's Den, had stalled short of its objective. On the other side of the field Ewell's batteries had opened up on schedule but were quickly silenced by the effective return fire of the Union cannon stationed among the tombs and headstones on Cemetary Hill, The Confederate attack finally stepped off at sunset and though vigorously pressed, ended in failure. The fight on the graveyard's slopes continued late into the night before recall was sounded and the two armies hunkered down to await the inevitable final clash on the next day. Both sides were still receiving reinforcements, almost hourly, until by the morning of July 3, the stage was set with 97,000 Union and 75,000 Confederate players. The positions of the Army of the Potomac and the Army of Northern Virginia had remained substantially unchanged for two days; only Sicle's salient had been pushed in and the Union line extended south to the Round Tops. Strategically, the situation for Lee was also unchanged, though perhaps a bit more urgent. his army, outnumbered and in hostile territory, had been living off the land and had practically stripped the surrounding countryside bare. Again, Longstreet counseled Lee to place the army south and east of the Round Tops astride Meande's line of communications, and force the northern general to attack. Lee would have none of this and ordered a coup de main on the Union center spearheaded by Pickett's division who had arrived during the night, Longstreet replied, "no 15,000 men ever arrayed for battle can take that position," and reluctantly began the preparations for the charge. At 1:07 p.m., two guns of Captain Miller's battery stationed in the peach orchard fired signal shells into the clear Pennsylvanian sky. At 1:08 p.m., the 140 guns assembled by Lee's chief of Artillery, Colonel E. P. Alexander, began the barrage; many at a distance of only 800 yards from the Union center. Brigadier General Henry J. Hunt, meade's Chief of Artillery, withheld fire until the Confederate positions were located and then let fly with his batteries. They then commenced to hammer away at each other, with no visible slackening, for almost two hours. By 1863 the Art of the Artilleryman had made but one small advance to the science in the last many centuries: grapeshot; a coffee can sized package of little round iron balls that were fired out of the smooth-bore cannon like a giant shotgun. An infantry division would find it quite impossible to charge across a mile of open wheat field, into the muzzles of over 50 batteries firing double loads of grapeshot, and survive. Colonel Alexander's assignment was to eliminate the Union batteries and inform his superiors it was time to attack. A little before 3:00 p.m., Brigadier General Hunt passed the order for the Union cannon to cease fire and let the muzzles cool while ammunition was brought up from the rear. At this point Alexander, now desperate to see some signs of the effectiveness of his fire and almost out of shells, sent a message to Pickett, "For God's sake come quick; the 18 guns are gone, unless you advance quick, my ammunition won't let me support you properly." Pickett in turn rode to Longstreet to seek final approval. Longstreet, opposed to this assault from the beginning, could only nod an ascent. Pickett saluted and replied, "I am going to move forward, sir," turned, rode back to his troops and into immortality. The Army of Northern Virginia quite possibly possessed the finest fighting troops on the North American continent in July, 1863. The 15,000 men gamely moved out to the command. "Forward, guide center, march." towards a small clump of trees on Cemetary Ridge pointed out by General lee from astride his warhorse, Traveler. The Union batteries in the center reloaded with canisters of grapeshot and waited for the infantry to get within range while the batteries on the flanks continued to lob exploding shells into Pickett's neatly ordered lines. Then, when only a few hundred yards of wheat field separated the attackers and the defenders, every cannon along the Union line slashed out. Less than one percent of those who started off made those yards. Confederate Brigadier General Armistead actually reached the stone wall that marked the Union position, and with his cap on his sword yelled, "Follow me!" before he was shot down. There is a monument there now that marks the high water mark of the Confederacy; the closest Lee and the Army of Northern Virginia ever came to an offensive victory on northern soil. Over 7,000 lay dead, wounded or captured; the rest recrossed the field still under continuous barrage, to be greeted by a devastated Lee who said, "All this has been my fault. It is I that have lost this fight, and you must help me out of it in the best way you can." The next day, during a torrential storm, the Army of Northern Virginia started back south in a wagon train that stretched for 17 miles. It would now be on the defensive for the rest of its existence until the final surrender on April 9, 1865. ORDER OF BATTLE The Army of the Potomac Maj-Gen George Gordan Meade commanding --------------------------------------------- troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- I Army Corps - Maj-Gen John F. Reynolds commanding (killed July 1) Maj-Gen Abner Doubleday commanding Maj-Gen John Newton commanding 1st Corps Artillery Col C.S.Wainwright 1 Corps 1st Division Maj-Gen J.S. Wadsworth 3,400 Wdsworth 2nd Division Brig-Gen John C. Robinson 3,200 Robinson 3rd Division Maj-Gen Abner Doubleday 3,300 Dbleday II Army Corps - Maj-Gen Winfield S. Hancock commanding Brig-Gen John Gibbon 2nd Corps Artillery Capt J.G. Hazard 950 II Corps 1st Division Brig-Gen John C. Caldwell 4,300 Caldwell 2nd Division Brig-Gen John Gibbon Brig-Gen William Harrow 4,500 Gibbon 3rd Division Brig-Gen Alexander Hays 4,400 Hays III Army Corps - Maj-Gen Daniel E. Sickles commanding Maj-Gen D.B. Birney 3rd Corps Artillery Capt George E. Randolph 950 III Corp 1st Division Maj-Gen D.B. Birney Maj-Gen J.J.H. Ward 6,200 Birney 2nd Division Brig-Gen A.A. Humphreys 6,100 Hmfhreys V Army Corps - Maj-Gen George Sykes commanding 5th Corps Artillery Capt A.P. Martin 770 V Corps 1st Division Brig-Gen James Barnes 4,500 Barnes 2nd Division Brig-Gen R.B. Ayres 4,300 Ayres 3rd Division Brig-Ben S.W. Crawford 4,400 Crawford VI Army Corps - Maj-Gen John Sedgwick commanding 6th Corps Artillery Col C.H. Tompkins 900 VI Corps 1st Division Brig-Gen H.G. Wright 5,200 Wright 2nd Division Brig-Gen A.P. Howe 5,150 Howe 3rd Division Brig-Gen Frank Wheaton 5,250 Wheaton XI Army Corps - Maj-Gen O.O. Howard commanding 11th Corps Artillery Maj T.W. Osborn 875 XI Corps 1st Division Brig-Gen F.C. Barlow Brig-Gen Adelbert Ames 3,500 Barlow 2nd Division Brig-Gen A. von Steinwehr 3,500 Steinwhr 3rd Division Brig-Gen Carl Schurz 3,200 Shurz troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- XII Army Corps - Maj-Gen H.W. Slocum commanding 12th Corps Artillery Lt. Edward D. Muhlenberg 575 XII Corp 1st Division Brig-Gen Alpheus Williams 4,300 Williams 2nd Division Brig-Gen John W. Geary 4,250 Geary Army Artillery Reserve - Brig-Gen R.O. Taylor commanding Capt John M. Robertson 1st Regular Brig Capt D.R. Ransom 600 1st Reg 1st Volunteer Brig Lt-Col F. McGilvery 550 2nd Vol 2nd Volunteer Brig Capt E.D. Taft 575 2nd Vol 3rd Volunteer Brig Capt James F. Huntington 560 3rd Vol 4th Volunteer Brig Capt R.H. Fitzhugh 550 4th Vol -------------------------------------------------------------------------- The Army of Northern Virginia General Robert E. Lee commanding ------------------------------------- troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- I Corps - Lt-Gen James Longstreet commanding 1st Corps Artillery Col J.B. Walton 550 I Corps 1st Division - Maj-Gen John B. Hood 1st Division Artillery Maj M.W. Henry 300 Henry 1st Brigade Brig-Gen D.R. Anderson 2,700 Anderson 2nd Brigade Brig-Gen H.L. Bennings 2,500 Bennings 3rd Brigade Brig-Gen E.M. Law Col James L. Sheffield 2,200 Law 4th Brigade Brig-Gen J.B. Robertson 2,100 Robertsn 2nd Division - Maj-Gen Lafayette McLaws 2nd Division Artillery Col H.C. Cabell 250 Cabell 1st Brigade Brig-Gen W. Barksdale Col B.G. Humphreys 2,200 Barksdal 2nd Brigade Brig-Gen J.B. Kershaw 1,900 Kershaw 3rd Brigade Brig-Gen W.T. Wofford 2,000 Wofford 4th Brigade Brig-Gen P.J. Semmes Col Goode Bryan 1,900 Semmes troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- 3rd Division - Maj-Gen George E. Pickett 3rd Division Artillery Maj James Dearing 350 Dearing 1st Brigade Brig-Gen J.L. Kemper 2,750 Kemper 2nd Brigade Brig-Gem A. Armistead Col W.R. Aylett 2,800 Armisted 3rd Brigade Brig-Gen R.B. Garnett Maj George C. Cabell 2,750 Garnett II Corps - Lt-Gen Richard S. Ewell commanding 2nd Corps Artillery Col J. Thompson Brown 450 II Corps 1st Division - Maj-Gen Jubal A. Early 1st Division Artillery Lt-Col H.P. Jones 350 H. Jones 1st Brigade Brig-Gen William Smith Col John s. Hoffman 2,750 W. Smith 2nd Brigade Brig-Gen R.F. Hoke Col Isaac E. Avery Col A.C. Godwin 2,850 Hoke 3rd Brigade Brig-Gen Harry T. Hays 2,400 H. Hays 4th Brigade Brig-Gen J.B. Gordon 2,200 Gordon 2nd Division - Maj-Gen Edward Johnson 2nd Division Artillery Lt-Col R.S. Andrews 450 Andrews 1st Brigade Brig-Gen John M. Jones Lt-Col R.H. Dungan Col B.T. Johnson 2,450 J. Jones 2nd Brigade Brig-Gen James A. Walker 2,250 Walker 3rd Brigade Brig-Gen George H. Stewart 2,400 Stewart 4th Brigade Col J.M. Williams 1,600 Williams 3rd Division - Maj-Gen R.E. Rodes 3rd Division Artillery Lt-Col Thomas H. Carter 350 Carter 1st Brigade Brig-Gen E.A. Neal 2,500 Neal 2nd Brigade Brig-Gen S.D. Ramseur 2,600 Ramseur 3rd Brigade Brig-Gen George Doles 2,250 Doles 4th Brigade Brig-Gen Alfred Iverson Brig-Gen S.D. Ramseur 2,150 Iverson 5th Brigade Brig-Gen Junius Daniel 1,875 Daniel troops commander # men flagname --------------------------------------------------------------------- III Corps - Lt-Gen Ambrose P. Hill Commanding 3rd Artillery Col R.L. Walker 450 III Corp 1st Division - Maj-Gen R.H. Anderson 1st Division Artillery Maj John Lane 350 Lane 1st Brigade Brig-Gen William Mahone 2,750 Mahone 2nd Brigade Brig-Gen A.R. Wright Col William Gibson Col E.J. Walker Col B.C. McCurry Col C.H. Anderson 2,500 Wright 3rd Brigade Col David Lang Brig-Gen E.A. Perry 2,400 Lang 4th Brigade Brig-Gen Carnot Posey 2,200 Posey 5th Brigade Brig-Gen C.M. Wilcox 1,000 Wilcox 2nd Division - Maj-Gen William D. Pender Brig-Gen James H. Lane 2nd Division Artillery William T. PROUDLY PRESENTS ANOTHER GREAT DOC HOW TO START ALADIN: After the appearance of the Title Screen, the Configuration program may be started by pressing either "C" or simply by pressing the spacebar. Aladin will now install itself in your Atari. The Aladin program must now be started by pressing the reset button. If your Atari Has two disk drives attached, both must be turned on. THE CONFIGURATION PROGRAM After the configuration program has loaded, the actual working configuration program can be called to the screen by pressing "C". 1. Main storage size (Hauptspeichergrosse): This is where how much Ram the Atari ST takes is determined. 2. SuperDisk size: This is where the size of the SuperDisk is determined. By pressing the spacebar the SuperDisk size can be increased in 32K increments. The minimum size of the SuperDisk must be 128K. If you wish not to use the SuperDisk it is installed at 0K. 3. Disk Drive Info. (Laufwerke informationen): Here is where the number of drives and which drives installed in the Atari is set. 4. The Keyboard Layout (Tasturlayout): This is where the Country- specific keyboard layout is set. 5. The Printer Port: Here is where the Atari port that the Macintosh system will use as a printer port is chosen. If the parallel port is your printer port, Aladin automatically configures the serial port as your Modem port. 6. This option allows you to choose which port you want as your printer port. In the event you have a serial printer plugged into your modem port and your modem port is configured as a serial port, you must here tell Aladin that this is your printer port (Druckeranschluss). THE KEYBOARD The Control and Alternate Keys The Command and Option keys of the Macintosh have been redesignated on the Atari keyboard. The Command key is replaced by the Control key. The Option key is replaced by the Alternate key. THE TEN KEY While working under Aladin, the Atari St Ten Key operates in the same key codes as the Macintosh Ten Key. THE CURSOR KEYS Under Aladin these keys become special function keys and are supported by the Command System. Many programs will support these additional function keys. HELP AND UNDO Pressing the Help key corresponds to pressing Command-? on the Macintosh. Pressing the Undo key corresponds to pressing Command-Z on the Macintosh. These keys, in most all programs, are used as cancel and to call up help functions. THE FUNCTION KEYS The Function keys F1 - F10 correspond to the key combinations command- shift-1 thru command-shift-0 on the Macintosh. The normal Macintosh System supports the Function keys F-1 thru F-4. F1: Remove Disk from Drive 1. F2: Remove Disk from Drive 2. F3: Save to Disk F4: Print to Printer with Capslock: The entire screen. without Capslock: Only information in active windows. Additional Function Command-Option-Shift-F10: Restarts the Macintosh Command System. This function corresponds to pressing Reset on the Macintosh. THE DISK DRIVES Aladin supports both single and double sided drives. Those disks with the same format as GEM disks may be copied thru help and a quick copy program under the GEM desktop. REMOVAL OF DISKS If the user wishes to remove a disk from a drive, he must inform the command system of this. He may do this through a removal command or by pressing F1 or F2. When the command program is ready to remove the disk, it lets the user know by flashing the light of the drive the disk is in, and by sounding a beep. The computer will now wait until the disk is removed. If a disk is removed without first informing the command system, the user will receive a flashing light and beeping and the computer will wait until a disk is again placed back into the drive. The drive will NOT begin reading a disk that has been replaced in it, it waits until the user confirms that it is the correct disk. INSERTING DISKS INTO A DRIVE In order for Aladin to acknowledge a disk in a drive the disk must NOT be write-protected. Write protection is still possible through some software. READ AND WRITE PROTECTING DISKS There is a special accessory in the Apple menu called Write-protect (Schreibschutz) which allows disks, through software, to be write and even format (naturally only in Aladin) protected. FORMATTING DISKS If a disk is put in a drive and the command system is not able to read it, you have the option of formatting the disk. The disk size may be either 355K or 710K. The disks receive a fastload format which allows them to read and write data with maximum efficiency. In the event a GEM formatted disk is placed in the disk drive by mistake, Aladin informs you of this and gives you the option of either removing the disk or formatting it. USING MAGICSAC DISKS It is possible to read MagicSac disks, however, they can not be written on. Application programs that run under MagicSac must first be accommodated for before they will run under Aladin. THE SUPERDISK-THE FASTEST WAY TO BOOT MACINTOSH The Superdisk is a specialized Ram disk. It is reset-sure, and the free Ram size is installable and boot capable. Consequently, the entire Macintosh control system may be started out of the Superdisk. The disk drives have priority over the Superdisk, therefore, if a drive has a disk containing system data, the system will be booted up from the drive instead of the Superdisk. After the system has been copied to the Superdisk, the user can go to the Finder and choose the option "deactivate" ("Ausschalten") from the special menu (spezialmenu). This will give the Superdisk priority and allow it to be used as the system disk. THE PORTS, YOUR THREAD TO THE OUTSIDE WORLD Aladin supports both ports on the Atari. The application programs, however, can't distinguish between the serial and parallel ports and teats both the same. The serial ports only restriction is that it may only be run at one speed up to 19200 Baud. Otherwise all other functions are the same as on the Macintosh. THE CLOCK, HOW DOES ALADIN KNOW WHAT TIME IT IS? Aladin uses the clock in the Atari keyboard. Once the clock is set, the "alarm" Desk accessory of the Macintosh may be used. The time remains set as long as the Atari is on. THE MACINTOSH SOUND CAPABILITIES With the sound hardware of the Macintosh and the Atari being completely different, sound routines are called in to play. This makes it possible to utilize the sound in programs and set their functions in Aladin. The sound routines and warning tones are in this way, by default, passed on to the Atari. This has been Translated by STRIDER specifical Presents .... Flight Simulator Scenarios compiled by Ian Chadwick for use with subLogic's FS2 program for the St (colour). Flight Simulator is copyright subLogic. Each of these files must be placed on separate data disks and renamed "F7" (they only use 4K, so you shouldn't have trouble storing them - just label your disks). Don't save one to your original program disk but a scenario file can be safely saved on a backup copy. To load and save situations, follow the instructions in the manual and on the screen. Most of these scenarios start with your plane at rest, safely on the ground, but a few begin in motion. If you want to create your own situations with planes already in flight, you must get it there first, pause, go to slew mode, then set position and save it before doing the fine adjustments. If you put a plane in the air from a rest position, even with the throttle up to full - you plummet to a painful, albeit simulated, death. Note that there are several differences between 8-bit FS2 situation set-up and ST set-up. There are six files here, numbered F7.001 to F7.006. They all try to mix sceanrio locations - at least one airport from each chart is provided. Most are simple take-offs and explorations, but there are others where you must perform a task. Several locations and situations were taken from Gulick's 40 Great Flight Simulator Adventures and 40 More Great Flight Simulator Adventures (Compute Books), so you can follow those adventures by selecting the right start or situation. Others I created or discovered myself. You can customise these situations by changing the time of day, weather, winds, reliability, realism, etc (night flights can be VERY interesting and tricky, especially with the shader off). Be creative. Set the VOR for a destination and fly to it, listen to the COM radio. Use different views as you fly (spot plane, tower, etc) to see how you're doing. Remember to check little things before landing - like gear, lights, etc. After you master a situation with the prop plane, try the jet. Or the multi-player set-up. There are some real challenges in the FS2 database: can you find the Flying F ranch strip? Or Bishop and Lovelock? What happens when you take off from the WW1 scenery and then fly north? Or when you fly west from Fairchild and keep going. Is that Logan coming into view? Can you fly to the north pole? Some of these are described in Gulick's books, the rest - well, the ST version has its own surprises as well as 40 new airports to explore!! Good luck....I'm looking forward to seeing new FS2 challenges you devise soon! F7.001 locations La Guardia Renton Olympia Block Island Grass strip (southern shore of Vancouver Island, Canada!) Tacoma Narrows Port Orchard JFK El Monte Logan Oceanside Muni Central Park (not an airport, sure, but a nice place to visit on a Sunday afternoon...) F7.002 Snohomish Santa Catalina Kankakee Bradley Van Nuys William Fairchild Chester Shady Acres Chino Bremerton San Diego (note the turbulence!) Morris Muni F7.003 Danbury Torrance Westchester Martha's Vineyard Buchanan Chandler San Francisco Lake Tahoe Reno-Stead Bloomington Sammamish (where? a mystery airport, not on the charts...) F7.004 Sanderson Field Hartford Nowhere? (where are you? stay in level flight and just watch out the window first time you try this one. after a few minutes, things change abruptly. The simulator world becomes...well, different!) Alcatraz (yes; the island, still very difficult to leave! can you take off?) Visala Porterville (On the edge of the FS2 universe; you're approaching from 3000 feet. Can you land there or do you drift off the edge of the world?) Livermore Palo Alto Fallbrook Sikorski O'Hare Auburn F7.005 George Washingston Bridge (leave the controls alone and watch. will you make it? if you do, can you circle around and land on it?) World Trade Towers (ditto, but you can't land there, of course) Liberty Island (play the tourist...) Monterey Inflight (really just a simple up-in-the-air situation for those of you who have trouble mastering takeoffs... you're out of Oakland, now fly over the Bay yourself) Space Glide (no throttle allowed: can you glide down from 10,000 feet and land on the island below?) Pyramid Power (just another crazy place in simulator land, from 40 GFSA) Golden Gate (yes, you're parked on it.now get off before you cause traffic jams...) Outer Limits (where are you? run this right after Golden Gate; it changes according to what was run before it. very strange... all those buildings in the middle of nowhere. familiar? sure, but it CAN'T be, right? he he. recall if after another situation - say Liberty Island) Space Needle (buzz Seattle's wonder landmark) Fly Me A River (cruise over the Kankakee) LAX Approach (A nice night flight into LA) F7.006 Spanaway (used heavily in 40 MGFSA...) Arlington Muni Windham U of Illinois/Willard (for Bruce Artwick...) Willows-Glen Deadstick (another challenge: can you land on San Clemente below without power?) Night Flight (from 40 Great...I really enjoy a lot of night flights) Half Moon Bay (did you know there's a place of the same name in B.C.?) Southridge Willows-Glenn Mono Lake (can you land on the island?) Decisions (another deadstick approach, this time at 10,000 feet over Seattle. There are a lot of places to land; which airport do you choose?) McArthur (Long island at night - clouds, turbulence and fog to add spice to your flight)e - or + keys to cycle through the available colors. To change a color of an existing brick, position the cursor over the brick and select a different color. 5. To erase a brick, posit. .. DOC_24 PRGjq* SOFTWARE and DR.J (U.S.A.) Proudly Present HARRIER COMBAT SIMULATOR by Mindscape ATARI REFERENCE CARD GETTING STARTED What You Need: -> Atari 520ST, 1040ST, or Mega computer -> Monitor or TV (color recommended) -> One disk drive -> Joystick (optional but recommended) -> Optional formatted disk for saving missions Loading Instructions: 1. If you are using a joystick, make sure that the mouse is plugged into Port 0 and the joystick is plugged into Port 1. 2. Insert the Harrier Combat Simulator disk into Drive A. 3. Turn on your monitor or TV, the disk drive and the computer. SAVING AND LOADING MISSIONS You may save your mission at any point during play. Remember to have a formatted disk ready BEFORE you start the program. To save a mission, hold down the ALTERNATE key and type S. An information screen will appear shortly. Eject the program disk from the disk drive and insert the formatted disk. Move the cursor over the disk drive icon and click the mouse button to select the disk drive where your formatted disk is located. Type a name for the mission you are saving and click the O.K. button on the screen. If you decide you do not want to save a mission, click the QUIT button on the screen to return to the mission in progress. To load a mission, hold down the ALTERNATE key and type L. An information screen will appear shortly. Eject the program disk from Drive A and insert the disk that has your saved mission. Move the cursor over the disk drive icon and click the mouse button to select the disk drive where your game disk is located. Type the name of the mission you would like to load and click the O.K. button on the screen. If you decide you do not want to load a mission, click the QUIT button on the screen to start a new mission. JOYSTICK CONTROLS Up Dive Right Bank right Down Climb Left Bank left KEYBOARD CONTROLS 1 Weapon AAR display 2 Rearm - only at established ground sites 3 Downward Vertical Thrust 4 Downward 45 degree Thrust 5 Horizontal Thrust 6 Clear FOFTRAC 7 Bomb Sight (press fire button after selecting bomb sight) 8 Homer 9 Missile Sight (press fire button after selecting missile sight) 0 Normal HUD Q,W,E,R Landing Sites (must select Homer before pressing Q,W,E, or R) T Engine Sound On/Off U Landing Gear Up/Down I Infra-red Flares O Power Down P Power Up A Action Arrest - Pause S Sound On/Off F Flaps Z Bank Left X Bank Right C Chaff B Brakes < Left Rudder > Right Rudder ; Nose Up / Nose Down Space Bar/Fire Button Fire cannon, or launch bomb, or missile ESC Aborts the mission SPECIFIC TO THE ATARI ST VERSION You may experience a crash of enough force to stop all Harrier functions, but not enough to destroy the craft entirely, leaving you trapped in the cockpit. Press ESC to bail out. When you crash the aircraft, abort a mission or finish a mission, a combat summary screen appears on which you are prompted to press the RETURN key to continue the program. Press the RETURN key TWICE in order to continue the program. Typist's Notes: Other than different key commands, the first version seems to be the same as this newer version.e A and insert the disk that has your saved mission. Move the cursor over the disk drive icon and click the mouse button to select the disk drive where your game disk is located. Type the name of the mission you would like to load and click the O.K. button on the screen. If you decide you do not want to load a mission, click the QUIT button on the screen to start a new missioQCkA7B"RhatO{gذ gR`R`#x(H# pL"Qȼ~=.Ϣ 1ĒcJLq4cUqT i.:E 9QcRzI 9y \9EDQ4E9D$ NLMXJ7 /  \??<9NAX Gj)f 0|6alNu+|,؁S kByRaH0J2/09/90-Rk/"!w1&CZ,*Hel-s RZ&of~x5J$l $3Y7E1Ф 7=|#5J-cjdfɮGGyw#k-rMF& hB(>L~ocdchA!j20^!:=˺*IWF|ѨSiU55sK>ond_?s'A'sAbYn.ylRtrP=up(5 Y"QNo.I}!q!aeSewSoftw%OCHeV3T.01Co7ma7K^eyseF5kA~mJ1eTStFK4KR2IJ'WEI`0D@=gJP3ĥHiZIF472Jlea/`D<j5JShi!fF5-F1`0]')V_1-6+Re4ectivelyJxUp/DownJPaEZC"bLeft/`Righ$ EkDisplayD/bRG)+bc4T1IJ-File WTr)ToptBB*BEDm MkՅBloc0k)QG${ Goto RLinO)Hq2I*JS Faster [shift] period < Slower [shift] comma ALT i Reposition Instantly ALT j joystick on n.o. note: I'm not sure if this works on the ST version as these docs are from IBM ALT x / Exit Game CTL c CTL v Version Number Save/Load Instructions If you are playing from floppy disks (and not a hard drive), you will need a blank, formatted disk BEFORE you start to play. This disk will become you Save/Load disk. If you are playing Loom from a hard disk, your games will be saved in the directory with the game files. Press F5 when you want to save or load a game. If you are playing from floppy disks, you will be asked to insert your Save/Load game disk. Once the Save/Load screen is displayed, you can move the cursor and click on either SAVE, LOAD or PLAY.The SAVE/LOAD option will not be available during the opening sequence. TO SAVE: Click on the SAVE option. The current list of saved games will be displayed in slots along the left side of the screen. Select a slot by pointing the cursor to it and clicking. Now you will be able to type a new name for that slot or use the backspace key to change the existing name. Pressing ENTER will reactivate the cursor. Click the cursor on OK to save the game, or CANCEL if you have changed you mind and do not wish to save it. TO LOAD: Click on the LOAD option. The current list of saved games will be displayed in slots along the left side of the screen. Select a slot by pointing the cursor to it and clicking. Click the cursor on OK to load the game, or CANCEL if you have changed you mind and do not wish to load it. Note: Loading a previously saved game will cause you to lose the game you are currently playing. SAVE/LOAD is disabled during cut-scenes (whenever the cursor disappears from the screen). About Loom In Loom, you play the role of Boffin Threadbare, a young boy coming of age in a fantasy world on the brink of apocalypse. Wielding a legacy of magical knowledge, you will set out across a landscape filled with beauty, danger and excitement, making new friends, solving mysteries, and growing in experience and power as you weave your way toward a destiny of overwhelming consequence. Loom is unlike traditional "adventure games" in many ways. Its goal is to let you participate in the unfolding of a rich, thought-provoking fantasy. It is neither a role-playing game (although it incorporates elements of role-playing), nor a collection of brainteasers. Its simple mysteries are designed to engage your imagination and draw you deeper into the story, not to frustrate you or increase the amount of time it takes to finish. You can never be stranded while playing Loom. We've gone to great lengths to insure that you will never find yourself in a situation from which you cannot escape. If you're not sure how to proceed, remember: the knowledge you need to continue the story is always available somewhere nearby. You don't need to save and restore your game frequently to insure success (although you can if you want to). Don't be afraid to experiment. Nothing in the game can "kill" you. If you're really stumped, ask a friend for help. Sooner or later, the answers will reveal themselves! Most important of all, Loom is designed to be completed, not played halfway through and then thrown on a shelf and forgotten. We spent a lot of time and effort creating these disks. We want you to enjoy them all! Listen to the audio drama! The Dolby Stereo cassette tape included in your Loom package will tell you everything you need to know to play the role of Bobbin and to enter his world. Listening to this tape before you start the game will help you to enjoy the story to its fullest. You'll also gain a clearer understanding of how Bobbin can weave magic to affect his environment. Read the Book of Patterns! It contains important information about the magical powers you will soon command. Read the rest of this manual! Loom looks and plays like no other adventure game. Take the time to learn how to make the most of its unique design. This is you role... You direct the actions of Bobbin Threadbare, an inexperienced member of the Guild of Weavers. At the beginning of the story, Bobbin doesn't know very much about the power of the Weavers or how to use it. As he encounters and masters increasingly challenging situations, Bobbin becomes a more proficient Weaver. If this is your first computer adventure game, be prepared for an entertaining challenge. Be patient, even if it takes a while to figure out some of the puzzles. If you get stuck, you might need to solve another puzzle first or discover a musical pattern. But hang in there and use you imagination, and you will guide Bobbin to understand the mysteries of the Loom! We've included the Book of Patterns to help you learn the magical patterns that have been created by Weavers over the millennia. As Bobbin explores the world around him, certain actions on his part cause musical nots, or threads, to be played. Pay attention to these threads- they will always occur in a series of four, which the Weavers call a draft. As the Book of Patterns points out, each draft has its own unique effect, and discovering the purpose for each draft is the secret to success in the world of Loom. As Bobbin finds new drafts, write down the individual threads (each draft has four) for future reference. Be sure to use a pencil when writing drafts in the Book of Patterns! Each time you start a new game, the threads of each draft may be different. Playing the Game After the opening title sequence and introduction, you will see Bobbin standing high atop a rocky peak overlooking the island of Loom. You begin directing his actions when he finishes talking and turns to face you. The screen is divided into the following sections: 1) The Animation Window is the largest part of the screen. The animated action takes place there. It shows the "camera's-eye view" of the room or location where Bobbin is. 2) The Distaff, the magic staff of the Elders, is represented graphically below the Animation Window. The distaff is essential to Bobbin's success, as it allow him to spin the drafts which affect the world around him in different ways. Remember, Bobbin must first find the distaff for it to appear on the lower part of the screen! 3) The Icon Box is in the lower right corner of the screen. When the cursor touches an object on the screen that can be used in some way, this box will display an icon representing that object (except when Bobbin is already standing next to an object). To move Bobbin around, move your cursor into the Animation Window, point it where you want him to go, and click. If you point to an open door and click, Bobbin will walk through it. To examine or "use" an object, point to the object and double-click, or click on the object's icon in the Icon Box. Some objects will produce the sound of a draft (or part of a draft) when activated in this way. Bobbin must be standing next to an object in order to examine it or spin a draft on it. You'll know when he's standing next to an object when its name appears under the icon in the Icon Box. You can deselect the object in the Icon Box by pressing the ESC key. To spin a draft, point and click on each note on the distaff in the proper sequence. For example, if you hear a series of four musical sounds in the game, like C D E C, you should first write the sequence in the Book of Patterns. next to the corresponding draft description. Then, you can try the draft yourself by clicking on an object on the screen, waiting for Bobbin to stand next to it, and repeating the same four notes on the distaff. Note: If you wish to stop spinning a draft while in the process of spinning it, you can press ESC. "Cut-scenes are short, animated sequences - like scenes from a movie - which provide clues and information about the characters (like when Bobbin is greeted by the message nymph). While you are viewing a cut-scene, you do not direct the action and the cursor will disappear from the screen. Things to Try of the Island of Loom Touch the leaf on the tree next to which Bobbin is standing in the beginning of the game. (You can "touch" the leaf by moving the cursor over and double-clicking.) Walk to the Sanctuary of the Elders, at the far left end of the village. Inside you will find three tapestries which Bobbin can tell you about. You will also find the Elders in a heated discussion, and the Loom. Pickup the distaff which was dropped by the Elder Atropos. You must have this object to complete the game. Open the swan's egg into which Hetchel was transformed. Double-click on the egg to hear the Draft of Opening. Then, using the distaff, spin the draft on the egg yourself. Walk to Hetchel's tent, at the far right end of the village. Here you will find a flask with dye in it and a bye pot full of boiling dye. Using each of these objects will produce interesting and educational effects. (Be sure to have a pencil handy!) The Book of Patterns E C E D Opening - This fundamental draft is traditionally the first - - - - one taught to novice spellweavers. Once mastered, it may be spun into tarpaulins, theater curtains, or any covering that must be whisked aside on command. Dyeing - This draft was perfected by the dye chemists of the - - - - Woonsocket Chapter, who slaved for hours over steaming pots to satisfy the Clerics' appetite for colorful vestures. Originally woven into all types of fabric, the applicability of the Dyeing draft has diminished over the course of centuries. Now it works only on wool. Summoning - Chiefly spun by the Elders in those rare - - - - instances when a member's physical presence is required in the Sanctuary. The draft may be perceived by its recipient in many different ways. It most often takes the form of a small, luminous spheroid, referred to in children's stories as a "messenger nymph". Tongues - The Pattern of Tongues was first spun into the - - - - dinner placemats at the 423rd Conclave of the Guilds, held at Elstree in 7610. For the first time, the Guild delegates could understand each other's speeches. This innovation was widely praised until an Undertake was overheard insulting a Florist. Both Guilds were plunged into a bloody war lasting five hundred years. Silence - Silence was hailed as a welcome relief for first- - - - - time parents and dwellers in college dormitories. Unfortunately, our Guildmasters are too often hired to spin these threads in situations of doubtful appropriateness. The worst offender is the Guild of Conductors, whose members frequently impost a draft of Silence over their audience before a concert. Emptying - The contents of almost any filled container may be - - - - instantly unravelled with this handy draft. Before its development c. 4200, the streams of Woonsocket ran green with the discarded dyes of the chemists. Avoid the temptation to spin Emptying upon lakes or clouds; its range is deliberately limited to prevent catastrophes such as the Double Deluge of 4204 (for which the Guild admits no responsibility). Unmaking - Novices are often impatient to acquire the - - - - undeniably dramatic ability to Unmake physical objects. Luckily, these volatile threads lie well beyond the grasp of all but the most mature spellweavers. Entire armies can and have been disembodied by the transawesome power of Unmaking. Let us hope we are never again called upon to demonstrate our craft in this manner. Extinguishing - Open flames are easily smothered with the - - - - draft of Extinguishing. It untangles the threads of oxygen and fuel within a conflagration almost instantly, with few if any side effects any very little smoke. The Guild of Firefighters awarded us with their 6222 Plaque of Distinction for the development of this safe, fast-acting treatment. Sharpening - Scissors, pins and knitting needles are the - - - - usual benefactors of this simple draft. In ancient times, however, warriors often submitted their blades to our Guildmembers for treatment. A formal protest by the Blacksmiths resulted in the Wetstone Bridge Treaty of 7550, which specifically prohibits the use of the Sharpening draft on weapons of war. Blessing - Also known as "Casino's Bane". Blessed items - - - - acquire a charmed state of probability which manifests itself as "good luck" to laymen. Use of this draft outside the Guild is restricted by the Emerick Agreement of 5858, which coincidentally supplies our treasury with an ample endowment from the Order of Statisticians. Straw into Gold - When times are lean, the Elders may invoke - - - - this draft to generate extra revenue. Its use is strictly regulated by the Treasurer of the Guild to prevent inflation. Other Guilds, ignorant in the ways of spellweaving, have concocted a variety of outlandish fairy tales involving this rather elementary weave. Temblor - Temblor was discovered by a reckless (and now very - - - - dead) spellweaver who directed the threads of Rending upon a thought-to-be-dormant volcano. Eagerly sought after by the Guild of Seismologists, this extremely dangerous draft is included here only for reference; its spinning has been forbidden by the Guild since 7331. Rending - The inventors of this innocent draft could not have - - - - imagined how badly it would be abused. The Guild of Embalmers originally licensed the draft for tearing rags into long strips. When the Embalmers were disbanded in 6529, a legal battle awarded the rights to the Guild of Career Politicians, who employed it to shred documents. The secret wandered from one unscrupulous Guild to another until it ended up among the Assassins, whose uses for Rending are too horrible to describe. Night Vision - The threads of this distinctive and beautiful - - - - draft are extrapolated from the song of nocturnal birds. At one time, Night Vision was prized by the Guild of Miners, whose legendary underground realm was chiefly illuminated by luminous tapestries bearing our Seal. Tragically, demand fell off after the Great Earthquake of 7331. Healing - In Volume 19 of her Brief History of the Guild of - - - - Weavers (Guild Press, 5620), Third Elder Lazykate documents the way bandages were treated with Healing as early as 1716. The four threads have evolved far beyond their original form. They can now be spun into virtually anything which needs rejuvenation, with the notable exception of the spellweaver's own body. Shrinkage - Many fabrics contract when exposed to moisture or - - - - heat. In studying this phenomenon, the ancient Weavers isolated the threads that cause this natural Shrinkage, and soon developed a draft to weave the effect into any material object. Be wary in its use! Open spun, the Shrinkage threads can never be unwoven. Desire - The draft of Desire has its origins in the primitive - - - - days of our community, when it was used to lure unsuspecting passersby into Guild shops. When spun upon a creature or person, it warps the threads around the spellweaver so that he or she resembles whatever thing the victim desires most. The illusion is quite fragile and impossible to maintain for more than a few moments. Waterproofing - The 5992 expedition of Fifth Elder - - - - Spindleshank to the rain forests of Lesser Uxbridge yielded this very practical draft, which shields any fabric from the effects of moisture. The Poison Galoshes Panic of 6003 almost resulted in a permanent ban on Waterproofing, until it was revealed that magazine test reports had been rigged by the Guild of Umbrella Openers. Reflection - This draft was commissioned by the Guild of - - - - Dancers to expedite costume changes for their 500th anniversary performance of the classic ballet Olema. When properly invoked, the spellweaver immediately assumes the appearance of the being the draft is spun upon, and vise versa. The four threads are based upon the mating grunt of the slit-throated chameleon. Terror - This draft reweaves the spellweaver's appearance - - - - into a form drawn from the deepest anxieties of the being the threads are spun upon. In effect, it turns you into the thing the recipient fears most. Terror works only on sentient beings, but its potency more than makes up for this limitation. It is approved for limited therapeutic use by the Guild of Psychotherapists. Folding - Archaeological evidence suggests that Folding was - - - - never supposed to be spun upon the fabric of space. Instead, its inventors seem to have been more concerned with the management of laundry! No faster or more convenient way has been found to move a spellweaver from one place to another. Caution must be exercised when Folding a section of space already Folded by another spellweaver. Careless spinning can create an uninhabitable "wrinkle" zone, such as the Gainsborough Blind Spot. Invisibility - When spun upon a person or group, Invisibility - - - - frays the focus of their vision, rendering the spellweaver quite difficult to see. The provenance of this draft is uncertain. It seems to have been acquired (under questionable circumstances) from the Guild of Shepherds, whose genius in the art of stealth is probably unrivaled. Confusion - The reason why this unusual draft developed is - - - - lost in time. Revisionists claim that it was spun into the cheaper fabrics sold at Guild shops in an attempt to undermine the confidence of bargain hunters. Whatever its origin, Confusion's potency has not diminished over time. One spin leaves a victim helplessly bewildered until the spellweaver is safely out of sight. Shaping - Only a handful of Weavers possess the concentration - - - - necessary to Shape a material substance. The threads of the draft must be spun with unusual single-mindedness before the Pattern will yield. Even then, a successfully Shaped object may revert to its original form if the draft is not rewoven periodically. Twisting - The origins of this ancient draft are lost in - - - - history. The earliest references to it are woven into the foremost hem of the Long Tapestry, beside threads depicting the manipulation of flax and yarn by hand. Tradition has it that the four notes were derived from the rhythmic squeak of First Elder Swellfax's own spindle. Warmth - What Weaver has never been wrapped in the cozy - - - - threads of a Warmth draft? Second only to Aphrodesia in popularity (they are often sold together), Warmth has been a staple of our Guild for much of our recorded history. Even a thin gauze coverlet feels as substantial as a Penumbrian quilt after a single application. Aphrodesia - The Guild's quick rise to prosperity and - - - - influence was due in very large part to the success of this best-seller. Fabrics woven with threads of Aphrodesia are guaranteed to soften the heart of even the most indifferent love interest. Only the Elders are privileged to know the true origin of the draft. Rumors of a secret affair between Second Elder Twillfast and a member of the Guild of Organists are malicious and completely unfounded. Sleep - It would be difficult to find a pillow, baby bonnet - - - - or sleeping bag that has not been imbued with the soothing properties of this popular draft. The Guild of Nannies requires its use in all household fabrics, and the Anesthesiologists have approved an industrial-strength version as an alternative to chloroform. C'F G C Transcendence - Few indeed are the Weavers who have - - - - successfully spun this, the most subtle and mysterious expression of our art. Transcendence dissolves the ties that bind our threads into the Pattern, elevating mind and body to an undefined state of existence. Transcended beings are said to assume the form of birds, constellations, or even sunspots. Because corporal punishment is forbidden in our Guild, Transcendence is occasionally used as a means of humane banishment, but only for the most unforgivable infractions of the the Rules. Software Presents PLANET OF LUST STORY You are Captain Brad Stallion, owner and operator of the one- man space vehicle known throughout the entire galaxy as..."The Big Thruster". Once again, the Federated Government honchos have called upon you to carry out an important mission. Dr. Dildo has captured the pleasure planet Erotica in his powerful force field. If the Federated Government does not hand over its ultimate weapon, the Mind Imprinter, Dr. Dildo will increase the force field and crush the planet. So much for next year's vacation. Your assignment is to capture Dr. Dildo and deactivate the force field generator before he can carry out is evil plan. THE CONTROLS You are Brad Stallion. You see through his eyes and manipulate objects with his hands (the Hand Pointer). The lower one fourth of the screen is your console. There is a text display area and game controls. The text display area will display a 'What now?' prompt when there is no text to display. You clear or activate the text area by clicking on the left mouse button. The hand pointer is used to manipulate objects in a scene. This may include touching someone, turning on controls, opening doors, etc. Be careful, some things may not be safe to touch! Additionally, the hand pointer is used to tell you of certain game conditions. If there is more text for you to read than can be displayed at one time, the pointer will become the word 'MORE'. When this happens, no other game controls are active. clicking the left mouse button (or pressing RETURN will then display the next section of text. To the right of the text display area is a four point compass rose, up-down gadgets and three buttons. These buttons are labeled 'I' for inventory, 'L' for location and 'S' for game status. The compass rose may be used for going North, South, East or West. The up-down gadgets may be used for standing or climbing up and sitting, lying or going down (as a direction, that is). Clicking on the 'L' button will display the text associated with the scene. To find out where you are in the galaxy, type "where am I" at the 'What now' prompt. Clicking on the 'I' button will provide you with an inventory of the items currently in your possession. Clicking on the 'S' button will generate a status report from Sandie, you Ship's computer. ('Sandie' stands for "Ship's Automated Navigation Data and Information Entity".) Sandie is your best friend and companion. She is totally dedicated to your well being. She will help you, offer advice on occasion and sometimes act as your conscience. But be careful! Like! you, Sandie has been in space a LONG time. Thanks to the wonders of futuristic electronics, Sandie is almost always with you via tele-link. The 'Console' button near the compass rose is for a second group of game options. These options include Printer on/off, Music on/off, Save a game position, Load a saved game and Resume the game. For producing a printed transcript of the game session, see "Printer Notes" below. there is another way to turn the music on and off from within a scene. Can you find it? The Save position feature will save the displayed scene and any attributes or objects which you have collected. Load position will recall this scene and your attributes, objects and galactic location. The 'What Now' prompt is your keyboard entry method. All game commands have a keyboard equivalent. Typing 'n', 'N' or 'North' is the same as clicking on the north arrow of the compass rose. You may get the 'What Now' prompt by pressing the left mouse button with the pointer over the text display area or by pressing the ESC, RETURN or SPACEBAR keys. The 'What Now' prompt must be displayed before any keyboard commands are given. To execute a command, type in the command, such as 'stat' or 'status' for a Status Report and press RETURN. If an illegal command is given, the text area will display "Can't...". Every scene has its own group of legal commands. What may be legal in one scene may be required in another. Most scenes may be solved by touching an object with the hand pointer (such as a snake, a directional arrow or a control button). Some scenes require text input. This may be a one word command such as "eat" or a two word command such as "take nap". None of the scenes require complex sentence input. THE GAME OPTIONS MENU Hidden in the upper left corner of the Text Display area is the Game Options Menu. This is accessed by pressing the right mouse button while in the text display area. (Note: This is the only time you need to use the right mouse button.) Continue to hold the right mouse button down and then move the pointer over the desired selection and release the button. Two options are available at all times (unless the pointer is asleep or indicates 'MORE'). These options are 'Start New Game' if you are dead or in a similarly hopeless situation. After selecting this option, you will be returned to the control room of the spaceship. If you have Saved a previous position, you may Load this position by clicking on the Load button in the Console menu. PRINTING Planet of Lust will generate a printed transcript of all game and text commands. To do this, the appropriate printer driver must be selected in Preferences. Preferences may be accessed by expanding the bird icon window and then clicking on preferences. The most common printer drivers are included on Disk 1. If your driver is not provided, copy it onto the 'devs/printer' directory on Disk 1. Consult your Owner's manual for guidance in selecting printer drivers with Preferences..ly for the "Olympic Auditorium BBS" Poague 350 Pague Very Proudly Presents VIP PROFESSIONAL These docs are definitely not for the faint hearted. Would you believe the complete docs are 165 pages and 506K long ??? Due to memory restrictions, we've broken the docs up into five 100K files, which are all on this disk. I hope the person who did these docs scanned them; could anybody be stupid enough to type out 500K+ by hand ?? Anyway, on with part 1 of the doc, and the first 31 pages. TUTORIAL INTRODUCTION Introducing Integrated Spreadsheets Electronic spreadsheets are one of the most popular programs for personal computers. Hardly a person exists who does not have the need to make calculations, be they for taxes, a home budget, checkbook ledger, financial plans, or any one of hundreds of other uses. Before computers became easily available, we had to depend on pencils and erasers to draw up our budgets. If we wanted to change some assumption, such as our monthly heating costs or medical expenses, we would have to erase all the figures dependent on those figures and recalculate them. Drawing up budgets or other financial plans was a burden, being both time consuming and messy. Then electronic spreadsheets were introduced. The public was presented with a better alternative to creating spreadsheets than the paper-and-pencil method. Electronic spreadsheets were designed to eliminate the hassle associated with financial planning by harnessing the power of a computer to do the work needed. The Lotus 1-2-3 Standard After several years of development of spreadsheets, there has emerged a universal standard: Lotus 1-2-3. Lotus 1-2-3 has set the standards for many of the business and productivity worlds. Almost all spreadsheets conform to the 1-2-3 file structure, and millions of people are trained in its commands and structure. Not only that, unlike any other computer program, 1-2-3 has spawned a literal mini-industry, with special application programs, books, spreadsheet templates, and even a magazine devoted just to 1-2-3. Because of this obvious standard, VIP Professional has been directly modeled after 1-2-3 to bring that standard and its many benefits to you. What makes 1-2-3 so popular is its extreme power and its integration of the major pieces required for financial planning: a spreadsheet , a database, and presentation graphics. These powerful applications have been integrated into one easy-to-use package. VIP Professional Takes 1-2-3 Up To 10 VIP Professional completely adheres to the 1-2-3 standard. You, the user, can use Professional just as you would 1-2-3-- the same keystrokes, commands and results. Because of this, you can go to the same books, magazines, templates and applications written for 1-2-3, and apply them immediately to your use of VIP Professional. We have provided a list of books and the like in Appendix B just for that purpose. Page 1 But we haven't stopped at mere compliance with the Lotus standard. Lotus was created before the exciting advances in graphics displays and mice. Lotus is also limited to the constraints imposed by the IBM PC. VIP Professional is therefore able to give you the benefits of drop-down menus, dialogue boxes and the like made available by the new breed of mouse-driven computers. This means that the 1-2-3 standard is made even easier to use. In addition, VIP Professional has incorporated many of the advances allowed by the newer, more powerful computers, including a gigantic 8192-row by 256-column spreadsheet, versus the 2047-row spreadsheet of Lotus. Many other enhancements to the Lotus standard have also been included to make VIP Professional lead the way to the powerful spreadsheets of the future. Perhaps what's best of all, VIP Professional is being made available on nearly every popular computer so that the 1-2-3 standard will be available to everyone, and everyone will be able to transfer spreadsheet files, no matter what computer they use. Conventions Used In The Handbook Several conventions are used in this handbook for keyboard notation. When refered to separate key names are enclosed in square brackets. For instance, the arrow keys are refered to by the direction that each points: [Right],[Left],[Up] and [Down]. Other keys and key combinations are refered to by their generic names. For example, moving the screen display one screenful over is known as paging and will be refered to as [Page][Left] (or [Right], [Up] or [Down], depending on the direction of the page). There are ten special function key combinations which are refered to by name and/or by the word "Function" and a number which designates its place (1 through 10). For example, the GoTo function may also be refered to as Function 5. Unless it is specifically stated otherwise, if we place two keystrokes in a procedure together, press the first and, while you are pressing the first, press the second. For example, to make the capital letter "A", you would press [Shift][a]. If we separate keystrokes from one another (perhaps by using "and" or "or"), press the first key, then press the second. If you are not sure of the key strokes needed to execute various functions, you may also refresh your memory by using the Quick Reference Card which comes with this program. In addition to using certain conventions with keyboard commands, we use some for menu commands. In later chapters of both the Tutorial and the Reference Guide, we will ask you to select a certain command and we will follow this request with a set of characters enclosed in parentheses. For instance, we might ask you to select the Query command from the Data menu (/DQ). For the same command, we might ask you to select the Data Query command (/DQ). Each word of a command represents a level in the command sequence. To get to the Query command, you have to go through the Data command. Page 2 LESSON ONE Getting To Know VIP Professional Introduction The VIP Professional Tutorial has been designed to get you going with your new program right away. Our intention is to teach you how to operate VIP Professional. At the same time, we try to tie you into your newly found knowledge about Professional with that of spreadsheets in general. This chapter introduces you to the basic structure of VIP Professional. It explains what VIP Professional looks like and how to move about the worksheet. The rest of the Tutorial will take you through the steps for creating a simple home budget. Home budgets are something we're all familiar with, so we don't have to concentrate on what they are and how they work. Instead, we can pay attention to using VIP Professional. Creating the home budget will teach you how to use the essential commands of Professional and a great many of its features. Each lesson is designed to help you through a few of the basic commands as you add more and more to your new budget. At the same time, we will be mentioning some of the options available in each of the areas. Feel free to handle just one lesson, or even just a part of a lesson at a time. The whole idea is to make learning this program as easy as possible for you. Once you have finished the lesson of the Tutorial, you will be ready to make your own spreadsheets. The Atari ST Keyboard The Atari ST keyboard is one of the best designed keyboards for any microcomputer. It provides keys for almost all popular functions. This is a great help for programs such as VIP Professional because it assures ease-of-use. You will find the function keys, the arrow keypad and the numeric keypad of great use with this program. Because of the well designed keyboard, we have often been able to create more than one way to perform a task. This allows those who have previously worked with Lotus 1-2-3 to use familiar keystrokes. It also allows the newcomer to learn VIP Professional while taking full advantage of the ST keyboard. Page 3 VIP Professional's Display After you've loaded the VIP Professional program, you will see a display on your screen. This screen display can be divided into three basic areas: the main menu at the top; the worksheet in the middle; and the control panel at the bottom. The menu line at the top contains the menu titles for the many menu commands available with VIP Professional. We will discuss these menu choices later in this chapter. First, let's get a better understanding of the display. The Worksheet Area Below the menu line is the worksheet display and its borders. Heading the worksheet is a rectangular bar with horizontal lines called a Title bar. In the midst of it is the word, "Untitled". Once you name your worksheet as a file, its name will appear instead of "Untitled". At the left of the Title bar is the "Quit box". If you click the mouse key after you have moved the cell pointer over the Quit box, you will leave, or quit, your worksheet. You are prompted as to whether or not you want to save your work. At the right of the Title bar is the "Full box" which you are familiar with from GEM. It works the same with VIP Professional, except that the worksheets will not cover the control panel at the bottom of the screen. The worksheet display takes up much of the screen area. It consists of a grid like pattern of horizontal and vertical dotted lines. This display of grid lines can be turned on or off from the VIP menu. The rectangular areas formed by the grid lines are the cells. In many ways, this area is like a sheet of paper you would use to do calculating work. In each cell, you may enter a piece of data and that cell acts as a container for the data. At the left and to the top of the worksheet are the borders which label rows and columns. The rows are labeled by numbers; the columns are labeled with letters. There are up to 8192 rows and up to 256 columns possible on one worksheet. After the columns reach Z, the series goes to AA,AB and so on to IV. As you can tell from the description above, what you see on the screen can only be a partial display of your entire worksheet. A worksheet can go off the screen many times over to the right and at the bottom. In fact, the screen display is like a gliding window which shows you just a small portion of your worksheet. You can move your "window" anywhere on the worksheet as you are working, but you cannot see anything larger than what fits on your screen. Using a standard font and column width, this is usually about seven columns by fifteen rows. Until you print your worksheet, you will not be able to see the entire worksheet at one time. The screen display can, however, be split so that you see two sections of your worksheet from different areas (see Lesson Six: "Windows and Titles"). By now you will have noticed the pointer which moves when you move the mouse. This pointer has different functions depending on where it is on the sheet. While in the worksheet, the pointer has the shape of a cross, and is called the cell pointer because it is used to select cells. When it leaves the worksheet, it becomes an arrow for selecting menus and other items. The pointer becomes a grooved box when it is close to the left and top edge of the worksheet and when it is near the column dividers. This indicates that it can be dragged to create windows or wider columns. Of course, the pointer will turn into the "busy bee" when the system is busy. Page 4 As we've mentioned, the cells in the worksheet are usually divided by lines for neat formatting. Notice that one cell is shown as a dark block. In this cell rests the cell indicator. The cell indicator indicates the cell which will be affected by data entry or which is the starting point for any command. Whenever you want to write something in a cell, you must first move the cell indicator to that cell. You can move the indicator in several different ways, the two simplest being by pointing (moving the cell pointer) to a different cell and clicking the mouse button, or by using the arrow keys to move the cell indicator. Feel free to try moving about using either way. Acting as borders at the bottom and to the right side of the worksheet are the Scroll boxes. These areas are for controlling movement of the screen display. For those of you who are using a mouse, they offer a convenient and easy way to move your screen display. The figures in the Scroll boxes are for scrolling, paging and gliding. Their uses are discussed later in this chapter. At the lower right side of the worksheet display, in the corner where the lower and right Scroll boxes (described below) meet, there is the Size box. It works just like it does in GEM. The Control Panel The area at the bottom of the screen, below the worksheet display, is the control panel. It controls data entry, editing, worksheet movements and messages.At the extrempinning has been forbidden by the Guild since 7331. Rending - The inventors of this innocent draft could not have - - - - imagined how badly it would be abused. The Guild of Embalmers originally licensed the draft for tearing rags into long strips. When the Embalmers were disbanded in 6529, a legal battle awarded the rights to the Guild of Career Politicians, who employed it to shred documents. ThThe first part of the line is the cell locator. The cell locator gives the current location of the cell indicator, or where you are in the worksheet, by displaying its address (the column letter and row number of the cell). Next to the cell locator is a "check" icon. This is the mouse equivalent of the [Return] key. Beyond the checkmark is space for displaying cell contents. Whenever the cell indicator rests in a cell in which a format command has been invoked or data entered, the data and command status will be shown in the space next to the cell locator. The data is shown in full. The format commands are shown in abbreviated form with parentheses around them. The second line is the Edit line. At the left of this line is the mode indicator. The mode indicator usually tells you which of the several modes or processes the program is in: Value, Label, Point, Edit, Menu, Error, Wait, among others. The Command and Step icons may appear before the mode indicator when macros are being used. When you are in the Point mode, The Absolute icon appears after the mode indicator so that you can click it to create absolute references in formulas. The mode indicator also serves as the mouse equivalent of the [Break] function. Whenever you click on it, you are returned to the Ready mode. Next to the mode indicator is an Escape (or Cancel) icon. This icon is the mouse version of the [Escape] key. The Break and Escape functions are discussed later in this chapter. The rest of the Edit line is used when you enter the Edit mode. A duplicate version of the entry on the Status line appears on the Edit line for you to work with. The Edit line is also used to display help messages and prompts which assist in implementing commands. Page 5 VIP's Icons By now you should be wondering what the Express icon and other icons are for, and how they are used. Icons have two purposes: to inform, or to be a "button". Many icons appear in the right-hand area of the control panel only when you have entered a certain mode or to remind you of an active status. For example, if you have depressed the [Capslock] key, a CapsLock icon appears to remind you. Other icons provide a convenient way to implement a command. For instance, the Recalculate icon provides an easy way for you to recalculate the sheet. To recalculate, you need only click on the Recalculate icon. The icons which appear in the control panel are as follows: The largest of the icons, the Express icon, is constantly visible at the left of the control panel. This icon is used for moving the cell indicator to different areas of the worksheet. The Express icon moves the cell indicator several different ways, depending on which part of it the pointer is over when you click the mouse. How to use the Express icon is described in the section, "Using a Mouse to Move Around" of this chapter. The other icons consist of a Help icon, an OK or checkmark icon, an Escape icon, an Absolute icon, a Recalculate icon, a Protect icon, a Scroll Lock icon, an End icon, a Step icon, and a CapsLock icon. Aside from the Help, Recalculate and Escape icons, these icons only appear when invoked, and they disappear when they no longer apply. Each of these icons is discussed briefly below. Further discussion of the individual functions can be found throughout the rest of the manual, in the sections which apply to them. We have already discussed the Escape and checkmark icons. Another permanent icon is the Help icon. The Help icon is used to obtain context-sensitive help. At any time while using the program, you may click on the Help icon to get instant help about the command or function you are using. This has the same effect as hitting the [Help] key or [Function 1]. The Recalculate icon is another permanent icon. When you click on it, a recalculation will occur. This has the same effect as pressing [Function 9]. The Absolute icon appears to the right of the mode indicator only when you are in the Point mode and are pointing to a cell you wish to reference. If you move the cell pointer over the Absolute icon and click the mouse key, the reference will run through a cycle from totally absolute to totally relative. This has the same effect as pressing [Function 4]. The End icon appears when you have pressed the [Insert] key to indicate that the next time you press an arrow key, you will tab in the direction indicated. It is called End because that is what it is called in Lotus 1-2-3. The Circular Reference icon appears during a calculation of your worksheet if a circular reference is found. Circular references may cause problems in worksheet calculations because they consist of two cells with formulas which depend on one another and, therefore, cannot be resolved without changing one reference. The Protect key appears to indicate that global protection has been enabled. In addition to icons described above, several icons indicate statuses. When the Scroll Lock facility is on, the Scroll Lock icon appears. The Step icon appears when you have invoked single stepping in macro execution. The CapsLock icon appears when the [CapsLock] key has been used. Page 6 Moving Around The Worksheet Now that you know what all of the elements of the workshle bar is the "Full box" which you are familiar with from GEM. It works the same with VIP Professional, except that the worksheets will not cover the control panel at the bottom of the screen. The worksheet display takes up much of the screen area. It consists of a grid like pattern of horizontal and vertical dotted lines. This display of grid lines can be turned on or off from the VIP menu. The rectangular areas formed by the grid lines are the cells. In many ways, this area is lik around; still, there will be times when using the keyboard will be the most convenient method. Because of this, we have built in similar movement functions for both methods to make sure you can get around just as easily either from the keyboard or with the mouse. Using a Mouse to Move Around When you move the mouse, you control the pointer. When the pointer is over the sheet, it has a cross shape. You can move it freely over any cell on the screen. To select any cell, just click the mouse button when the pointer is over the cell. When you have selected a cell, the cell locator on the bottom of the screen is updated to show the new location. It is important to remember that the cell indicator is "where the action is." All commands and data entry affect only the cell where the cell indicator resides. Yet, the pointer can move anywhere, even to parts of the worksheet currently off the screen. Because of this, you have to remember to click on a cell if you want to select that cell; placing the pointer over the cell is not enough. Movement around your worksheet with the mouse is very easy. At your disposal are the Scroll bars, Scroll arrows and express icon. The Scroll bars at the right and bottom of the worksheet allow you to glide to distant parts of the worksheet in a hurry. Their use is very simple. Just move the pointer over the box, or "thumb", in the Scroll bar, hold the mouse key down and drag the thumb across the bar by moving the pointer. You will notice that as you drag the thumb, the cell locator is updated. What is shown is the location of the upper left cell of the worksheet window as you move. When the locator gives the general location you desire, let up on the mouse button. You will then be able to see your updated worksheet area. The cell locator reverts to displaying the actual location of the cell locator. Remember that if you want to enter data or execute a command at this new location, you must select a cell. If, instead, you only wanted to go to the new location to check on some data, a simple way to return to the position of the cell indicator is to click on the cell locator in the control panel. The Scroll arrows in the Scroll bars have two functions. First, clicking on the arrows will move the worksheet in the desired direction one cell at a time. Second, if you press the [Shift] key and click the mouse on any of the arrows, your work sheet will move, or page, one windowful in the desired direction. The Express icon has already been introduced. Movement with the Express icon is tied to data you have entered. The four corners control movement to the four corners of your current worksheet. The four arrows control tabbing to the end or beginning of data blocks (depending on where you are). The center controls movement of the cell indicator within a selected range. E Tabbing is a special feature which you will learn to appreciate. It is useful not only for moving around the worksheet, But also for selecting ranges of data for commands. For those of you familiar with Lotus 1-2-3, this command is equivalent to pressing [End] and then the arrow key for the Page 7 desired direction. Its use is simple. Any time the cell indicator is on a cell with data and you use tab, the indicator will move to the last cell containing data in the direction chosen. If the cell indicator is on a blank cell when you tab, it will be moved to the next cell containing data in the desired direction. Using Arrow Keys to Move Around As was said before, your actual position in the worksheet is reflected by the dark cell indicator. Unlike with the mouse, when you use the keyboard to move around the worksheet, all movement is tied to the cell indicator since the keyboard cannot easily be made to control the pointer. The simplest movement is done by using one of the four arrow keys to move the cell indicator one cell at a time in the desired direction. When you use the arrow keys, you will notice that the longer you press down on them, the farther you will move from your starting position. The reason for this is that arrow keys, like character keys, have a repeat feature. If you depress an arrow key once, the cell indicator only moves one cell. When you press down continuously on the key, it repeats its function over and over until you stop pressing. Professional remembers and stores the keystrokes that haven't't been acted upon yet. When you stop pressing a key, the program finishes acting on all its keystrokes before it is ready to go to another step. If you want to stop the movement from remembered keystrokes, press [Control][Undo]. The arrow keys can move you to any cell of the spreadsheet. However, they cannot move the cell indicator beyond the boundaries of the spreadsheet (for example, they can't move the cell indicator to the Status line). If you should attempt to move past its edge, the computer will beep at you and the cell indicator stops moving at the border cell. However, you can move about inside the spreadsheet while moving the window display with you. This is done by moving the cell indicator to the right or down until you reach the end of the display. If you press the arrow key again, your worksheet will scroll in the direction you have chosen, one row or column at a time. Moving in Leaps and Bounds There are also ways to move quickly about your sheet using keyboard commands. You can use your arrow keys, or a combination of arrow and other keys, to move in screenfuls or to move to the bottom right and the top left cells of the worksheet you've created (these are considered Home and End). Moving by screens, or paging, is done by pressing [Shift] and the arrow pointing in the direction desired. [Tab] and [Shift] [Tab] will also page to the right and left. [Home] will move you to the top left corner of your work area and pressing [Insert] and then [Home] will move you to the bottom right corner of your work area. Page 8 Tabbing, the function of moving through blocks of data, is done in a two-step process. After the cell indicator is in the cell you are starting from, press [Insert]. You will notice that the End icon appears in the control panel. Next, press the arrow key pointing in the direction of your choice. This will erase the icon, and move the cursor to the end or beginning of the block desired. You could also press [Insert], then [Home] to move the cell indicator to the end of your current worksheet. Once you press [Insert], the End icon remains on the screen until you press an arrow key or until you press [Insert] again to turn it off. MOVEMENT KEYS SUMMARY: Page Right [Shift][Right] or [Tab] Page Left [Shift][Left] or [Shift][Tab] Page up [Shift][Up] Page Down [Shift][Down] Top Left [Home] Bottom Right [Insert][Home] Tab [Insert] plus arrow key Tying the Cell Indicator to Worksheet Movement VIP Professional provides another feature for moving the screen display over the worksheet using the keyboard. This feature is known as scroll locking. When you press [Shift][Home], you are linking the movement of the arrow keys to that of the screen. It causes movement of the cell indicator through an arrow key to be syncronized with the worksheet display. The Scroll Lock icon appears in the control panel when you have enabled Scroll Lock. Every time you use an arrow key to move, the screen is also moved the same amount of cells. To unlock scrolling, press [Shift][Home] again. The key combinations for moving by pages and the scroll bars won't operate while you are making use of this function, nor will commands such as the Worksheet Titles command. Using the GoTo Function A convenient way to move the cell indicator to a particular cell is by using the GoTo function [Function 5]. (The GoTo function can also be reached through the VIP menu, but we will discuss this more later.) This command allows you to specify a cell address (or coordinates of a cell) where the cell indicator is to be moved. It is initiated by pressing [Function 5]. In response to a prompt for a location, type the column letter and the row number designating the cell's location. As you type, the address will appear on the Edit line in the control area of the screen. Enter the cell address by pressing [Return]. Your position in the worksheet will immediately be changed to the specified cell. Page 9 Protected Cells There is one instance when you will find you can't move into certain cells of the worksheet. These cells are protected. The reason for protected cells is that there will be times when you put certain information on your spreadsheet that you don't want changed no matter what else is changed. An example of a cell you might want protected is one which contains important formula. Cell protection can be enabled and disabled (turned on and off) from two different menus: the Worksheet menu (see "Worksheet Commands" in the Reference Guide) and the Range menu (see "Range Commands" in the Reference Guide). When Worksheet protection is enabled a Protect icon will appear in the control panel. The Worksheet Titles command is another command which creates protected areas. These titles can only be entered by using the GoTo function [Function 5], or by using your mouse. Introducing Menus One thing remains to be introduced to you before moving on to the making of a budget. As was mentioned before, the top row of the screen contains command menus. VIP Professional has many commands to help you with the creation of your worksheets. Some commands are done with the mouse, or arrow keys, while others are placed in menus. Each of the menus has a series of selections to cover a specific aspect of the program. Many of these selections also have their own selections as well. You will learn more about these commands in the upcoming chapters. At this point, we only want to give a general idea of how to use the menus. With a mouse, menu commands are invoked just as they are with GEM. Point at a selection in a displayed menu and click. Often after you make a selection a new command line will appear with another set of selections. These selections may also have menus. In fact, it is possible to go through menus several layers deep, and so you may want a way to get back to a previous menu, or back to the Ready mode. To go back to the last menu, click on the Escape icon; to return to the Ready mode, click on the mode indicator. The menu commands may also be invoked from the keyboard; either by typing command letters or by using the arrow keys. Note, however, that the Desk and VIP menus cannot be reached from the keyboard, but only with a mouse. This maintains compatibility with Lotus 1-2-3 macros. Whether you use the command letters or the arrow keys, the first step is to press [/]. This causes the mode to change to Menu and the main menu items to become active. To select the Worksheet Window command by typing letters, you would press [W]. The main menu is replaced on the menu line by the Worksheet menu. To select Window from it, you would press [W] again. The Window menu appears on the menu line and you may select one of its commands. If, instead, you choose to use the arrow keys, you can move back and forth along the menu line with your [Left] and [Right] keys. As you pass over each item it is highlighted. To choose one of the items, press [Return] when your choice is highlighted. The main menu will vanish to be replaced by the menu of the item of your choice. You may choose an item from this menu just as you did the first one. In this way, you can move through the menus one by one until you are finished making all your choices. You will notice that as you course through the menu items, help phrases appear in the control panel. These phrases describe the command to help you make the proper selection. Page 10 Escaping and Breaking Out of Commands There are two commands to help you get out of just about any place in the program. One is Escape and the other is less drastic of the two. Escape is invoked either by pressing [Escape] on the keyboard, or by clicking on the Escape icon in the control panel. It is used to escape partially out of commands. It usually takes you to the previous step, whether it is the last menu, the last command prompt or the last mode. Break is used to take you completely out of a command or prompt series. It is invoked either by pressing [Control][Undo] or by clicking on the mode indicator. You will find it particularly helpful when you want to break out of several layers of menus at one shot. Saving or Quiting Your Worksheet When you finish a work session, you may want to save your worksheet. Instructions on how to save and retrieve a worksheet file can be found in "Lesson Eight: Saving, Retrieving and Printing Your Worksheet". On the other hand, you may decide just to quit VIP without saving your worksheet. You may use Quit command by typing "/Q" or by using your mouse or arrow keys. You may also click the mouse button over the Quit box. How to Get Help VIP Professional comes with a built-in, context-sensitive help facility to help you to learn to use the program. It is extremely easy to use. At any time when you are using the program, you can either press [Function 1], use the Help command from the VIP menu or click on the Help icon in the control panel, and the Help Menu or specific help will appear with a discussion of help for the general area you are using. Page 11 LESSON TWO Beginning the Home Budget The Basics of Entering Data You've loaded the program and familiarized yourself with the display and the basic concepts of Professional. You've formatted blank data disks so that you can save your work in case you want to. You are now ready to start constructing a sample budget on the worksheet, but first, let's go through what we know about cells. Just What is a Cell ? We've explained that a worksheet is a grid of cells. OK, so exactly what is a cell ? Well, a cell is a distinct area for data display. A cell shows some or all of the data assigned to its location, depending on how wide the cell is. Originally, each cell is nine characters wide, so up to nine characters of data will be displayed in each cell. Methods to enlarge or shrink the cells are discussed later in this section. It must be emphasized that what is displayed does not limit what is stores for that cell. Although each entry may have up to 240 characters, the display is limited. If the entry is a number, the display will be limited by the current width of the cell. The full cell contents will still be remembered, but only those that will fit in the cell will be displayed. Initally, the program automatically changes numbers to scientific notation if that will allow display of the number in the cell. If the value cannot be displayed in the cell, asterisks will be displayed instead. The asterisks will be replaced by the actual value when the width of the column has been changed to accommodate the display. Changing the column width is discussed in lesson Four. Labels are different. Because VIP Professional allows limited text processing capabilities, labels have been given a special feature. A label will spill over the boundaries of its initial cell. This will happen as long as the cells to the right of the initial cell are unused. Because a whole screen of characters can be displayed, you may write complete paragraphs of text very easily. As you can see, the cells are located at coordinates of the grid (for example, A1, C3 or Z200). The worksheet has 256 columns and 8192 rows. This is a sizeable chunk of real estate for you to use. The coordinates of a cell are often referred to as the cell's address. When you create a worksheet, there are three types of information you will be supplying. One category consists of the names and titles you give to columns and rows of figures. This category is called "labels" . Another category consists of numbers you will be working with such as house payment amounts, etc. These are the "values" . The third category is the formulas and calculations you will use to combine the numbers you have supplied, such as adding certain numbers, taking the sum of others, averaging others, and so on. This category is naturally titled "formulas" . Formulas are really a subset of values since formulas result in numbers. Each category has its own special input rules so that the program can be sure of dealing correctly with it. Page 12 You are helped in data input by the mode indicator in the control panel of the screen. When you are just moving around your worksheet, the mode indicator says "Ready". The Professional is ready for any command or data entry. Once you start to enter data or initiate a command, however, the mode indicator changes. It is ready to tell you the type of data you have entered (by indicating "Value" or "Label" as a mode), or some other special mode, such as "Menu", "Edit", "Point", or "Error", that you are in. This can be helpful when you want to make sure the computer knows what you are doing or vice versa. Labels Let's begin to give some shape to your worksheet. With the cell indicator A1, type the following letters: Mortgage. As soon as you type the letter "M", the mode indicator changes from "Ready" to "Label" to indicate what type of data you are putting in the cell. As you type in the text, you will see it on the Edit line. Nothing happens to your worksheet yet. You are still preparing your entry. Until you press [Return], click the mouse on the Checkmark icon or press any arrow key to "set" your entry into your worksheet, you can cancel that entry by pressing [Escape] or by clicking the mouse button while the pointer is over the Escape icon. Let's press [Return] to set the entry. When you press [Return], the Professional will first check to see if you made any errors. It will quickly recalculate your worksheet and update the screen. The mode indicator is returned to Ready. Presumably no errors have been made at this time, so the word "Mortgage" on the Edit line is moved to cell A1. It is also moved to the Status line to tell you the contents of the cell where the cell indicator resides. But if you typed only the letters "Mortgage", why has the apostrophe been put before the entry on the Status line ? This is a special label marker or, as it is more commonly called, a label prefix. Whenever you put a label in a cell, the Professional adds a marker before the label to tell what kind of label it is. When you start on a worksheet, all labels you enter are automatically aligned to the left of cells. You may to choose, however, to place labels flush to the right side, center them or have them repeat in a cell. There are four special characters which decide the appearance of a label in a cell. Of these, an apostrophe before the label causes it to begin at the left margin. This is the apostrophe that has been added to the label you entered. It is automatically assumed that you want your labels to the left. However, if you start an entry with a double quote the label will be justified to the right margin. A caret ("^") would cause it to be centered. A backlash ("/") would cause the label to repeat. For example, using backlash plus the dash character ("/-") would cause the dash to fill the cell. If you want your labels to always be placed at the right or centered, you can use a Worksheet command to change the default (or automatic) setting to do what you want. Now, let's move the cell indicator to B1. You can move the pointer to the cell and click, or press the [Right] key. Here let's use the [Right] key. Did you hold the [Right] key down too long ? If so, did you hear a slight clicking sound more than once ? You were listening to the type-ahead feature. When you input text faster than the screen can react, your keystrokes will be remembered and when you stop pressing, it will continue to perform according to the remembered keystrokes. For example, If you held the [Right] key for a while, you would hear several clicks as the system registered each entry of the [Right] key. Page 13 After you have let up on the key, the cell indicator continues to move right until all the keyboard instructions have been followed. Any time you want the Professional to stop following the instructions from the keyboard, press [Control][undo] (the Break function). This will cancel any instructions which have'nt been acted upon yet. Where were we ? Oh, yes. Get that cell indicator back to cell B1. The entry line should be empty. Type "Car Bills". The Edit line will now show the phrase "Car Bills". Well, the label "Car Bills" isn't quite right. What we meant was "Car Payments". Since you have'nt pressed [Return] yet, we can catch the error. Editing Entries Professional is quite forgiving. It lets you correct errors in a number of ways. If you have'nt finished an entry yet, you can delete preceding characters with [Backspace] until you reach the spot where the mistake was made, and then you can retype the entry correctly. If you want to start over, you can use [Escape] instead. You'll be back in the Ready mode, from where you can start over, or move to another cell. If you move to another cell, you could move back to the first cell, and type in and enter a correct entry. Your new entry would replace your old one. This is VIP's replacement feature. Still, you may have only made a slight mistake in entering your label or value. Maybe you just spelled the word wrong. Although you could just reenter your data, if you have long labels or complex formulas, it is usually much easier to edit the cell. To begin editing, First enter the cell to be edited, here B1, and then press [Function 2] (the Edit function). As an option, you can issue the command for Edit by choosing the Edit item from the VIP Menu. The mode indicator will change to "Edit" to tell you that you are in the Edit mode and to remind you that some of the keys now have different functions. For instance, had we pressed [Return] after entering "Car Bills", we might want to go into the Edit mode to change it. After selecting Edit, the blinking cell cursor appears at the end of the entry. You can move the cursor anywhere on the line to edit. The left and right arrows move you one space at a time toward the left or right. Other key combinations are used to move you to the first [Home] and the last character [Insert] of the entry or five characters to the left or right [Tab] or [Shift][Tab] of its current position. To edit you also have the choice of two delete commands and one insert command. You can delete the character under the blinking cursor (by using [Delete] or the character preceding the blinking cursor (by using [Backspace]. Whenever you type a character, it will be inserted at the place of the cursor. To change text, delete the old text, then insert the new text. Once you have completed necessary editorial surgery, you may press [Return] to set the entry into your sheet. Here, we would [Backspace] to the space before "Bills" and type "Payments". Then we'd press [Return]. Although most of us use the Edit function after we have completed a cell entry, it is also available when first entering data. You may use [Function 2] at any time to enter the Edit mode, and when you have completed your editing of an entry, you may press [Function 2] again to return to completing the entry. Editing is most convenient for fixing complex formulas and long labels. Page 14 Edit commands are also available when you are entering text in response to a request by VIP Professional for some information. This occurs frequently. For example, it happens in the Range Name command, many of the File commands, and in several of the Graph Option commands. In addition, if VIP finds an error in an entry, you may be automatically placed in the Edit mode. For example, if you have a label which begins with a number and ends with text (like "3rd Qtr."). VIP will be confused. It will place you in the Edit mode so that you can clear up the source of its confusion. By typing in an individual label prefix at the start or the label, you can let Vip know that it is definitely a label which you are entering. When you press [Return] after making this minor editing change, VIP will accept your label and go back to the Ready mode. More About Entering Labels Now that you've changed "Car Bills" to "Car Payments", move the cell indicator to C1 and type: Education. Instead of pressing [Return], press [Right]. What happened ? First note that the cell indicator is not on cell C1, but on cell D1. This is because, to set the entry in the worksheet, you pressed the [Right] key instead of [Return]. When you press an arrow key to set an entry, the entry is set, and the cell indicator automatically moves to the next cell in the direction the arrow key points. You may actually use any of the cell indicator movement commands_ including paging, gliding and tabbing to set an entry move. In this case, since you used the [Right] key, the cell indicator has moved to cell D1. Selecting D1 with the mouse would have the same effect. After editing an entry, you can only use [Up], [Down[ and the paging commands to set the edited entry because the other keys are used for different purposes in the Edit mode. Did you notice that one of the labels you just typed in not only filled cell B1, but extended to the next cell as well ? This is because labels have a special feature which allows you to type long labels without being limited by cell width. Because of this, you can use Professional as a text processor to add comments to your reports. The label will be displayed across cells until the end of the display is reached. The label will skip over cells with existing data, then continue writing in empty cells beyond the cell with data. Also, if you type new data in a cell which is being overlapped by a long label, your new entry will overwrite the long label in that cell. In succeeding empty cells, the long label continues overlapping. Let's make a sample worksheet. For convenience, we'll begin again. This time, let's start the budget at row two instead of one. First, clear your worksheet by typing "/WEY". This is just one way of several to use VIP Professional's menus. We will be discussing menu commands in Lesson Four. For now, go ahead and fill in the labels to look like this: Page 15 That takes care of the budget labels. But what of the time period for calculating the budget ? We'll calculate a budget for a year and put the months down in column A. In cell A3 type: '1-85. You will note that you typed the apostrophe this time before you typed your label. This is because the numbers at the start of an entry are usually recognized as values, and so must be purposely marked as labels to be treated as such. If you didn't use the apostrophe, the cell would display a negative 84 (1 minus 85). Any time you wish to enter a number as a label it must be preceded by a label prefix, such as an apostrophe. The mode indicator will change to "Label" to show that you are entering a label. Now, continue to fill in the next eleven months in column A. Notice that all labels are flush to the left of the cell. Later on, you will learn how to change that and other formats to fit your needs. Values It's now time to put some numbers in the worksheet. As we have seen, numbers can be used as labels. Whenever you enter a number not preceded by a label prefix, the system presumes that you are entering a value. The Ready mode changes to Value, and the Edit line displays the value you are entering. Of course, aside from the numbers themselves, values and formulas also begin with several other characters. @, #, +, -, ., (, #, and $ cab be used to begin formulas. These are described below in the discussion of formulas. The symbols, +, - and ., are also the standard positive and negative signs and the decimal indicator used by numbers. Other than these indicators, values are entered much like labels: by typing the data and pressing [Return]. The same editing functions apply to values as well. There is one form of number, however, that you might not be familiar with: "scientific notation". Scientific notation is a format for displaying extremely large or extremely small numbers, such as 1000000000000000, or .0000000000000001. The idea is to shorten those values by eliminating most of the zeros through the use of the power-of-10 factor. This factor is expressed as E (for exponent) plus or minus the number of zeros left out. Thus, the number 1000 could be expressed as 1e+3, and .0001 could be expressed as 1e-4. You are free to enter numbers this way if you like. The number will be displayed in the normal way unless you change the format to general or scientific format, or unless the number is too large or small to fit in a cell without using scientific notation. Now that you understand value entry, let's put some figures on the worksheet for the first month. As you see, contrary to labels, numbers are automatically flushed to the right with a space left at the end. The space is there to divide the value from any label which might be put in the next cell. Values are aligned to the right because as numbers get bigger, they can extend further to the left in the cell. The digits of all values in a column are lined up. For example, the "ones" are placed closest to the right, the "tens" take the next place and so on. Placement of numbers and other format considerations will be discussed later. At this point, you have the beginnings of a simple home budget. In the next lesson, we will learn more about making the budget work for us, and how to make it look attractive. Page 16 Errors In Data Entry By now you have probably made a few mistakes and bumped around the spreadsheet, creating strange noises and the like along the way. You may have even been beeped at a few times. Not to worry - VIP Professional is not about to let you make a mistake that would cause major problems! Generally, everything is planned to make the process of creating a worksheet almost second nature. Still, sometimes a finger can slip and lead to a mistake. When you have made a mistake, you're likely to hear a beep. If the error is easy to figure out, it is left at that. Usually the beeps are caused by trying to move the cell indicator off the worksheet, etc. However, sometimes you will have to be told what kind of error you made. Sometimes the error was not something you did, but something you did not do. For example, you may have tried to use Help, but been told that you had to put the Help Disk in the drive. At other times, VIP Professional tries to help you locate the problem causing the error. If the problem occurs during data entry, a beep will sound and you will be put in the Edit mode with the cursor near the problem so that you can quickly fix it. Sometimes, you may even encounter a dialog window, or prompt, which gives you a short massage on what you did wrong and how to correct it. If it asks you to, click "OK" or press [Return] before moving on. Page 17 LESSON THREE Formulas and Number Crunching Introducing Formulas We now have a simple home budget for the month of January 1985. If we assume that our experience would remain the same for each month of the year, the final calculation and all intermediate steps would be simple and hardly worth worrying about. Unfortunately, inflation changes our monthly expense totals. We need to adjust our budget to reflect the expense increases due to inflation. For our example, we will assume a modest inflation rate of 6% per year. If you were calculating the monthly expense adjustments without the help of VIP Professional, you would first calculate the monthly rate from the yearly rate. Then, you would multiply the previous month's expense by the monthly inflation rate, add it to this month's expense and enter the new number in this month's column. Calculating a budget this way is tedious. The calculation for each expense also has to be done for each month. With five items and 12 months, that's a lot of formulas! Your spreadsheet gas taken the tedium out of such calculations. It does the calculations for you once you've entered the formulas. What's more, you can "copy" the formulas so that you don't have to enter the same formula over and over again. Copying parts of the worksheet will be discussed in Lesson Five. Formulas may take a variety of shapes, nut their concept is simple. The aim of a formula is to perform mathematical operations on one or more other cells and/or numerical values, and to be able to display the results numerically in the cell of the formula. Mathematical operations include addition, subtraction, multiplication and division, among others. In our budget example, we could continue to calculate amounts to put in the rows for the months of February, March, etc. Instead, let's use a formula and have Professional calculate the ensuing monthly amounts. We will begin with February. In cell B4, type: +B3*(1+.06/12). Press [Return] to enter it. The "+" sign tells the system that the letter that follows is not a label, but part of a formula. A letter without an appropriate prefix will always be considered a label. In this case, the first "+" sign is used as an indicator. It also indicates that the term "B4" is a positive value. You could also use a negative sign or one of several other signs to begin your formulas. The signs used as formula prefixes will be listed in "Building Formulas Using Operators and Functions" of the Reference Guide. When you start with a formula indicator, the Ready mode changes to Value. This is because formulas are actually a form of values. The formulas we've just entered in our example tells VIP Professional to multiply the value in cell B3 by 1.005 and place it in cell B4. The figure 1.005 is derived as the factor which reflects an interest rate of 6% over a 12 month period. Once you press [Enter] you will see. The cell indicator still resides in cell B4. The Status line shows the cell indicator's location by displaying the formula in cell B4. You will note, however, that the contents of B4 are not displayed as a formula, but as a number. In fact, it is the numeric result obtained from the formula. This is precisely how VIP Professional works. When you enter a formula in a cell, the result of the calculation is displayed. By positioning the cell indicator over the cell, you can see the underlying formula on the Status line. Page 18 Pointing to Values in a Formula There's another way to create the sample formula that is just a little bit easier. After you press [+], use the mouse or arrow keys to select cell B3. You will notice that the word in the mode indicator changes from "Value" to "Point". The Status line now shows the current location of the cell indicator, B3, and the contents of cell B3. Type the next operator ("*"). Notice that "B3" has been placed on the Edit line after the + sign. The cell Indicator is moved back to cell B4. After moving the cell indicator to cell B3 and pressing [*], you can finish typing the rest of the formula. Enter it by pressing [Return]. Pointing to cells is an easy to specify cell addresses. You don't have to remember the actual cell coordinates to type in; all you have to do is move the cell indicator over the cell, then type in the next operator or press [Return] if you have reached the end of the formula. How Formula Construction Affects Calculation How the formula is calculated has not been explained yet, and it needs to be. There are several calculations in the formula we've just made. The program has to have a way of knowing which calculations should be performed first so that it does'dosen't reach an unintended result. Obviously, since it cannot read your mind, you have to understand how to establish the order in which it should be calculated (precedence in calculation). In general, the computer calculates from left to right in a formula. There are two ways to make sure calculations come out right. The first is by using parentheses to enclose calculations which must be performed first. The other is to rely on a standard operational precedence. In our formula example, +B3*(1+.06/12), both methods were used. Parentheses enclose a subgroup, "(1+.06/12)", in our formula. They separate the operations enclosed by the parentheses from the multiplication operation after "B3". This means that the calculations within the parentheses are completed before being multiplied by the contents of cell B3. Yet, with "(1+.06/12)" you will see that even within the parentheses are two operations: addition and division. So what is VIP Professional supposed to do first ? Add 1 and .06 or divide .06 by 12 ? The answer lies in the rules of operational precedence. VIP Professional follows the conventions developed in mathematics for the precedence of calculation. One of the most basic rules is that multiplication and division are performed before addition and subtraction. Thus, the program knows to divide .06 by 12 before adding the result to 1. Of course, if you can't remember the rules of precedence, you can use parentheses to make sure the operations are done in the correct order. If you do use parentheses, make sure they are properly paired around the equations you want set off. There are several other operators besides the four mentioned above, and each has a precedence in calculations. Here's a list of the operators used and their order of precedence. The numbers under the "Precedence" heading tell you which will be done first. Operations which have the same precedence are handled by the system according to their order in the formula, from left to right. Page 19 operator function precedence ^ Exponentiation 1 - Make Negative 2 + Make Positive 2 * Multiplication 3 / Division 3 + Addition 4 - Subtraction 4 = Equals 5 <> Not Equal To 5 > Greater Than 5 >= Greater or Equal to 5 < Less Than 5 <= Less or Equal to 5 #NOT# Logical Not 6 #AND# Logical And 7 #OR# Logical Or 7 Some of the operations need a bit of explanation. Exponentiation (^) is the operation of taking a number to a power. For example, two to the power of two, or two squared, looks like 2^2. The equal, not equal, and so on through logical Or, are all special logical operators used for sophisticated functions. These are discussed in the chapter devoted to @ functions (see "Building Formulas Using Operators and Functions" of your Reference Guide). Another matter which needs clarifying is the duplication of the plus and minus signs in the list. As the chart indicates, plus and minus can have two functions. One is as an indicator of positive or negative value; the other is as a mathematical operator. VIP Professional knows the difference between 6-5 and 6--5. The answer to the first is 1, and the second is 11. Our formula example has taught you how to create formulas using standard operations. There is still more to learn about formulas and advanced functions, but this can wait. The chapter on building formulas in the Reference Guide will provide you with in-depth information about formulas when you are are ready. The Built in Calculator VIP Professional has a built in calculator which you can use to instantly find the result of any formula. It can be used in either of two ways. First, any time you are entering a formula, you may press [Function 9] or click on the Recalculation icon. The formula will then be changed into its resulting value. The second way to use the calculator is to move to the cell which contains a formula you wish to evaluate, press [Function 2] to edit the cell, then press [Function 9] or click on the Recalculate icon to evaluate the formula. Whenever you use the calculator, the program permanently changes the formula into the resulting number. Therefore, if you wish to retain the formula, the best way to use this feature is to first enter the formula in the target cell, then change to the Edit mode and calculate the formula as it appears on the Edit line. Once you have obtained a result, press [Escape] to abort editing and return to the Ready mode while the formula is still in the cell. Page 20 Calculation Sequencing Calculations and recalculations of a worksheet are initially performed automatically and in natural order by VIP Professional whenever you complete an entry. With natural recalculation, VIP Professional calculates each cell by column, but when it encounters a reference to another cell, the contents of that cell are completely calculated before going back to its former order. The process continues until all cell contents have been recalculated. This method takes care of many forward reference problems (which are described later in this section) simply because it takes them into account. Natural recalculation just happens to be one way of calculation order. You can control the order and several other things about how your worksheet is calculated through the Worksheet Global Recalculation menu (menus and their commands will be explained in the next chapter.) Calculation can also be done by first calculating the contents of all cells in column A (in the order of first to last row), then column B and so on across the columns. This is called columnwise recalculation. To have your worksheet calculate in this order, you would choose Columnwise from the Worksheet Global Recalculation menu. You might want to have calculations performed across rows rather than down columns. This may be because of a special way you have created your formulas. Or, it may be necessary to calculate along rows first to avoid forward or circular references (which are described later in this section). For calculation to be done rowwise, you would choose Rowwise from the Worksheet Global Recalculation menu. Recalculation after each entry is time consuming, especially as your worksheet becomes larger and there are more formulas to recalculate. You may want to turn off automatic recalculation. A good example of not needing automatic recalculation is when you set up a worksheet from a template. You want quick entry without having to wait for recalculation all the time. Switching from automatic to manual recalculation is also governed by the Worksheet Global Recalculation menu. To disable automatic calculation, select Manual from the menu. Now, you are free to enter data without waiting for recalculation. whenever you make a change to the worksheet, the Recalculate icon will appear at the bottom of the screen to remind you that you will have to recalculate when you want to see the correct results. To recalculate, press [Function 9] (the calculation function) or click the Recalculate icon while you are in the Ready mode. You may also switch back to automatic recalculation by choosing Automatic from the Worksheet Global Recalculation menu. Besides using the Recalculate function for recalculating at any time when you're in manual recalculation, there may also be times when you wish to force a recalculation while you are in automatic recalculation. This can happen when a particularly intricate formula will not yield accurate results the first time it is calculated. The problem is frequently caused by an inappropriate sequence of calculation within the formula. To force recalculation again, use [Function 9] while in the Ready mode. You may also force automatic recalculation by specifying a set of number iterations from the Recalculation menu. Actually, Iteration is another command for recalculating difficult formulas. It sets a number of times for the worksheet to be recalculated. Certain results can only be obtained by several calculations, or iterations, of worksheet formulas. When you choose Iteration from the Worksheet Global Recalculation menu, VIP Professional prompts you to specify the number of iterations you want. In response, you would type a number (between 1 and 50). The next recalculation would be done and repeated the number of times you specified. Page 21 Circular Reference and Forward References What should have become apparent by now is that it is possible to create a worksheet which will not give accurate results. There can be several reasons for inaccurate calculations in worksheets, the two most common being circular references and forward references. Circular references are formulas which refer to each other. Neither can be properly resolved since they depend on each other for a value. When VIP Professional comes across a circular reference, the Circular Reference icon is displayed in the lower section of the screen. The second potential problem arises from forward references, which are formulas which refer to cells calculated later in the evaluation order. A problem arises since the source cell may be evaluated prior to the cell refered to. If the value of the referenced cell changes between calculations, the source cell will be inaccurately calculated. The Natural recalculation order was created specifically to handle this problem. Still, you may encounter it if you use the Columnwise or Rowwise recalculation methods. These and other problems which may arise when creating worksheets are discussed thoroughly in works devoted to spreadsheets, along with many hints for successful worksheet creation. See Appendix B. Page 22 LESSON FOUR How to Use Some Helpful Commands Introducing Menu Commands Up to this point, we have mainly described basics of data entry. Data entry is the primary task in creating a worksheet. Entering data and comparing it with other items of the worksheet is helped by menu commands. These commands let you change the format of the display, let you insert or delete columns, rows and cells, let you juxtapose different parts of the worksheet, let you save, load and print worksheets, graph your results and much, much more! VIP Professional's command structure is built around a logical separation of functions. With an integrated spreadsheet program, you will wish to perform several different tasks. Many of these tasks have to do with the worksheet as a whole; some only have to do with a certain range of cells; still others have to do with performing an auxiliary function, such as printing, file management or graphing. VIP Professional has these eleven command menus: Desk, VIP, Worksheet, Range, Copy, Move, File, Data, Graph, Print, Quit Copy is used to copy the contents of one cell or a range to another. Move moves the contents of one cell or range to another. Quit, like the Quit box which can be reached by mouse, allows you to quit the worksheet. Desk and VIP are two special menus which can only be reached by using a mouse. The worksheet menu contains commands which affect the worksheet as a whole. Worksheet commands cover such things as cell formatting, creating windows, altering column widths, or setting up printer defaults. The Range menu gathers together commands that affect a cell or a group of cells. These include cell formatting, giving names to ranges for future use, and justifying text in groups of label cells. The File menu is responsible for every file management command such as saving, retrieving and combining files. In addition, it has a command which helps transfer data from a worksheet file of another program to VIP Professional. The Graph menu governs creating, decorating and displaying graphs. It also allows you to save either graph settings or the graph itself (in a picture file). The Data menu provides several unique information management commands to manipulate data in a database. You can put data records in the type of order you specify, single out certain pieces of data or create "what-if" tables using only the necessary information from your worksheet. "Menu" commands can be implemented with the mouse or from the keyboard. Most commands have subcommands, and many of the subcommands have their own menus. These act just like the main menu except they must be accessed through the main menu. Page 23 Invoking Commands With the mouse commands can be chosen by moving the cell pointer across the menu line. As you highlight each item, it's drop-down menu will appear in a column below. You may also highlight the items from these menus as you move the pointer over them. You may select an item from the menu line or you may select an item directly from one of the drop-down menus. To select an item, click the mouse while the item is highlighted. From the keyboard, commands are initiated by pressing [/], then the first letter of the command. That is, 'W' for Worksheet commands, etc. For subcommands, you would press the letter corresponding to the subcommand, such as 'E' for Erase. This is represented in the handbook as /WE. This way of selecting commands excludes Desk and VIP commands. As with Lotus 1-2-3, you can move through the menus with your arrow keys. First, press [/]. This displays the menu line and allows you to move through and highlight the items (excluding Desk and VIP) by using your [Left] and [Right] keys. Press [Return] when an item is highlighted to select it. It's submenu replaces the existing menu. You may chose an item from this menu the same way you did from the first menu. If there are more submenus, these will be displayed in turn and you may also chose from them. As you move across the menu line, you will notice that when an item is highlighted, its submenu appears in a column beneath it. You may bypass a main item and choose an item directly from its submenu by using your [Up] and [Down] keys to move around in the submenu, highlighting an item and pressing [Return] to enter it. A common result of invoking a command is a prompt sent by VIP, requesting information. The most common request for information is what range is to be affected by the command. However, you may be asked to do such things as supplying names or significant digits. The prompt will not only request information, it may give you a message. With the mouse, you will be given the option of clicking the mouse key to complete the action or canceling the action by moving the pointer on the Cancel icon and clicking the mouse button. From the keyboard, these correspond to [Return] and [Escape]. At times, you may select the wrong command. There are two ways to deal with a wrong menu selection: return to the previous selection and try again (if you are issuing a series of commands) or return all the way to the Ready mode. To return to the last selection, click on the mouse key while the pointer is over the Escape icon or press {Escape]. To escape to the Ready mode, use a break ([Control][Undo]). The mouse equivalent to issuing a break is clicking the mouse button once while the pointer is over the mode indicator. Go ahead and familiarize yourself with the command structure of VIP Professional. You'll be using the menu commands quite a bit from now on. Page 24 Changing the Format of the Worksheet Let's return to our sample worksheet. Many of the menu commands control how you view the data in your spreadsheet and how to manipulate that data. You may not only wish to enter data, you also want to look at a certain way or be standardized for a better display or presentation. You can affect the format of your worksheet in two ways. One is to make the change throughout the entire worksheet; the other is to have the change affect just one cell or range of cells. To affect the entire worksheet, you would use the Worksheet menu; otherwise you would use the Range menu. Let's look at how these commands affect your worksheet. Your worksheet currently shows columns of nine characters each, with labels aligned to the left and values aligned to the right. These initial settings are the current default format. Default means that the setting is automatically assumed by VIP Professional. What if you want all of the columns to be 12 instead of 9 characters wide so that you can accommodate wider labels such as "Car Payments"; and what if you wanted the titles in column A to be centered instead of aligned to the left, and, finally, what if you wanted the numbers to have dollar signs ? Let's first change the width of all worksheet columns. Select the Worksheet Global Column-width command (/WGC). You will then be prompted for the new width. You may select the width in either one of two ways. You may type in a number for the new width, or use [Left] and [Right] keys to change the width on the screen. Decide for yourself whether to enter the number 12 or press [Return] to enter your choice. You will see that now your labels, including "Car Payments", fit nicely within their columns. But look at column A. The dates seem to rattle around in their cells. Column A should be much more narrow. Fine. There are two ways to change that - with the mouse or with the keyboard. To use the mouse, move the pointer past the line separating the worksheet from the columns border and to the line between columns A and B. You will notice that the pointer has changed to a grooved square. This pointer acts as a "grabber" to grab lines. Press the mouse button and, with the grabber, drag the column line left to the desired width. When you let up on the button, the new width will be set. Alternatively , you may use the keyboard. Move the cell indicator into column A. Next, select the Worksheet Column-width Set item (/WCS). Worksheet Column-width will change the width of the column were the cell indicator is located. If you had chosen Worksheet Column-width Reset instead, it would simply make sure your column's width was the global one. In response to the prompt you receive after selecting the right command, enter the number, 7, and click the mouse button or press [Return]. Now, the dates look better. How about another worksheet change ? Let's change the display of numbers to a currency format. VIP Professional allows you to format numbers in any one of several different ways. You can fix the number places after the decimal point, you can show numbers as currency, you can show numbers in scientific notation, and so on. The currency format shows numbers with dollar signs, and with commas at the proper breaks, for example, $10,000. It defaults showing two places after the decimal point (10,000.00) although you may specify more or less than two places. The display format for the entire worksheet is selected from the Worksheet Global Format menu (/WGF). When you select Currency from the menu, you will be asked to confirm two as the number of digits to be displayed after the decimal point. At this point, click the mouse button or press [Return]. Your values are displayed as: Page 25 Your actions have resulted in changing all the values of your budget to the dollar format. Notice that the numbers in the first column were not changed. This is because those numbers were entered as labels rather than values. The currency format only applies to values or displayed results of formulas. From now on, whenever you enter a value, the currency format will apply unless you change the worksheet format again or unless you change the format of one particular cell or range of cells using the Range Format command. Making Localized Changes Let's illustrate how the local, or Range Format, command is used to change the format of a particular cell. Local Format commands are similar to the Global Format commands. The same formats are offered. The major difference is that, unlike Global commands which apply to an entire worksheet, Range Format commands become "attached" to the cell or group of cells in which they have been used. Even if you change the contents of the cell, the Range Format remains effective. The format set by the Range Format command has precedence over the format set with the Worksheet Global command. To change a local format, you must use one of the choices offered by the Range Format command. If you wish to return to the Global format, you would select the Reset option of the Range Format command. In the same way that changing the format of values in a range has precedence over the format of all worksheet values, a range of labels can be positioned differently in their cells than their global setting allows. As an example, let's change the format of a group of cells in column A. Let's center the month/year titles. Place the cell indicator over cell A3, the first cell to be changed. Next, select Range Label-prefix (/RL). You are presented with a choice of Left, Right, or Center. Select Center (C). You will see that the cell indicator changes slightly. In response to the prompt, specify a range to be covered by the command. This brings up a interesting feature of VIP Professional: range selection. You won't be doing anything just yet to finish your command selection. Once you've read about range selection, we'll come back to finishing the command. Page 26 Selecting a Range Many of the commands of VIP Professional involve selecting a range of cells which will be the object of a command. The Range, Copy and Move commands obviously require range selections, although ranges must also be selected for many other commands. Some commands, such as the Copy command, even require that you select a source range and a target range. First, just what is a range ? A range is a group of contiguous cells. It can be as small as one or as big as the entire worksheet. Of course, it can also be any rectangular area in between. The one thing that a range cannot be is an area of cells which can't be defined by two points. The top left cell (the start or anchor cell) and the bottom right cell (the free end cell) of the range defines its parameters. These two cells can be one and the same, defining a single cell. Range selection is done by using either the keyboard or the mouse. Whenever you need a range, you will be prompted to specify its parameters. At the same time, the cell indicator changes to indicate that it is awaiting a range selection. If the range consists of only one cell, you can move the cell indicator over that cell and press [Return]. If the range consists of a rectangular area, the easiest way to specify the range is by dragging the pointer with the mouse (that is, holding the mouse button down while you move the pointer). Actually, using the mouse gives you another option: specifying the range before beginning the command. In either case, to specify the range, press the mouse button down while the pointer is over the anchor cell, then drag the pointer to the range's end cell. A dotted-line rectangle will follow the pointer. When you let up on the mouse button, the range of cells covered by the dotted rectangle will be highlighted as the selected range, with the end or "free" cell highlighted differently. When you are creating your range, why don't you try moving all around the worksheet display while you are holding the mouse button down ? Notice how the range parameters change. While you are holding the mouse button down, you can change the borders of your range as much as you want. Only when you let up on the mouse key is the range actually selected and the borders determined. Until you press [Return] or click on the Checkmark icon in response to the range request, you may freely alter the range. To do so, move the pointer to the cell to be the new free cell, press the [Shift] key and click the mouse button. You can do this as often as you like. In fact this [Shift]-click procedure can also be used to specify a range which can't be displayed on the screen at one time. With the anchor cell selected, you can use any of the movement commands to go anywhere on the worksheet. When you get to where you want to go, [Shift]-click the desired cell as the free cell to select the range. You may instead elect to use the arrow keys to select your range. This method may only be used after a command prompt asking for a range. To use your arrow keys, place the cell indicator on the start cell. Next, press [.] once to set that cell as the anchor cell. Now, use the arrow keys to move the free cell wherever you wish. You will notice that the selected range becomes highlighted as you move. If you go too far and pass the end cell you want, you can back up until the cell indicator is over the right cell. Once you are satisfied with your range, press [Return] to enter it. Using the arrow keys, you may also use any of the tabbing, paging or other worksheet movement commands to get to the end of your range. The area covered during the move will be highlighted as part of the range. Page 27 Another option for entering the range is to type the cell addresses of the range. Just type the cell address of the start cell, a period and the address of the end cell. It will appear next to the prompt as you type. You will see two periods separating start and end cells, instead of the one you typed in. This is normal. Press [Return] to enter the range when you are finished specifying. While you are in the process of specifying your range, you may need to alter it. The [Escape] and [Backspace] keys are used to change the range. [Escape] will back you one step at a time through the process, first to the start cell, then back to the command. [Backspace] will only take you back to the start cell from the end cell. In a command which asks for a source range and a target range, once you have pressed [Return] to set the source range, only [Escape] will return you to the original command; [Backspace will have no effect. The range selection feature offers one other convenience. You have noticed that the start cell serves as a pivot for the range. This is why it is also called the anchor cell. When creating a range, you can rotate the anchor cell in a clockwise motion by pressing [.]. The free cell also moves clockwise to keep opposite from the anchor cell. The mouse equivalent of this is the block-shaped cross inside the Express icon. Each time you click your mouse while the pointer is over this cross, you are moved clockwise to the next corner. Once you've created a range, you can name it with one of the Range Name commands - to be specific, Range Name Create (/RNC). Naming ranges can be very useful. For example, you might wish to name different parts of your worksheet to create ranges for printing. You can also name ranges to simplify formula entry. Why not name your cells for their functions, such as "Profits", "Costs" and the like. In several cases, you will find it easier to refer to a cell or group of cells by their range name instead of by their location. This is mainly because it is easier to remember the name of something rather than its address. Page 28 Back to our Worksheet Example Going back to our sample worksheet, we only need to specify the range sought by the Range Label - prefix command. Press the mouse button while the pointer is on cell A3, and hold down the button while you drag the pointer to A14. Let up on the mouse button and click on the Checkmark icon. Voila! Each label of the range is centered in its cell. You can also use the keyboard. With the blinking indicator in A3, press [.] and then press [Down] until you get to A14. Press [Return] to enter it. Or, instead of using the [Down] key to move to the end cell, try using [Insert] [Down]. You will see that the cell indicator moved as surely to the cell A14 as if you had pressed [Down] to get there. Moving to the end of a column of figures is one of the more frequent uses of the tab feature of VIP Professional. Now do the same for the expense titles in cells B2 to H2 and your titles will be centered. Page 29 LESSON FIVE Moving Text About Copying Parts of Your Worksheet So far, entry of your data has been slow, perhaps even tedious. Each amount has been entered in each cell, and so on and so forth. To continue with the formulas, you could manually type in each formula in each cell, which can get to be quite tedious. Fortunately, the Copy command was designed to alleviate this tedium. The Copy command allows you to copy labels, values, formats or formulas from one cell or range to another. The power of this command will become obvious very soon. In the examples we have used so far, we entered one formula, the one in cell B3: You will recall that this formula calculates the effects of inflation on your monthly costs. Since the inflation rate has been assumed for the entire year, you would have to use the formula for each item and for each month to make the calculations work for the entire year. Furthermore, since the formula has to work in all the cells of column B (cell after cell), you would have to change the cell reference in the formula each time you entered it in another cell, The Copy command can do this - and more - for you. To best show how Copy works, we will use an example. We want to copy the formula in cell B4 down the entire column to reflect the increases due to inflation on the previous month's expenses. To begin, place the cursor on cell B4 and select Copy (/C). You will now be prompted for the range to be copied, and the target range. Any of the range selection techniques discussed previously can be used to specify ranges. The area to be copied is often called the "source range" and the area to which it will be copied is the "target range". Prompts will help you specify the ranges in the correct sequence. You are first asked to give the source range. You will notice that the cell indicator has changed to show that it is expecting you to specify a range. This is to tell you that you are in the point mode. The mode indicator has also changed to "Point". Our source range here is only cell B4, so press [Return] while the cell indicator is over cell B4. You are next asked for the target range. Let's try giving the target range with the mouse. Move the pointer to cell B5 and hold down the mouse button. This starts the range at that cell. You will notice that this coordinate, followed by a period, will be put after the "Target Range". VIP Professional is waiting for you to complete the range. Now drag the pointer down to B14, and let up. You will notice that the cell indicator has expanded all the way from B5 to B14. Cell B14 remains highlighted because you have not completed your range selection. You could still change the range by [Shift] - clicking the mouse key while the pointer is over a different cell, such as B13, or C15. For now, click on the Checkmark icon or press [Return] to signal you are finished with the range. Page 30 Using the keyboard can be almost as easy. The first thing to do after giving the source range (by pressing [Return] while the indicator is over cell B4) is to move the indicator to cell B5, using [Down]. Next press [.[ to anchor the cell. VIP Professional now waits for you to specify the end cell of the target range. Use the [Down] key to move the blinking indicator to cell B14. The cell indicator in cell B5 will expand to cover the cells as you move. You could move the indicator in any direction to expand or shrink your range. For our example, after you have moved the indicator to cell B14, press [Return]. The formula in cell B4 is copied in all the cells of column B from B5 to B14. One more way you could use Copy is by typing in the target range. First, enter the source range by pressing [Return] while the cell indicator is in B4. If the cell indicator had not already been in the source cell when you were prompted for the source range, you could have specified it by typing in its coordinates (column letter, then row number) and pressing [Return]. You will then be prompted for a target range. VIP Professional automatically assumes that the cell where the cell indicator sits is the start cell of the target range. This is not, however, where you want to start the target range. Therefore, type in "B5", then [.], and finally "B14". Press [Return] to enter it. If, at any time before entering both Copy ranges, you decide to start anew, press [Escape] or click the mouse button over the Escape icon once to erase either range. You may press [Escape] one more time or press [Control] [Undo] (for a break) to be returned to the Ready mode. Once back in the Ready mode, you can specify the source and target ranges from the beginning, or you may select another course of action. Relative and Mixed Cell References Coming back to our example, You will notice that although you copied a formula, all the cells show numbers. In fact, all the cells show increasingly greater numbers. This is just what you intended. The goal was to multiply the amount of the item of the previous month by the inflation factor of 1.005. But wait a minute. Wasn't the cell reference in the formula to B3 ? Sure, So why did the numbers get bigger ? Move the cell indicator to cell B5. Look at the cell reference there: The formula in that cell is: +B4*(1+.06/12). How did the B3 become B4 ? By some fancy footwork. If you check the formula from B4 to B14, you will notice that as you go down from cell to cell, The cell reference changes with each new cell. VIP Professional knew that as you moved through the months for your budget, you would want to continue to reflect the monthly increase due to inflation by multiplying the succeeding amounts of each month by the inflation rate. This change in cell reference is done automatically by VIP Professional to help you with your calculations. It is assumed that when you copy formulas, you want all cell references to be "relative". That is, you want the cell references to be changed to reflect the relative movement of the formula. Here, we want the formula to act on the preceding cell, so VIP Professional changed the cell reference to make sure this happened for each cell of the copy series. The program will make references relative in whatever direction the target area lies from the source range. Page 31 Here we go with part 2 of these very extensive VIP Professional docs .... Of course, sometimes you will not want the cell references to change. You want them to be "absolute". This would be helpful if you wanted the amount in every cell to be multiplied by the same amount every time. For example, we want the amount in each succeeding cell to be multiplied by the inflation rate. What if we did not calculate that rate in each cell with the formula (1+.06/12), but instead, got that number from, say, cell A1. The formula in cell B4 would then look like: +B3*A1. If we copied that formula from B4, and let VIP Professional use relative references, the formula in cell B14 would be: +B13*A11; Although we want the reference to cell B3 to change relative to the copy, we want the reference to A1 to stay the same. Otherwise, who knows what the result would be ? After all, A11 has the label "9-85". There is a way to let the reference to cell B3 change relative to the move while keeping the reference to cell A1 the same (that is, absolute). This would be done by editing the formula +B3*A1 to read: +B3*A$1. The "$" indicates to VIP Professional that the coordinate which follows is not to be altered during a copy. Since the coordinate "A" would not change during a copy down, you only have to put the "$" before the coordinate "1". When only half the reference is absolute, it is called a mixed reference. Of course, you could put a dollar symbol before both coordinates to be safe. This makes the reference absolute. Copying Whole Ranges Let's try out your knowledge about copying ranges with another example. With the cell indicator on cell B4, select Copy (/C). For the source range, press the mouse key while the pointer is over cell B4 and drag the pointer to cell B14. Let up on the mouse key and click on the Checkmark icon or press [Return]. To specify the target range, press the mouse key over cell C4, and drag it to H4, then let up. Click on the Checkmark icon or press [Return]. What you are doing is copying a portion of column B to column C through H. If you are using the keyboard, you should specify the source range by placing the cell indicator in cell B4, pressing [.], then moving the cell indicator with the [Down] key to cell B14 and pressing [Return]. Specify the target range by placing the cell indicator in cell C4, pressing [.] and moving the indicator to cell H4 using the [Right] key. Finally, press [Return] to finish the command. In either case, you do not have to indicate the entire target range from C4 to H14. Just the first and last cells of the first row will do fine. The program will know that you mean the entire range to be copied from there. Now, if you move the cell indicator to cell H4, you will notice that the cell reference has changed from B3 in cell B4 to H3 in cell H4. VIP Professional strikes again! What you have learned about relative, mixed and absolute references applies not only to the copy command, but to the Move command. After all, the Move command is just a Copy command combined with an Erase command. Let's do one more sample using the Copy command and then we'll move on to something new. Let's put a total line across the last amounts of the columns. First, select cell A15. Now type "\" is a label indicator which makes the following characters repeat across the cell. Here, we have the dash repeated across the cell. Now, use the Copy command to copy this cell from B15 to H15. You already know this, so go ahead: Page 32 Inserting Space for Beauty It's about time we make the sheet look a little more organized. I don't like to have my titles placed so close to the top of the worksheet. How about a little elbow room ? Let's insert some rows at the top of the sheet. Move the cell indicator to cell A1 and select Worksheet Insert Rows (/WIR). You are prompted for a range. The program wants to know how many rows to insert into your worksheet. For our example, we only want to insert one row, so just press [Return]. Now, use the Worksheet Insert Rows command again and insert some more rows to add as many rows as you like. Remember, use your arrow keys to show how many rows you want inserted from the point where the cell indicator rests when you start the command procedure. If you were to inspect cell B4, which has now been changed to cell B7, you will see that the cell reference has been changed from B3 to B6. VIP Professional always tries to keep the integrity of your worksheet. Cell references are changed to reflect insertions or deletions of columns or rows to make sure the calculations are always correct. Of course, labels will also be moved. Some Helpful @ Functions There are several functions which can be used as formulas or parts of formulas by VIP Professional. These are the @ functions. The @ functions, which (like formulas) are considered values, are system - supplied operations that can be used to perform special tasks, such as determining the sum of a column or row, finding the average of several figures, or performing logical operations. Many of these operations go beyond the simple arithmetic operations allowed by the system; others integrate frequently used formulas in one command to save you the effort of typing them each time. @ Functions start with the "@" symbol, followed by the name of the function. Since "@" indicates a value entry, no other formula marker is needed. Functions are often performed on an "argument" which must immediately follow the function and which must be enclosed by parentheses. The term "argument" is technical jargon meaning the object of the function. An argument specifies the values to be operated on. It may be a number, a cell reference or a series of numbers or data. The entire list of functions is contained in the section devoted to them. To acquaint you with the use of @ functions in this section, we will take you through an example using one of the most commonly used of these, the @SUM function. @SUM is used to find the sum of a series of numbers. We can use it with our sample worksheet to sub-total each of the expenses we have listed, and then to find the grand total of all our expenses during the year. @SUM takes a series of values as an argument. Obviously, when you take the sum of values, there has to be more than one value. The series is placed within parentheses. A series may consist of single cells, a range of cells, or a combination of both. If it consists of noncontiguous cells, each cell reference must be separated by a comma; the first and last cell of a range of cells must be separated by a period. There are two ways to specify a series: by typing in the values or their cell addresses, or by pointing to them. Page 33 Let's try it out. Here, we want to find the sum of the values in cells B6 to B17, then the sum of corresponding values in the next column and so on through column H. Then, we want to find the sum of these subtotals. The first step is to put the cell indicator on cell B21. Start the function by typing "@SUM(". Now to specify the series. You could just continue typing "B6.B17)" and press [Return] to enter it. That's OK when you know the coordinates cold. But when you are less sure, it is usually better to select the coordinates. To do this, move the pointer to cell B6, press the mouse button, and drag the pointer to cell B17, then let up on the mouse button. If you are working from the keyboard, move the blinking indicator to B17, press [.], then tab up to the start of the column. That'll take you to B3. In either case, you will see that the formula now looks like: @SUM(B6.B17. You're not quite done. If you press return now, VIP Professional will beep at you. You still have to close the parentheses. Do it, and press [Return]. The sum is shown in B21: Now, to get the sums of the other expenses, copy the function in B21 to a range from C21 to H21. You should know how to do this by now. Finally, add the subtotal sums for the grand total. Select cell H23. Then type: "@SUM(". Now select the range by dragging the pointer from B21 to H21. Or move the blinking indicator to H21, press [.], then tab left to get to B21. End the function with a ")" symbol and press [Return]. You have just completed a simple home budget for an entire year. You done good! Page 34 LESSON SIX Windows and Titles Introduction It has become obvious that even with the large worksheet display available with VIP Professional, you usually cannot view your entire worksheet at one time on the screen. This can be troublesome if you want to remember the titles of your categories as you view areas further down the worksheet or if you wish to compare the effects of changing the formula in column A on the results in column O or BK. Two VIP commands take care of these concerns: the Worksheet Window command and the Worksheet Titles command. Your Many Windowed Worksheet Sometimes, you need to compare different portions of your spreadsheet which are not on the screen at the same time. To do this, you would use the Worksheet Window command. The Window command allows you to divide your text into two separate screens, each of which displays a different part of the worksheet. This allows you to change a formula or figure in one part of your worksheet and immediately see the results in other related parts. For example, you might want to see how the change in one expense affects your assets, your gross earnings, and any number of other results which are not normally displayed on the screen at the same time. Windows use the same grid pattern as the original worksheet. All commands which will work on the worksheet as a whole, except commands for printing or saving, will work separately on each of the windows. You may create vertical or horizontal windows. Windows are created either through the Worksheet command menu or by using the mouse. Using the mouse is probably the easiest and certainly, the most fun way. If you move the cell pointer to the top of the worksheet window (below the columns border), you will notice that the pointer changes into a grooved square which is used as a grabber. It allows you to grab windows and columns. To create a horizontal split, grab the line below the columns border; to create a vertical split, grab the line to the right of the rows border. Just drag the line to where you want the screen split, and let up on the mouse button. If you want to go back to one window, grab the line and bring it back to where you got it from. From the Worksheet menu, windows are created at the position of the cell indicator. To create a horizontal window, place the cell indicator in the row which is to become the top row of your second window, and select Worksheet Window (/WW). Next, select Horizontal. The display will then be divided into two windows. The cell indicator will have moved up one row from where it was originally placed, into the source window. In our budget example, we might want to see how changing some of our expense assumptions in row 6 affects the totals in row 21. To do this, we would create a window at row 10. Using the mouse, drag the columns border line to row ten and let up on the mouse button. (Did you notice how the pointer turned into a grabber when you moved it to the columns border ?) Using the Worksheet menu, we would place the cell indicator in cell A10 and select Worksheet Window (/WW), then Horizontal (H). Page 35 Notice that the cell indicator moved to cell A9 from cell A10. This is normal. You are in the top window. To get to the second window, you can either select the desired cell with the mouse, select the Window Function from the VIP menu, or use [Function 6]. This will take you to the first row of the second window (A10, to be exact). Your windows initally use the same formats as the worksheet did before you created the windows. Later, you can change either window's format independently. As we've mentioned, you can use any of the commands on the individual windows. This excludes Print commands and some of the File commands. When you save your worksheet with windows set, these settings are saved too. Synchronizing Windows The Worksheet Windows command offers several options. You can choose a horizontal or vertical split for the window, you can control the synchronization of the movement of your windows and you can clear all the windows. To begin with, windows have synchronized scrolling in the direction of the split. This means that whenever you scroll one horizontal window to the left or right, both windows will scroll together, keeping the same columns on the screen. However, if you scroll up or down, the windows will move independently. The opposite result is obtained if you create a vertical window; scrolling up and down is linked, while horizontal scrolling is independent. In our example, move the cell indicator in window 1 to cell H6, which is off the screen right now. Notice how both windows now show column H: Now select the Window function [Function 6] to move the cell indicator into the lower window (or, if you are using the mouse, move the cell pointer to the lower window and click the mouse key). Scroll down until row 23 comes into view. Notice that the contents of the upper window remain the same while you are scrolling. With a horizontal window, you can freely move up and down without scrolling the other window. If you wanted to, you could unlink the scrolling altogether. To do this, you would select Worksheet Window Unsynchronized (/WWU). Scrolling is unlinked. Separate scrolling can be useful, for example, to keep one section of your worksheet on the screen while moving to areas farther away in the other window to make changes. Now that you have your windows in place, let's find out just how useful they are. With your mouse or arrow keys, move the cell indicator in the upper window to cell C6. Let's find out what happens if you buy another car, and thus double your car payments. Change the amount in cell C6 to $400. After you do this, you will be able to see the resulting change to your yearly total for car payments and to your grand total in the lower window. You could change any other amount or ask "What if ?" questions as well. Without the windows, you would have to make the change, scroll to the Totals row and see the result of the change, then move back, and so on. If you wish to eliminate your windows, you may use the grabber to drag the line back from where it came, or you can select Worksheet Window Clear (/WWC). When you do this, the screen will no longer be split, and the cell indicator will return to its last position. Page 36 Locking Titles You have noticed that, as you scrolled to see the amounts in the Utilities column, the month/year column scrolled off the screen. As you scrolled to see the amounts in the totals rows, the labels at the top of the sheet scrolled off the top. This could be downright inconvenient, since you need to remember which month and which category each amount is assigned to. To help with this common problem, A Worksheet Titles command has been created. The Worksheet Titles command is used to "freeze" your "titles" in place, horizontally, vertically, or both, so that they will stay on the screen while you scroll the rest of your worksheet. Titles is a term for any data you have in a particular row or column, or both, which helps label the information in your worksheet. A good example is the month/year information in column A and the categories in row 4 of the worksheet. With the Worksheet Titles command you can freeze your titles in the direction you want so that they stay on the screen while the rest of the worksheet scrolls. Let's use the Worksheet Titles command to freeze the row and column of labels in our budget. Freezing titles is controlled by the position of the cell indicator. Titles are frozen from columns to the left and/or in rows above the cell indicator to the end of the current screen display. Here move the cell indicator to cell B6 and select Worksheet Titles (/WT). Then, select Both (B) since you wish to freeze both the information in column A and the information above row 6. These titles are now frozen. The split created by the titles command is shown by a solid line below and/ or to the right of the columns and/or rows locked in. When you scroll the worksheet, the titles will stay in place while the rest of the worksheet moves. For example, move the cell indicator to cell H22. Notice that in the column indicator at the top of the worksheet, column A is not followed by column B. Column B has scrolled off the sheet so that column H can be displayed. Also, on the row indicator, the next row after row 5 is not 6. Now try to move the cell indicator into cell A1 using your arrow keys. Any way you try, you won't be able to move the cell indicator to cell A1. This is a protection feature. It is assumed that you want the titles to stay the same, since they label your worksheet. VIP Professional therefore protects your titles from accidental alteration. There are, however, some ways to get the cell indicator to a cell in the Titles area. The first way is by using the GoTo command [Function 5]. By using this command, you can alter any of the titles. The other way to move into a Titles area is by using your mouse to move the cell pointer into the Titles area, then clicking the mouse button. In either case, you will not actually enter the Titles area. Instead, a duplicate set of cells will be created starting with the cell selected. Any changes you make to these cells will also appear in the Titles area. The next time you scroll or page, the duplicate cells will appear. If you no longer want your titles frozen, you can unfreeze them with the Worksheet Titles Clear selection (/WTC). Page 37 LESSON SEVEN Graphing Your Budget Introduction Vip Professional has advanced graphics capabilities. Using data from your worksheet, VIP allows you to create five different types of graph, display them in color or black and white, then print them. The different types of graph are: Pie chart, Bar graph, Stacked - bar graph, Line graph and XY graph. To make each of these graphs more useful, you are allowed to add labels, grid lines, titles, etc. These options, along with other commands used especially for graphs, are governed by the Graph menu. Making a Graph in Three Steps The first job in creating any graph is to organize your spreadsheet so that data can be used in the graph. To be used, all graph data must fit within a range or ranges. Using ranges to create a graph is most easily shown by actually creating a graph from our budget. The next step is to choose the kind of graph we want to show. To do this, select Graph Type (/GT). We want to make a Bar graph, so select Bar. The third thing you have to do is specify the range for the graph. You can have up to six ranges, that's the A thru F in the Graph menu. The different ranges are for graphing different sets of data. We only want to graph one set of data: the yearly expense totals in cells B21 to H21. Since we only want to graph one set of data, we will first move the cell indicator to the first cell of the range, B21, then select the Graph A range (/GA). You will have to specify the range in response to a prompt. Use one of the methods we described in Lesson Four. Now that you have specified the range of cells for your graph, you have almost enough information to create the simplest possible graph. The next thing we want to do is specify whether to see the graph in color or in black and white. For now, we'll just stick with the default setting of black and white. Let's look at our graph. Select Graph View (/GV) and a simple Bar graph will appear on your screen: You will notice that the graph has its own window. This window works just like the other windows in GEM. You can move it around the screen by dragging the Title bar, make it shrink or grow with a Full box, and make it disappear by using the Quit box. When you click on the worksheet window, the graph will go into the background and the worksheet becomes active. To reselect the graph, either click on the graph window or select Graph View. Whenever you reselect a graph it, will be updated with the latest data. Let's look at what we have on the graph. You see seven bars on it. The bars have an identical pattern. The color of the bars depends on the colors you choose (from the Control Panel item of the Desk menu). When you started the work session. Patterns and colors are used to help distinguish different ranges if you are graphing more than one range or set of data of the same range, each bar uses the same pattern and color. On the left side of the graph are scaling numbers. VIP Professional automatically creates a scale from the data it has been supplied, with the largest and smallest number, and standard increments in between controlling the scale. Page 38 OK, your graph looks good already. You can get back to your worksheet. If you are using a mouse, move the cell pointer back to the worksheet and click the mouse key. This makes your worksheet window "active" and the graph window "inactive". With a mouse, you may decide to keep the worksheet and graph windows displayed side by side on the screen so that you can easily move back and forth. If you are using the keyboard, [Escape] will erase the graph display and return you to the worksheet display. Some Graph Options This is still a fairly dull graph. It tells you nothing, since there are no titles, labels or legends. We definitely want to have these. First, let's label each bar. Your graph has an X line and a Y line. The X line is the one across the bottom; the Y line is the one on the left side. Your labels go along the X line. There is a special command for assigning such labels to a Bar graph: Graph X (/GX). When you select it, you will be asked for a range of labels. The X line labels are obtained from your spreadsheet. You will either use a range on your sheet which already exists or create a range for use. We already have a perfect range for our example: the labels in cells B4 to H4. If the Worksheet Titles command is still in effect (remember the locked title you created in the last chapter ?), you will probably use the GoTo function (Function 5) to move the cell indicator to B4 so that you can select the range. Once the cell indicator os over the cell B4, you can select a range using the same method as you did with the Graph A command. Now, select Graph View (/GV) to take a look at your graph: It looks a little messy. The problem is that your graph can only display a certain amount of characters (depending on the font style and size) on a line. It had to truncate all your labels to get them to fit. To make the labels look neater, you could either shorten each of the labels in cells B4 to H4, or copy that range to B25 to H25, shorten the names in the copied range and select that range for your X labels. Let's do the latter so we don't have to change the budget itself. First, use the Copy command (/C), with the source range as B4 to H4, and the target range as B23. Next, shorten the labels of the target range to: Mtg; Car; Edu; Food; Insur; Clothes; and Util. Now select Graph X, with the range B25 to H25. Move the cell pointer to the graph window and click the mouse key to activate it or, if you are working from the keyboard, select Graph View (/GV): To view your graph again, you could have used the Graph function [Function 10] instead of /GV. The Graph function can be issued from the keyboard or from the VIP menu. However, it is used in the Ready mode, not the Menu mode. Are you getting the knack of graphing yet ? Its amazing how your learning begins to get easier as soon as you've learned some of the basic concepts of the program. One of the last things we'll do with this graph is put in titles. Select Graph Options Titles (/GOT). We'll give a name to the graph, then we'll label the Y axis. Select First (F). You will be asked to give a name. Let's type in: "1985 Household Budget" and press [Return]. Now select Y and type in: "Yearly Total" and press [Return]. Page 39 Let's look at your graph again. Move the cell pointer back into the Graph window and click the mouse key or, if you are using the keyboard, select Graph View (/GV) or use the graph function: There's much more you can do with a graph, but your sample one will give you an idea of how easy it is to make a graph. Graph options are discussed further in the Reference Guide. Let's do one last thing: change our graph type. Select Graph Type (/GT). Now, select Pie. This'll change the type. Select Graph View or use the Graph function to take a look: You will notice that the X labels are now used to label different parts of your Pie, and that the title of your graph is still there but the Y title is gone. VIP Professional has automatically calculated the percentage each expense is of your total budget. That's just how the Pie chart works. You can change to different types of graph at any time. Of course, some types of graph require different types of data. The Stacked - Bar graph and XY graphs each need more than one range of data to be useful. The chapters on Graphs in the Reference Guide explains this in detail. Saving graph settings with a worksheet file and saving a graph in a graph file are discussed in the chapter, "Graph Commands". Printing of graphs is done in one of two ways. You may either "screen print" your graph using the built-in screen feature of your Atari ST computer, or you may use the Graphprint program supplied with VIP Professional. The GraphPrint program provides a convenient means to print your graph with enhancements. Its use requires that the graph be saved using the Graph Save command of VIP Professional. The GraphPrint program is discussed in Appendix A. On the other hand, you may only want a quick, convenient "picture" of what you have on your screen. In that case, you can use the screen print function. To screen print, all you have to do after you have set up your printer is press [Alt][Help]. A copy of what appears displayed on the screen will be printed out. For more information, consult your Atari ST user's manual. Page 40 LESSON EIGHT Saving, Retrieving and Printing Your Worksheet Introduction Now that you know the fundamentals of how to make a worksheet, you are probably wondering how you can print it, save it for later use or combine it with another program. Printing your worksheet is controlled by the Print commands, and the commands of the File menu are used for saving and retrieving your worksheet (Among other things). Your worksheet data has two separate aspects. One is the underlying commands for formulas, formats and display options which you have used to create your worksheet. The second is the display of the results of the underlying formulas, etc. In other words, the first aspect is of the work you put into the worksheet, the second aspect is of the end results. This dichotomy helps to explain a number of things. One important point to remember is the difference in memory required for both aspects. Although a file may take quite a bit of memory when displayed for use, it may only take a little bit of space when it is saved. This is because the amount of actual memory required to save the raw data is different from the amount of memory required to process and display that data. One thing you should know is that there is no direct correlation between the amount of disk space used to store the raw data and the amount of memory the worksheet will consume while it is being used. When you save your worksheet to disk, what you are really doing is saving the underlying raw data used to create the sheet. You are not saving exactly what you see on your screen. Still, there are times when you want to save what you see on your screen instead, such as when you want to include it in a letter or report. The "File Commands" chapter of the Reference Guide discusses the file commands for this thoroughly. On the other hand, when you print your worksheet, you normally want to print what you see on the screen, not the underlying formulas and data. Yet, there are still times when you will want to print the underlying data. Printing underlying data is useful for comparing formulas or for entering the data in a program other than VIP Professional. Page 41 Saving Your Worksheet To save your worksheet, the first thing you must do is place a data disk in your drive. Next, select File Save (/FS). A list of current file names is displayed and you are prompted for the name to be given to the file you want to save. You can specify the name either by highlighting it using the arrow keys or the mouse, or by typing it in. In any event, once the name has been selected, you must press [Return] or click "OK" with your pointer. Since there are not, as yet, any files on your data disk, give your worksheet the name, "Budget" and press [Return]. The first thing VIP Professional will do is check your data disk to ascertain whether there is already a file on the disk with that name. If there were, you would be asked whether you wish to replace (press [R}) that file with the new contents of the worksheet or cancel (press [C]) your request to save it. If you are using a mouse, you can click the mouse key over Cancel to cancel the save or over Replace to replace the old contents with the new. Since there is not yet a file on the disk called "Budget", the file will be saved without prompting. However, when you next save the file "Budget", you will be prompted. To see if the file has been saved to the disk, select File List (/FL). Then, select Worksheet (W). A list of all worksheet files on your data disk will be shown. You will see the name "Budget.wks" among them if it has been saved. VIP Professional has given your file a three character extension of "wks". This stands for "worksheet". This is just one of the extensions used By VIP Professional to help organize data. Other extensions are used to distinguish files "printed" to disk (.prn), and graph files saved to disk for printing (.gph). Don't worry about the extensions just yet. VIP Professional automatically knows which one is the right one and will attach it to the file names. Retrieving a Worksheet Once you have saved a worksheet, you can retrieve it form the disk with the File Retrieve command (/FR). If you were starting another session with VIP Professional and wanted to retrieve the saved worksheet called "Budget", you would use this command. From other programs, only files with the extension ".wks" can be loaded with the File Retrieve command. Once you have selected File Retrieve, you will be presented with a list of current data files, provided you have a data disk in your drive. You may select the appropriate file by highlighting it using the mouse or the arrow keys, or you may type in the file name. Press [Return] to enter your selection and the file will be loaded. The File menu has several other useful commands for extracting and importing files and the like. See the chapter on File commands in the Reference section for more information. Page 42 Printing Your Worksheet Display The Print menu controls actual printing of copies, as well as the saving of the display for use with other programs. Obtaining "hard copy" of your worksheet results can be important for your records, for your reports or for comparison of results. On the other hand, you may wish to include parts of your worksheet in a report generated with another computer program, such as a word processor. For this, you would "print" your worksheet to a file on your disk, rather than sending it to a printer. In this case we will be printing to the printer. The first thing to do is to make sure that the ST is set up to work with your printer. For this, consult the ATARI OWNER"S MANUAL and your printer's manual. Next, make sure that your printer is turned on, and has paper inserted. Now, on to the printing. The fundamentals of printing are quite simple. (A considerable section is devoted to printing in the Reference Guide so that you can learn all the fine points.) VIP Professional prints the display of your worksheet only. It will print your data exactly as it appears on the screen, including all your special formats (ignoring windows). The program prints whatever range or ranges that you specify. You can print a selected portion of your spreadsheet or the whole thing. To initiate printing, you select Print (/P). You are immediately presented with a choice of printing the worksheet to Printer or File. Let's go to the Printer (P). The next step is to specify the Range. Select Range (R) from the Print Printer menu. You will then be asked to specify the range for printing. You should be familiar with how to set ranges by now. Remember that the Express icon can be quite useful in selecting the end cell of your worksheet. When this is done, select Align (A) to tell the program that it will be beginning at the top of a new sheet of paper. Then, select Go (G) for printing to start. Your worksheet will be sent to the printer one row at a time. What is printed is limited only by the size of the paper - it's width and length. If the worksheet is longer than one sheet of paper, it will continue to be printed on successive sheets of paper until it is all printed. Similarly, if the worksheet is too wide to be printed across one sheet of paper, after all the rows have been printed, the system will return to the first row and resume printing at the column where it left off. Those are the basics of printing. If you decide to alter the margins or use special features of your printer, you will have to consult the section devoted to printing options in, "Print Commands" of the Reference Guide. However you have formatted your text, if you choose to print to a print file rather to the printer, you should select File rather than Printer. When you choose Go, your work is sent to a print file. Print files are mainly used for importing and exporting text or for sending with a modem. They cannot be retrieved on VIP once they are saved. Instead, they can be retrieved by using a standard ASCII text processor. To make matters simpler, printed files are automatically saved with a default extension of ".prn". VIP Professional will not become confused when loading actual raw data for spreadsheets. Also, you will be able to distinguish which files you can combine with other application programs (the ones with the ".prn" extension). If the work you want to print can be contained in one screen, you may decide just to go ahead and screen print it. When you press [Alternate] and [Help], your printer will print exactly what appears on the screen. Page 43 NOW WHAT ? Now that you have gotten through this tutorial, you should have a lot of questions about all the different commands and functions at your disposal, and how you can best use them. Great! The reference section of the manual is devoted to discussing the commands and features available with each of the menus, including the Copy, Move and Quit commands and several other menus we haven't't discussed in the Tutorial. We'll discuss formulas in depth and introduce you to such subjects as building macros. The appendices contain information on how to print graphs and other useful subjects. You should also be sure to use the index to help you find the information you need for using this program. As was stated earlier in the manual, spreadsheet programs have become very standard, and many books have been written about them. Therefore, advice on how best to create worksheets to meet your specific needs and what type of pitfalls to avoid when creating them will be left to those excellent works. Consult Appendix B for a list of several popular and excellent works. Depending on your experience, you will almost certainly wish to consult one or more of these works since they contain many fine suggestions, hints, guidelines and warnings which should be heeded, not to mention the many templates (or designs for specific types of worksheets) which can make your job of creating a worksheet simpler. For optimal use of the program, we highly recommend that you use one of those books along with this manual. Page 44 REFERENCE GUIDE INTRODUCTION Now that you have finished the VIP Professional Tutorial, you have become familiar with the program's general capabilities. The VIP Professional Reference Guide describes each of the commands and features of the program in greater depth. Since it is quite detailed, we suggest that you read each section when and as you need it instead of going through the Reference Guide page by page. We do recommend that you read the first chapter before you read any other section of the Reference Guide. The first chapter describes the rules of data entry, along with explaining the use of different modes. The chapter ends with a description of the ten special functions which perform specific, advanced operations. The chapter on formulas gives you information about when to use formulas and how they should be structured so that they can be calculated by VIP Professional. Different types of values, including the use of cell references to indicate values, are discussed. We also describe the operators (such as addition and subtraction) and @ functions. The next chapter is devoted to keyboard macros. Keyboard macros are also known as typing alternatives. Keyboard macros attach a string of keystrokes (labels, commands, formulas and just about anything else which can be done from the keyboard) to a letter. When this letter is typed as a keyboard macro, the string of keystrokes associated with it is inserted in its place on the worksheet. There are several special commands associated only with macros which are explained in this chapter. The last chapters of the Reference Guide are devoted to menu - related commands. These commands are arranged into different chapters, according to which menu they stem from. The first of the chapters introduces menu commands in general and gives information on using them. The chapter also describes the three independent commands Move, Copy and Quit. The second chapter of menu - related commands covers the special menus, Desk and VIP. One of these menus (Desk) gives you information about the program and allows you to select such things as printer configuration and screen color. The other menu offers the ten special functions. It has one additional item called, "Goodies" which allows you to do such things as change type size and turn the grid display on and off. The following six chapters cover each of the main menu items which govern separate aspects of the VIP Professional Program. The main menu items are: Worksheet, Range, File, Data, Graph and Print. We won't introduce the chapters individually here because it would take too long. However, each chapter is begun with an introduction which gives an overview of the aspect of VIP Professional the menu is responsible for and the various commands which stem from it. The in-depth explanations of the Reference Guide are supplemented by a quick reference card which comes with your VIP Professional. The quick reference card presents you with easily accessible information on how to execute popular commands and functions. If you have problems locating information you need, there is a detailed index in the rear of this manual which can point you in the right direction. Four appendices ("Using Graphprint", "How to Use Files Created with Lotus 1-2-3", Reference Works" and "Introducing ASCII") give you further information on subjects not directly related to the VIP Professional Program. Page 45 VIP Professional also offers on-line help to guide you through rough going. This on-line help is in the form of commands available to you (how to issue them and what they do). The help you receive applies directly to the area you are working in. In some cases, it can be your most immediate source of assistance, so don't forget to take advantage of it! A SUMMARY OF WORKSHEET BASICS Setting Entries When in any cell, you can type an entry (value, formula or label) or issue a command. If you type an entry, you must enter it in the cell by pressing [Return] or by using one of the movement keys. While you are typing the entry, it will appear across the Edit line so you can see if you are making mistakes. A blinking cursor underscores the position of your next potential character. If there was an entry already in the cell, you can choose to edit the existing entry by going into the Edit mode or you may simply replace it with a new one by typing the new one in and entering it. The entry of the current cell appears on the Status line as well as in the cell. [Return is used to enter (or "set") values, labels and formulas in a worksheet. It signals to the computer that you have finished keying in information and that the computer can now process it. If you are using a mouse, clicking it once is an alternative to pressing [Return]. The arrow and other movement facilities can also be used to set entries in the Label or Value modes. After setting the entry, a movement key will move your position on the worksheet according to its function. For example, you may use [Right] to set an entry. After it sets the entry, it moves the cell indicator one cell to the right. Except for paging commands and [Up] and [Down], the movement keys are not used to enter data from the Edit mode. This is because the Edit mode has its own uses for the movement keys. Page 46 Different Types os Entries When you enter data, VIP Professional knows the difference between three possible types of entries by prefixes used or by the first character of the entry. It is important that VIP Professional be able to tell the difference between these entries because each is used differently. Values are the simplest type of entry. They can be used by calculations in other sections of the worksheet. Values are typed in as a number and [Return] is pressed to enter it. No prefix is needed. Labels, unlike values, are usually text. They act as headings or explanations and are not used to calculate other areas of the worksheet. If you start typing text rather than numbers or number indicators (such as operational signs). VIP Professional understands that you are entering a label and goes into the label mode. An interesting difference between values and labels is that if a value does not fit in a cell, VIP remembers it but does not display it unless a format is used which allows a value to change to an exponent. Instead, on the other hand, can spill over into the cell to the right if they do not fit within a cell, provided that the cell to the right is empty. This feature allows text processing. You are not limited to one-word titles. Instead, you can add sentences or even paragraphs of explanatory text to your worksheet. There are four label-prefix characters which are used to indicate individual alignment for labels. If there is any doubt about whether you are entering a number or a label, these label prefixes remove it. In addition, they decide the positioning of the label in the cell. The four label prefixes are: ' for left alignment, " for right alignment, ^ for centering and \ for repeating the keystroke series across the cell. For instance, if you have a label such as " 3rd Quarter", VIP Professional might assume that it is a value from the first character. However, if you use the ' character as a label prefix, there is no doubt that you intend it to be a label and that it should be aligned to the left edge of its cell. Label prefixes are discussed further in the "Range Commands" and "Worksheet Commands" chapters, under the Worksheet Global Label-prefix and the Range Label-prefix commands. Commands, which also use letters, are preceded by the command prefix (the / character) so as not to be confused with labels. Formulas are basically values. We only discuss them separately from values because they are more complicated than the average value. A narrow definition of formulas is that they are calculations which result in a certain value. It is this resulting value - and not the formula - which is usually displayed in the worksheet. Formulas are discussed fully in the chapter, "Building Formulas Using Operators and Functions". Page 47 Using Different Modes VIP Professional distinguishes between the process used for entering a value/formula and entering a label by using different modes. These and several other modes are important when you consider that different things are done in each mode. For instance, the Point mode allows you to point to cells (or use cell addresses) as parts of formulas. There are several different modes and processes used by VIP Professional. The more frequently used ones are: Ready, Label, Value, Point, Edit, Menu, Error, Wait and Find. Each mode governs which actions you may take and the effects of certain commands or keystrokes. The mode you are in is shown by the mode indicator. The Ready mode is the one in which the program starts. When you complete some action, VIP Professional returns to the Ready mode in preparation for your next action. From this mode, you are allowed to issue a command or start entering data. When you are in the Ready mode, you can also use your mouse and movement keys to move to any part of the worksheet. However, when you start invoking menu commands, the Ready indicator is erased from the screen. Until you are finished with or escape from the command sequence, you will not be able to move about your worksheet (this excludes such things as specifying ranges in response to prompts). When you start typing a label prefix or text (excluding commands), VIP Professional places you in the Label mode. Anything entered while you are in the Label mode is treated as a label, not as a value/formula even if it is a number. Labels have different properties than values. The difference will become more apparent as your experience with VIP grows. You must complete the entry or press [Escape] to return to the Ready mode before you can move around the worksheet. When you start typing a number or a number indicator (such as an operational sign), VIP Professional places you in the Value mode so that you may enter a formula or a value. When you have entered the value or if you press [Escape], VIP Professional returns to the Ready mode. If, at some point when you are entering a formula in the Value mode you start to point at a cell which is to be included in a formula, VIP Professional will immediately change to the Point mode. Once you have pointed to and set a cell reference in a formula, VIP Professional returns to the Value mode. The fifth mode, the Edit mode, is used by VIP Professional for both labels and values. It provides you with more sophisticated editing procedures than those otherwise available. The Edit mode causes a value or label entry to appear on the Edit line as well as on the Status line. A blinking cursor appears at the end of the entry. You may move this cursor to any character of the entry and change that part without affecting the rest of the entry. When you reenter the value or label, the newly edited version will be used. Menu appears in the mode indicator when you are selecting one of the menu commands. Until you are finished with a command sequence, or use [Escape] or [Break], you are limited to making the choices offered by the commands. You cannot start a command sequence, then, choose to move around the worksheet and edit some entries. The Error mode only occurs when Professional realizes you made a mistake. The mode indicator changes to "Error". A prompt may be displayed on the screen to explain the type of mistake you have made. Once you have corrected your mistake (you may also have to confirm one of the options associated with the prompt), the prompt disappears and the mode indicator returns to Ready. Page 48 The Wait mode is used when VIP Professional is processing a command. During this mode, no commands can be invoked or data entered. The Find mode is similar to the Wait in that no commands can be invoked or data entered during its duration. The Find mode is used during a Data Query operation, while the Professional is seeking for the records which meet the specific criteria. How Modes Affect Keyboard Commands As we stated earlier in this section, different keystrokes have different effects in each of these modes. In the Ready Mode: When you are in the Ready mode, the mouse and the movement keys are used to move you around the worksheet. The movement commands are described in "Getting to Know VIP Professional". From the Ready mode, you may also begin to enter data or invoke a command. In the Label, Value or Point Mode: In the Label or Value modes, you have several functions available. These functions are: [Escape], [Break], [Delete] and [Backspace]. The functions are also available in the Point mode, but their use is slightly different then. [Escape] and [Break] are used in command sequences as well as modes to move you backward one step at a time (with [Escape]) or through the whole series to the Ready mode (with [Break]). By using [Escape] before you enter a label or value, you can cancel your entry and return to the Ready mode. Pointing to the Escape icon and clicking the mouse key has the same effect as [Escape] on labels or values: it cancels the entry on the Edit line. Another function used in the Label and Value modes is [Backspace]. When [Backspace] is used while typing a label or a value, VIP Professional moves the cursor one space backward and erases the character. To Use Press: Break [Control][Undo] Escape [Escape] Backspace [Backspace] If you are entering a formula and pointing to cell addresses, you are placed in the Point mode. To go back to the Ready mode from there and without setting the formula, you may use [Escape] twice. On the other hand, if you are in the Point mode, you may issue a [Break] as a shortcut. A [Break] will move you back to the Ready mode by automatically causing you to [Esacpe] from each mode you have gone through since you last left the Ready mode. Not only do you revert to the previous mode each time you press [Escape], but, when you are in the Point mode, any cell you have just pointed to has its address removed from the formula you are entering. Using [Backspace] may therefore result in a circular reference formula (a formula which uses a reference which depends on the formula). It deletes the cell reference you just made while replacing it with the cell address of the formula cell. Page 49 In the Edit Mode: The Edit mode may be entered in one of two ways. First you may to choose to enter the Edit mode whenever you are in the Ready, Label or Value modes by pressing [Function 2] or selecting Edit from the VIP menu. In addition, the system automatically places you in the Edit mode whenever you are prompted for data input from a command, or whenever you have made an error in data input which is caught by VIP. When in the Edit mode, the following keys have the specified functions: EDIT FUNCTIONS If You Press You Will: [Delete] Delete the character under the cursor [Backspace] Delete the preceding character [Home] Move to the entry's first character [Insert] Move to the entry's last character [Tab][Right] Move five characters to the right [Tab][Left] Move five characters to the left [Right] Move one character to the right [Left] Move one character to the left * Any character key Inserts text In addition to the [Delete], [Backspace] and movement functions, you may also insert characters while you are in the Edit mode. VIP Professional does not replace already existing characters with those which are inserted. Instead, inserted characters are simply added at the spot indicated by the position of the cursor. The movement keys are used in the Edit mode to move to a certain area in the label or value that needs to be corrected. [Backspace], [Delete] and insert feature are used to correct the mistakes. The arrow keys use the same repeat feature which they do in the Ready mode. Instead of having to press the arrow key repeatedly to move more than one space, you can continue to hold the key down after pressing it. Page 50 Special Functions VIP Professional has ten special functions which help with various aspects of the program. These special functions are discussed further in the areas which pertain to them. However, we would like to present you with an overview of them here. The functions can be reached from the keyboard by using the ten function keys. These ten special functions are also included in the VIP menu. Choosing the ten functions through their menu is discussed further in the Reference Guide under, "Desktop and VIP Commands". Function number Function Name 1 Help 2 Edit 3 Name 4 Absolute 5 GoTo 6 Window 7 Query 8 Table 9 Calculate 10 Graph [Function 1] is the Help function. If you are using a mouse, you may also get help by clicking over the Help icon. From the keyboard, you may also press the [Help] Key. If the Help disk isn't in the disk drive, your computer will beep and send you a prompt, which lets you know that you need to insert the Help disk or cancel the request. Help offers you condensed explanation of commands available to you in different aspects of your work along with directions on their execution. To return to your worksheet, press [Escape]. [Function 2] is the Edit function. From the Ready mode, this invokes the Edit mode. In this mode, you may edit the value or label entry of the cell you are currently in. Once you enter the label or value, VIP Professional will return to the Ready mode. If you are in the Edit mode when you use this function, VIP Professional moves to the mode you were in before entering the Edit mode. [Function 3] is the Name function. In the Point mode, when you are prompted for a range, this function causes VIP Professional to display a list of your worksheet's currently named ranges. You may clear the list by choosing a name (point to one of its names and enter it) or you may simply press [Escape]. [Function 4] is the Absolute function. This function offers an alternative to the Absolute icon. While in the Point mode, it causes the cell or range you are referencing in a formula to be a relative, absolute or mixed reference (see "Building Formulas Using Operators and Functions" for a discussion of the three types of references). Before using [Function 4], point to the cell whose address you wish to use in the formula. The Absolute icon will appear in the control panel. You may either click on it or press the [Function 1] to make the cell reference absolute. If you continue to use the Absolute function, the address will cycle through the possibilities from completely absolute to mixed to completely relative. When the desired address type has been obtained, you may go back to the formula. Example: Using the [Function 4] on A1=$A$1 - A$1 - $A1 - A1 - $A$1 ... Page 51 [Function 5] is the GoTo function. This function, along with a typed and entered cell address, moves you to that cell whether it is protected or not. It can also be used to reach cells normally inaccessible in a Titles area (created by the Worksheet Titles command). [Function 6] is the Window function. This function is used after you have created two different windows with the Worksheet Window command or with the cell pointer as grabber. By using this function, you can move from one window to another. If you are using a mouse, you may also move the cell pointer from window to window, then click the mouse. [Function 7] is the Query function. After you use the Data Query command to find certain records, VIP Professional allows you to reapply this command using the most recently specified input range, criterion range and (if applicable) output range with the Query function. [Function 8] is the Table function. This function allows you to recalculate the table in the Data Table 1 or the Data Table 2 command (depending on which was most recently used). Along with the most recently used data table, the Table function uses the most recent input cell(s) in its calculation. If you've just used Reset, the function is disabled until you specify another range and input cell(s). [Function 9] is the Recalculate function. It forces a recalculation of the entire sheet. It may be used at any time. However, it is usually used in either of two situations. The first is when you have elected to use manual recalculation. When you enter data after having selected manual recalculation, the program will not recalculate the sheet automatically. Instead, you must manually force recalculation when you have finished entering your data. To recalculate, either click on the Recalculate icon or press [Function 9]. The other use for the Recalculate function is to calculate the result of a formula - a sort of built-in calculator. Whenever you are in the Value or Edit modes and are working on a formula, you may click on the Recalculate icon or press [Function 9] to make the program calculate the result of the formula on the Edit line. Since this will permanently change the formula into the resulting value, if you wish to continue to use the formula as is, you should first enter the formula into a cell and then perform this function in the Edit mode when you have a duplicate of the entered formula. When you press [Escape], the calculated version of the formula is erased, while the previously entered version remains. [Function 10] is the Graph function. The Graph function is identical to the Graph View command. Used from the Ready mode, it allows you to see the most recently drawn graph. This function is particularly helpful when you are working on a graph and want to see how all the changes made in a worksheet affect your graph. As with the Graph View command, once you have finished viewing the graph, you may return to your worksheet by pressing [Escape] or by using any of the mouse options discussed in "Graph Commands". Page 52 BUILDING FORMULAS Using Operators and Functions Introduction This chapter defines formulas and describes how they can be built using operators and/or functions. An entire chapter is being devoted to formulas because, unlike labels or other value entries, the creation of formulas offers many possibilities and powerful features. The purpose of this chapter is to provide you with information about constructing a formula for a VIP Professional worksheet. In addition, we will list and describe all the operators and functions available with Professional. Formulas can effect either single cells, or large portions of your worksheet. As you become more comfortable with them, you will find ways of using formulas in combination with a variety of VIP commands. For instance, as you discovered in the Tutorial, the Copy command may prove particularly useful for extending the power of a single formula because, with it, you can copy a formula many times over. In addition, the Worksheet and Range Protect and Unprotect commands offer flexibility by allowing you to protect your formulas from accidental change. Defining Formulas A formula is an instruction for VIP Professional to calculate a number (or value). Formulas may be entered in any cell. Often you will construct your worksheet using both values and formulas. Many formula cells depend on value cells because they use these contents of value cells to obtain results for the formula. For this reason, value cells are called input cells. The cells containing formulas which reference the input cells are the output cells. There are four general rules which apply to formulas: 1. A formula must begin with one of the following characters: 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,.,+,-,(,@,#, or $. All characters other than the numerical ones, the decimal point, and $ (which is the absolute symbol) are operators. + and _ can double as operators and as indicators of positive and negative values. 2. Like values, formulas appear in the control panel of the screen on the Edit line as you type them. [Return] (or any of the methods used for setting values described in "A Summary of Worksheet Basics") signals that you are finished typing the formula and that it is to be entered into its cell. While in the Edit mode, formulas can easily be edited using standard editing functions. 3. A formula may not contain space characters when it is typed in. 4. Every formula consists of values and operators and/or @functions. Depending on the calculation type, when you refer to a value, you can either type in the numbers for it, use a cell address to indicate that the cells contents be used as values, or you may specify a range by name or by cell addresses. An operator is a character which defines the operation performed on the value(s). An @function begins with "@" and a name which defines its operation. Page 53 Typing Characters Typing the characters which symbolize the values and operation(s) is the simplest way to set up a calculation. To enter a formula this way, you must begin it with a formula prefix (one of the seventeen characters listed above) if it doesn't already start with one. Then, type in the characters of the first value, the symbol of the operator, followed by the characters of the next value and so on in a string until you reach the end of the formula. Do not use [=] to end the formula. Press [Return] to enter it. Using Cell References in a Formula There are two ways in which a value can be entered in a formula by referencing its cell. You may type the cell address or you may point to it using the mouse or movement keys. If you include cell references in a formula, VIP Professional automatically uses the values stored at the referenced cell whenever it calculates the formula. When there are changes to the contents of the referenced cells, VIP uses the new values and updates the formulas' results upon recalculation. To avoid confusion, we call those cells in which a formula is entered formula cells. The cells which are used as references to values in a formula are called reference cells. In general, these can also be called output cells (formula cells) and input cells (reference cells). Typing: When you type a formula with a cell address, begin by typing a formula prefix ([+] to indicate positive is the easiest to use), then the first cell address (column letter followed by row number), and so on. Press [Return] to enter your formula. Pointing: VIP Professional is a visually oriented program. This makes it easy to enter a formula by pointing to the reference cells. You may use your mouse or your arrow/movement keys. To construct a formula using the pointing method, first type a formula prefix (usually [+]), then indicate the reference cell. With the mouse, you can move the cell pointer to the reference cell and click. Or, you can use your arrow keys to move the cell indicator to the reference cell. If the cell reference is at the end of the formula, set the reference and enter the formula at the same time by pressing [Return]. If another operator follows your reference in the formula, you may set the reference by typing the operator in. As soon as you start pointing to a reference cell, VIP Professional places you in the Point mode (see "A Summary of the Worksheet Basics"). Type the next operator (notice that it returns you to the formula cell), and so on to the end of the formula. Press [Return] to enter the formula. Page 54 Relative and Absolute Cells When you use cell references to build formulas, you are no longer referring to freestanding values. Instead, you are referring to the contents of cells. Thus, the value used in the formula is the current value contained in the reference cell. In addition, VIP recognizes that there may be a relationship or correlation between the cell which is referenced and the formula cell. Therefore, unless you specify otherwise, it automatically makes your cell references "relative". A relative cell reference uses the distance between the referenced cell and the formula cell to establish its relationship. The difference is measured in the number of cells column-wise and the number of cells row-wise the referenced cell is from the formula cell. For example, if you have a formula in a cell whose address is C14 referencing cell B13, then the formula is actually taking the current value of the cell one cell up and one cell to the left of its location. If you use a formula with a relative cell reference in one cell, its relative nature may not be apparent. However, once you start using the Move or Copy commands to change the location of the formula cell, the relationship becomes obvious. For example, if the formula in cell C14 which referenced cell B13 were moved to D15, then the cell reference would be changed to C14 because of its relative nature. Formula cells can also be "absolute". By placing a dollar symbol ($) in front of the column letter and in front of the row number of the formula cell, you are letting the program know that the reference cell is absolute and not relative. When a formula is calculated with one or more absolute cells in it, no matter where the formula is located, an absolute reference will always refer to the contents of the cell at the original address. Named ranges can also be made absolute by putting a "$" before the name. This makes all cells accessed in the named range absolute when that range is used. When a formula is written so that one column or row is absolute while the corresponding row or column of the cell address is relative (or vice versa), it is called a mixed cell reference. A mixed cell reference can be created by putting the absolute symbol ("$") before the part of the cell address, either column letter or row number, you want kept absolute. The corresponding part of the cell address is left as is (relative). Mixed cell references are often used with formulas which are copied along rows or columns. By using the Absolute function [Function 4] when you are in the Point mode, you can run a cell or range reference through a cycle (absolute, mixed, mixed again, then relative). Point to your cell reference, then use the function. Each time you use the function it moves your reference one step further in the cycle. Using the Absolute icon has the same effect. Move the cell pointer over the Absolute icon. Each time you click the mouse key, the reference goes through one step of the cycle. Page 55 Revising Formulas Like other types of entries, formulas can be revised while you are still typing them or when you are returning to them from another cell. When you are in the Value mode and are typing a formula for the first time, you can use the [Backspace], [Function 2] and [Escape] keys to edit a formula. [Backspace] erases the character preceding the Edit cursor. [Escape] erases the entire formula you have been entering and returns you to the Ready mode. Once in the Ready mode, you can move to another cell or enter the same cell and retype your formula. [Function 2] places you in the Edit mode so that you can use the editing commands for major "surgery". If you are in the Value mode and decide to point to a cell to use it as a cell reference, you will be placed in the Point mode (shown by the mode indicator). When you are in the Point mode, there are only two keys which can be used to revise your formula. The effect of these two keys is different depending on whether you are pointing to a single cell or a range. If you are pointing to a cell range, VIP Professional uses [Escape] to shrink the range down to its anchor cell (the start cell of the range). It changes the anchor cell into just another single cell. You remain in the Point mode. If you use [Backspace], VIP Professional cancels the previously made range specification and returns the cell indicator back to the formula cell instead. You are still in the Point mode. If you are returning to a formula cell and choose to enter the Edit mode, you will have more advanced editing features at your disposal. You will also be placed in the Edit mode if VIP Professional finds an error in your data when you enter it. The Edit cursor will be placed at the point of the error. Once in the Edit mode, you may use all the editing functions available with editing other entries. These functions are described in "A Summary of Worksheet Basics". Precedence in Calculations The order in which formulas are calculated often has a bearing on the result of the calculation. VIP Professional uses three factors to govern precedence in calculation. The three factors are: the order in which a calculation is entered (from left to right) the use of parentheses to determine subgroups which are isolated and calculated first, and the order of importance of the individual operators in a calculation. Order of Entry: When you enter a formula, you do it from left to right. If VIP doesn't have any order clue (parentheses or individual operators), it will calculate the formula the same way you entered it. For example, if you have a formula like "6-8+2", it won't try to add 2 to 8 before it subtracts the results from 6. If it did, you would have a final result of -4. The actual result obtained by the program is 0 because 6-8=-2, then -2+2=0. It doesn't matter whether you use freestanding values or cell references. If the individual operators have equal precedence and you haven't used parentheses, the formula will be calculated from left to right. Page 56 Using Parentheses to Indicate Subgroups: When you use parentheses to indicate subgroups in a formula, the sections inside the parentheses will be isolated from the rest of the formula and calculated first. The results are then integrated back into the formula and used to calculate it as a whole. If we should decide to include the parentheses around the formula in the example above, we might write the formula like this: 6-(8+2). In this case, VIP would first isolate and calculate the part of the formula enclosed in parentheses (8+2=10). Then the result would be integrated back into the formula (6-10=4). Precedence of Individual Operators: Individual operators also affect the way in which a formula is calculated. There are actually 16 different operators and seven "Levels of precedence". A level of precedence is the amount of priority one operator gets over the other. The table below lists (in order) the operator symbols and their operations. Precedence Operator Function 1 ^ Exponentiation 2 - Make Negative 2 + Make Positive 3 * Multiplication 3 / Division 4 + Addition 4 - Subtraction 5 = Equal 5 <> Not Equal 5 > Greater Than 5 >= Greater Than or Equal 5 < Less Than 5 <= Less Than or Equal 6 #NOT# Logical Not 7 #AND# Logical And 7 #OR# Logical Or Individual operators and their operations have priority over the order in which the formula is entered. Whenever possible, VIP Professional will try to do operations in the order of their operator's precedence. For instance, an addition operation (which has a precedence of four) is done after a multiplication operation (which has a precedence of three) even if the addition operation is first in the order of the formula. For example, in the formula, "7+4*10", the result is 47 (4*10=40, then 40+7=47). Where parentheses are used to set off subgroups, those subgroups are still calculated first then integrated into the rest of the formula. Using the example above, "7+4*10", we could enclose the part of the formula we want done first in parentheses. The formula might now look like this, "(7+4)*10. The result is 110 (because 7+4=11, then 11*10=110). Page 57 Logical Operators The logical operators =, >, <, >=, <= and <> are used to compare values. The result obtained from the use of a logical operator is either 1, (True) or 0 (False). For example, the formula 1=2 would give the result 0, since 1 does not equal 2. Logical operators are frequently used with the @ if function, and to find information in databases, For example, a formula using a logical expression can be used as a criterion in a Data Query command. The construction of formula criteria is described in the chapter, "Data Commands". Compound Statements In addition to the logical operators described above, there an additional three which have the precedence level of six (logical not) and seven (logical and, logical or). These logical operators are also compound statements. Compound statements are also mathematical equations which meet more than one condition. For example, #NOT# finds all values which are not equal to the specified value. Therefore, #NOT# can be said to meet all conditions except the specified value. #NOT# is used to find values which are not specified. For example, "#NOT#($A$13+2)" finds those values which are not equal to the current value of cell A13+2. #AND# is used to find those values which fulfill all conditions set. For example, "+$A$13#AND#(>5)" finds those values which are equal to the value of cell A13 and greater than 5. #OR# is used to find those values which fulfill either one or the other conditions of set. For example, "$A$13#OR#$A$15" finds those values which are equal to either the value of cell A13 or that of cell A15. Calculating an Individual Formula If you would like to know what a formula's result is without calculating an entire worksheet, use the Calculation function while you are in the Value or Edit mode and while the formula is displayed on the Edit line. You may also use the Recalculate icon for the same purpose when you are in the Value or Edit mode. Move the cell pointer over the Recalculate icon and click the mouse button. Your formula is calculated and the result is displayed on the Edit line instead of the entire formur of the formula cell, you are letting the program know that the reference cell is absolute and not relative. When a formula is calculated with one or more absolute cells in it, no matter where the formula is located, an absolute reference will always refer to the contents of the cell at the original address. Named ranges can also be made absolute by putting a "$" before the name. This makes all cells accessed in the named range absolute when that range is used. When a formula ise discussed in more detail in the chapter, "Worksheet Commands". Initially VIP Professional performs calculations in a certain order called natural. With natural recalculation, VIP Professional calculates each cell by column, but when it encounters a reference to another cell, the contents of the reference cell are calculated and the resulting value used to calculate the formula cell before continuing. Forward references occur when the contents of one cell hinges on the contents of other cells which haven't been calculated yet. The method of natural calculation is, however, slower than the other methods. To return to this form of calculation after you've changed to another, you would use the Natural command form the Worksheet Global Recalculation menu (/WGRN). Another option you have is calculating by columns without waiting for references to be solved. This speeds up the calculation process a bit. A third option allows you to have calculations performed along rows rather than down columns. You may require rowwise calculation because of a special way you have created your formulas. For instance, it may be necessary to calculate along rows first to avoid forward references which cannot be resolved by columnwise calculation. The Columnwise and Rowwise commands from the Worksheet Global Recalculation menu (/WGRC and WGRR) are used to change calculation type to these options. Automatic recalculation after each entry is time consuming, especially if you are using a large worksheet. At times, you may decide you want to turn off automatic recalculation and switch to manual recalculation. First, select Manual from the Worksheet Global Recalculation menu (/WGRM). Now, you are free to enter data without having to wait for calculation after every entry. Whenever you do make a change in your worksheet, the Recalculate icon will appear on the screen to remind you that recalculation needs to be done for revised results. To recalculate, either click on the Recalculate icon or press [Function 9]. There may be times when you wish to force a recalculation or even additional recalculations. This happens frequently when particularly intricate formulas will not yield accurate results on first-time calculations. The most common culprit is an inappropriate revaluation order. To force recalculation at any time, use the Calculate function while in the Ready mode (or, with the mouse, the recalculate icon). You can also specify a set number of iterations of the formula (recalculations) by using the Iterate command of the Recalculation menu. Iterate is a command which is used to help with the calculation of numbers which are difficult to ascertain. VIP Professional allows you to control the number of calculations you want through the Iterate command. Choose Iterate from the Worksheet Global Recalculation menu (/WGRI). Then, type the number of desired iterations (any number between 1 and 50). Press [Return] to enter your choice. Page 59 Achieving Different Results with Calculations Depending on the method of calculation you choose, it is possible to create a worksheet which will not give accurate results. This can be done in many ways, two of the most common being caused by circular references and forward references. Just as forward references occur when a cell refers to other cells which are generally calculated later in the sequence, a circular reference occurs when two cells refer to each other. These and other problems may arise when creating worksheets are discussed thoroughly in texts devoted to spreadsheets, along with many other hints for successful worksheet creation. In Appendix A, we refer you to those works which we feel are particularly useful. If you should find yourself recalculating a worksheet with a circular reference, the Circular Reference icon appears in the lower section of the screen. Two Special Values: NA and ERR Two special values, "@NA" and "@ERR", are used to substitute values in cells with formulas which are impossible to calculate. NA means "not available". It is used when certain necessary values are not available. ERR is used when an error has arisen in calculation of the sheet, such as divide by 0, or a reference to a cell in a range which has been moved. All cells which depend on cells with these values reflect this by displaying the same type of value. For example, if one cell containing a value of @ERR has four cells which depend on it for their values, than all five cells have the value of @ERR upon recalculation. Page 60 @ Functions @ functions are built in formulas. Some, such as @NPV (Net Present Value), replace what would otherwise be a very complex formula, while others, such as @SUM, serve as a substitute for a commonly used formula. @ functions also include logical operations which do not result in numerical values as such, but instead result in "True" and "False". A set of @ functions are reserved for use with databases. These @ functions begin with the letter D after the @ symbol. Their use is discussed in the chapter " Data Commands", under the section, "Using Database Functions to Generate Statistics". @ functions are constructed in a certain way. They begin with the "@" symbol. This is followed by a function name (such as "sum" or "avg") which lets your computer know what type of function it is expected to do. Although there are a few special cases, most @ functions are usually concluded with an argument. The @ functions which do not require an argument are described as such and listed along with the others at the end of this chapter. An argument is a set of values which are operated on by the function. The values you use in an argument can be typed in (free-standing) or cell references. @ function arguments can consist of single values, a cell range or set of cell ranges. Where they are used, ranges can be refered to by name or through cell addresses. To find out more about naming ranges, see the chapter, "Range Commands". Depending on the nature of the operation, some @ functions only accept numbers and will not accept ranges. As with other formulas, space characters may not be inserted in an @ function name. @ functions can be used by themselves or as part of a larger formula. Usually, they can be used wherever you need a number for cell entry. @ function used alone: @sum(A12..A15) @ function used in a formula: 3+@sum(A12..A15) @ functions can be used as parts of other @ functions when they are set off by parentheses. Extremely complex formulas can be constructed with @ functions. Should you ever write a formula that is too complex for your computer to process, it is possible to break down the formula into two or more parts, enter them into different cells, and use those cell references to form a simple formula. Example: In cell A1, put: +A7+@COUNT(A8..A19) in cell A2, put: +2+3-1+@COUNT(B8..B19) In cell A3, put: +A1+A2 @ Function Types As we mentioned earlier, there are several different types of @ functions. We have grouped the @ functions in the order of their various types for further discussion. The groups are: financial, logical, mathematical, statistical, data, special and date functions. Database functions are excluded from further discussion here because they are described in the "Data Commands" chapter. However, all other @ functions will be listed here, although for in-depth information on these functions, we suggest you turn to one of the books listed in Appendix B. Page 61 Financial Functions The financial functions are used to find values of calculations which are purely financial in nature. For example, you would use these functions to find the future value of an annuity or to find the present value of an ordinary annuity. @IRR (best possible guess, cash payment series): The Internal Rate of Return function finds the (approximate) internal rate of return for a series of cash payments made at set intervals. This function requires a value which represents your best possible guess at the right answer. It also requires a series of cash flows (one negative and the rest positive). No blank cells should be included in the series. Should there be any period when no cash payment was made, place a zero in its cell. This function uses an interative scheme to find the correct answer. If a convergence to within .0000001 doesn't occur in 20 iterations, the result of the value is "ERR". At times, depending on what best possible guess you first make, the result of the function may vary when you use the same cash payment series. Usually, if a guess is between 0.0 and 1.0, it will yeild an accurate result. Example: (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) (1) Pmt. -2500 1250 1000 500 250 (2) Guess 0.12 @IRR(B2,B1,F1)=0.102212 @NPV (initial payment, interest rate, series of future cash flows): The Net Present Value function is used to find the net present value of a series of future cash flows. The initial payment is a single value. The interest rate is also a single value. It is a percentage which represents the rate of interest for each period. The series of future cash flows is a range representing receipts or payments steming from the initial value. The range which represents the series of future cash flows must be a single column or row. Blank cells should not be used, but zeros may represent areas of non-receipt. The actual result of the function includes the initial payment. To find the overall net present value, subtract the initial payment from the result. Example: (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (1) Initial 1000 Rate 11% (2) (3) Series 500 500 500 500 +B1+@NPV(E1,B3.E3)=2551.222 Page 62 @FV (payment, interest, terms): The Future Value function is used to find the future value of an annuity. For this you need to specify a monthly payment value, an interest rate (per period) and a number of payment periods. You may use numbers or cell references as values. Example: If payment=1200, Interest=6% and Terms=12, then @FV(1200,.06,12)=20243.92 @PV (payment, interest, terms): The Present Value function is used to find the present value of an ordinary annuity. It needs a payment, an interest rate (per period) and a number of payment periods. You may use numbers or cell references for values. Example: If payment=1200, Interest=6% and terms=12, then @PV(1200,,06,12)=10260.61 @PMT (principal, interest, terms): The Payment function is used to calculate mortgage payments based on principal, interest rate per period and the number of periods. Even if you use zero as an interest rate, the function will yield correct results. You may use numbers or cell references for values. Example: If Payment=1000, Interest=6% and terms=12, then @PMT(1000,.06,12)=119.2770 Logical Functions The logical functions are very like the logical operators discussed earlier. Logical functions are used to test other values of true or false. @True and @False do not take arguments. @FALSE: The False function represents the value of 0 (false). Example: @False=0 Therefore, @FALSE*8=0 @TRUE: The True function represents the value of 1 (true). Example: @TRUE=1 Therefore, @TRUE+(5*2)=11 @ISNA (value): This function represents the value of 1 (true) if the specified value has the value NA (not available). If not, it has the value of 0 (false). Example: If cell A2 has the value NA, then @ISNA(A@)=1 Page 63 @ISERR (value): This function represents the value of 1 (true) if the specified value has the value ERR (that is, if the value has an undefinable result). If not, it has the value of 0 (false). Example: If the value of cell A5 is 5, then @ISERR(A5)=0 @IF (condition, first value, second value): This function is used to first test the condition. It then uses the first value if the condition is true. It uses the second value if the condition is false. Example: If the cell B2 equals 7 and the value of cell B3 equals 8, then @IF(B2>B3,2,5)=5 Mathematical Functions The mathematical functions cover many different areas of pure mathematics, including many trigonometrical and algebraic expressions. We have listed the trigonometrical functions first. Of these functions, @PI and @RAND do not require arguments. @ACOS (cosine of the angle in radians): This function calculates the arc cosine from the cosine of an angle in radians. The cosine value must be between -1 and +1. It can be entered as a number or a cell reference. The result of the function is always between 0 and Pi. If not, it is indicated by the value "ERR". Example: @ACOS(.3)=1.266103 @ASIN (the sine of the angle in radians): This function calculates the arc sine from the sine if the angle in radians. The sine value must be between -1 and +1. It can be entered as a number or a cell reference. The function's result is always between -Pi/2 and +Pi/2. If not, it is indicated by the value "ERR". Example: @ASIN(.5)=0.523598 @ATAN (tangent of the angle in radians): This function calculates the arc tangent from the tangent of an angle in radians. The function's result will always be between -Pi/2 and +Pi/2. Example: @ATAN(1)=.785398 @ATAN2 (first value, second value): This function calculates the arc tangent from the tangent of an angle in radians. The tangent is represented as x/y. If the first value equals zero and the second value equals zero, the result is displayed as "ERR". It is entered differently than @TAN (second value/first value) because it considers the signs of the first value and the second value to have separate values for all four quadrants, from -Pi to +Pi. Example: @ATAN2(.5,1)=1.107148 Page 64 @COS (angle in radians): This function calculates the cosine of an angle in radians. Example: @COS(.5)=.877582 @PI: It is frequently used to convert degrees to radians. One degree equals @PI/180 (radians) Example: 20*(@PI/2)=31.41592 @SIN (angle in radians): This function calculates the sine of an angle in radians. Example: @SIN(1.5)=.997494 @TAN (angle in radians) This function calculates the tangent of an angle in radians. The value "ERR" is displayed if the Angle-In-Radians =Pi/2+Pi*n (n being any integer). Example: @TAN(1.5)=14.10140 @ABS (value): This function calculates the absolute value of a number. Example: If the formula in cell A1 reads 6-8, then @ABS(A1)=2 @EXP (value): This function calculates a value raised to the exponential power. If the value is greater than 230, the result is displayed as "ERR". Example: @EXP(10)=22026.46 @INT (value): This function finds the integer part of a value. Example: If the formula in cell A1 reads 3-.6, then @INT(A1)=2 @LN (value): This function calculates the natural logarithm (or base e of the value's logarithm) of the value. The result is displayed as "ERR" if the value equals zero or is negative. Example: @LN(10)=2.302585 @LOG (value): This function calculates the base 10 logarithm of the value. The result "ERR" is displayed if the value is zero or a negative. Example: @LOG(5)=.698970 @MOD (first value, second value): This function finds the value of the remainder from the first value after it has been divided by the second value. Example: @MOD(30,4)=2 Page 65 Here we go with part 3 of the extensive VIP Professional docs .... @RAND: This function is used to find a random number which is distributed uniformly between 0.0 and 1.0. It doesn't use an argument. Example: @RAND=.414100 or @RAND=.690568 @ROUND (value, no. of decimal places): This function is used to round off a value to a specified number of decimal places. Example: If the formula in cell F2 reads 2.34*2.456, then @ROUND (F2,2)=5.75 @SQRT (value): This function calculates the square root of a value. If the value is negative, the result of this function is displayed as "ERR". Example: @SQRT(169)=13 Statistical Functions The statistical functions are very similar to the data functions (discussed in the chapter, "Data Commands"), the difference being that data functions are used on a distinct section of a database (and begin with a D in the function name) while statistical functions require a list of values to work with. The list specified can be a range. @COUNT (list): This function counts all the items in a list and uses that number as its value. If the list consists of one cell, the result of the function will always be "1" even if the cell is blank. In all other cases, blank cells are not counted. Example: @COUNT(2,4,6,8)=4 @SUM (list): This function adds all the cell values of the list. If the list is a range, blank cells are ignored. Example: @SUM(2,4,6,8)=20 @AVG (list): This function averages all the values of the list. If the list is a range which contains empty cells, they are ignored. Example: @AVG(2,4,6,8)=5 @MIN (list): This function finds the minimum value of the list. If the list is a range, empty cells are ignored. Example: @MIN(2,4,6,8)=2 Page 66 @MAX (list): This function finds the maximum value of the list. If the list is a range, empty cells are ignored. Example: @MAX(2,4,6,8)=8 Special Functions Special functions do not relate to any particular subject. Instead, they are a special set of functions which help you define or find values on your worksheet. You have already been introduced to two of them: @NA and @ERR. @NA: This function indicates that a value is not available. The result is displayed as "NA". Example: @IF(3>2,@NA,3)=@NA @ERR: This function indicates that a value cannot be defined. The result is displayed as "ERR". Example: @IF(3<2,3,@ERR)=@ERR @CHOOSE (x, set of values): This function is used to test logical expressions or to look up short tables. The first value of the argument (x) is converted to an integer. The rest of the argument is a list of optimal values. This first value of the argument must be greater than or equal to 0 and less than the largest of the values in the list. If not, the value of this function is displayed as "ERR". Otherwise, the result is a value from the list of values whose order corresponds with that of the integer plus one. Example: @CHOOSE(3,2,2.5,4,6,8)=6 @HLOOKUP (x, range, offset): This function looks up a table horizontally if "x", the test value, is in the first row of the range. X specifies the column in which the result can be found. The range you specify consists the area which is to be searched (usually the entire table). In the first row of the range, values cannot be duplicated and must be in ascending order. If the first value exceeds x, then the result is displayed as "ERR". For any other value of the row which exceeds x, the result is the value of the cell below the previous value in the row. The offset determines how many rows below the first one in the range it should look to find the result of the function. Example: (A) (B) (C) (D) (1) 1 2 3 4 (2) 5 10 15 20 (3) 2.5 4.5 6.5 8.5 @HLOOKUP(3,A1.D3,1)=15 Page 67 @VLOOKUP (x, range, offset) This function is similar to the one described above, except that the look-up is done on a vertical basis, so the range is based on the first column. Example: (A) (B) (C) (1) 1 5 2.5 (2) 2 10 4.5 (3) 3 15 6.5 (4) 4 20 8.5 @VLOOKUP(2,A1.C4,1)=10 Date Functions VIP Professional provides a sophisticated, yet easy-to-use method for including dates in calculations and for creating calendars. The trick to it is the conversion of calendar dates (from january 1, 1900 to december 31, 2099) into numbers starting at 1, and increasing by one for every day since. This takes into consideration the february months and leap years. Every date has a specific number that can be attached to it, such as the number 36526 for january 1, 2000. Once you have the dates numbered, you can add a month or a year by adding 30 or 365 to the number for the date, as well as performing many other calculations. Obviously, to do this easily, you need functions to find the numbers (or serial dates). You will also need functions to turn these numbers back into calendar dates. These functions are provided by the date @ functions and by the Worksheet and Range Date Format commands. The first functions listed below allow you to change today's date or another, specified date into its serial version so it can be used in calculations. A Date Format command can be used to convert the calculation's results back into calendar format. @DATE (year, month, day): This function calculates the serial number of a date. The year must be between 1900 and 2099. When you use a date as an argument, enter it in parentheses and numerically: Year-Month-Day. Years are numbered from 0-199 and start at 1900. for example, you might use "@DATE(83,4,12)" to change the calendar date April 4, 1983, into its serial number. If you enter it in the wrong order, VIP will still evaluate it. If it is an impossible date, VIP Professional displays "ERR" in the cell. By an impossible date, we mean one which has too many months in the month's place or too many days for the specified month. For example, the dates entered as "(85,14,12)" and "(85,2,30)" are impossible: Example: @DATE(85,9,24)=31314 Page 68 @ TODAY This function is used to change today's date to its serial date (up to December 31, 2099). This command is only effective if you have set the date using the Control Panel in the Desk Menu. Example: If you entered today's date as sept. 24, 1985 in the computer, then @TODAY=31314 The following three date @ functions convert a serial number into the actual day ,month or year, in numbers. These functions are useful for finding out where you are in a series. @DAY (date): This function finds the day of a month given the serial date (which is used between January 1, 1900 and December 31, 2099). Example: @DAY(31314)=24 @MONTH (date): This function is used to find the month number from a given serial date (from January 1, 1900 to December 31, 2099). Example: @MONTH(31314)=9 @YEAR (date): This function is used to find the year number from a given serial date (from January 1, 1900 to December 31, 2099). Example: @YEAR(31314)=85 Page 69 Using Date @ Functions To Calculate Dates As we said above, date @ functions let us work easily with days in calculations. With date arithmetic, we can take calendar dates translated to their serial dates with the @DATE or @TODAY function, and add days, months, or years to create time periods for whatever purpose. We can also create complex formulas with logical expressions for special calculations. The way the calculation results are changed back into calendar dates is through the date format commands in the Worksheet and Range menus. The date format commands take a number and change it into the corresponding calendar date, with three optional displays: Day-Month-Year (i.e. 07-MAR-85), Day-Month(i.e. 07-MAR) and Month-Year (i.e. MAR-85). For example, the date, March 28, 1985, is displayed as 31134 when entered in a cell with the date function @DATE(85,3,28). This number can be changed back into the display of a calendar date 28-MAR-85 by selecting the date option (Day-Month-Year) of the Range Format command for that cell. Example: Starting from the date, September 24, 1985, if you want to find out if 61 days (or two months) later is November 24, 1985: 1. First make sure an empty cell has a date format (if not, use the Range Format command, Option 1) and that its column width is wide enough to display the result of the function (if not, use the Worksheet Column-Width Set command and set it to 12 spaces). 2. Enter the formula: @IF((@DATE(85,9,24)+61=@DATE(85,11,24)),@DATE(85,11,24),@ERR). Press [Return]. 3. If the date 61 days later is November 24, 1985, then that date will be displayed in the previously empty cell. If it is not, "ERR" will be displayed instead. A good example of the usefulness of date arithmetic is the creation of a column of months in the year for expenses, such as that created in the tutorial section of this Handbook. Instead of painstaking entry of labels for all the months, we could have used date arithmetic to increment the last date by 30 days to go through the sequence of months from January through December. The first step would be to use the @DATE function in cell A4 to find the serial number for a day in January of 1985, say January 6: @DATE(85,1,6). The next step would be to go to cell A5 and enter the formula +A4+30 to add 30 days to the previous month. (30 days is considered a banker's month.) Next, we would copy the contents of cell A5 from A6 to A15. This serves to add 30 days to the date of the previous cell. The final step would be to format the cells from A4 through A15 with the Range Format Date Month-Year command. Now you would have a nice succession of the months. Page 70 KEYBOARD MACROS Introduction Vip Professional has a special facility called keyboard macros which allow you to use a stored sequence of key strokes attached to a letter. Instead of typing a series of keystrokes over and over again, you can simply type the series once, attach it to a letter, and type the letter whenever you need to use the series. Keyboard macros are used anywhere a repetitious series of keystrokes are needed. Keyboard macros are used for such diverse matters as formatting text, entering values or directing movement and position of entries in the worksheet. Keyboard macros, called macros for short, can be quite simple or very complex. However, even in its simplest form, a macro is versatile enough to allow you to make choices governing several aspects of its production. At the other end of the spectrum are extremely sophisticated and powerful macros which are responsible for specialized applications. In fact, the macro facility created by Lotus 1-2-3 has developed into quite a mini-industry of application programs which will turn VIP Professional, or 1-2-3, into a dedicated program for specific purposes such as accounting. These applications are on sale at major computer stores. Ask your dealer which will work with VIP Professional. We encourage you to investigate these applications to see if any would be suitable for you. There are also books devoted to the creation of specialized macros. You may consult Appendix B for applicable books which you can buy at your local book store. As you learn to use macros and become skilled in their construction, you will become familiar with the more advanced uses of keyboard macros and the concepts backing them. Interactive macros and the macro commands (the "/X" commands) are two of the most sophisticated forms of macro usage. We will begin this chapter with instructions and examples of simple macros and the options available in their production. From this point, we will go on to discussing the more advanced topics involving keyboard macros. Creating a Simple Macro Learning how to create simple keyboard macros is best done through example so we will begin by taking you through the steps for producing and using a keyboard macro. For our example, we will create a macro which is in the form of a label. This label will be used in cells of varying distance around your worksheet. The worksheet we will be using is a fictional example which summarizes the total value of products (of which there are five types) sold by six different salesmen in one month. It includes the monthly totals for each type of product. During this month, certain products were not stocked and, therefore, unavailable to some of the salesmen. To reflect this, we will use a macro to put the label "No Stock" in the pertinent fields. Now that you have decided what the macro will consist of (the label "No Stock"), you will have to find some place on your worksheet to construct it. Find a cell in an empty area of your worksheet. Enter the sequence of keystrokes "No Stock~" in label format into the empty cell. We will describe the purpose of the "~" later in this chapter, but for now it is only important to know that the "~" is needed to set the label in its cell. Page 71 A label format is used in the construction of all keyboard macros. Even if the key strokes of the sequence are commands or formulas, the sequence must be defined as a label, Because you are defining the sequence as a label, you may use any of the label-prefixes. These three are: 'for left aligned labels, and ^ for centered labels. In most cases, you will probably find it simplest to use the ' label-prefix. A general rule about macros is that what appears in the label is what is used as the keyboard macro. However, these label-prefixes are ignored when macros are used. When text is used as a macro in the Ready mode, VIP Professional will recognize it as a label and assign it the Worksheet Global Label-Prefix or the Range Label-Prefix setting, depending on which controls the cell. To make a label-prefix count-- that is, to make a label-prefix align text to the right or be centered-- you must begin the sequence with two label-prefixes. The first label prefix is necessary for the production of the macro, but is later ignored. The second label-prefix acts as an ordinary label-prefix when the macro is run. Although the macro we are constructing in our example is very simple and uses only one cell for its construction, macro sequences can be constructed in more than one cell. These are called multiple-cell macros and we will discuss them further later in the chapter. Such macros must be created as a range of cells in a column. Each and every cell used in the construction of a macro sequence must include a label-prefix character. The next step of the example is to attach the contents of the cell to one of the letter keys. To do this, you will use the Range Name Create command. First select Range Name Create (/RNC). In response to the prompt for a range name, enter the letter you wish to use preceded by the backslash character. For instance, when you use the letter "D", type it in as "/D" and press [Return] to enter it. The letter may be typed in upper- or lowercase. Both are considered alike by VIP Professional in this case. In response to a second prompt requesting a range, specify the address of the cell which contains the macro sequence, or the first cell of the range if the macro is more than one cell. You may type in the cell address or point to it using your mouse or arrow keys. Press [Return] to enter it. The macro sequence is now attached to the letter "D". The final step is using the keyboard macro. Move to the first cell in which you wish to use the macro. Type "[Alternate][D]". Vip Professional types the key stroke sequence attached to the letter "D" ("No Stock"). To use it again, simply move the cell indicator over the next cell in which you wish to use the macro and repeat the process. If you should ever attempt to use an incorrect macro name, the computer will beep at you and send you an error message. Keyboard macros are usually invoked (or used) in the Ready mode. They are begun in the cells where the cell indicator is currently residing. Macros used in the Ready mode consist of value or label entries and/or one or more complete commands. Macros can also be used in response to prompts when issuing commands. For example, a textural macro sequence can be used as a title in response to a prompt of a Graph Name command. It can also be used as a footer in a Print Options Footer command. Page 72 Revising Macros VIP Professional recognizes a macro sequence by its range name rather than by its contents. It is fairly easy to reenter the cell in which the macro was constructed and make any editing changes necessary. Macro ranges are edited in the same way that all other worksheet cells are edited. When you reenter a cell, whether it is a macro label or any other unprotected cell, you may choose to be placed in the Edit mode and use the functions available for editing. If you delete keystrokes, make sure you delete all characters of that keystroke. Otherwise, you may end up with a garbled macro. For example, if you use the keystroke, "{Down}", make sure all the letters and the braces are erased. Representing Characters Other Than Numbers and Letters in Macros Besides numbers and labels, macro sequences can also use commands, formulas or any one of ten special function key combinations. Almost anything that can be reached from the keyboard is fair game for macros! Commands are entered in a manner similar to the way they are entered when typed. For example, if you wish to use the format command, Worksheet Column-width Set, to set a column's width to 11 characters, you would type "/wcs11~". Formulas are entered as part of the macro sequence in the form they usually use. To represent keys of more than one character, arrow keys, and the special function key combinations in a macro sequence, type its name surrounded by braces. For example the left arrow key is indicated in this fashion, "{Left}". It doesn't matter if you use upper- or lowercase letters. VIP Professional considers both to be the same. When writing macro sequences, never use brace characters for anything other than enclosing the names of these particular keys and key combinations. The chart below lists the key names and functions. Key Function {Up} Up Arrow Key {Down} Down Arrow Key {Right} Right Arrow Key {Left} Left Arrow Key {Home} Home {End} End {Pgup} Screen one Page Up {Pgdn} Screen one Page Down {Delete} Delete Key {Esc} Escape Key {Bs} Backspace one Character {Edit} Edit Function {Name} Name Function {Abs} Absolute Function {GoTo} Express Function {Window} Window Function {Query} Query Function {Table} Table Function {Calc} Calculation Function {Graph} Graph Function {?} Pauses for input until you press [Return] Page 73 This list is self-explanatory and describes functions you have already been using, except for the last item which we have not yet discussed. If you use the "{?}" in a macro sequence, VIP Professional will pause at this item when it repeats the macro sequence. You may manually include any information you want during the pause. Then press [Return] to finish the keyboard macro. Whenever VIP Professional pauses during a macro operation, the letters "CMD" appear before the mode indicator. So, when you use a question mark set off by braces in the macro, "CMD" will be displayed when the macro is running and the question mark has been reached. Once you press [Return], "CMD" is erased and running of the macro is resumed. Using [Return] in Macros Although we could have included the symbol for [Return] in the chart above, we did not because it doesn't use braces around its name like the other functions do. It also has some interesting and useful properties which we will discuss in this section. The [Return] key is symbolized by the tilde character, [~], when it is used in a macro sequence. If a tilde is present in a macro sequence, it means that [Return] will be substituted in the actual running of the macro. Of course, the [Return] key itself (along with clicking the mouse button and the movement facilities) is still to be used to finish off and enter a macro sequence when it has been constructed in the worksheet cells. [~] is generally used in the midst of a macro sequence to complete a command or to enter data in a cell. The tilde may be followed by a new command or data entry. For example, [Right] may be used once after [~] to indicate that the following group of information should be placed one cell to the right of the first one. The [~] may also be used at the end of the X-command macro sequences. Example: '/wcs12~"Name~{Right}/wcs25~^Address~ (This will set the starting column width to 12 spaces and align the label, "Name" to the right of the cell. Then it will move to the cell to the right, set column width to 25, and center the label, "Address" in the cell.) Using a tilde at the end of a macro sequence is the same as pressing [Return] after typing in a value or a label. [Return] "sets" an entry and leaves you free to move to another cell. If you do not use a tilde, you will remain in the cell of the macro. You may press [Return] or type in additional information. As an alternative, you can even include another macro. Example: You may use a macro like this: 'Label~. Or, you may use a macro like this: 'Label. Then press [return] to enter it after it has been run. In addition to [Return] or [~], you will notice that the movement keys have preserved their ability to set entries. For example, if you use "{Right}" in a macro sequence, it will set the preceding section (a label or a value) in a cell before moving one cell to the right. Page 74 Single-step Mode VIP Professional has a special facility called Single-step mode. This facility slows down the running of your macro to one keystroke or /X command at a time. The principal use for this facility is testing the design of your macro. By checking each step, you may find where the flaws (if any) exist. Then, you can correct them. To use the Single-step mode, press [Alternate] and [Function 1]. A Step icon will appear in the lower section of the screen. To stop using the Single-step mode, press [Alternate][Function 1] again. This will stop the running of your macro, although it doesn't erase it. While you are in the Single-Step mode, your macro will only be executed one step at a time. To advance one step in the running of the macro, press any key on your keyboard. After it finishes one keystroke, function or /X command, the macro pauses. You may examine the results of that step. Then, press any key to go to the next step. Multiple-cell Macros Some longer macro sequences use many keystrokes. Instead of attempting to crowd them all into one label or being forced to create a series of macros to meet your needs, Vip Professional allows you to create a macro sequence using more than one cell. Each cell must sequentially follow the previous one in the same column; each cell must also use a label-prefix character. You may enter as many keystrokes as you deem feasible in each cell. When Vip Professional uses a macro, It reads its sequence in the order of the first cell from left to right, then the second cell from left to right and so on down the column. It stops reading at the first non-label cell in the column. There are two commands which modify the order in which a macro sequence is read and used: /XG and /XC. These advanced commands are discussed later in the chapter. We suggest that you keep macro sequences manageable by dividing them into sections of not more than 20 or 30 characters per cell. A sequence can be divided at any point between keystrokes. It makes no difference to VIP Professional where the division occurs. Commenting VIP Professional reads a sequence columnwise. If you have a column of empty cells to the right or to the left of a macro sequence, you can use this space to make notes (in the form of explanatory labels) for your personal use. These notes let you know exactly what it is you are trying to accomplish with each step of a macro sequence. This is called "commenting". Auto-execute Macros Most of the time, you will be assigning letters to macro sequences. There are special cases when you will want to assign the character "0" (zero) to a macro sequence (range name \0). This creates an "auto-execute" macro. Macros using the range name "0" are automatically invoked whenever you reload the worksheet using the File Retrieve command. Macros assigned to "0" (zero) may not be executed using [Alt] 0. If you wish to use this macro other than when the program is loaded, you must give it another name. Page 75 /X Commands VIP Professional has a set of eight special commands which are effective only when used in a macro. These commands transform macros from simply being repetitious, predetermined sequences of keystrokes to a decision-making process which can even decide the sequence of key strokes. Each one of the commands affects the way in which VIP Professional reads the keystrokes. These commands are called /X commands. The chart below lists all eight and their functions. Command Function /XI(Condition)~ Uses if-then condition /XG(Location)~ Goes to a location /XC(Location)~ Goes to a location (calls a subroutine) /XR Returns (from subroutine) /XQ Quits macro execution /XM(Location)~ Displays a message in the control panel /XL(Message)~(Location)~ See /XN /XN(Message)~(Location)~ Displays a message in the control panel, accepts a label entry (/XL) or number entry (/XN) from the keyboard, and places this entry in a cell. The /X commands are extensive and powerful. Using them may involve making several decisions governing their actions. If you do not make these decisions, VIP Professional will make the decisions for you. It is possible that a decision will be made that you didn't anticipate or intend. We suggest that you make as many decisions as possible concerning the macro and its environment. We also suggest that you test your macro carefully using the Single-step mode. To use an /X command, it must be constructed as part of a macro sequence. Each /X command uses the cell of the worksheet as variables (that is, they use information from the worksheet for their operations. Six of the eight /X commands require a condition, location, message or a combination of them, each of which is followed by the ~ symbol. The other two /X commands are used by themselves. /XI)condition)~ The /XI command is an "if-then" conditional command. The condition is considered true if it has a non-zero value. If its value is zero, it is considered false. When the condition holds true, VIP Professional continues reading keystrokes in the same cell. If the condition is false, VIP Professional moves to the next cell. Page 76 /XG(location)~ The /XG command is the macro version of the GoTo command. It is used to direct the macro to go to a new location and continue execution there. You may invoke this command in any cell of the worksheet. If it is not in the cell specified as the location, VIP Professional will move to the one specified. After finding a specified location (which may be a cell address, a range or a range name) with this command, VIP Professional will continue reading keystrokes from that location. If you had specified a range or a range name instead of a cell, VIP Professional begins in the upper left corner of it. /XC(location)~ The /XC command is the Call Subroutine command. This command is similar to the /XG command discussed above since it continues reading the keystrokes of the macro at the location you specify. Like the /XG command, the location may be specified as a cell address, a range or a range name. The /XC command differs from the /XG command because it can use the /XR command to repeat or "nest" the sequence of key strokes which are sandwiched between itself and the /XR command. This sandwiching cannot be done without using the /XC command. /XR The /XR command is the Return from Subroutine command. It is always used in conjunction with and after the /XC command. If no /XC command has been included in the macro and a /XR command is, the computer will beep in error when the macro sequence is being read. Otherwise, the /XR command rereads the sequence of keystrokes starting after the /XC command. This repetition, or nesting series, can be done up to 16 levels (or times) per macro. /XQ The /XQ command is the Quit command. When the CMD indicator is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, this command causes VIP Professional to erase the indicator and return you to the worksheet in the Ready mode. The /XQ command is usually issued after the macro has been invoked rather than being part of the macro sequence like the other /X commands are. /XM(location) The /XM command is used to make a choice from a preconstructed menu. This menu is constructed by yourself before you construct the macro sequence. The location required in the macro sequence is the location of the menu in the worksheet. The location may be specified as a cell address, range, or range name. The specific location is considered to be the top left cell of the menu range or the entire range (depending on whether you've specified a single cell or a range). A menu range can be up to eight columns wide and is at least two rows deep. Page 77 The menu range contains the menu you have constructed. Each range is at least two rows deep. The first row is used to enter up to eight different choices, using any text you want. We suggest that the text be kept as short as possible to avoid overflowing other worksheet cells. Each choice is placed in its own column (or cell). There should be no empty cells. between the menu items. The cell following that of the furthest right menu item should be empty. When reading keyboard command input, VIP Professional reads the choices from left to right and stops at the first empty cell or the eighth choice (whichever comes first). Remember that when you choose one of the items you will often indicate it by its first letter, so it is unwise to use menu choices with the same first letter. If you do have two or more menu choices which begin with the same letter, VIP Professional uses the first choice it comes to. Upper- and lowercase letters are considered alike. The second row of the menu range is reserved for an explanatory phrase for each of the menu choices of the row above. This explanatory phrase explains the command in abbreviated form. It may list the actual steps needed to take the action described by the menu choice. Only forty characters of these phrases will be displayed on the screen. Below the second line, that is, below the explanatory phrase for each command, is a macro to execute whatever you have assigned to the command. After all, without this, what good would the user-definable menus be? These macros are created just like any other macros. After the /XM command is used, VIP Professional will continue reading the key strokes of the cell in the third row. If necessary they can continue columnwise in the cells below that first one. If that first cell is empty, VIP Professional considers the macro sequence to be completed. The /XM command is ready to be used in a macro sequence now. When the macro is invoked, VIP Professional will pause at the /XM command and move to the location you specified as its range. The menu appears just like other menus - at the top of the screen. The second line of the control panel is used for the explanatory phrases of each menu choice. You may choose one of the items just like any other menu command. Your choice will be carried out. If you make a wrong choice and press [Escape] to move back one step as you would with the regular VIP Professional menus, you will find that VIP Professional simply continues reading the Key strokes of the rest of the macro sequence instead and ignores the Escape. /XL(message)~(location)~ The /XL command is used to enter labels in specified locations. When the /XL command is used, VIP Professional first moves you to the specified location. In the macro sequence, you may specify the location as a cell address, a range or a range name. If you have specified a range or a range name, VIP Professional will only use the top left cell of the range as its location. The message which is included in the macro sequence can be up to 39 characters long. When you arrive at the specified location, VIP Professional displays the message on line 2 of the control panel. You can add to this message by typing up to 240 additional characters. Then enter the message by pressing [Return]. All labels entered using this command will be labels and will left-align in the cells. VIP Professional will not recalculate your worksheet for you automatically after you have used this command. If you wish recalculation to occur, you may decide to include calculation steps later in the macro sequence. Page 78 /XN(message)~(location)~ The /XN command is very similar to the /XL command. The major difference is that it uses values rather than text. It is not a label. In fact, if you should use or type in an entry which cannot be interpreted as a numeric value, VIP Professional beeps and sends you an error message. You must press [Return] or [Escape] before you can reenter characters in the correct fashion. The entry may consist of numbers or formulas. @ functions and range names in formulas are acceptable. When you use this command in a macro sequence, VIP Professional moves to the specified location, displays the message in the control panel (up to 39 characters) and waits for you to add any numbers or formulas you wish. After pressing [Return], VIP Professional will calculate the numeric value of the entire entry and enter the value at the specified location. However, the program does not recalculate the entire worksheet; you must include {Calc} steps to force recalculation if you need it. Page 79 INTRODUCING MENUS & the COPY, MOVE & QUIT COMMANDS Using menus to select commands Many VIP Professional commands can be reached through menus. Menus are lists of choices which pertains to one subject. The lists are called menus because of their similarities to the menu you use in restaurants. The choices listed on a menu are called items or commands. The commands of VIP are structured in layers, with subsidiary menus stemming from one dominant menu. from these subsidiary menus stem other menus, and so on. One good way to look at the command structure of VIP is to think of it as a tree. The main menu items are like branches, their submenus are like twigs, and the sub-submenus are like leaves. You use this menu structure when you issue commands. For example, to choose the Graph Options Color command, you must type /GOC if you are in the main menu. This moves you from the main menu to the Graph menu (/G), then from the Graph menu to the options menu (O) and finally specifies the Color command (C). If you are already in the Graph menu or in the Options menu, you don't move through those menus to get to the command. Typing OC (if you are in the Graph menu) or C (if you are in the Options menu) is sufficient. The same concept holds true with the modes you use. If you are working from the keyboard, you do not press [/] unless you are in the Ready mode. When you are already in the Menu mode and press [/], your computer will beep at you. Of course, this does not apply when you are using a mouse because the Professional automatically moves you from the Ready mode to the Menu mode and you don't need to press [/]. The layering of menus is most pronounced when you use your mouse or arrow keys to choose items. Only one menu at a time is displayed on the menu line. By highlighting one command from the menu, you can bring up its subsidiary menu (or drop-down menu), choose a command from it to bring up its submenu and so on until you finish the command series. The main (starting) menu has eleven choices. The first two are Desk and VIP. The Desk menu offers choices pertaining to your computer hardware such as setting your printer configurations. The VIP menu has a subcommand called "Goodies" which allows you to choose fonts or turn the grid pattern of the worksheet display on or off. The VIP menu also offers menu alternatives to the ten special functions. Another three menu choices you have are the Move, Copy and Quit commands. These are important commands which are used like other menu commands. Unlike the other menu commands, however, they have no submenus. The other six items complete the list of main menu items. Each item governs a certain aspect of the VIP Professional program. The choices are: Worksheet, Range, File, Data, Graph and Print. We have organized our discussion of menu-related commands into several chapters. This chapter introduces menu commands and gives you some necessary information about them, such as issuing the commands and cancelling wrong choices. It also discusses the Copy, Move and Quit commands. Desk and VIP menu commands are listed and described in the next chapter. Each of the following six chapters deals specifically with one of the items which governs an aspect of VIP Professional. Page 80 Invoking a Command by Pointing There are two ways in which a command can be invoked (or issued). One way is by pointing to it on a menu. Using a Mouse: If you are using a mouse, do not press [/] to move to the menu line. Instead, simply move the cell pointer to the menu line. You can move the pointer over the items listed, highlighting each item in turn. As you highlight the items, their drop-down menus appear in columns below them. You can move up and down through these submenus. Each item is also highlighted as you pass over it. To make a command selection, highlight one of the items from the menu line or from a drop-down menu and click. If you don't want to make a selection, just click the mouse button while the pointer is outside the worksheet window, but not highlighting an item. If you accidentally choose a command, place the cell pointer over the word "Menu" in the mode indicator and click the mouse key. This the mouse equivalent to a break. The mouse equivalent to [Escape] is the Escape icon. Move the pointer over the icon and click the mouse button for each time you want to use [Escape]. [Escape] moves you one step back in your current command series. Using the Arrow Keys: To point to an item from a menu, first press [/] to let VIP Professional know you are ready to use a command. The program highlights "Worksheet" on the menu line. By using [Right] and [Left], you can move back and forth along the row, highlighting each item in turn except the Desk and VIP menus which can only be reached with the mouse. If you press [Return] while any command is highlighted, a new menu of the sub-commands appears on the menu line. Alternatively, you may be faced with a series of prompts which lead you through a command process. When items are highlighted from a main menu, you will notice their submenus appear in a column beneath them. You can skip selecting a main item and select an item from its submenu instead. Use [Up] and [Down] to move through the columns. When the item of your choice is highlighted, press [Return] to enter it. If you don't want to make any of these selections, simply press [Escape] until you return to the Ready mode or issue a break by pressing [Control][Undo]. Invoking a Command by Typing Command Letters Another way to issue a command is by using the keyboard to type it. Precede a command, or a series of commands with a diagonal slash ([/]). This lets VIP Professional know that the letters you are about to type belong to a command and are not to be considered as a label. Now, you can begin to type in the command of your choice. VIP Professional recognizes the command by initial letters and moves on to the next step of the command. For example, If you choose to change the left margin setting of a worksheet in a print file, you will type /PFOML. The diagonal slash begins the command sequence. P chooses the Print item from the main menu. F chooses File from the subsidiary menu. Then, O chooses Options. M chooses Margins and L chooses left. At this point, you may even type in the number of spaces you want the left margin set at (plus [Return] to set the number). Did you notice that there is no need to press [Return] to enter your menu command choices? Page 81 If you make a mistake typing in command letters, you can use [Escape] to back up one step at a time in your command sequence. For instance, if you type in "/WGFG" (Worksheet Global Format General), but you really want "/WGDD" instead, you can use [Escape] twice. This takes you back to the Worksheet Global menu. From this point, all you need to do is type in "DD". On the other hand, if you want to escape from the entire sequence, use a break ([Control][Undo]) to go back to the Ready mode. The Menu Mode When you are selecting menu commands, the mode indicator displays the word "Menu". While you are in this mode, you cannot move freely about the worksheet or enter data. Once you have finished a command series or escaped, the mode indicator changes back to Ready and you can move about the worksheet or invoke another command. VIP's MESSAGES AND DEFAULT ENTRIES Prompts VIP Professional helps you to move from step to step in many commands by issuing prompts. Some examples of what you may be prompted for are file names, range names or other needed pieces of information. These can be specified by typing in the answer you want and pressing [Return] or, when appropriate, by using arrow keys or mouse to point to a name on a list and pressing [Return]. Error Messages Error prompts may also be used to inform you when an error has been made. VIP uses prompts instead of just beeping at you when there is an error because it tries to give you as much information as possible about the error so that you can solve it easily. When a minor error is made, like trying to move off the worksheet with your arrow keys, the computer will merely beep at you. It assumes that you are aware of the cause of the error. At other times, VIP Professional moves you to the source of the error in addition to beeping at you. With many of the more sophisticated commands and functions, errors are more difficult to pinpoint. In such cases, VIP Professional displays an error message on the screen until you correct your mistake or press [Escape] (or the mouse equivalent of [Escape]). Default Entries VIP Professional may also present you with a default entry. A default entry is an entry which appears automatically on the screen in response to a prompt. Default entries are based on the premise that it is easier to accept or revise an existing entry than it is to type in a new one. In dealing with a default entry you can do one of three things: accept it, revise it, or exchange it for one of your choice. If you accept an entry as it stands, simply press [Return] or click your mouse. If you want to revise the entry, you can do so while you are still in the Edit mode by using your movement, delete and backspace keys. Characters can also be inserted by typing them in where they belong. You will find that there are a few exceptions in which an entry cannot be revised but must be either accepted as is or completely retyped. If you would rather type in a new entry, press [Escape] once to erase the existing entry and type in the new entry. Page 82 Correcting Typing Mistakes When you type a command, VIP Professional places you in the Edit mode until you are finished. You can correct any typing error you make while you are in the Edit mode by using the features made available to you by that mode. This feature is particularly useful when you need to type in a new file or range name. Once You've Issued a Command ... VIP Professional usually returns to the Ready mode after the command or command series has been executed. You can then enter another command or start entering data in your worksheet. However, this, like all rules, has its exception. There are times when VIP Professional anticipates that you will be issuing several menu commands in succession. The menu of related commands will stay on the screen until the program feels you have issued all the necessary commands. For example, you may choose Graph from the main menu by typing /G. Then choose and execute a Graph Options Color command to view your graph in color (O for Options and C for color). Choose Quit (Q) to leave the Graph Options menu and go back to the main Graph menu. Then you can choose a Graph Name command by typing N. As you can see, VIP Professional moves from menu to menu with the Graph Options menu until you choose to leave it by using Quit. It then stays in the main Graph menu until you choose Quit again. When VIP anticipates that you may be invoking several related commands in a row, it often offers the Quit command with the other menu choices. Then, if you want to get back to the Ready mode without making all the selections offered you, you can choose Quit (Q). You may even be able to use Quit several times before you are returned to the Ready mode. For instance, to move to the Ready mode from the Graph Options Format menu, choose Quit once to go back to the Graph Options menu, once again to go to the main Graph menu and a third time to return to the Ready mode. Escaping from a Wrong Command Sometimes, you will find that you have issued a wrong command or you might decide that you really don't want to have a command executed even though you have already invoked it. If you haven't executed a command yet (for example, If you haven't sorted a database with the Data Sort command), you can cancel the command by pressing [Escape]. [Escape] backs you up one command step in the present series each time you press it. So if you choose the Data-Range command of the Data Sort command (/DSD), the first [Escape] takes you back to the Sort menu, the second takes you back to the Data menu, and the third places you in the Ready mode. If you are using a mouse, you have an equivalent to pressing [Escape]. By moving the mouse over the Escape icon and clicking the mouse key once, you can cancel a command you just issued. If you click the mouse key more than once, each time you press it, VIP Professional will move one step backward in the command sequence. A fast way to undo a whole series of commands is to use a break. The key combinations used for a break is [Control][Undo]. The mouse equivalent is to click the mouse button while the pointer is over the mode indicator. A break will undo all the commands issued in the present series. You will be returned to your last position in the Ready mode. Page 83 But how can a command that has been executed be undone? This is harder. In some cases, you will find there is a Reset command which allows you to cancel settings you made using other commands. For example, with the Graph Reset command you have the option to cancel any graph ranges you specified (A-F), the X range or all your graph settings. Usually the only way to undo a command which has already been executed is by issuing another command which voids the first one. For example, if you insert an unnecessary row in your worksheet, you will have to issue a command to delete that row. Three Independent Commands As we stated earlier, there are three independent commands (Copy, Move and Quit) which can be found in the main menu. They are independent because they have no submenus. These commands are extremely powerful. They can be invoked at any time in the Ready mode(like the other menu commands), but each is responsible for only one function. Copy copies worksheet entries from one area to another in the worksheet, Move moves cell entries, and Quit allows you to leave your worksheet. The Copy Command The Copy command is used to create new cell entries by copying, or duplicating, already existing cell entries. The Copy command can be used to copy both values and labels. In its most sophisticated use, the Copy command can be used to copy formulas and produce projections and extrapolations throughout the entire ranges of your worksheet Copying Labels and Values One of the simplest uses of the Copy command is to copy a label or plain value (not a formula) from one cell to another or from one range to another. It is important to note that the Copy command erases the previous contents of the cell you are copying into and there is no way to recover this information. Any formulas which refer to the copy cells by cell address will remain valid and use the new contents. "To" (target) and "from (source) copying ranges should not overlap one another. Overlapping leads to inaccurate copying- except for those rare cases where the two areas share the same upper left hand corner. You can use a single cell or range to copy. Ranges must always be rectangular in shape (rows, columns, and other square or rectangular areas are acceptable). Cells which are separated from each other must be copied one at a time. Copying Formulas To copy formula(s) of one or more cells to another area, use the same procedure described for copying values and other characters. The difference concerns only those formulas which reference cell addresses. The exact match of the copied cell formula to the new cell formula depends on whether you use absolute cell addresses, or mixed cell addresses in the formula. The concepts of absolute, relative and mixed cell addresses are discussed in the "Building Formulas Using Operators and Functions" chapter of the Reference Guide, under the section "Relative and Absolute Cells". Page 84 If you use an absolute cell address in a formula, the formula is transferred to the new cell using identical operations and identical cell addresses without regard to its new location. If you use relative cell addresses in a formula, the formula transfers identical operations. However, because the cell addresses are relative, the cell addresses change in accordance with their new location. If you use a cell address in a formula which is two spaces up and one to the right of the original cell, it will be two spaces up and one to the right in the copied cell. In copying a range specification, VIP Professional adjusts each of the cell addresses independently. When a formula using a range name in place of cell addresses is copied, the computer automatically assumes that the range is relative. To make the Range absolute, precede the range with the absolute symbol "$". This will make the range absolute as a group (that is, each cell of the range is considered to be absolute. Mixed cell addresses in a formula act as a combination of absolute and relative references. The absolute part of a mixed cell address - whether it is the column or row - will remain the same. The relative part of a mixed cell address is different in the copied cell formula than it is in the original. The relative part of the address depends on the distance relationship between the original formula cell and the referenced cell for its location. Basically, this means that the cell address of the formula changes when it is copied, although the change is only in one direction. Using Copy First, select the Copy command by typing /C or choosing it from the main menu line. In response to a prompt for a range, use your arrow keys, your mouse, or type the anchor and end cell coordinates (separated by a period) to specify the range or cell to be copied from (the source range). Once you have selected a source range or cell, VIP Professional sends you another prompt. This one asks for a range to be copied to (a target range or cell). In response to the second prompt, specify a range or cell in the same way as you did the first one. VIP Professional does the rest of the work. The Move Command The Move command is another powerful command available with VIP Professional. It transfers a cell or range of cells from one location in your worksheet to another. The relationships between the moved cells are not disturbed. This command is particularly suitable redesigning areas of your worksheet. Moving cell entries is just like picking them up from one location and placing them in another. Not only are the formulas and other relationships between them unchanged, but all formulas which refer to the moved cells are kept the same as before. When you move a cell which is located at the top left or bottom right corner of a specified range, you will alter the structure of the range (its range definition). Any formulas which refer to that range will be altered to take into account its new definition. If you move any other cell of a range, it will remove the cell from that range without affecting the range definition. Page 85 If you move the contents of a range to another location, it is important to note that any previous entries in that location will be erased. Any cells which are used as references are erased and are no longer valid references. All formulas which used those cell references now display the value "ERR" instead of their former values. Using Move To issue a Move command, first select the command by typing "/M" or choosing it from the main menu. In response to a prompt for a range to be moved, specify either a range or a single cell. You may use your arrow keys, mouse or type the anchor and end cell coordinates (separated by a period). Like Copy, Move has a special feature which allows you to select a range you specified with your mouse prior to invoking Move. Press [Return] to accept the previously specified range when its cell coordinates are displayed next to the prompt or specify another and press [Return] to enter the newest one. After selecting a source range and in response to a second prompt, indicate the area where you want the cell(s) moved to using the same method you did for the first prompt. This will be the target range. Press [Return] to enter it. VIP Professional will now move your cell or range to its new location. Using the Quit Command When you are ready to quit your worksheet, VIP Professional has a special Quit command. To select the Quit command, simply type "/Q", Choose it from the main menu or click on the Quit box at the left side of the Title bar. This brings up two options: "Yes" and "No". Selecting Yes ends the work session and returns you to the computer's operating system. Selecting No cancels the Quit command and returns you to the Ready mode in your worksheet. The most important reason why VIP Professional questions your decision to quit is to give you a chance to save your worksheet if you wish to do so. If you wish to retain your work in some form, use the File Save command to save your entire worksheet, the File Xtract command to save a portion of your worksheet or the Print commands to print your worksheet now or save it in a print file. Saving Your Worksheet Before You Quit We strongly suggest you save your worksheet (with the File Save command) quite often before you quit it. In fact, we would suggest that you save it as often as every 15 minutes. Anything from an erroneous command to a power failure can destroy your work if you keep it solely in your computer's memory. Once you have finished your worksheet or are ready to end the work session, you can decide the finished form in which your worksheet is to be saved (whether it is all or part, etc.). Page 86 DESK and VIP COMMANDS Introduction The Desk and the VIP menu are two special menus available with VIP Professional in the GEM version. These two items are different from the other items in that they cannot be invoked by typing their initial letters (preceded by [/]). However, they can be invoked by using the mouse and clicking to make your selection. The Desk and VIP items are additions to those offered by Lotus 1-2-3. The Desk menu contains utilities specific to the Atari ST. The VIP menu provides functions specific to VIP Professional, and places the Function key commands to an easy-to-use menu. Desk Commands The Desk item is an Atari-specific item. This means that it is an item which is common to Atari. If you loaded the VIP program using the GEM desktop, this item will always be present on the menu line. Its functions and its menu items can be found in the Atari Owner's Manual and are described there in detail. However, there are a couple of points we'd like to mention here. If you are interested in getting information about this program, you can get it by using the Professional info. item. It will show you which program is currently loaded and gives copyright information about that program. It is from the Control Panel item of this menu that you can control such things as the colors used by the monitor for your worksheet display and for the display of the graphs that you create. If you use certain date functions, you would also want to set the correct time and date using this item. Other things you can do from the Control Panel include: setting the mouse and keyboard response times (that is, making them faster and slower), and activating/deactivating audio feedback. The Install Printer item is another important item from the Desk menu. If you want to print a worksheet or a graph, you will first use the Install Printer item to set necessary printer configurations. Page 87 VIP Commands The VIP menu offers eleven different items. The first ten items of the VIP menu are the ten special functions of the program. These functions can also be invoked from the keyboard, but for mouse users, it may be easier to use the VIP menu. The ten functions are: Help, Edit, Name, Absolute, GoTo, Window, Query, Table, Calculate and Graph. Although they are listed here, they are described thoroughly at the end of the chapter, "A Summary of Worksheet Basics" of the Reference Guide. Name Function Help Calls up the Help program. Edit From the Ready mode, places you in the Edit mode. From the Edit mode, places you in your last previous mode. Name Calls up a list of the worksheet's current names. Absolute Takes a cell or range reference through a cycle of absolute, mixed, then relative reference types. GoTo Moves the cell indicator to a specified cell. Window With split-windows, moves the cell indicator from one window to another. Query Performs a Data Query operation using the most previously made settings. Table Performs a Data Table (either 1 or 2) operation using the most previously made settings. Calculate From the Ready mode, recalculates the entire worksheet. From Value or Edit modes, calculates the result of a formula and displays it on the Edit line. Graph In the Ready mode, it displays a graph using the most recent settings. The eleventh item is called, "Goodies". Goodies has two subcommands: Grid and Font. Grid is used to make the grid pattern of your worksheet visible or invisible. To keep the Grid pattern, choose "On". To erase the grid pattern, choose "Off". The Font item allows you to change the font size of the characters in your worksheet display. You have three choices: Small (S), Medium (M) and Large (L). Page 88 WORKSHEET COMMANDS Introduction The Worksheet menu is used to design a worksheet which suits your needs. The commands affect your worksheet as a whole or are used to make large-scale changes in it. Worksheet commands are also used to manage your worksheet display. One group of commands is used to set default instructions for a current directory along with printing information such as margins. A default command is one where VIP Professional automatically assumes certain selections. You do not have to make your own selections unless you want to tailor the features to meet special needs. In general, default commands are most in evidence in the Worksheet aspect of the VIP Professional program. A set of commands, called "global", are responsible for changes that take place throughout the worksheet. Other commands include changing column-width(s), adding or deleting rows of columns, splitting the worksheet window, freezing titles on the screen and erasing worksheet contents. Worksheet Global Format VIP Professional considers values separately from labels when formats are set. Worksheet Global Format commands are used to change the format of number cells (i.e. cells which display values). However, these commands have no bearing on the display of the labels. The format commands only determine how VIP Professional stores values for display, they do not change the values themselves. This is important to remember because, at one point, you may round your worksheet values off to two decimal places. For example, a number such as 314.323 will then be displayed as 314.32. If, at a later point, you decide to change the display setting to four decimal places, VIP Professional remembers the original numerical value and now displays the number as 314.3230. VIP can effectively remember the values you enter to 15 decimal places. In addition, if a format makes a value too long to be displayed within a cell, asterisk marks are placed across the cell. For the value to be displayed, the format must be changed so the display is shortened or the column width must be widened to accommodate the value in the cell. The Worksheet Global Format command can be used in conjunction with the Range Format command. Where it os used, the Range Format command overrides the Worksheet Global Format command. If, for example, you numbered a series of rows in a worksheet, you might want to have the numbers displayed simply as positive integers. What if all the other values needed to be displayed as dollars and cents? The first thing you would do is select the Currency option of the Worksheet Global Format command. Notice that all your values are now displayed as dollars and cents. Now, select the Range Format command and specify the column of values numbering the rows as the range. Choose the General format option. The column of numbers is displayed as positive integers while the other values of the worksheet continue to be displayed as U.S. currency. Select the format command form the Worksheet Global menu (/WGF). Then, choose the display format you want and enter it. There are nine available options. Page 89 Currency: Choose Currency (C) from the Format menu. U.S. dollar symbols are needed. Negative values are displayed in parentheses. Commas are used after every third digit to the right of the decimal point. Enter the number of decimal points you want the values rounded off to. Your choices are 0 to 15. Press [Return]. Date: Choose Date (D) from the Format menu. Choosing Date causes the values of your worksheet to be considered "serial dates" and to be translated and displayed as dates. This format is most often used with date arithmetic (see the section on "Date Arithmetic" in the chapter, "Building formulas using Operators and Functions"). With the Date format, you have three choices: 1) Day-Month-Year,2)Day-Month,and 3)Month-Year. Make a choice by typing the number of the selection and pressing [Return]. Day and year are displayed numerically (with two digits each) and month is displayed as abbreviated text (with three letters). a date would be displayed as "09-MAR-85". Fixed: Choose Fixed (F) from the Format menu. The Fixed format allows you to set the number of digits you want displayed after the decimal point. Then enter the number of decimal places (your choices are from 0 to 15) to which all values will be carried. Press [Return]. General: Choose General (G) from the Format menu. This chooses the standard format. Trailing zeros after a decimal point are not displayed. Large numbers are displayed in scientific notation. This is the initial, default format for VIP Professional. Percent: Choose Percent (P) from the Format menu. The Percent format displays values as percentages. It displays a percent sign after the number. Enter the amount of decimal places you wish your percent rounded off to (your choices are 0 to 15). Scientific: Choose Scientific (S) from the Format menu. This format displays your values as scientific exponentials, rounded off to the number of decimal places you select. Enter the number of decimal places (0 to 15) which you want the multiplier rounded off to. Text: Choose Text (T) from the Format menu. This displays the formulas instead of their current values in the cells. The text format is often used to compare values displayed with the underlying formulas. This is done by using the Worksheet Window command. One window is used to view the resulting values, while the other window is used to view the underlying formulas. Page 90 Comma: Choose Comma (,) from the Format menu. Your values will be displayed with commas after every third digit from the right of the decimal place and with the number of decimal places you specify. Negative values are displayed in parentheses. Choose the number of decimal places to be rounded off to (between 0 and 15). Press [Return]. Plus or Minus: Choose Plus or Minus (+) from the Format menu. This format is used to create horizontal bar graphs. The number of symbols represents the integer. "+" is used for positive integers, "-" is used for negative integers and "." is used for zero. Worksheet Global Label - prefix To change default settings for label formats, use the Worksheet Label - prefix command. Label formatting information is stored differently than numerical formatting is. Labels do not change their appearance like values do. Instead, changes in label formatting come about from the way labels are placed in their cells: either flushed left, flushed right or centered. Another prefix, the "\" character can be used individually to repeat the cell contents across the cell. There is no global worksheet command option available for the repeating label format. A prefix character )or label prefix) is one of four characters which determine a label's appearance in a cell. When you are in the Label or Edit mode, it will appear in the control panel as you type in the label. The prefix character is not displayed in the worksheet, however. Prefix Effect ' Align to Left " Align to Right ^ Center The label formatting information is stored with the labels individually. However, with the Worksheet Global Label - prefix and the Range Label - prefix commands, VIP can default an area to use one of three label prefixes (left, right or center) when a label is entered. Since label alignment is initially defaulted to the left, you will notice that, if you type in labels without changing the label format in some way, your label will be preceded by an apostrophe (') which aligns them with the left of the cell. By selecting the Label - prefix command from the Worksheet Global menu (/WGL), you can change the original left alignment to the right, or center it. The Worksheet Global Format command affects only those labels you create after issuing a change. Previously created labels will remain positioned as they were before the change. When you specifically enter a label prefix, or if you use the Range Label - prefix command, you will override the Worksheet Global Label Prefix. Page 91 Although the fourth label prefix (\) is not available with the Worksheet Global Format command, it can be used individually to make a label repeat itself throughout the cell. When used with the Copy command, this feature is especially handy for typing lines and dashed lines across your worksheet. If the label is as long, or longer, than its cell, alignment doesn't matter because VIP will fill the cell and continue past the cell into the cell to the right, fill that cell, move on to the next right cell and so on until the entire label has been accommodate. Although a cell can contain as many as 240 characters, the display will only show as many as will fit across the screen at one time. Any time you begin a label with a number or any other character which might cause VIP Professional to think that you were entering a value instead of a label, you must specifically precede it with a character prefix to let VIP Professional know that it is definitely a label. If you are creating a Keyboard Macro and you begin a label with a keystroke which is a value prefix or the command prefix (/), be sure to precede it with a character prefix also. There will be times when you wish to change alignment of already existing smaller groups of and single-cell labels. In such cases, use the Range Label - prefix command for groups of labels or use the Edit mode for single-cell changes. Worksheet Global Column - width When we speak of column width in your worksheet, we are referring to the number of character spaces it takes to fill a cell in that column. Your worksheet is structured as a gridlike pattern of cells which is organized into columns and rows. Any changes you make in the width of one cell will be reflected in all other rows of the column. Although the column width is initially defaulted to 9 spaces, by selecting the Worksheet Global Column - width command, you may change the width of all the columns of your worksheet. To do so, select Column - width from the Worksheet Global menu (/WGC). VIP Professional will display the current global width setting. To set a different column - width, you can use your [Left] and [Right] keys. You could also type in the number of characters you want for the column - width and press [Return]. The [Right] and [Left] keys adjust the current cell width. Each time you press [Right], one space is added to the width. Each time you press [Left], one space is subtracted. When you reach the desired width, press [Return] to set it. The Worksheet Global Column - width command only affects the window in which the cell indicator is located. For example, if you have split the screen into two vertical windows and the cell indicator was in the left window when you issued the Worksheet Global Column - width command, then only the left window would be affected. Page 92 Worksheet Global Protection Often worksheets are created to be used by untrained personnel. Because of this, it may be desirable to protect areas of your worksheet from accidental changes, leaving only the areas which require entry accessible. This is done by using the Worksheet Global Protection command (/WGP) in conjunction with the Range Unprotect command (/RU). The Worksheet Global Protection command is the only command which can be activate worksheet protection. If it is not on, the Range Protect command will be ineffective. Once you have protected the worksheet by enabling Worksheet Global Protection, you may then use the Range Unprotect command to unprotect areas of the worksheet for data entry. Should you later decide to protect areas unprotected with the Range Unprotect command, you may use the Range Protect command to protect those areas. If you decide to turn off protection altogether, simply disable global protection. As an example, you might wish to create a monthly balance sheet to be used by your bookkeeper. Worksheet Global Protection is enabled to protect your formulas, labels, and instructions. Since the monthly values will have to be re-entered each month, use the Range Unprotect command in those cells to override the Global Protection command. In the ranges you have specified with Range Unprotect, protection will be lifted from the cells. Once you select the Worksheet Global Protection command, you will be offered two choices: Enable (on) and Disable (off). Type (E) to enable or (D) to disable. Worksheet Global Recalculation The Worksheet Global Recalculation menu allows you to turn the automatic calculation feature of your worksheet on and off. It also allows you to choose the type and number of calculations you want done on the same worksheet. Calculations affects only the formulas and values which are related to the formulas. Calculation and recalculation of worksheets is also discussed in the chapter "Building Formulas Using Operators and Functions". When you select Recalculation from the Worksheet Global menu (/WGR), you are offered a submenu with five commands governing the type and/or order of calculation (Automatic, Manual, Column, Row and Natural) and one command allowing you to choose the number of times you want recalculation to occur (Iteration). Automatic is the default setting. Every time you add or change an entry, VIP Professional will automatically calculate your worksheet for you. Automatic recalculation can be time consuming, particularly when your worksheet is fairly large. You may switch to manual recalculation to save time between entries. Choose Manual from the Worksheet Global Recalculation menu (/WGRM). Now the worksheet will only be recalculated when you want it to be. To switch back to automatic recalculation, select Automatic from the Worksheet Global Recalculation menu (/WGRA). Natural recalculation is the default setting for order of calculation. This causes calculation to occur in the order of columns (from left to right). Every time VIP Professional comes across a forward reference (a formula which refers to another cell whose contents have not been calculated yet), it calculates the contents of the cell further ahead before it jumps back and continues calculating in the order of columns. If you choose another type of recalculation, then decide to return to natural calculation, you must choose Natural from the Worksheet Global Recalculation menu (/WGRN). Page 93 Another option you have for recalculation order is columnwise. Columnwise order recalculates the worksheet in the same order as natural does; column by column, from left to right. However, with forward references in columnwise order, the referenced cells do not have their contents calculated before the formula cells are calculated. Columnwise can be chosen from the Worksheet Global Recalculation menu (/WGRC). Instead of performing calculations in the order of columns, they can be performed in the order of rows. To do this, invoke the Row command from the Worksheet Global Recalculation menu (/WGRR). This will cause calculation to change from the order of columns to that of rows (from top to bottom). One reason you may decide to use rowwise instead of columnwise (or vice versa) is that it can avoid some simple forward reference problems which might occur otherwise. Iteration is the command which controls the number of times calculation occurs. Some complex formulas only achieve accurate results in calculation after being recalculated a number of times. You may also wish to check calculations by recalculating to see if different results can be obtained. Choose Iteration from the Worksheet Global Recalculation menu (WGRI). Then choose the number of times you wish calculation to occur by typing in the number (between 1 and 50) and pressing [Return]. At the next calculation, the worksheet will be recalculated the number of times you specify. Calculation of your worksheet does not always lead to the same results, nor are the results always completely accurate. Two major problems in calculation are forward references, which may occur when using the Row or Column method of recalculation, and circular references. Forward references are formula cells which refer to cells whose contents haven't been calculated yet. Although the Natural recalculation automatically takes care of forward references, the Row and Column methods do not. Circular references are formula cells which refer to other cells which refer back to themselves (the values of the cells are interdependent). If VIP ever finds a circular reference while it is calculating your worksheet, a small Circular Reference icon will be displayed in the Control area of your screen. It is also a good idea to check the order of precedence in calculations (see "Building Formulas Using Operators and Functions") if you are obtaining unexpected results. The order of precedence makes a difference in the way individual formulas are calculated. This, in turn, can affect many formula cells in the worksheet. Worksheet Global Default The Worksheet Global Default commands control a group of settings which are used automatically every time you retrieve a worksheet. The commands are used to let the computer know which directory is to be used for saving and retrieving files, what type of printer and interface will be used, and the configurations of the printed page (for example, the margins and line spacing). Since they are defaulted, these commands will remain the same for the worksheet until you change them. Except for deciding the directory, the command choices can be changed from the Print menu (see the chapter "Print Commands"). The current directory can be changed with the File Directory command (see the chapter, "File Commands"). If you wish to save any changes you make with these commands for another work session, be sure to use the Update command from the Worksheet Global Default menu (/WGDU). Page 94 To alter the originally defaulted printer configurations and directory, select Worksheet, Global, then Default (/WGD). This will result in the submenus of commands which decide directory (called "folder" with Atari) and printing values. Of course you can change folders by opening another folder icon (as described in your Atari manual). Choosing a Directory A directory decides where your files will be saved to and which files you can retrieve. It decides both the disk drive and the name of the folder which will be saved into and retrieved from. To choose the command, select Directory (D). Then specify the disk drive and directory you want. This is done by typing "Letter of Disk Drive (choose from A - C):\(Name of directory)". The letters are: A for the first disk drive (with floppies), B for a second disk drive (with floppies) and C for hard disks. For example, if you type "B:\ACCTS", all your files are saved and retrieved to the "B" disk drive and the directory (or folder) "ACCTS". This means you've decided not to change the target directory from what it is. If you wish to save or retrieve files to another directory at a later time, you may use this command again. You may also change the setting with the File Directory command, or, in many cases, you can specify another disk when you enter a file name by typing the disk prefix (one of the letters from A - C) and the folder name, if necessary. Choosing Printer Information Other defaulted commands are those which control the printer. Select Printer (P) to bring up the Printer Control submenu. We will discuss each subcommand in the paragraphs below. First, we will list the initial configuration values. They are as follows: Auto Line-feed: No Top Margin: 2 Bottom Margin: 2 Left Margin: 4 Right Margin: 76 Page Length: 66 Set-up String: None Pause at end of page (wait): No Page 95 Automatic Line Feed The Automatic Line Feed command is chosen with Auto-LF(A). It controls whether or not there is to be automatic line feed at the end of each line, which, in turn, is dependent on what your printer requires. Your choices are Yes (Y) and (No (N). If you choose Yes, the printer will automatically be sent a line feed after a carriage return. If you choose No, the printer will not be sent a line feed after each carriage return. Press [Return] to enter your choice. Margins VIP Professional lets you alter the margins for printing so that you can control the aesthetics of your printed reports. The default settings assume an 8 1/2" X 11" sheet of paper using a 10 pitch typeface (10 characters per inch). The default margins are a top margin of 2 lines and a bottom margin of 2 lines, giving you 62 lines of text. The left margin is 4 spaces and the right margin is 76 spaces, giving you 72 characters per printed line. You may however, decide to change the defaulted printer configurations for printing on computer paper, or based on a compressed font which gives 16.7 characters per inch, or for some other purpose. VIP Professional allows you to do this by changing any of the defaulted settings. Top Margin The Top Margin command sets the top margin for the printed page. This margin is expressed as the number of lines from the top of the page. Choose Top (T). Then select either the initial defaulted value or one of your own. To select the initial defaulted value, press [Return]. To change the defaulted value, type in the number and press [Return]. Bottom Margin The Bottom Margin command sets the bottom margin for the printed page. This margin is expressed as the number of lines from the bottom edge of the page. First, choose Bottom (B). You have a choice between 0 and 10 or using the initial defaulted value. If you would like to make your own selection, type in the number of your choice and press [Return] to enter it. If you want to continue using the defaulted value, press [Return]. Left Margin The Left Margin command sets the left margin of your printed page. Choose Left (L). Your choices are retaining the original defaulted value (by pressing [Return] or choosing a new value of 0 to 240 character spaces. To choose a new number, type the number and press [Return]. Right Margin The Right Margin command sets the right margin of your printed page. First, choose Right (R). You may keep the initial defaulted value by pressing [Return] or you may select a value of your own. To use your own value, type in a number between 0 and 240 (character spaces), and press [Return]. Note that the right margin is determined by the number of character spaces from the left edge of the paper to the right side and not from the right edge towards the left. Page 96 Page Length The Page Length command sets the page length of the printed page. First, choose Page - Length (P). Then, you may retain the original page length or specify a new one. If you wish to retain the original setting, press [Return]. If you wish to change it, specify a number between 20 and 100 by typing it in and pressing [Return]. The standard 11" page length is 66 lines. One inch equals six lines. Set-up String The Set-up String command allows you to set-up a string of printer control codes to control special features of your printer, such as the compressed font. Set-up strings are discussed in the Options section of the Print Commands chapter (under Set-up) and also in Appendix D. Type in a set-up string and press [Return] or simply press [Return] if you decide not to include a set-up string. Wait If you are using single-sheet feed paper, the Wait command is used to tell the printer to wait for a paper change between each page. Select Wait (W). Specify Yes (Y) or No (N). "Yes" signals that printing should be held up between pages. If you choose it, you will have to press [Return] to resume printing after every page. "No" signals the printing should continue automatically page by page. Status The Status command displays the current selection of the Worksheet Global Default commands (Directory, Automatic Line Feed, Printer Interface, Margins, Page Length, Set-up String and Wait). Choose Status (S). The settings for the Worksheet Global Default commands will be displayed on the screen. Press any key to go back to the worksheet display. Update The Update command is used to save the defaulted settings (including those you may have changed with the Worksheet Global Default command) for future use. If you do not update the settings, they will revert back to the original settings the next time you start VIP Professional. Select Update (U). Your configuration settings are now saved. Quit (in Printer and Default Submenus) The Quit command helps you move out of the Printer submenu or out of the Worksheet Global Default menu. Select Quit (Q) if you wish to get out of the Printer submenu. Then select Quit (Q) again if you wish to get out of the Worksheet Global Default menu. This will return you to the main Worksheet menu. Page 97 Worksheet Insert Rows and Columns There are two commands which are used to insert space in a worksheet. The Worksheet Insert Rows command is used to insert one or more rows and the Worksheet Insert Columns command is used to insert one or more columns in your worksheet. These commands are for adding space for additional data, or for beautifying your worksheet. When a row or column is added, the other rows or columns move downward or to the right to accommodate the inserted areas. Usually, no rows or columns are lost at the ends of your worksheet since the borders of the worksheet expand to allow for the inserted areas. VIP Professional automatically adjusts cell references in moved rows or columns to correspond with their new locations. Initially, the inserted areas use the global formats (for value and label displays, and for column width and rows). To insert rows, first place the cell indicator on the row below which you want the space inserted. Select the Row command (/WIR) from the Worksheet Insert menu. A prompt will appear on your screen asking for a range. Use your arrow keys or your mouse to move the cell indicator down the number times you want a row to be inserted. Press [Return]. To insert columns, first place the cell indicator on the column before where you want the space to be inserted. Select Column (/WIC) from the Worksheet Insert menu. As with inserting rows, respond to the prompt by using your arrow keys or mouse to indicate the number of columns you want inserted. Press [Return]. Worksheet Delete Rows and Columns The two commands, Worksheet Delete Rows and Worksheet Delete Columns, are used to delete one or more complete rows or columns in your worksheet. After deleting a row or column, the remaining rows and columns are moved up or left to fill the gap made by the deleted space. If there are any cell references in your worksheet which refer to one of the deleted cells, then the formulas depending on them display the "ERR" value. To delete rows, first place your cell indicator over the first row you wish to delete. Select Row from the Worksheet Delete menu (/WDR). In reply to the prompt which appears, use your arrow keys or mouse to specify the number, or range, of rows you want deleted by moving your cell indicator over them. Press [Return]. To delete columns, place your cell indicator over the first column you want deleted. Select Column from the Worksheet Delete menu (/WDC). A prompt appears on the screen asking for a range. Use your arrow keys or mouse to indicate the number of columns. Press [Return]. Worksheet Column-width The Worksheet Column-width command is used to change the width of a single column. This command is similar to the Worksheet Global Column-width command, except that it operates on single columns and allows you to "reset" column widths to the global format. The Worksheet Column-width command overrides the Worksheet Global Column-width command. To set the width of one column, move the cell indicator to a cell in that column. Select the Column-width command from the Worksheet menu (/WC). You have two options: Set (S) or Reset (R). Page 98 If you choose Set, you can set the column-width with your arrow keys or mouse. With [Left] and [Right], subtract or add one space at a time to the current width. Press [Return] when you reach the desired width. To use the mouse, Move the pointer into the columns border. The pointer will change to a grooved square, called a grabber. Move the grabber over a line dividing the columns (in the columns border), and hold the mouse button down while you drag the line to reach the desired width. Then, let up on the mouse. As a third option, you can type in the number of spaces for the column width and press [Return]. If you want to return the column-width setting to the global column-width setting, use the Reset option of the Worksheet Column-width command. To reset column-width settings, select the Worksheet column-width command after you have positioned the cell indicator on the target column. Select the Reset option (R). The column is returned to the globally defaulted setting. Worksheet Titles The Worksheet Titles command is used to lock rows, columns or both in place on your screen st that when you scroll through your worksheet, the row and/or column will remain visible. On your screen, column letters and row numbers form a border near the top and at the left edge of the screen. When you move the cell indicator down or to the right, notice that these borders will remain in place to indicate your position on the worksheet. The borders are said to be "frozen". Sometimes, you will find that it is convenient to maintain a vertical section of your worksheet in one place while you scroll through and make changes in other sections of your worksheet. Just as the borders at the left and top of the worksheet display are "frozen", you can "freeze" the worksheet sections horizontally, vertically or both. This is known as "title locking" or "freezing titles". To freeze your titles, first select the cell to the right of or beneath the columns or rows you wish to freeze. Next, select the Titles command from the worksheet menu (/WT). Then, choose whether to freeze the Row(s), Column(s) or both (R, C, or B). The titles are now frozen on the screen from the position of the cell indicator to the left edge of the worksheet (for Columns), the top edge of the worksheet (for Rows) or both (for Both). A line acts as a border around the frozen area to separate it from the rest of your worksheet. The frozen area will remain in place as you scroll through your worksheet in any direction. An addition difference between this and other areas of your worksheet is that you will not be able to enter the frozen area using your cell indicator in the Ready mode. This is a protection feature which protects the titles area from accidental alteration. Still, there will be times when you need to enter the titles area. You may do so by using your mouse or the GoTo function ([Function 5]). When you do so, the Titles area will be duplicated below and/or to the right of the original titles area. This is done so that you may alter the copy, but still not get into the actual Titles area. Any changes you make to the duplicate Titles area will be reflected in the original Titles area. Once you scroll the duplicate Titles area off the screen, it will no longer be displayed. To unfreeze titles, select the Clear command from the Worksheet Titles menu (/WTC). The worksheet display returns to normal. Page 99 At last, here's the fifth and final part of these HUGE VIP docs .... Although it is called a Line graph, Line graphs do not necessarily use lines to depict sets of data. There are four options you may use singly or (when possible) in combination to show the values in a Line graph. To choose the Format of your Line graph, you will use the Graph Options Format or the Graph Options Data-Labels command. The first option is using symbols to represent different sets of data. Each set of data uses a different symbol and each piece of data is represented by the symbol of its set. The symbol is placed directly above its item on the horizontal axis (base) at the height which indicates its place on the scale. In place of symbols, you may use data labels to depict the values on your graph. The data labels are chosen from a range in your worksheet and each point on the graph is represented by its own label. A third option is using a line to indicate the position of each data item on the scale. Imagine using an invisible dot to pin point the data's position on the scale. Then draw a line connecting the dots from the left to the right side of the graph. One line is used for each range of data. This is the line option. A fourth option is using a combination of line and symbol. A line is drawn across the graph to represent the position of each piece of data in a range. Then the position of each piece is further identified by the symbol representing its range. Pie Charts A Pie chart is round and divides one set of data into slices. The size of these slices depends on the amount or value of each piece of data in respect to that of the entire range. VIP Professional considers the entire chart to be 100% of the range. It automatically calculates a precentage for each slice (which is rounded off to one decimal). Totaled, the individual slices equal 100% or as close to 100% as is possible. Pie charts best demonstrate how one piece of data affects the entire set. VIP Pie charts have an interesting feature which displays the first slice of a Pie as "exploded" (that is pulled partially out and separated from the other slices). XY Graphs XY graphs use two numeric scales to represent data. The first scale is placed on a vertical axis (the Y axis) similar to the Bar and Stacked-bar graphs. The second scale is placed on a horizontal axis (the X axis). With Bar graphs and Stacked-bar Graphs, the X axis is reserved for the horizontal line-up of the sets of data. With its two axes, the XY graph represents pairs of values instead of the single values the others do for set(s) of data. For example, you can represent the monthly and yearly sales figures for several items. Each of up to six sets of data is connected with a line. The position of each piece of data on the biaxial (that is, using both horizontal and vertical axes) scales is emphasized by a symbol representing its range. Each piece of data can also be labeled individually to avoid confusion. Page 132 Choosing a Graph Type To choose a type of graph, first select the Type command from the Graph menu (/GT), then choose the type of graph. The types are chosen by typing their initial letters (B for Bar, S for Stacked-bar, l for line, P for Pie, or X for XY). It is a good idea to choose the type of graph, select all options you want to use with it, and then view it after you've made your choices. VIP Professional will not display your graph for you until you use the Graph View command. Changing Graph Types To change from one graph type to another while still representing the same data, reselect the Type command from the main Graph menu and enter the type you want. Then, reselect View from the menu to see the result. Graph X (Specifying a X Axis for Data or Optional Labels) The X command from the Graph menu is used to specify a X axis (the horizontal axis). With Bar, Stacked-bar and Line graphs, this command can be used to place optional labels along the horizontal border. With Pie charts, the labels are placed to the right of the Pie. The X command has a different function with XY graphs. With XY graphs, VIP Professional replots the original data values from the Y axis (vertical axis) to take into account the new X axis values. Each piece of data is now plotted in accordance to the relationship of the X and Y axe's values. The X value range is used to replot the first set of values from the Y axis (the A range), then the second (the B range) and so on with the X values used in the order the X range was selected. With Bar, Stacked-bar and Line graphs, VIP Professional places the labels at equally distant intervals along the X axis underneath the bars. With Pie charts, VIP Professional arranges the labels to the right of the chart. Select the X command from the Graph menu (/GX). Then specify and enter a range of labels or values from the worksheet in response to the prompt. You may find you need to create one which suits your needs beforehand. VIP Professional automatically does the rest of the work. Notice that X labels are not limited to label entries but can also be numbers or formulas. In fact, values are usually used with the XY graphs. Graph A,B.C.D.E, or F These six letters (A, B, C, D, E, and F) are used to select the different sets of data needed for the graph by using a cell range from a worksheet. Since at least one cell range must be indicated, selecting A is mandatory. Select A from the Graph menu (/GA). Now specify the cell range from your worksheet and enter it in response to the prompt. Actually, for all graphs, excepting Pies, you may substitute any other of the range command choices (B - F) for A. There are two things to remember when deciding which data from a worksheet to use in a graph. The first is that the amount of data should be kept down to a manageable level. The second is that, to give it sense, the data should have some common theme. Frequently, the data you want to use for your graph ranges cannot be found in one convenient range. At times, you may even want to contrast distant parts of your worksheet in a graph. When this happens, copy the cells you want to use into an unused portion of the worksheet so that you can use the range command on them there. Page 133 After you have selected a primary range with Graph A (or a substitute range command), you may decide you wish to compare similar sets of data with it. Select letters B - F the same way you did A and specify a range for each. The additional sets of data you choose will be integrated with that of A. The first values of each range will be grouped together, then the second values of each range are grouped together and so on. VIP Professional saves these different sets of data from causing confusion by making them contrast. Both types of bar graphs (Bar and Stacked-Bar) in black and white use different crosshatching patterns. VIP Professional can also use color to distinguish the different data ranges. Even without a color monitor, you can select the Options Color command. If you do use a black and white monitor, the graph won't be displayed in color on the screen. When you use the Options Color command, each range is displayed in an identifying color. If you want the color of a specific part of the graph changed, either change the range identity of the part (for example, from A to F) or use the Control Panel in the Desk menu. Graph Reset The Reset command allows you to erase graph type and range settings for an entire graph, just for the graph type or for individual range settings. What is reset depends on which option you select with the Reset command. Usually this command is used after you have saved a graph, and now wish to create a new graph with your data. Select the Reset command (R), then the option which indicates what you want reset. Graph (G) erases the entire graph from the computer's memory. X (X) erases labels from non-XY graphs and the X range from the XY graphs. A to F (A, B, C. D, E and F) erases individual range settings. VIP Professional acts as though you had never specified that graph, type or range setting before. However, if it was a data range that was reset, VIP Professional remembers the legend and format selected for it. If you select another data range to replace the one that was reset, the legends and format will automatically be reused. Graph View The Graph View command is used to see your graph after you have selected all necessary ranges and options for it. Select the View command from the Graph menu, (/GV). Graph settings will be remembered while the original worksheet is still in use, even if you are no longer viewing the graph. With the text version, the graph will replace the worksheet on your screen. With the GEM version, the graph will be displayed in a window similar to that of the worksheet. If you are using a mouse, you may decide to share the screen between the graph and worksheet windows once you have used Graph View. To move from one window to another, move the cell pointer and click the mouse key. This also makes the window you've clicked active and the other inactive. Once you have viewed a graph, you may decide that you want to return to the worksheet to change some values or add some options and look at the graph again. If you erase your worksheet (by pressing Escape or clicking the mouse button over the Quit box), you may redraw your graph later using Graph View again or you may use the special Graph function (by pressing [Function 10] or choosing it from the VIP menu with your mouse). If you used your mouse to move the pointer from one window to another and clicked the mouse button to make that window active, you may move back to the updated graph by changing active windows. Page 134 Graph Save The Graph Save command is used to store a current graph in a graph picture file for printing or to be used in other programs. The command adds the extension ".gph" to the file to distinguish it from other types of files. To use the command, select Save from the Graph menu (/GS). Give a file name either by typing one and pressing [Return] or by choosing one from the menu of existing .gph files. If you choose an existing file name, VIP Professional will ask if you wish to erase the current graph before it accepts a new one. Once erased, the file cannot be recalled. Lower- and uppercase letters are considered alike when you enter graph file names. They can be up to eight characters long, and use the letter or number characters and the "_" character. Once the file name has been chosen and entered, the graph's image is stored on the current directory - unless you have used a disk prefix to specify another disk drive. Graph Options The Graph Options commands are a set of optional commands which allow you to do such things as adding legends and deciding the format for your graphs. They are used for aesthetic purposes and to offer additional information about the graph. To display the Options menu, select Options from the main Graph menu (/GO). You may choose as many options as you want before returning to the main Graph menu or the Ready mode. Quit (Q) will take you out of the Graph Options menu. [Escape] can also be used to back you up one step at a time. Graph Options Legend The Graph Options Legend command controls labels which act as keys to your graph elements. The legends are assigned to each of the colors, gray shades or cross hatching used in your graph. Legends are ignored with Pie charts. Choose the Legend command from the Graph Options menu, (/GOL). Then select the data range by typing the letter of the range: A, B, C, D, E or F. The most recent legend for that range is displayed in response to the command. If you accept it as is, press [Return] and continue with your work. A legend is a label which can be up to 19 characters long. For the sake of the display, we suggest you keep legends as short as possible. Sometimes you may find that, when you specify legends, the screen will display more characters than the printer will print. In addition to typing in legends, you could use a cell's contents as a legend. To use a cell's contents, specify the Graph Options Legend command just as you would otherwise, only, instead of typing in the legend, type in a backslash ("\") followed by a cell address or a range name and press [Return]. If you choose a range name, VIP Professional will use the contents of the top left cell of the range as the legend. If you use a cell's contents as a legend, VIP Professional considers the reference to be absolute. If the cell's contents are changed or transferred to another area, VIP Professional continues to use whatever contents are still in the same cell address. The next time you view your graph, the legends will be displayed at the side of the screen. If you reset the corresponding data range, VIP Professional no longer displays the legend but it retains it in memory. When you specify another range to take the place of the first one, the legend will reappear. Page 135 VIP Professional stays in the Options submenu until you use Quit to return to the Ready mode. If you wish to specify a legend for another range, select Legend (L) again, and specify your new range and legend. Graph Options Format The Graph Options Format command determines the way data points are shown or connected in XY and Line graphs. The options include using a line to connect all the points from one range, symbols to show all the data points (each range using a different symbol), neither lines nor symbols or both connecting line and symbol for the points. Select Format from the Graph Options menu, (/GOF). To set an overall format, select Graph, (G). To select a particular range from the graph, choose the range by its letter, (A...F). Now select the type of format you wish to use: Lines (L) for lines, Symbols (S) for symbols, Both (B) for both lines and symbols, and Neither (N) for neither lines nor symbols and returning back to the Graph Options Format menu. If you select Neither, you will have to use the Graph Options Data-Labels commands to designate your ranges. The next time you view your graph, the chosen formats will be displayed. VIP Professional stays in the Format submenu after you have chosen a format option. You may format additional ranges at this point. To return to the Options submenu, select Quit, (Q). Data-Labels The Graph Options Data-labels command is used to specify a range of cells from the worksheet whose contents will be used to label the data points from a given range (A...F) in all graphs except Pie charts. Select the Data-labels command from the Graph Options menu. Choose the letter of the data range you wish to label (A...F). Now specify the range of cells from the worksheet which you want to use as labels. Any formula or number will be converted to a label according to its current value and the Range or Global command affecting its cell format before it is displayed on the graph. If you previously selected a range, it will be displayed. As the last step, select the alignment of the labels to the data points by typing the first letter of the choice. Choose "C" for Centered, "L" for Left, "A" for Above, "R" for Right and "B" for Below. For Bar graphs, always choose Above for bars with positive values and Below for bars with negative values. The next time you view the graph, your data labels will be displayed in position. VIP Professional stays in the Data-labels submenu until you issue a Quit command (Q). If you use a command from the Graph Reset menu to erase a range at some later time, you will also erase the data labels from that range. Graph Options Titles The Graph Options Titles command is used to title the entire graph (with a main title and/or a subtitle). or individual axes (X or Y). Select the Titles command from the Graph Options menu, (/GOT). Now choose to enter a First line (F) in the graph title, a Second line (S) in the graph title, a title for the X - or horizontal - axis (X) or a title for the Y - or vertical - axis (Y). The last title used for your option will be displayed. To accept it, press [Return]. To change it, press [Escape] and enter the title of your choice in its place. VIP Professional has automatically placed you in the Edit mode to make writing and revising easier. You may use up to 39 characters in a title. However, we suggest that titles, like legends, be kept as short as possible. Page 136 While some lengthy titles appear acceptable displayed on the monitor, they may contain more characters than the computer will print. The First graph title uses a larger font size when it is displayed than the Second one does. Instead of typing a title, you may use the contents of a cell as a title. To do so, start your Title entry with a backslash ("\") and either type in the address of the cell or a range name. Press [Return]. If you type in a range name, the cell contents of its top left cell will be used. Should the cell contents be changed before you use the Graph Save command, whatever contents are at the location you specified will be used as the current title. Numbers and formulas assume their current values and can also be used as titles. When the new titles are displayed, both graph titles (First and Second) are centered at the top of the graph. Graph titles are independent from file names you choose for the Save and Name commands. X-axis titles appear below the horizontal axis and the Y-axis titles appear parallel to and to the left of the vertical axis. VIP Professional stays in the Options submenu until you use a Quit command (Q) to go back to the main Graph menu. Graph Options Grid The Graph Options Grid command is used to add horizontal, vertical or both lines or remove all grid lines from all graphs other than Pie charts. Choose the Grid command from the Graph Options menu, (/GOG). Your options are: Horizontal (H) for horizontal lines, Vertical (V) for vertical lines or Both (B) for both vertical and horizontal lines. To remove all grid lines, choose the Clear (C) option. If grid lines are added, they will appear at each scale mark in the direction you specified the next time you view your graph. Scale marks are "ticks" (tiny lines) set at equal distances along the axes. These decide how each piece of data is represented by adjusting its value to scale. If all lines are removed, the grid lines are no longer visible the next time you view your graphs although the data points still maintain their coordinates. Graph Options Scale The Graph Options Scale command allows you to move between automatic and manual scale settings in all graphs (except Pie charts which don't use scaling). It also allows you to specify a "Slip" factor for the X-axis labels. Usually, you will want to stick with the automatic scaling. However, at times, you may wish to take advantage of manual scaling to get a close-up view of a particular portion of a XY graph. For example, you may have created an intricate engineering model, and wish to see exactly where two points intersect. If the automatic scaling does not allow a good enough view, you can change to manual scaling and change the scale to look at just a portion of the entire graph. Scaling is initially set to Automatic with VIP Professional. Once you've chosen the data for your graph, VIP decides what increments to use for scaling. For example, if each piece of data you chose for a Bar graph varies by about ten points, than the increment for the scale numbers will be ten points. The scale numbers and ticks showing the scale numbers rising incrementally are lined up vertically along the Y axis (and X axis for XY graphs). How many scale numbers (increments) are used depends mainly on the highest and lowest ranges. When the values of the graph data are displayed, the length of each bar is decided by the scaling. Page 137 If you change scaling to Manual, you can change the upper and lower limits of scaling, but you will not be able to change the scale increments yourself. However, the increments are modified by the changes you make in the upper and lower limits. To use the command, select Scale from the Graph Options menu. Then select Y-axis (Y), X-axis (X) or Skip factor (S). The X-axis scale setting can only be used with XY graphs. If you choose Y-axis or X-axis, you will now have to specify Automatic (A) or Manual (M) scaling. Scaling is initially set to Automatic. If Manual is chosen, specify an Upper (U) and Lower (L) scale limit by choosing Lower first and typing a number for the lower scale limit. Enter your choice by pressing [Return]. Then choose Upper. Type in and enter an upper scale limit. To ensure that the scale includes zero in Bar and Stack-bar commands, VIP Professional ignores a positive Lower scale limit or a negative Upper scale limit. For Both Manual and Automatic scaling, VIP Professional uses round numbers as upper and lower limits. Although you set the limits with Manual scaling. VIP Professional can only use the round numbers which are closest to the limits you set. "Tick" marks are drawn next to each scale number, evenly spaced along the axis. If a range of data point values is too varied (for example, a range which has some values differing by 5 or 10 points but whose lowest and highest values may not be able to fit on the graph and will be excluded. Otherwise, VIP Professional tries to include all the data values in the graph. If you have set a scale too small to include all the values for a data range, VIP Professional adds to the scale until the entire screen has been filled. If you select the Skip command (S), you will need to type in a number for the Skip factor and enter it. Then, starting from one, every nth entry (depending on the number you chose) will be taken from the X range and used as a label along the X axis (the horizontal one). For example, if five is the Skip factor, the first, sixth, eleventh (and so on) entries from the range are used as graph values. When you have used the Graph Options Scale commands, VIP Professional continues to return you to the Scale submenu until you choose Quit (Q) or [Escape]. This takes you back to the Graph Options menu. Graph Options Scale Format The Graph Options Scale Format command allows you to control the format in which scale numbers on a graph are displayed. Pie charts are ignored by this command. The initial setting used by VIP Professional to display your graphs is the General Format. This is a fairly standard format choice, but with VIP Professional you have an additional seven choices: Fixed, Scientific, Currency, Comma (","), Percent, Date or Text. Their displays are the same as those described under Worksheet Global Format, see the chapter, "Worksheet". Choose the Format command from the Graph Options Scale menu. Notice that before you can use this command, you will have to go through the necessary options available with Graph Options Scale (for example, you will have to choose X axis or Y axis). Select your desired format and, in response to the prompts, type and enter the additional information (like number of decimal places for the Fixed option). After you have selected this command, VIP Professional will return you to the Options submenu. The next time you view your graph, the scale numbers will be set to the format you have chosen. Page 138 Graph Options Color or Black and White The Graph Options Color/Black and White commands are used to decide whether your data bars, lines or symbols will be displayed in color or in black and white. If Black and White is chosen, the data bars will be displayed in contrasting patterns to avoid confusion. Choose Color or Black and White from the Graph Options menu, (/GOC or /GOB). If you have chosen black and white, all data bars will be displayed in the contrasting patterns. If you have chosen color, VIP Professional will display symbols, data bars and lines from different ranges in various colors. Titles, legends, scale numbers, axes and grid lines will always be displayed in a uniform color. The colors used for display depend on color choices you made with the Color Palette in the Control Panel. The Control Panel is displayed by choosing "Control Panel" from the Desktop menu. Graph Name VIP Professional has a set of four commands grouped in a submenu under the Graph Name command. These commands are used to identify and manage groups of graph settings. Named graph settings are different from graph files (made with the Graph Save command) in that they are the specifications you made for a graph saved as a group with your worksheet in a worksheet file. Create The Graph Name Create command is used to store all graph settings for each graph in one group. Because of this command, you can create more than one graph from a worksheet by saving the graphs on which you are not currently working in separate groups. Both graph settings and range locations can be saved with this command. Then, by using the Graph Name Use command, the group of graph settings can be reopened. Select the Create command from the Graph Name menu (/GNC). Enter a Graph Name up to 14 characters long. If you use an existing name, VIP Professional erases the old graph settings and replaces them with the new. Once this has happened, there is no way to replace the old graph settings. We suggest you use an existing name with care. VIP Professional returns to the main Graph menu after you issue Graph Name Create. The graph settings are saved in the worksheet file with the name you chose. The graph settings you save with the Graph Name Create command will be saved along with all other worksheet settings when you use the File Save command. The File Retrieve command is used to retrieve the worksheet and all its named graphs. The File Combine command does not retrieve graph settings. Since the graph settings are saved as part of the worksheet, the Worksheet Erase command erases the worksheet and its settings (including the graph settings, along with cancelling their names). The Graph Name Delete and the Graph Name Reset commands are used to delete graph settings without deleting a worksheet. Graph Reset Graph does not cancel graph names, named graphs or saved graphs. Page 139 Use The Graph Name Use command is used to pull out named graph settings from storage on the worksheet so that you can work with them as the current graph. Select the Use command from the Graph Name menu (/GNU). Now enter the graph name. VIP Professional will use the current graph settings to redraw the graph on the monitor. Because VIP Professional saves the location of the cells in the specified ranges rather than the contents of the cells, you may change the graph's contents by changing the information in your worksheet. Using the Graph Name Use command, VIP Professional will envoke the stored settings and use them with any new information integrated. Delete The Graph Name Delete command is used to delete named graph settings individually. To use it, select the Delete command from the Graph Name menu. Specify the name of the graph which you wish to delete. VIP Professional does not wait for confirmation before it erases the graph name and settings. Make sure you are deleting the right group of graph settings before you press [Return]. After you have used this command, you are returned to the main Graph menu. Reset The Graph Name Reset command is used to erase all named graph settings in a worksheet. Before you use this command, double check the graphs and make sure you won't be using them anymore. Once the graphs are erased, they cannot be recalled. Select the Reset command from the Graph Name menu (/GNR). All named graphs are erased from memory. As with the Graph Name Delete command, no confirmation is necessary. After you have selected this command, VIP Professional returns you to the main Graph menu. If you use the Worksheet Erase command to erase a worksheet, all graph names will also be cancelled with it. Graph Quit The Graph Quit command allows you to leave the main Graph menu and return to the Ready mode. As you have noticed, once you enter the Graph menu, you will not leave it until you use this command or [Escape]. To use the Graph Quit command, choose Quit from the Graph menu (/GQ). This will return you to the Ready mode. Page 140 PRINT COMMANDS Introduction VIP Professional uses Print commands to prepare a printed version of a worksheet. The Print commands are used only to print worksheets. Before you print, you must make sure your printer is properly set up. Setting up your printer is controlled by the desk menu. If you have problems, consult your Atari ST Owner's Manual. Print commands are not used to print graphs, the Graphprint program is responsible for that feature. Print commands allow you to obtain a printed version of your worksheet or only a part of it. The printed versions are known as "hard copy". Print commands also allow you to save your prepared copy for merging with another document using a text editor. If you decide to save your print-ready copy, VIP Professional saves your work in a print file. The contents of a print file look exactly like the hard copy version (complete with margins, etc.). This electronic version of a printout is known as "soft copy". Of course, many Print commands are used to format the copy for printing or - depending on the command - not to format it. Print commands are even used as a type of bridge to help in exporting and importing standard files from other programs. Printing Now Vs. Saving to a Print File The first choice you will have to make when you call up the Print menu is whether to print your work directly or whether to store it in a print file. You will make this choice by selecting Print Printer (/PP) if you want to print your work during this work session or by selecting Print File (/PF) if you want to save it to a print file. When you choose Print Printer, you will be allowed to choose all the Print options you need to prepare your copy for printing. Then, when you choose the Go command, the worksheet (or range) with its settings and other Print command specifications are passed directly from the computer to the printer. The printer responds to the computer and makes a hard copy (or "printout") of your range. With the Go command, you also have several other commands (such as Align) which help with the positioning of the paper in yoh. Legends are ignored with Pie charts. Choose the Legend command from the Graph Options menu, (/GOL). Then select the data range by typing the letter of the range: A, B, C, D, E or F. The most recent legend for that range is displayed in response to the command. If you accept it as is, press [Return] and continue with your work. A legend is a label which can be up to 19 characters long. For the sake of the display, we suggest you keep legends as short as possible. Sometimes t. However, if you do choose them, your choices will be remembered and saved with the file. When you are ready to print or export your file, you must use a standard ASCII text (or word processing) program. Although you can use the File List command to check and see that your print file is saved, you are not able to display it using VIP Professional again. A popular use of the Print File command is to create files which can be used in a word processor. The Print File command allows you to save a text version of your entire spreadsheet or just a portion of it. You then load it into a text processor for letters or reports. Page 141 The Print Menus Once you have chosen to save your work in a file or to print it, you will be placed in the main Print menu. The main Print menu appears at the top of the screen. It consists of these commands: Range, Line, Page, Options, Clear, Align, Go and Quit. Of these commands, Quit will take you out of the Print menu after a printing session. Range and Go are the only mandatory commands for printing. All other commands are optional. Now that you are in the Print menu, the first thing that you will want to think about is how much of your file you want to print and what it will look like. For one printing or print file, you may use one or more ranges from a worksheet or the entire worksheet. If you want to print the whole worksheet, that will be your range. If it's a series of smaller ranges you want printed, you will have to specify each range of the series separately. The worksheet or range(s) you decide on will become the objects of the other print commands. You can decide on such things as what margins to use or if you want your copy to include headers or footers. In addition, you can decide whether to print your work as it is displayed or cell by cell, with underlying cell formulas instead of current values. After you've decided all this, you will send the range and its newly made settings to the printer or to the print file by using the Go command. Then, if you are printing a series of ranges, you can separate the ranges by a line or a page. You can even use a command to let VIP know that the top of the page is aligned on your printer. The Procedure for Printing There is a general procedure for printing which is described below. If you are using more than one range, the procedure is repeated for each range. Throughout the rest of this chapter we will discuss each group of commands in the order that it should be issued. (After selecting Print Printer, or Print File and a name for the file...) Step 1: Keeping in mind your desired print range, if you want to use certain options, specify them first. The options are: page format (Margins and Page Length), extra text (Headers or Footers), range borders (Borders), printing format (Formatted and Unformatted) and worksheet documentation (As-displayed or Cell-formulas). There is an additional option area called printer control (Set-up). This option allows you to use a series of invisible characters to control such aspects of printer use as changing the typeface or changing the type size. Step 2: Specify the print range. Step 3: If you reload or adjust paper in the printer to start a new page, let the program know you have done so by selecting Align. Step 4: At any point before using Go, you may select Clear to erase specifications you have set for range and options (individually or as a group). Step 5: To send the contents of your computer's main memory to the printer or to the print file (depending on which you specified previously), select Go. Step 6: If you are done and have no more ranges to prepare for printing, select Quit. - Or.. Page 142 Step 7: If there are more ranges to be printed, decide if you wish to separate them from each other. If you specify Line, the ranges will be separated by one line. If you specify Page, each range will be printed on a fresh page. At this point you may recycle the procedure, using a new range. If you are using the same options for the new range as you just did for the previous one, you can skip Step 1 and move directly to Step 2. Print Options As you saw in the above section, Step 1 of the printing procedure is choosing one, several, or none of the options available. In some areas, only one command or choice is available for options. In others, more than one command is available. All options are discussed in the order in which they were introduced in Step 1. Your selections will be stored with your worksheet file if you save it. However, they will be returned to the default value if you erase the sheet. You may reset them for any new sheet that you create. Margins The Options Margins command allows you to set left, right, top and bottom margins for your printout. VIP Professional has its own initial default settings for margins which may have been kept or changed with the Worksheet Global Default Printer command (see the "Worksheet Commands" chapter). This command is particularly helpful in cases where you would change fonts. For instance, if you intend to use a compressed font, the margins would be different because they are measured differently. With a compressed font, the size of the character spaces (which are the unit of measure for margins) has been changed dramatically. The default settings will be used whenever you do not supply your own margin settings with the Options Margins command. The initial default margin settings for VIP Professional assume a standard 8 1/2" by 11" sheet of paper with 66 lines per page: Left 4 spaces from left edge of the paper Right 76 spaces from left edge of paper Top 2 lines from top of paper Bottom 2 lines from bottom of paper If you haven't't changed the settings with the Worksheet Global Default command, these margins will be used. You may change one or more margin settings. To change margins, select the Margins command from the Options menu (OM). Now choose which margin you want to set: Left (L), Right (R), Top (T) or Bottom (B). Specify the lines for the top and bottom margins or the spaces for the left and right margins by typing in the number and pressing [Return]. If you set the right margin, remember the number of spaces are counted from the left edge toward the right - not from right to left. Page 143 Actual settings for top and bottom margins are three more lines than those that are set if you use the optional headers/footers. The reason for this is that VIP Professional automatically reserves three lines for each. The first line is reserved for the header or footer itself. The additional two lines are reserved for two blank lines which separate headers and footers from the rest of the text. Therefore, if you are using continuous feed paper and have set the top and bottom margins to zero, each page of text will actually begin three lines below one perforation and stop three lines above the next perforation. VIP Professional prints your ranges using the margins you select, or the default margin settings. If the worksheet you created is wider than will fit within these margins, VIP Professional prints what it can from the worksheet. If there are labels which are too long, VIP Professional cuts them off at the right margin. If there are excess columns of values, VIP Professional prints them last, page for page. Page Length The Options Page-Length command is used to set the number of lines per printed page. The term "page length" refers to the total number of lines from the first to the last line of the sheet of paper. This command is particularly helpful if you are using non-standard type sizes or non-standard paper lengths. VIP Professional uses an initial default value of 66 lines which is based on an 11 1/2-inch long sheet of paper using a standard type size. Using the Options Page-Length command, you can change the page length to any number of lines ranging from 20 to 100. If you don't use this option, or after you end a work session without printing or storing, VIP Professional automatically uses its own default value. To select the command, choose Page-Length from the Options menu (OP). The current page length is displayed. To accept it, press [Return]. To change it, enter the number for the new page length and press [Return]. Headers or Footers The Options Header and the Options Footer commands allow you to add one line each of additional text at the top (header) or bottom (footer) of your copy directly one line above the top margin and below the bottom margin. VIP Professional automatically adjusts the copy so that there an additional two lines of blank space separating the headers or footers from the body of the copy. Not only can you add headers or footers, you can also decide whether they should begin at the left margin, be justified to the right margin, or centered on the page. To select the commands, choose Header (OH) or Footer (OF) from the Options menu. When you are prompted to enter either a header or footer line, you may type in any desired text up to 240 characters long and press [Return]. We suggest that the line not exceed the margins you have set. VIP Professional automatically places you in the Edit mode while you write and revise your entry. Your header or footer may be divided into up to three sections, one beginning at the left margin, one centered , and one right-justified. To create separate sections, divide the sections with a vertical bar "|", VIP Professional will consider it a new section and position it as one section to the right of the previous one. If you begin a line with a "|", it will center the line. If you begin a line with two |'s the line will be flushed right. A line which doesn't begin with a "|" will begin at the left margin. Page 144 If you reselect the Options Header or Options Footer commands after you return to the Options or main Print menu, you can edit or erase the header or footer when it is displayed beside the prompt. Two items which are often included in a header or footer are the date and page numbers. Both of these can be automatically entered by VIP Professional either singly or together. When you type a number symbol ("#"), VIP Professional will replace it with sequential page numbers in hard or soft copy. When you type "@", VIP Professional will replace the symbol with the current date in your copy. Borders The Options Borders command allows you to provide a border along the left and/or top of each page of a printout. Columns or sections of columns chosen from the worksheet are placed at the left side of the page beside the corresponding rows to provide the left border. Rows or sections of rows are placed above corresponding columns to provide the top border. This command is mostly used for including column and/or row headings on each page of your copy. To select the command, choose Borders from the Options menu (OB). Choose the type of border you want: Rows (R) or Columns (C). Then, select the border range. The border range is a range which covers the rows or columns which you wish to use as a border. For example, if it is a series of rows you want to use as a border, move the cell indicator to the first row of your border series, press[.], then move the cell indicator to the last row and press [Return]. If you have used this command before, your last border range choice will be displayed. Press [Return] to enter your new range specification. When you specify the border range, be careful not to include areas from the range that are to be printed or you will have duplicated text from the areas they nave in common. When you print, the contents of rows which correspond with the column addresses of the print range provide a top border. For example, if column A - F indicate the width of the print range and the border range is specified as row 1, the top border will include cells A1 to F1. The contents of columns which correspond with the row addresses of the print range are chosen to provide a left border. If you return to the Options Borders command from the Options menu or from the main Print menu to examine your borders, do not use [Return] to quit the command. [Return] can break up a border if it is pressed while your cell indicator is on the border. [Escape] will take you back to the Options menu. Formatted and Unformatted The Options Other Formatted and the Options Other Unformatted commands are used to format and unformat your copy by removing or adding certain format options and modifying the border option. The initial value is formatted. Unformatted is often used to prepare a file for export to another program. To select one of the commands, choose either Formatted (OOF) or Unformatted (OOU) from the Options Other menu. If you choose Unformatted, the copy will be printed without page-breaks, Headers or Footers. Borders will be printed on the first page only. If you choose formatted, the most recently specified (or defaulted) page-breaks, headers, footers and borders will be used as usual. Page 145 As-displayed or Cell-formulas The As-displayed or Cell-Formulas commands decide the appearance and contents of the printout by printing the worksheet as it appears or by printing the actual contents of each cell )cell by cell) as it was constructed. "As-displayed" is the initial value. "Cell-formulas" is usually used to get a printout of the formulas you've used in a worksheet. To choose either command, select As-displayed (OOA) or Cell-formulas (OOC) from the Options Other menu. If you choose As-displayed, the copy will appear as it would normally in a worksheet. If you choose Cell-formulas, the copy appears one cell per line. The cells are organized one row at a time (from top to bottom) and from left to right of the printing range. Blank cells are ignored. Each cell line contains the information that appears in the first line of the control panel when you are in that cell in the worksheet: cell address, format, protection status )if protected), and the actual cell contents. The actual cell contents are what was typed into the cell such as formulas (not their values), other values the way they were entered (that is, unformatted) and labels (including the label-prefix character). Options Set-up The Options Set-up command allows you to send preset instructions about type style, type size, etc. to the printer when you use Go to print a range. These instructions are a string of invisible characters entered from the keyboard which tell the printer what special features it should use. They are actually printer control codes and are determined by the requirements of your printer and by what available features you want to use. As such, they vary in both length and content. In addition, since the printer governs the features themselves, the characters used and even the features available will change from printer to printer. Please refer to appendix D for a list of printer control codes and more information about their construction. If you do not use this command, VIP Professional will use the global default set-up. The global default set-up initially set by VIP Professional is empty, but it may have been changed by you using the Worksheet Global Default Printer Set-up command. To choose this command, select Set-up from the Options menu (OS). The current string of printer control codes will be shown. VIP Professional has automatically changed to the Edit mode. To use this string, press [Return]. To cancel it for this work session, press [Escape], then [Return]. You may edit it by using arrow, [Delete], and [Backspace] keys as well as inserting other characters. The string of printer control codes can contain up to 39 characters. Each character is entered by typing a backslash ("\") followed by a number of three digits. This is the decimal number of the character's ASCII code (see Appendix D for a listing of ASCII codes). For example, the character, "Control-O" is number 15 in ASCII code. It would be typed in like this; "\015". Do not type in the character - always use the ASCII code. If a "\" is part of a control code, then type it twice (once to specify that you are beginning the character and once in decimal to include it with the code). As we mentioned earlier, the characters you use in the string are those which will control the features of your printer; there is no standardization of printer codes. To find which printer control codes work with your printer, look in the printer manual for its control codes. Then, if necessary, translate them to the "\" plus ASCII code format to enter them. Press [Return] to enter the string of characters. Page 146 When you use Go to print copy or to store it in a print file, VIP Professional will recall the printer control codes you have decided on for this work session and use them. If you have not specified any, it uses the default set-up. You will notice that many printer-controlled options can also be controlled by VIP through the print menu. When possible, use the commands of the Print menu instead of the printer control codes. They tend to be easier to use and keep track of. For example, although you may set margins using printer control codes, it is better to set them using the Options Margin command. Choosing the Print Range The Print Range command is selected from either the Print Printer menu or the Print File menu before you select Go. If you are reprinting the most recently specified range, there is no need to select this command. Otherwise, the command must be used. To use it, select Range directly from the main Print menu (R). Specify the range with your mouse or arrow keys or by typing the cell addresses or its range name. Press [Return] to enter it. When Go is selected, the range is printed or sent to a print file, as you have specified. Align The Align command is used to let VIP Professional know that you have reloaded or realigned the paper in the printer manually and that the printer is now at the top of a new page. If you don't use Align, VIP will not print any header you may have specified. Before you use this command, position the paper in the printer. The printer should be at the very top of the page since the margins will be included automatically from that point. However, you may decide to move the paper a few lines down if the printing is unformatted (and therefore does not include margins). To use the command, select Align from the Print menu (A). This will let VIP Professional know that it is at the top of the page. From this point, margins, page-breaks, etc. will be set according to specifications when you select Go to print. Clear The Clear command can erase the print range, headers, footers and borders. Margins, page-length, and printer control code set-up are returned to the Worksheet Global Default settings. The As-displayed format option is used. The Clear command can also be used to erase range, borders or format (in which margins, page-length, and printer control code set-up are included) individually. To use this command, select Clear from the Print menu (C). Next, choose the object of the Clear command: All, Range (R), Borders (B) or Format (F). If you choose All, the print range, headers/footers and borders are erased. Margins, page-length, and printer control set-up are returned to default settings and the As-displayed format option is used. No confirmation is necessary. If you choose range, VIP Professional erases the most recent print range selected. If you choose borders, any borders set are erased. If you choose format, the page-length, margins and printer control code set-up items are erased. Page 147 Go The Go command is used after you have selected any options you wish to use, a print range and, if you have positioned the paper manually, the Align command. It sends your prepared copy to the printer or to a print file, depending on whether you chose Print Printer or Print File to begin with. When you are ready to send your copy to a printer or to a file, select Go from the main Print menu. Your prepared copy is sent to the printer or placed in a print file for storage. If you selected Print Printer, and the printer is not turned on or connected, the computer will beep and send you an error message. Press [Escape] to return to your position before issuing Go. Correct the problem and reissue the Go command if you still want to print. You can stop printing before the printing of your prepared copy is completed by issuing a break ([Control][Undo]). The printing may not be interrupted immediately, because there still may be characters in the printer's own "buffer". These excess characters will be printed before printing comes to a halt. After you have issued Go and printed your sheet, VIP Professional returns to the main Print menu so you can go through the printing cycle again. Quit The Quit commands (Q) back you up one menu each time you use them. For instance, if you are in the Options menu and you use Quit, you are moved back to the main Print menu. From the main Print menu, Quit moves you back to the Ready mode. Advance a Line The Line command advances the paper in your printer one line at a time so that you can create some space between different print ranges. To use the command, select Line from the Print menu (L). An extra blank line is created between the last print range and the one coming up. Each time you press "L" or [Return], an additional blank line is created. If you reach the bottom of the page, as specified by the margin and page-length settings, VIP Professional advances you to the next page. If you use the Footer option, the footer will be printed in the correct position before the page is advanced. Advance a Page The Page command advances the printer to the top of the next page after one print range, to begin the next print range. It also is a good idea to use this command after the last print range has been printed because VIP Professional remembers where the last print range ended. Unless you use the Align command, the program thinks the next print range will begin right below the ending line of the last print range. For instance, if you ended your last printing in the middle of a page, VIP Professional thinks the next printout begins from the middle of the page. Therefore for the first page of the printing it will only print on what it thinks is the last half of the page left over from the last printing. To use the command, select Page from the Print menu (P). After ending with a print range, VIP Professional fills the rest of the page with blank lines. Any footer chosen is printed at the bottom of the page. The paper is advanced to the top of the next page. Page 148 APPENDIX A Using Graphprint Introduction GraphPrint is an ancillary program which allows you to print the graphs you have created with VIP Professional and which you have saved in graph files (files with the file name extension of ".gph"). It allows you to choose such things as font style or whether or not to have a border around your graph before printing it. Before you use GraphPrint to print your graphs, make sure that the computer is correctly configured to work with your printer. Configuring your printer is controlled by the Install Printer item of the Desk menu. This item is described in the Atari ST Owner's manual. If you have any questions concerning your printer, contact your dealer. Getting Ready to Use GraphPrint When you are ready to use the GraphPrint program, save your current worksheet and graphs. Use the File Save (/FS) command to save the worksheet and the Graph Save command (/GS) to save your graph. Remember that the graph file must be saved separately in a file with a ".gph" file name extension to be printable. Use the Quit command (/Q) to exit from VIP Professional. Now load the GraphPrint program. The main GraphPrint program consists of the following items: Item Meaning File Selects a graph for printing Options Selects printing options (font,etc.) Print Sets the page position as "top of form" and printed Quit Quits GraphPrint Throughout the rest of this chapter, each item will be discussed in the order of probable use. Items from this menu are selected with the mouse in a fashion similar to selecting items from the VIP Professional program. Choosing a Graph for Printing Once you are in the GraphPrint program, you will notice that the first item is File. When this item is chosen, the file catalog is called up. From the file catalog, you can select the graph you want to have printed. Choose it as you would any other file from the VIP program. Page 149 Options The Options item is the next item found in the Graphprint program. When you choose this item, you are preparing the graph you called up with File for printing. With Options, you can add a border around your graph and you can change the character style of your graph title or various other areas of text. Then, you choose the Print command, your graph will be printed with these additional options. Options has a menu of five commands: Border On, Top Title, Y Title, Other Titles and Numbering. In turn, Top Title, Y Title, Other Titles and Numbering offer the following choices: Normal, Bold, Dim, Italics, Underline and Outline. Both sets of commands can be chosen from the Options menu. A line physically separates the character styles from the five primary commands. Border On The Border On command is used to create a border for your graph. A border acts as a frame for your graph. GraphPrint will frame your graph with thick lines which form a rectangle. To use the Border On command, choose it from the Options menu. Choosing Text Areas for Change The Top Title, Y Title, Other Titles and Numbering commands are actually intermediary commands between the main item (Options) and the character-style choices. They decide the target of the character style(s) which are chosen next. If you choose the Top Title command, the character style you choose with it affects only the first, or primary title of your graph. If you choose the Y Title command, then the character style you choose with it will affect the Y-axis title of your graph. The Other Titles command affects such things as the second title line and the Graph X labels and the Numbering command affects the numbering alongside the graph. Choosing the Style of Characters Once you've chosen a Title(s) or Numbering command, you will have a choice of character style for the target text. Character style does not affect tour font type. The program continues to use the font style supplied by your computer. What choosing a character style does do is change the appearance of characters by emphasizing an aspect of their appearance. There are six options of character style available: Normal: The normal option uses the style usually used by your computer and printer for printing. Bold: The bold option uses a boldface style for your characters. Although you are not changing the size of lettering with this command, because the printing of the characters is thicker, they will require a little more space when they are printed. Dim: The dim option prints the characters of your choice finer than is usually used by your computer and printer. Because of this, the characters require a little less space than usual. Italics: The italics option prints your characters in italics. Page 150 Underline: The underline option underlines all the characters in each word or letter or number. Outline: The outline option draws an outline around each of the characters of the text. Print The Print menu contains two commands: Print Graph and Advance Paper. The Advance Paper commands is used to tell the program that the paper in the printer is at the top-of-form. The Print Graph command is used to print the graph once it has been completely formatted. Advance Papering Your Page for Printing Before you print your graph, or between printing graphs, make sure that the paper in the printer is in the correct position for printing. Remember that your printer will add all margins, etc. from what it considers the top and left sides of the page. The Advance Paper command is used to tell the Graphprint program that the top of a new page is aligned with the print head. You can use the printer's controls to advance the paper until it is in the position you want. Then, select Advance Paper. This tells GraphPrint that the current position of the paper is to be considered as the top of the sheet. Each following page in the print series will be begun at exactly where the last printing left off, unless you use the Advance Paper command again. Printing the Graph When you choose Print, the program will send your graph and its settings to the printer. In response, the printer will print out your graph. The Print command requires no affirmation before it prints your graph. If your printer does not print your graph, make sure it is turned on and ready for printing. You might also want to check that the printer configuration is correct on your computer. This can be done through the Install Printer item of the Desk menu. Once you've checked your printer and the printer configuration on your computer, you may come back to GraphPrint and try printing out your graph again. Leaving GraphPrint The Quit command allows you to leave GraphPrint when you are ready. To use the command, select Quit. You will be asked to confirm your decision before you exit GraphPrint. Page 151 APPENDIX B Reference Works No manual can hope to completely cover the variety of functions which electronic spreadsheets may serve. Many works have been written to help teach how to create and use worksheets. Others have been written giving numerous templates for general and special worksheets. The following is a short list of useful reference works which we recommend if you should have any questions about worksheets in general or special templates. Baras, Edward M. : Osborn/Mcgraw-Hill Guide to using Lotus 1-2-3: McGraw-Hill Book Co. : Princeton Road, Hightstown, NJ 08520: 1984 Bingham, Julie E. : 1-2-3 Go! : Addison-Wesley Publishing Co. : Jacob Way, Reading, MA 01867, (617)944-3700: 1984 Flast, Lauren and Flast, Robert : 1-2-3 Run : Osborne McGraw-Hill Co. : Berkeley, CA 94710: 1985 Haynes, John L. : "Circuit Design with Lotus 1-2-3" : BYTE Special IBM Issue (Vol 10, No. 11) : McGraw-Hill Inc. : Peterborough, NH 03458: November, 1985 Helliwell, J. ,Petzold, C., Poor, A. and Riddington J. : "Surveying the Resources : A 1-2-3 Training Compendium" : PC Magazine (Vol. 4, No. 16): Ziff-Davis Publishing Corp.: New York City, NY 10016: 6 August 1985 Kling, Bill : The ABCS of Lotus 1-2-3: Scott, Foresman, and Co, : 1900 E. Lake Avenue, Glenview, IL 60025, (312)729-3000: 1985 Krakow, Ira : Lotus 1-2-3 Self-taught on the IBM PC: Brady Communications Co., Inc. : Route 197, Bowie, MD 20715, (301)262-6300: 1985 Leblond, Geoffrey T. and Cobb, Douglas F. : Using 1-2-3: Que Corp.: 7999 Knue Road, #202, Indianapolis, IN 46250, (317)842-7162: 1983 Ochi, Kaz and Hughes, Patricia J, : Accounting with Lotus 1-2-3: Wadsworth Electronic Publishing Co.: Belmont, CA: 1983 Ridington, Jr., Richard and Williams, Mark: The Hidden Power of Lotus 1-2-3: Using Macros: Brady Communications Co., Inc.: Bowie, MD 20715: 1985 Starz, Richard: Working with 1-2-3 on the IBM PC and Compatibles: Harper & Row: 10 E. 53d Street, New York, NY 10022: 1985 Page 152 APPENDIX C How to Use Lotus 1-2-3 Files With VIP Professional on Your Atari ST VIP Professional and Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet files (with the file name extension, ".wks") are 100% compatible with one another. One minor detail to watch for when transferring files from program to program is the smaller workshee APPENDIX A Using Graphprint Introduction GraphPrint is an ancillary program which allows you to print the graphs you have created with VIP Professional and which you have saved in graph files (files with the file name extension of ".gph"). It allows you to choose such things as font style or whether or not to have a border around your graph before printing it. Before you use GraphPrint to print your graphs, make sure that the ansfer the files using a telecommunications program, follow the instructions in the program's manual for uploading and downloading (receiving) between the programs. Remember to check the configuration you set with the RS232 Config. item from the Desk menu. Of course, when you use a modem, you may also transfer files with the help of an information access system such as CompuServe. To transfer Lotus files for reading by VIP on Atari, hook an IBM compatible, 5 1/4" floppy disk drive up to your Atari system. The files you transfer must be on disks which are formatted from DOS 2.0 or a later version of PC or MS DOS. There have been articles written on how this is done. See the November, 1985 edition of Antic Magazine (524 Second St., San Francisco, CA 94107). You may also consult your dealer or user-group for help with this. Once your system is hooked up, turn it on and load your files from Lotus just as you normally would. If you should have any questions about hooking up an IBM compatible disk drive to your Atari system or about using a telecommunications program with Atari, contact your dealer for information. Once transferred, these files may be used just as other worksheet files are. Additional data input, editing, combining and extracting portions, using data commands and graphing work exactly the same on these files as they do on files originally created with Professional. Page 153 When you use the Data Sort command, records are sorted in ascending or desending order (see the section on Data Sort in the chapter, "Data Commands"). Labels which are in the sort range are sorted in ASCII order. The other cells are sorted as specified in the Data Sort section. Whether you choose ascending or decending (which reverses the order) is up to you. In addition to using this list to determine ASCII order for the Data Sort command, you may also use the list to find the decimal code for printer set-up string characters. Use the printer manual to find which (keyboard) characters you want to use, then convert them to three-digit numbers. Each three-digit number is always begun by a backslash ("\"). With numbers from the list below which only have one digit, precede the number with two zeros. For example, ASCII decimal number, "0" is written as "\000". With numbers from the list below which have only two digits, precede them with one zero (for example, "10" is written as "\010"). ASCII Keyboard 19 [Control]S Decimal No. Character 20 [Conrtol]T 21 [Control]U 0 [Control]@ 22 [Control]V 1 [Control]A 23 [Control]W 2 [Control]B 24 [Control]X 3 [Control]C 25 [Control]Y 4 [Control]D 26 [Control]Z 5 [Control]E 27 [Escape] 6 [Control]F 28 FS 7 [Control]G 29 GS 8 [Control]H 30 RS 9 [Control]I 31 US 10 [Control]J 32 [Space] 11 [Control]K 33 ! 12 [Control]L 34 " 13 [Control]M 35 # 14 [Control]N 36 $ 15 [Control]O 37 % 16 [Control]P 38 & 17 [Control]Q 39 ' 18 [Control]R 40 ( Page 154 41 ) 85 U 42 * 86 V 43 + 87 W 44 , 88 X 45 - 89 Y 46 . 90 Z 47 / 91 [ 48 0 92 \ 49 1 93 ] 50 2 94 ^ 51 3 95 _ 52 4 96 ` 53 5 97 a 54 6 98 b 55 7 99 c 56 8 100 d 57 9 101 e 58 : 102 f 59 ; 103 g 60 < 104 h 61 = 105 i 62 > 106 j 63 ? 107 k 64 @ 108 l 65 A 109 m 66 B 110 n 67 C 111 o 68 D 112 p 69 E 113 q 70 F 114 r 71 G 115 s 72 H 116 t 73 I 117 u 74 J 118 v 75 K 119 w 76 L 120 x 77 M 121 y 78 N 122 z 79 O 123 { 80 P 124 | 81 Q 125 } 82 R 126 ~ 83 S 127 [Delete] 84 T Page 155 GLOSSARY Absolute Reference: A way of referring to the contents of a cell or range of cells located at a particular set of coordinates for use as values in a formula. Active: Currently in use. ASCII: A standard American computer code consisting of 128 characters available on a computer. The acronym stands for American Standard Code for Information Interchange. Cell: One of the small, rectangular areas which make up a worksheet. It acts as a receptacle for data entry or as a starting place for invoking commands. Cell Address: The coordinates of a cell, decided by its column letter and row number. Cell Indicator: The marking which shows the current cell. It shows the cell as a shaded area, different from other worksheet cells. Cell Pointer: In the Gem version of VIP, the symbol which traces the movement of the mouse across the screen. It changes shape according to what it is used for: a cross while in the worksheet window, an arrowlike pointer outside the worksheet, a grooved box or "grabber" when by the top and left border lines, or a busy bee when waiting for a command to be processed. Character: A letter, number, puncuation or other special mark which can be used in text. Clear: Erasing or deleting data or a command. Click: With a mouse, pressing down and letting up quickly on the mouse key to make a selection or choice. Column: A vertical area which is one cell wide and ranges from the top to the bottom of the worksheet. Each column is designated by a letter. Command: An instruction from you to your computer to perform an action. Configuration: Settings which determine screen or print format or which provides information for and about the disk drives or printer. Current: Presently active and usable. Cursor: In the Value, Label or Edit modes, a line which underscores the position of the next possible character on the Entry or Status lines. Database: A worksheet which has been arranged in a series of records and organized into fields. Databases are used for data management. Default: A command or setting which is automatically assumed and does not need to be specified. Display: What is visible on the screen. Page 156 Enter: Signal to the computer that you have finished specifying or selecting information and that you are ready to have the computer process it. You may enter the contents of a cell, or a command or prompt response by using [Return] or clicking the mouse, etc. Entry: A piece of data (label, value or formula) which has become the contents of a particular cell. Error Message: A short message which is displayed on the screen in response to the inaccurate usage of a command. Field: A column or cell in a database representing one facet of information. File: A unit which can be saved and retrieved separately from others. There are three types of files: worksheet, print and graph. File Name: The name given for identification to a saved worksheet, graph or print file. Format: The way in which the contents of a cell are displayed or the way a printed page will appear. Formula: A calculation using operators and/or functions. It can be performed on freestanding values or on other cells' contents. Because formulas result in numerical values, they are considered a subdivision of values. Function: 1. An action performed by the computer. 2. One of the ten special functions, each of which supplements or parallels commands from various aspects of the program. 3. One of the @ functions whose basic use is to assist with various calculations. Global: Affecting the entire worksheet. Graph: A visual presentation of data from a worksheet. There are five types available with VIP Professional: Bar, Stacked Bar, Pie, Line and XY. Icon: A small figure displayed on the screen which is used to represent a function or serve as an indicator. Label: A textural entry or one which is treated as a textural entry in the worksheet. Labels are generally used to explain the values in a worksheet. Memory: A measurement of the capacity a device has for storage of data. Menu: A group of related commands which can be displayed in the menu area. Mixed Reference: A way of referring to the contents of a cell by its coordinates as a formula value. The reference is half absolute (remains stationary no matter where the formula is moved) and half relative (changes its position in direct correlation to changes made in the placement of the formula). If the column is relative, then the row is absolute, and vice versa. Mode: A particular way of processing commands and using them to promote a certain type of action. Some important modes of VIP Professional are: Ready, Value, Label, Point, Edit and Menu. Page 157 Mode Indicator: An area on the screen reserved for the name of the current mode. Name: A way of referring to the contents of a cell (range name), a file (file name) or a field in a database (field name). Point: With a mouse, placing the cell pointer over the location of the icon or the icon which you intend to select. Press: With a mouse, holding down the mouse key while the cell pointer remains over the area or icon of your choice. Program Disk: The disk which carries the VIP Professional program. Protection: A feature which allows you to prevent reentry in a cell, a range or an entire worksheet so that no editing changes can be made. Range: A group of contiguous cells or a single cell of a worksheet which can be used in a command procedure. Recalculation: The process in which VIP Professional calculates the formulas of a worksheet after changes have been made to it. Record: All the information from a single source arranged in one row of a database. Relative Reference: A way of referring to the contents of a cell through its cell coordinates for use as a value in a formula. Any changes made to the position of the original formula cell will result in corresponding changes in both coordinates of the reference. Reset: Erasing certain command selections and returning to initial settings. Row: A horizontal area which is one cell high and goes from the left to the right side of a worksheet. Each row is designated by a number. Select: To choose a menu command by using your mouse, your arrow keys or by typing initial letters. Special Functions: A set of ten functions which perform actions to help with various aspects of VIP Professional. They can be reached from the keyboard or from the VIP menu. Spreadsheet: The form used for creation of a piece of financial, business or statistical work, such as a budget or a database. System Disk: The disk which contains both the VIP Professional program and the Graphprint program. Table: A type of chart often used in financial analyses. A table includes variables and/or constants and shows the results of their calculations. Text: A series of characters which is usually not meant to be interpreted numerically or result in numerical values. This includes titles and other fact-giving information. Page 158 Value: A form of entry which is numerical or can result in a numerical value. Window: An area on the screen which shows a graph or a certain section of your worksheet. Split-screen windows refer to splitting the worksheet window so that two separate areas of the worksheet can be visible simultaneously. Worksheet: The area available to you for data input. Page 159 INDEX Absolute Cycle 6,51,55,88 @PI 65 Absolute Function 51,55,88 @PMT 63 Absolute Icon 6,55 @PV 63 Absolute Reference 6,31-32,55,88 @RAND 66 118,125 @ROUND 66 Active Window,Changing 35-36,88,100 @SIN 65 Advancing a Line between printing 148 @SQRT 66 Advancing a Page between printing @SUM 33,66 148 @TAN 65 Align Paper for Printing 43,147 @TODAY 69 151 @TRUE 63 Alignment of Labels, Global 91-92 @VLOOKUP 68 Alignment of Labels, Individual @YEAR 69 13,47,91 Defining @ Functions 61-62 Alignment of Labels, Range 91-92,106 Database 125-126 Anchor Cell 27,104 Data 68-70 Anchor Rotation 28,104 Financial 62 Area,Describing Worksheet 4-5 Logical 63 Arrow Keys 8 Mathematical 64 ASCII Code, Listing of 154 Special 67 @Functions 33-34,53,61-70 Statistical 66 @ABS 65 [Backspace] 14-15,49-50,110 @ACOS 64 Bar Graphs, Making 38,130,132 @ASIN 64 Break, Using 5,11,24,49,83-84 @ATAN 64 Calculate Function 19,51,58,93 @ATAN2 64 Calculation of Formulas 19,56 @AVG 66 Compound Statements 58 @CHOOSE 67 Logical Operators 58 @COS 65 Precedence in 19,56,93 @COUNT 66 Operators 19,57 @DATE 68 Using Parentheses 19,57 @DAVG 126 Calculation, Worksheet 6,21,59 @DAY 69 93,94 @DCOUNT 126 Capslock Icon 6 @DMAX 126 Cell Address 9 @DMIN 126 Cell, Definition of 12 @DSTD 126 Cell Indicator 4,7 @DSUM 126 Movement of 8 @DVAR 126 Cell Locator 5 @ERR 60,67 Cell Pointer 4,6,35 @EXP 65 Splitting Worksheet Window @FALSE 63 35,100 @FV 63 Setting Column Width 92,98 @HLOOKUP 67 Cell Protection 10 @IF 64 Global 93, @INT 65 Range 93,109 @IRR 62 Circular References 7,22,59,93 @ISERR 64 Circular Reference Icon 6,22,93 @ISNA 63 Clearing Split Windows 37,100 @LN 65 CMD Indicator 5,74 @LOG 65 Coloring a Graph 38,139 @MAX 67 Column-width Changing Global @MIN 66 25,92 @MOD 65 Column-width,changing Single @MONTH 69 25,98 @NA 60,67 Columns Border 4,92,99 @NVP 62 Combining Parts of Files 114 Page 160 Compound Statements 58 Choosing Colors 87 Control Panel 5,87,139 Response Time for Keys 87 Copy Command 32,84 Response Time for Mouse 87 Introducing 84 Setting Date and Time 87 Copying Formulas 84 Install Printer 87 Copying Labels and Values 84 Professional Info. 87 Copying Ranges 32 Dialog Boxes 24 Using Copy 85 Directory, Choosing a 113 Data Commands 117,129 Drop-down Menus 24 Distribution 129 Edit Function 51,56 Fill 128 Edit Line 5,13 Query 49,120-125 Edit Mode 14,15,48,83,91 Delete 124 End Cell 27 Extract 124 End Icon 6 Find 124 Entries, Setting Data 46 Quit 125 Erasing Selected Print Borders147 Range, Criterion 121-123 Erasing Selected Print Format 147 Range, Input 121 Erasing Selected Print Range 147 Range, Output 120,123 Erasing Worksheet Files 101,116 Reset 124 ERR 60 Unique 124 Error Messages 82 Sort 118-120 Errors, Typing Command Choices 83 Go 120 Errors, Data Entry 17 Primary-Key 119,154-155 Escape Icon 5,11 Range 119 Escape, Using 5,11,24,49,83,110 Reset 120 Exponentiation 20 Secondary-key 120,154-155 Express Icon 5,7 Quit 120 Extracting Part of a File 115 Table 126-128 Field Names 117 1 126-127 Fields 117 2 127-128 File Commands 111,116 Reset 127 Combine 112,114 Data Entry 12,46-48 Directory 94,113 Editing of 14,15,48 Erase 116 Errors 17 eXtract 112,115 Database, Creating a 117 Import 115 Database Functions 125 List 113 Offset 125 Retrieve 42,114 Range, Criterion 125 Save 42,87,112 Range, Input 125 Files, Defining 111 Date Arithmetic 70 Files, Displaying a List of 112 Date @ Functions 68-70 Files, Erasing 116 Date Format, Setting Range 70 Files, Naming 111 Date Format, Setting Worksheet 70 Files, Receiving 115,151 Default Directory 94 Files, Types of 112 Default Format (Global) 25,101 Financial @ Functions 62 Default Entries 82 Folder, Choosing a 113 Default Printer Configurations 95 Format, Global Value 25,89 [Delete] 14 Range Value 26,29,89,104 Deleting Characters in an Entry 14 Formula References in Data Sort Deleting Columns 33,98 118 Deleting Rows 33,98 Formulas 12,48,53 Desk Commands 87 As Criteria in Data Query 122 Control Panel 87 Calculating 19 Audio Feedback 87 Precedence in 56 Order of Entry 56 Precedence of Operators 57 Using Parentheses 19,56-59 Page 161 Compound Statements 58 Graph 133 Copying 30,84 X 134 With a Mouse 30 Save 135 From the Keyboard 31 Type 38,40,131-133 Creating 54 Bar 38,131 By Pointing 54 Line 131 By Typing 54 Pie 132 With Cell References 54 Stacked-Bar 131 Absolute 55 XY 132 Mixed 55 View 38,39,134 Relative 55 X 39,133 Editing 56 Graph Function 39,52, Entering 18 Graph, Resetting 134 Functions 54 Graph Type, Choosing a 131 Logical Operators 58 Graphprint 149 Operators 19,54 Align Paper for Printing 151 Revising 56 Options for Printing Graphs150 Forward References 22,93 Non-Titles 150 Free Cell 27 Character Style 149 Freezing Worksheet Titles 37,99 Titles 150 Full Box 4 Character Style 150 Functions, Special 51 Preparing for 149 Function 1 6,51,109 Printing Out 151 Function 2 14,51,56 Quitting GraphPrint 151 Function 3 51 Selecting a File for 149 Function 4 51,56 Graph Windows 38,130 Function 5 9,37,52,99 Graph's, Procedure for Creating Function 6 36,52,100 38,130 Function 7 52,125 Grid, Worksheet 4,12 Function 8 52 Help Function 51,109 Function 9 6,20-21,52,59,93,110 Help Icon 5,11,51 Function 10 39,51 [Help] Key 6 Glossary 156-159 [Home] 8,50 GoTo Function 9,37,52,99 Icons 5-6 Graph Commands 38,130-140 Absolute 6,55,88 A 38,133 Capslock 6 B 133 Circular Reference 6,22,93 C 133 End 6 Color 38 Escape 5,11 D 133 Express 5,7 E 133 Help 5,11,51 F 133 Protect 6 Graph Name 139 Recalculate 5-6,59,93 Create 139 Scroll Lock 6,9 Delete 140 Step 5,75 Reset 140 Importing a File 115 Use 140 Input Cells in Data Tables 126 Options 135-139 [Insert] 50 Black and White 139 Inserting Characters in an Entry Color 139 15,50 Data-Labels 136 Inserting Columns 33,98 Format 136 Rows 33,98 Grid 137 Integrated Spreadsheets 1 Legends 135 Iteration 21,59,93 Scale 38,137 Keyboard, Atari ST 3 Format 137-138 Keyboard Macros 45,71-79 Titles 39,136 Auto-executing 75 Reset 134 Commenting in 75 A - F (Range) 133 Creating Simple 71 Page 162 Defining 71 By Typing 81 Multiple-Cell 75 With Arrow Keys 81 Pausing 73 With the Mouse 81 Representing Characters 73 Using Break 83 Revising 73 From the Keyboard 83 Single-step Mode 75 With a Mouse 83 Using [Return] 74 Using Escape 83 Using Tildes 74 From the Keyboard 83 X Commands, Introducing 76 With the Mouse 83 XC Command 77 Menus, Drop-down 10,23 XG Command 77 Mixed References 31,55 XI Command 76 Mode Indicator 5,12 XL Command 78 Modes 5,48 XM Command 77 Edit 14,15,48,50,55,83,91 XN Command 79 Error 48 XQ Command 77 Find 48 XR Command 77 Label 48,49 Label Prefixes 13,47,91,106 Menu 48,82 Repeating 32,47,91 Point 6,19,30,48 Labels 47 Ready 49 As Criteria in Data Query 121 Value 48,49 Display of 12 Wait 48 Copying 32 Move Command 32,84,85 Entering 15 Introducing 84 Overlapping 12,15,47,91 Using Move 86 Locking Titles 37,99 Moving (Around the Worksheet) Logical @ Functions 63 7-9, Logical Operators 19,58 (With a Mouse) 7 Macros 45,71-79 Between Split Windows 35 Auto-executing 75 Movement Keys, Summary of 9 Commenting 75 NA 60 Creating Simple 71 Name Function 51 Defining 71 Named Graph Settings 139 Multiple-Cell 75 Erasing All from Worksheet 140 Pausing 73 Erasing One 140 Representing Characters 73 Retrieving 139 Revising 73 Saving 139 Single-step Mode 75 Operators (in Formulas) 53,57 Using [Return] 74 Options, Selecting Graph 135 Using Tildes 74 Output Cells in /Data Table X Command Introducing 76 126-127 XC Command 77 Point Mode 6,19,30 XG Command 77 Print Commands 141-148 XI Command 76 File 141-142 XL command 78 Printer 43,141 XM Command 77 Align 43,147 XN Command 79 Go 43,148 XQ Command 77 Line 148 XR Command 77 Options 143,147 Margins, Printed Worksheet 96 Borders 145 143 Footers 144 Mathematical @ Functions 64-66 Headers 144 Menu Commands 23,80-88 Margins 143 Command Sequences 83 Other 145 Introducing 23,25,80 As-Displayed 146 Resetting Command Choices 83 Cell Formulas 146 Selecting 23,25,81 Format 145 By Pointing 81 Quit 148 Page 163 Unformat 145 Retrieving Worksheet Files Page Length 144 42,114 Page 148 Return (Used in Macros) 74 Quit 148 Rows Border 4,92,98 Range 43,147 Saving a Graph 135 Set-Up 146,154 Saving a Worksheet 42,112 Printing of Screen Display 39 Scale, Setting Graph 38,137 Printing Graphs 149-151 Scientific Notation 16 Printing Worksheets, Procedure for Screen Display 4 43,142-143 Screen Printing 39 Prompting 24,82 Scroll Arrows 7 Protect Icon 6 Scroll Bars 7 Protection of Titles 10,99 Scroll Boxes 4 Query Function 51,125 Scroll Lock Facility 6,9 Querying a Database 120-125 Scroll Lock Icon 6 Quit Box 4 Scrolling 8 Quit Command 84,86 Scrolling Split Worksheet - Introducing 84,86 -Windows 101 Using Quit 86 Selecting Database Records Range Commands 103-110 120-125 Erase 110 Single-step Mode 5,6,75 Format 26,29,89,104 Size Box 4 Currency 104 Sorting a Database 118-120 Date 70,105 Source Range 30,32 Fixed 105 Special @ Functions 67 General 105 Special Functions 51 Percent 105 Spreadsheets, Introducing Plus or Minus 105 Electronic 1 Reset 105 Splitting a Worksheet Window Input 109 35,100 Justify 108 Creating Horizontal Windows Label Prefix 91,106 35 Name 106 Start Cell 27 Create 29,106 Statistical @ Functions 66 Delete 107 Status Line 5,13 Reset 107 Status, Checking Worksheet 101 Protect 93,109 Submenus Here's part 4 of these mega-huge docs for VIP Professional .... Worksheet Window The Worksheet Window command allows you to split the screen into two segments, or windows, so that you can simultaneously view different, unconnected areas of your worksheet. There are times when you want to compare different sections of your worksheet. you can even view the same section of the worksheet in different windows and in different ways. The easiest way to do this without printing is to use the split-window feature of your VIP Professional to split the screen. The split windows may be created horizontally or vertically. There are two ways to create windows: with the mouse and with the Worksheet Window command. Using the mouse, move the pointer either to the line above (for horizontal window) of the worksheet. When you do this, the pointer will change into a grooved square, or "grabber". Use the grabber to drag the line over the worksheet to the desired position for window. When you let up on the mouse button, the window will be created. If you drag the line back, the window will disappear. You may also use the Worksheet Window command. To create a horizontal window, place the cell indicator in the row below where you want the division to be. Select the Window command from the Worksheet menu (/WW). Next, select Horizontal (H). The display will be divided into two windows. The cell indicator will reappear in the last row of the source window (the first window). To create a vertical window, follow the same procedure used for creating a horizontal window. The only difference will consist of selecting Vertical (V) rather than Horizontal as the third step in the procedure. When you are ready to reunify the split windows, use the Worksheet Window Clear command (/WWC). Just like the undivided screen window, split windows use the grid pattern of the worksheet as a basis for operations. The actual positions of the cells on the worksheet are remembered and displayed on the borders. All commands which work on the grid as a whole, except for printing or saving, will work separately on each of the windows. It's important to remember that although you are now viewing two sections of your worksheet rather than one solid section, it is still the same worksheet. In some ways, the windows are independent from one another. The cell indicator can be used to move around each screen area, Each can have its own global display formats and global or individual column widths, and you can even use the split-window feature to view the same area differently in both windows. For example, in one, you could see the underlying formulas displayed in their cells, while in the other, you could view their current values. The window in which the cell indicator is located is the one which is active. The cell indicator can be moved from one window to the other in two ways. The first is by using the Window function [Function 6]. By using [Function 6] from the keyboard or selecting it from the VIP menu, the cell indicator will be moved from window to window. The other way to move from one window to another is by using the mouse to move the cell pointer. Move the cell pointer to a cell you want in the other window, then click the mouse button. Page 100 Synchronized Scrolling When you first split the screen, the windows are automatically synchronized horizontally or vertically (depending on which type of split-screen window you have). This means that horizontal windows scroll to the left or right together, but aren't linked when you move up or down in either of the windows. The same principle holds true for vertical scrolling: scrolling up and down in one window is synchronous in the other. Horizontal scrolling remains independent. This synchronized scrolling can be unlinked. To do so, select the Unsynchronize command from the Worksheet Window menu (/WWU). The scrolling is no longer linked. To reactivate synchronized scrolling, select the Synchronize command from the Worksheet Window menu (/WWS). The scrolling is now relinked from left to right for horizontal split-screen windows and up and down for vertical split-screen windows. Worksheet Erase The Worksheet Erase command is used to delete all the information entered in your worksheet. This command should only be used if you feel that the work you did during the session is unusable. Any information currently stored in the computer is lost. All individual settings are lost and global settings are returned to their initial values. To issue the Erase command, select it from the Worksheet menu (/WE). VIP Professional will require that you confirm this command. Choose Yes (Y) or No (N). Choosing NO will bring you back to your previous position in the worksheet. Yes erases all the information and settings you have added to your worksheet since it was first displayed. Default settings are returned to their initial settings. Worksheet Status The Worksheet Status command is used to give you information about your current worksheet. It displays the amount of available memory you have left for your worksheet and the global settings in effect. The settings displayed are for recalculation, global format, global label prefix, global column width and global protection. Select Status from the Worksheet menu (/WS). A table will appear on the screen. It lists the setting types and the selections that are currently in effect. It also lists the amount of memory still available for your use. When you are finished viewing this table, press any key to return to your worksheet in the Ready mode. Page 101 Using Computer Memory for Your Worksheet As we mentioned earlier, there is no simple correlation between the amount of memory used by your computer for your worksheet and the amount of memory needed to save your worksheet. Of course, the larger the worksheet is, the more memory it will use - whether you are working on it or have saved it to disk. It is not just the data that you have entered in your worksheet which requires memory, empty rows and columns in between your work may also use memory. For instance, if you format a range, then delete its data using a Range Erase command, you will find that the deleted range still uses memory. To regain memory, first unformat the deleted range area (by using the Reset command from the Range Format menu on the area). Then, whenever possible, move the data in your worksheet up to fill the blank area. Now, use the File Save command to save your worksheet. Then, use the File Retrieve command to retrieve it. When next you use the Worksheet Status command, any changes in available memory will be displayed. If the Worksheet Status command is used a second time in a work session, the Status table will display the results of additional memory usage by the worksheet, but it does not display subtracted memory usage. If you erase data or free memory in any way, you will need to use both the File Save and the File Retrieve commands before the Worksheet Status command can be used to display the updated information. Page 102 RANGE COMMANDS Introduction Range commands are used to process groups of cells in a worksheet. Many of the commands are similar to ones found in the Worksheet menu and in other menus. The most significant difference is that instead of being carried through the entire worksheet, Range commands only affect a certain prespecified rectangular area consisting of one or more contiguous cells. Range parameters are set through the use of two cells, the "start" (or "anchor") and the "end" (or "free") cells. The upper left cell of a range is initially the start cell and is considered the first cell of the range. The lower right cell, which is usually the free cell, os used to expand or shrink the borders of the range. When ranges consist of only one cell, the start and end cells are the same. Range borders are always exactly horizontal and vertical, the corners forming 90-degree angles. Frequently, ranges consist of rows, columns or some other type of rectangular area. When to Specify a Range Many VIP commands require that one or more ranges be specified. VIP will prompt you when it requires a range as part of a command. If you are using a mouse, there are times when you may specify a range before selecting a command. Then, when you invoke the command, you may accept the prespecified range or you may define a new one. For example, if you select the Copy command after you specified a range with your mouse, you may use the range by pressing [Return] when you are prompted for a source range and your selection appears typed in next to the prompt. If you do not wish to accept it, you may press [Escape], then specify and enter another range in one of the ways described in the next section. VIP will use the most recently specified range. With some commands, such as Data Query and Data Sort, ranges are remembered from the first time and displayed if you use the command again. To accept these defaulted values, press [Return]. To change such a range, press [Escape] and specify a range of your choice in its stead. How to Specify a Range For the Range commands, and for many other VIP Professional commands, you will need to specify a range in response to a prompt. Ranges can be specified three different ways: by using your arrow and other movement keys, by using the mouse and its movement aids, and by typing in the cell coordinates of its start and end cells. Once created, ranges can be named and reused by name in command procedures requiring ranges. Named ranges are discussed thoroughly later in the chapter. When you use your arrow and other movement keys to specify a range, you must first move the cell indicator over the anchor cell. Press [.]. Next to the prompt for the range, the cell coordinate of the start cell, followed by two periods and the same cell coordinate will appear. Once you start moving the cell indicator toward the end cell, the second cell coordinate will change, reflecting the movement of the cell indicator. If the range is fairly small, you will probably use your arrow keys to move to the end cell. If the range is larger, you may decide to use the page, tab or other movement keys in combination with the arrow keys. Once you have moved the cell indicator to the end cell, press [Return]. Next to the prompt for a range, you will see the cell coordinate of the start cell, two periods and the cell coordinate of the end cell. Page 103 Ranges are selected with the mouse by dragging the pointer across the cells to be included in the range. Just press the mouse button down when the pointer is over the start cell, then drag the mouse until the pointer is over the end cell, and let up on the button. If you decide to change the range, move the pointer over the new cell and press the mouse button while holding down the [Shift] key. When you have finally decided on your range, click on the Checkmark icon or press [Return]. It is even easier to include parts of your sheet which are currently off the screen in your range. First select the cell which is to be the start cell. Next, use any method to go to the cell which is to be the end cell. With the pointer over the end cell, click the mouse button while holding the [Shift] key. You may [Shift]-click to alter the end cell as you please. To set the range, press [Return]. Ranges can also be specified by typing. Type the cell address of the top left cell of the range, a period and the cell address of the bottom right cell. Press [Return] to enter it. If you have used the Range Name command to name an existing range, you may also type and enter the range name in response to a prompt asking for you to specify a range. Rotating the Anchor Cell When a range is specified (but not yet entered), its anchor, or start, cell can be changed by moving its position from corner cell to corner cell in a clockwise fashion. This can be done with the mouse or by pressing [.]. If you are using a mouse, move the pointer to the Express icon while the range is still highlighted. At the center of the Express icon, is a block-shaped cross. This is the Anchor Rotation figure. Click the mouse button over it. Every time you click the mouse button, the anchor cell is rotated to the next corner cell. To move the anchor cell from corner to corner of a range by pressing [.], first move the cell indicator to the current anchor cell. Next, press [.]. Every time you press [.], the anchor cell will be moved to the next corner. Range Format Just as the Worksheet Global Format command is used to set the global worksheet display of numerical values, the Range Format command is used to set the display of numerical values in a specified range. The Range Format command overrides the Worksheet Global Format command in those areas where it is used. As with Worksheet Global format, the values themselves aren't changed, only the way they are displayed is. If a chosen display format makes a value too long to fit into a cell, asterisk marks are placed across that cell. The original values are remembered. To display the value again, you must alter the column width or change the format. To set a format, select Format from the Range menu (/RF). Choose the letter of the format and any necessary information. Then, specify the range to be formatted using one of the methods described earlier. The format options are described below. Currency: Choose Currency (C). Values will be preceded by the dollar symbol. Negative values are enclosed by parentheses. A comma is inserted after every third digit to the left of the decimal point. Choose the number of digits you want to round off to after the decimal point by entering any number between 0 and 15. Press [Return]. Page 104 Date: Choose (D). Any integers between 1 and 73050 are considered to be "serial" versions of dates and are translated to a normal date format. The date format is usually used with date arithmetic (see "Date Arithmetic" in the chapter, "Building Formulas using Operators and Functions"). You have three options for the way dates are displayed. The day and the year are always displayed numerically while the month is displayed as abbreviated text and uses three letters (for example; "05-JAN-85"). Your options are 1) Day-Month-Year, 2) Day-Month and 3) Month-Year. Choose the number of your option and press [Return]. Fixed: Choose Fixed (F). This allows you to round off all values to a specified number of decimal places. Enter the number of decimal places you want each value rounded off to (type in a number between 0 and 15). Press [Return]. General: Choose General (G). This is the initial global default value. In this format, numbers are displayed as entered, except that where numbers are too large to be displayed, they are displayed in exponential notation. Otherwise, values are displayed as they are entered. Percent: Choose Percent (P). A percent symbol precedes each value in the range. Enter the number of digits (0 to 15) you want values rounded off to after a decimal point. +/-: Choose +/- (+). The value of your range will be displayed as plus or minus symbols. Plus is used to display positive integers. The value of the integer equals the number of + symbols used. If a value is 5,5 + symbols are displayed in its cell. Negative integers are displayed as - symbols. The value 0 is displayed as ".". Reset: Select Reset (R). The Reset command is used to counter the effect of the Range Format command. Range Format Reset returns a range to the global format (as set by the Worksheet Global Format command). Page 105 Range Label-prefix The Range Label-prefix command is used to change the display of labels in a range so that they are aligned to the right or left of the cell or centered. Any labels you wish to add to the range at a later time will conform to the global standards rather than to the range's standards. If you wish to change the position of the added labels in their cells, you must do so individually, while you are in the Edit mode. The Range Label-prefix command is similar to the Worksheet Label-prefix command. The major difference between the two is that the effect of the Worksheet command is global while the Range command is only effective in the specified range. Where both are used, the Range command has precedence over the Worksheet command. To use this command, first select it choosing by choosing Label-prefix from the Range menu (/RL). Choose right, left or centered alignment by typing in the first letter. R or L or C. Now, specify a range and enter it. VIP Professional will do the rest of the work for you and your range labels will be formatted according to plan. Range Name VIP allows you to give a specific name to each range that you create. This can be particularly useful if you have certain frequently used ranges. Naming a range makes it more personal and, therefore, easier to remember. For each worksheet you have created, VIP Professional allows you to keep a list of range names to designate ranges in it. These range names can be saved and retrieved with most file commands. However, the File Combine command does not allow you to keep range names when you combine two different worksheets. This prevents possible conflicts in named ranges. When VIP Professional prompts you for a range to be processed, you can use a range name. To have a list of the current worksheet range names displayed, use the Name function [Function 3]. To select a range name in response to a prompt, either point to it with your mouse or arrow keys or type in the range name. Press [Return]. There are three commands which relate specifically to range names: the Range Name Create command, the Range Name Delete command and the Range Name Reset command. In addition, the Range Name Label command is a special command which is used to name single-celled ranges. Range Name Create The Range Name Create command is used to give a name to a certain range. Range names make it easier to view or use certain ranges in command procedures. Once a range has been named, it's definition (the borders of a range as defined by its two end points) can be revised at a later date without changing its name by changing the position of its start and end cells. To name a range, select Create from the Range Name menu (/RNC). In reply to the prompt for a new range name, type one of your choice and press [Return]. Page 106 Like file names, range names can be typed in upper- or lowercase letters. VIP Professional displays all letters in uppercase. Range names can be up to 15 characters long. We suggest that you do not use space characters or the +. -, *, /, and ^ characters. This is to avoid similarities with formulas, commands and labels since that may cause confusion for the program. For the same reason, we advise you do not use range names that look like cell addresses. The last step to creating a range name is specifying the range. In response to a prompt, specify the range using one of the methods (mouse, arrow keys or typing) described in the beginning of the chapter. Press [Return] to enter it. To view a named range, type the range name or choose it from the range name list (which can be called up with the Name function [Function 3]. Press [Return]. To return to the Ready mode, press [Return] without pointing to any of the names. To redefine the borders of a named range, select the Range Name Create command. The existing range names for the current worksheet are called up with Range Name Create. Choose the name of the range you want by highlighting it with your mouse or arrow keys, or by typing it in. Press [Return]. Now specify the new range with your mouse, arrow keys or by typing. Press [Return]. All formulas with cell references which are referred to a range by that name will be updated to reflect the changes made. Range Name Delete The Range Name Delete command is used to delete range names that are no longer needed. This means that the deleted range names will not appear on the range name menu, nor will it be used to refer to range anymore. However, the cell contents of the range are unaffected. Formulas with cell references which previously referred to the range by name now refer to the range by using cell addresses. To use the Range Name Delete command, choose Delete from the Range Name menu (/RND). Choose the name you want deleted, either by typing it out or by choosing it from the list which is automatically displayed. Press [Return] to enter it. Range Name Reset The Range Name Reset command is used only when you wish to delete all range names from your worksheet. To select the Range Name Reset command, first choose Reset from the Range Name menu (/RNR). All range names are deleted from the Range Name menu. Ranges can no longer be referred to by name. All formulas which previously referenced cells by range name now use cell addresses. Range Name Label The Range Name Label command is used to create a string of one-celled, named ranges out of key value cells. Sometimes, you will find that it is easier to refer to the names of key values rather than their coordinates or the values themselves. Certain key formulas can also be single-celled, named ranges. This can be done with the Range Name Create command. However, when there are several cells in a row that contain key formulas and each has an identifying label located directly above, below, to the left or to the right, it may be easier to use the Range Name Label command to name all the ranges at once. Page 107 The names of these ranges are derived from the string of labels. The labels must either be all to the left, all to the right, all below or all above the value cells. To use the Range Name Label command, first position the cell indicator on one end of the string of label cells you want to use. Select the command by choosing Label from the Range Name menu (/RNL). Specify whether you want to name the value cells to the right, left, up or down of the label cells (R, L, U or D). Specify the range of labels you want used. Remember, as with all range names, VIP Professional can only use the first 15 characters of the label to give the range its name. Range Justify There will be times when you wish to add sentences or even paragraphs of explanatory text to your worksheet. VIP Professional allows you to do this by using the Label mode for entering your text. Labels are allowed more characters than can be contained in one cell. A label which contains more letters then can be displayed within a cell will automatically continue through the next cells to the right and are only interrupted by cells containing data. Labels can be written as ordinary text, with [Space] and punctuation characters. A series of long labels, all beginning in the same column can be written as a paragraph. Margins can be set or changed for these labels. The left margin is set by the cells in which the labels are begun. With the Range Justify command, you can change the right margin of a long label (or consecutive set of labels) to a specified ragged-right margin of your own. Range Justify reformats your margins to the length you specify by shortening or lengthening each row individually. All words which extend beyond the margin you set are carried down to the row below. This way of breaking sentences up between words to suit margin lengths is similar to the word wrap-around feature found in many text processors. To use the Range Justify command, place the cell indicator over the first character in the first label of your range. Now select the Justify command from the Range menu (/RJ). Move the cell indicator across the row until you reach the desired margin length. Press [Return]. The first label which follows it in an unbroken order (that is, until the first non-label cell), will be reformatted according to the margin length you specified. If you move the margins closer together, resulting in thinner paragraphs, more rows are used to accommodate all the labels. If you move the margins further apart for wider paragraphs, less rows are needed. Either way, VIP Professional automatically adjusts the rest of your worksheet to make room for these changes. If more rows are needed by the labels as a result of closer margins, the rest of the worksheet is moved down an equivalent number of rows. If fewer rows are needed because of wider margins, the rest of the worksheet is moved up an equivalent number of rows. To stop automatic adjustment, you can specify a depth as well as a width when you use Range Justify. To do this, follow the procedure described above, but, after you move the cell indicator across the row to the desired margin setting, move it straight downward until it is positioned over the last cell you want included in your range. Press [Return]. Page 108 If the series of labels fits into the range you specified, then the only area of your worksheet affected is the area you specified as your range. If the series of labels overflows the range parameters, you will receive an error message letting you know that the range has been filled. After you remove the messages (by pressing [Return] or clicking OK), you will see that the area which could not fit into the specified range continues below the range and is not set at the margin you specified with the Range Justify command. There may even be times when you lose parts of your longer paragraphs. When you add or delete words from labels after you have used the Range Justify command, you will notice that the label is not automatically adjusted to fit the specified margin length. If you want to retain the margin setting, you must use the Range Justify command again. Range Protect and Unprotect The Range Protect and Range Unprotect commands are used only in connection with the Worksheet Global Protection commands (see the section on global protection in the chapter, "Worksheet Commands"). In the ranges where they are used, the Range commands override the Worksheet commands. This is particularly effective since it allows you to have both protected and unprotected cells in your worksheet. Range protection of cells is used when you wish to keep certain areas (cell ranges) free from editing changes or other accidental changes. They cannot be entered (that is, the Value, Label, or Edit modes cannot be used in these cells) and, therefore, no editing changes can be made if you invoke protection. Range Protect: The Range Protect command may only be used when the Worksheet Global Protection has been enabled (/WGPE). It is usually used within a larger range which has been left unprotected or with a range used by the Range Input command (discussed in the next section). To use the Range Protection command, choose Protect from the Range menu (/RP). Specify a range and enter it. VIP Professional will set up protection in the range. Range Unprotect: To use the Range Unprotect command, choose Unprotect from the Range menu (/RU). Then specify a range and enter it. VIP Professional will unprotect that range. The Range Protect and Unprotect commands can be used to counteract one another. If you have a range which you previously had protected, you may unprotect it using the appropriate command, and vice versa. Range Input The Range Input command is often used as an extension of the Range Protect command described in the last section. With the Range Protection command, you can specify cells you do not wish changed. You cannot enter information in protected cells, but you can still move over them with your cell indicator. With the Range Input command, you can set your worksheet up so that only the cells you want changed can be entered or reached in any way. Protected cells can therefore be doubly protected by this and the Range Protect commands. The Range Input command can also be used without the Range Protect command. Page 109 For example, before using Range Input, you can create half-finished forms which only need a few pieces of data entered. Then use the Worksheet Global Protection command to protect your data and the Range Unprotect and Range Input commands to limit additional data entry to the desired areas. This data can be entered by you or by someone else who has little experience using VIP Professional. Since the data already entered is doubly protected there is little chance that anyone can damage it. The Range Input command is also easily used with keyboard macros to create such things as repetitive letters of forms. With macros, Range Input is used to indicate those areas where the forms require different entries. For example, in a repetitive letter, Range Input would be used to indicate the area which is filled in by the name. To use the Range Input command, first make sure the target cells are part of an unprotected range. To do this, use the Range Unprotect command discussed in the previous section. If you forget to leave Range Input cells unprotected, your computer will beep at you and display an error message when you use this command. Next, select the Input command from the Range menu (/RI). Specify the input range and enter it. When you use the Range Input command, the selected range is displayed in the upper left-hand corner of the display. You will notice that you may use your movement keys or your mouse to move in the Range Input cells only. All non-Range Input cells are bypassed when you move around in the worksheet. While Range Input is in effect, you can use the Help function [Function 1] and the Calculation function [Function 9]. For editing, you may use the Edit function [Function 2]. In the Ready mode, [Backspace] is used to erase the character preceding your cell indicator. To cancel an entry, press [Escape] once. All other functions and types of commands are inactive. If you press [Escape] or [Return] without first typing or editing an entry (that is, in the Ready mode), the Range Input command is ended. VIP Professional returns you to where you were in the worksheet before you issued the Range Input command. Both the worksheet window and the cell indicator are returned to their original positions. Range Erase The Range Erase command is used to erase the contents of a selected range. Just as the Worksheet Erase command erases the contents of an entire worksheet (including both commands and data), the Range Erase command erases a lesser area. The Range Erase command does not require confirmation before erasing. Therefore, it should be used with care. To use the Range Erase command, choose Erase from the Range menu (/RE). In response to a prompt for a range, select and enter the range you want erased and press [Return]. VIP Professional erases the contents of that range once you've entered it. Page 110 FILE COMMANDS Introduction File commands are used to store your worksheets, graphs and print-ready copy separately from one another. they are also used to interact between the different stored areas so that you can do such things as combining parts of files. The files of VIP Professional are similar to files used in an office. Each file stores a different subject and needs to be pulled out (or retrieved) once it has been filed (or saved) if you want to look at it again. Instead of saving the files in a cabinet, you will be saving the files on formatted data disks. The contents of your files, worksheets, graphs and soft copy for printing, are created in your computer's main memory. However, the files themselves are stored on data disks. Every time you retrieve a file, you are actually copying all the information in that file of that disk back into your computer's memory so that you can work with it. With VIP Professional, you only work on one worksheet at a time. When you are finished working on it or when you want to turn the computer off, you need to save your work to a disk. The number of files you can save to one disk is limited by the amount of memory available on the disk. But since you can use as many data disks as you want, the total number of files you save is virtually unlimited. Files are also grouped into folders or as they are also called, directories. Each folder may be used to contain several files pertaining to one particular subject. The disk drive and directory to which you save a file is initially controlled by the Worksheet Global Default Directory command. It can also be specified by using a disk prefix or by using the File Directory command. When you make a mistake in saving files or in retrieving them from a disk, your computer may send you an error message if it has problems "reading" from or "writing" to your disk. This means that, somehow, information is not being passed correctly to and from the computer. Since VIP Professional is actually a kind of master file itself, you may sometimes get this type of error message when you are starting up the program and there is a problem. Each file must be filed under its own file name. Then, when the computer is asked to retrieve a file, it can find the right one from all the ones you have in the directory on the disk in the correct disk drive. No two files on the same disk can have the same name. If you try to give the same name twice, VIP Professional "overwrites" the first file with the second file. Overwriting occurs when the contents of the first file are erased and replaced with the contents of the second file. Fortunately, VIP will send you a prompt first before overwriting. Even though you can save two files with the same name to different disks, it is not advisable. Similarly named files can cause confusion when you try to remember what their contents are. Worksheet file names can be up to eight characters long. The characters you may use are those from A - Z, 0 -9, and -. Characters other than these are considered illegal. Your computer will send you an error message when you try to use them for a file name. If you use the characters from the alphabet, VIP Professional recognizes lower- and uppercase letters as being alike. Example: "ACCTS3" is acceptable as a file name. "ACCOUNTING" is not acceptable because it is too long. "ACCTS 3" is also not acceptable because filenames may not contain [Space] characters. Page 111 Types of Files There are three different types of files. Each one contains a different kind of information. The three types are: Worksheet files store raw worksheet data. Graph files are used for storing the graphs which you create. They are stored separately from worksheet files because they are created differently and because the procedure for printing them is different from printing worksheet files. Print files use the contents of worksheet files, but these contents are the electronic version of printouts. To retrieve these files, you need a standard ASCII text processor. Print files usually serve as the bridge between importing and exporting standard files from other programs. As you can see from the File List and File Directory commands discussed in this chapter, the different types of files are not grouped together on a disk. The program gives each data disk three different lists, one for each type of file. The three types of files are distinguishable by their file name extensions. File name extensions are preceded by a period (".") and added to the file names. The file name extensions are: "wks" for worksheets, "gph" for graph and "prn" for print. No [Space] characters are used between the file name and its extension. Upper and lowercase letters are considered alike. For example, a graph file name "ACCS85" would be stored like this: "ACCTS85.gph". File name extensions are used when you first create a file, when you move from one directory to another or when a worksheet file becomes a print file. Most often VIP Professional adds the file name extension automatically (for instance, when you save a print file). At other times, such as when you move from one type of file to another, you need to add the file name extension or use the File List command. File Save The File Save command is used to save a worksheet and all its settings from the computer to a disk. This command is particularly important because it is the only thing that stands between you and the computer. Irretrievable loss of your worksheet once it leaves the computer's main memory. In case of power outages or incorrect commands, your computer loses track of what is in its memory and your worksheet is lost. Of course, if you quit your worksheet or turn off the computer the same thing happens. Because of this, it is important to save your worksheet. There are so many ways you can accidentally or intentionally erase a file. We suggest that you save your worksheet frequently, perhaps even as often as every 15 minutes! Each time you save your file, you may return to it to update or add information. When you save it again, you use the same file name. To use File Save, first select the Save command from the File menu (/FS). Type in the file name you wish to use or choose an existing file name from the name catalog (a list of existing file names which appears with the command). You may use your arrow keys or your mouse to move through the list. If you type in or point to an already existing file name, a computer prompt appears to ask you whether to replace the old file or not. If you choose Replace (R), the computer erases the older version of your file and stores the new one. If you decide you'd rather keep the older version, choose Cancel (C). The older version remains saved, but the newer one won't be. If you still want to save the newer version, you will have to do so under a different name. Page 112 When you save your worksheet, notice that there is no simple correlation between the amount of memory used when it is created on the computer and the amount of memory used when it is saved in a file. If there is not enough memory space left on your disk to store the worksheet, your computer sends you a prompt letting you know that the disk is full. In this case, simply insert another data disk (making sure that it is formatted) and repeat the File Save command. In rare cases, you may want to save a worksheet which holds more information than can be contained on a data disk. If this happens, separate the information by using the File eXtract command )discussed later in this chapter) and place the information on different disks. To retrieve the information on your computer, use the File Combine command (also discussed later). File List The File List command is used to display a list of file names of a particular type from the directory you are currently using, along with the amount of memory used by each file and the amount of total memory you have left on that disk. You can use this command at almost any stage of your work. Once you have finished viewing the list of file names, any key takes you back to where you were on the worksheet. To use the File List command, first select the List command from the File menu (/FL). Then specify the type of file you want to look up by choosing the correct file type: Worksheet (W), Print (P) or Graph (G). If there are no files of the type you requested, the computer sends you an error message. When this happens, press [Return] to go back to your worksheet. File Directory The File Directory command is used to set the current disk drive and the directory (or folder). This means that the computer sends the file for storage to a specific directory (folder) on a specific disk. The current disk drive is initially set by the Worksheet Global Default Directory command. Usually the program disk is kept in the first disk drive (A) and the data disks are kept in the second disk drive (B). Hard disks are labeled,"C". To use the File Directory command, first select Directory from the File menu (/FD). The current disk drive and directory setting will be displayed. If you wish to retain it, press [Return]. To change the current file directory, type the letter of the disk drive (A - C), a colon and the name of the directory preceded by a backslash. All your files will now be saved to that disk in that disk drive. Example: B:\ACCTS85 Using File Directory is recommended, but if you want to change the disk drive setting for just one file, you can use the disk prefix (one of the letters from A - C). for example, if you want to retrieve a directory named "ACCTS85" from a disk in drive B and your current disk setting happens to be drive A (A), type "B:\ACCTS85" and press [Return]. Then, when you are finished with that file, you can reset the disk setting to the one you had before by using the same method. Page 113 File Retrieve The File Retrieve command is used to move information from a file stored on a disk to the computer's memory. The computer will only search for the file in the current directory (specified by the Worksheet Global Default command or the File Directory command). If you are working on a worksheet, make sure you save it before retrieve another or you will lose it. The computer automatically erases whatever is in the main memory before it retrieves a file for you. To use the File Retrieve command, first select Retrieve from the File menu (/FR). Indicate which file you want retrieved by typing in the name or choosing it from the file catalog displayed. Press [Return] to enter it. File Combine The File Combine command is used to add part or all of a saved worksheet to the worksheet you are currently using. This command does not erase the worksheet you are using and only affects the areas the worksheets have in common. The worksheets are matched cell for cell and it is only those cells which have the same coordinates, or cell addresses, which are used. How the current worksheet is affected by File Combine depends on one of three options you choose when you issue the command. The first option you have is to copy entries from the saved worksheet to the current worksheet. When you choose the Copy option, each entry from the area of the saved worksheet replaces the matching entry of the current worksheet. Another option is Add. Entries from the saved worksheet which match the position of those from the current worksheet are added to those from the current worksheet. Only numbers and formula values from the saved worksheet are used during this File Combine command. Labels and empty cells from the saved worksheet are ignored. Empty cells from the current worksheet take the added values of the saved worksheet's cells. The last option, Subtract, is similar to adding. The only difference lies in the operation. Numbers and formula values from the saved worksheet are subtracted - - not - - added to the current worksheet. To use the File Combine command, place the cell pointer at the upper left corner of the area in your current worksheet where you want changes to be made. Select the Combine command from the File menu (/FC). Now, select a method of combining. Choose Copy (C), Add (A), or Subtract (S). Choose to use the entire saved worksheet (E) or a named range (N). If you chose a named range, type in the name of the range. If you chose an entire file, specify the name of the worksheet by typing it or by pointing to it on the file catalog (displayed automatically) and pressing [Return]. Unless you use a disk prefix, VIP Professional will look for the worksheet file in the disk you are currently using. It might be a good idea to save the current worksheet and to make a copy of the saved worksheet before you execute the command if you don't have much experience with this command or are unsure of what its effect might be. This way you will still have a copy of your work. The File Combine command cannot be rescinded once it is issued. Page 114 File eXtract The File eXtract command is used to save a range or, as an option, to save currently displayed formula values (rather than the formulas themselves) of a range from a worksheet into a separate worksheet file. The command os often used to save part of a worksheet or, when used with the File Combine command (discussed previously), to save part of one worksheet to another. To use the File eXtract command, select the eXtract command from the File menu (/FX). Choose to save formulas (F) or only the current values of formulas (V). Choose a file name for the extracted portion of your worksheet. If you choose a file name already in existence or the file name of the current worksheet, the computer will ask if you want to replace the contents of the existing file (R) or cancel the command (C). Cancel takes you to where you were before you selected the command. If you choose Replace, the saved worksheet will be overwritten by the extracted portion. Specify the range to be extracted by using your movement keys or your mouse. Press [Return] to enter it. A new worksheet file containing the extracted range is now created with the name you specified. All the settings which are part of that section of the worksheet are also saved. File Import The File Import command is used to copy numbers and/or labels from a file which wasn't created on VIP Professional (but from another spreadsheet or computer) to a worksheet. With this command, you can import just text or numbers and labels and superimpose this new data at a specified spot in your worksheet. "Domestic" equivalents to the File Import command would be the File Retrieve and File Combine commands. The File Import command processes most standard-format print files from programs other than VIP Professional. Standard-format files are files which do not use characters or formats which are peculiar to the word processor or computer it was created on. Usually, all that is necessary to create a print file from an incoming file (which is not already a print file) is renaming it with a ".prn" file name extension. For this, the GEM Desktop can be used. The Atari user's manual has instructions for renaming files. After making sure that the file you are importing has a ".PRN" file name extension, you can use the File Import command. First, position the cell indicator over the upper left cell of the worksheet area you will want to use. Select the Import command from the File menu (/FI). Decide whether you want to specify Text (T) or Numbers (N). If you decide on numbers, you must enclose all labels of the imported file in quotation marks. This can be done using the source program or a text editor. Then, type the name of the print file to be imported. Press [Return]. With text, VIP Professional changes each line of text into a long label, moving down line by line. A paragraph is really a series of long labels, all starting in the same column. The labels are begun at the spot specified by the position of the cell indicator. The length of each label depends on the length of each line of the imported text. Each cell of the VIP Professional worksheet can contain as many as 240 characters (although only those which fit in the worksheet window will be displayed). Page 115 With numbers, VIP Professional searches out all numerical values and sets of characters (labels) enclosed by quotes. These numbers and characters are transferred to VIP Professional worksheet line-by-line. The worksheet matches the print file's lines with its rows. The numbers and letters are entered successively; with each number/label following the last one a cell to the right. The labels enclosed by quotes are transferred to the VIP Professional worksheet as left-aligned labels. With the File Import command, the imported data replaces worksheet cell contents in the area in which it is entered. However, if there are blank lines in the imported print file, the worksheet moves its contents down a matching number of rows from the place where the blank lines are inserted. It is important to make sure that when you import text, it has been standardized. With VIP Professional, you could still try to import non-standardized text, but the results are unpredictable and can be quite suprising. File Erase The File Erase command is used to delete a file from a disk. It is most often used to remove files one at a time from a disk so that there is more room for storage on the disk. Care must be taken when exercising this command because once a file has been erased, it cannot be retrieved. To use the File Erase command, first select the File Erase command from the File menu (/FE). Now choose which type of file you wish to erase: Worksheet (W), Graph (G) or Print (P). Indicate the file to be deleted by typing its name or by pointing to it on the file catalog. The catalog is displayed automatically with this command. Press [Return]. The computer will offer you options asking you to confirm or to cancel the deletion. If you choose Yes (Y), the file you specified is erased. If you choose No (N), you are returned to your previous position and the command is canceled. To use the File Erase command for deleting more than one file at a time, you have two special characters which you can use. The question mark ("?") and the asterisk ("*") are used along with file name characters to produce a type of file name pattern which erases all files which match its specifications. The procedure for using the File Erase command is the same as usual with these additional characters, the only difference being that with them, more than one file can be deleted. "?" matches any single character which is positioned in the same place of the file name as it is. For example, If you type "RCVBL?" as the file name when you issue the File Erase command, files such as "RCVBL1" or "RCVBL2" would be deleted. However, a file with the name of "RCVBL12" would not be deleted since the question mark allows only one optional character in its place. The "*" is used to end a string of characters. It matches all characters in a file name from where it is placed to the end of the file name. If you type "ACCT*" as a file name when you issue File Erase, files with names such as "ACCTS", "ACCTG", "ACCTG1" would be deleted. A file with the name "ACTSLTR" would not be deleted because its characters do not conform with those specified before the asterisk. The "*" character can be used alone when the File Erase command is issued. When this is the case, all files in the current directory are erased. Page 116 DATA COMMANDS Introduction Data commands are powerful tools used for database management aspects of VIP Professional. They maintain records in the order that you decide as well as assisting in financial planning and numeric analysis. Once you have created your database, you can sort part or all of it, make queries to find significant information, and perform statistical analysis. Other special database commands allow you to create tables for analyzing different possibilities and find the frequency distribution of portions of your database. VIP Professional's Data commands follow as a natural extension of the program's many capabilities. The Data menu is fully integrated with other menus and uses commands from them, such as Worksheet and Range commands, to design and use a database. These, plus the specific Data commands, combine to offer you extensive data processing capabilities. Creating Databases A database is a set of records pertaining to a main subject. Databases gather information from a variety of sources. Each source is considered a record. All the information (or data in the database is organized into groupings of similar information. Each group represents a different facet of the data records. These facets are the fields. For example, say that you worked in a company which employed twenty people. You need to keep track of their names, addresses and telephone numbers. The best way to do this is to make a record of each employee. This gives you 20 records. Then, organize all the records into fields. You might end up with seven different fields in this order: last name, first name, street number and street, city, state, zip code and telephone number. A database uses the same column and row organization that is used by the worksheet itself. Formulas, labels and values are also entered and used similarly in a database. The biggest difference between a database and other worksheets is that the columns and rows of the spreadsheet are used to organize the fields and records of the database. Each cell of a database (excluding the top row which is used only for field names) is part of both a field and a record. Columns are used to organize the fields. The first row of the database uses labels called field names which head and describe the fields assigned to the columns/fields below. No two fields in a database may have the same field name. All field names must be labels, so if you enter a number to be used as a field name, make sure you precede it with a label prefix. [Space] characters should be avoided when typing in field names. Even if they are not apparent, the computer remembers that they are there. This may lead to undesirable results or an error message if you do not remember to use them in commands at a later time. The following rows of the database (the second, third and so on) are used as records. Records are entered in a database in order of their fields. Each field of a record is placed in a column which is headed by an identifying field name. Records usually consist of several fields. Each contains a piece of data which makes up one element of the record. Page 117 As we said earlier, each piece of data that you enter in your database is considered part of both a field and a record. If this concept seems a bit confusing, a good way to clarify it is to compare a piece of data with a worksheet cell. A cell is part of both a column (a field for a piece of data in a database) and a row (a record for a piece of data in a database). VIP Professional databases are easy to use partly because they incorporate commands and features that you are already familiar with from other aspects of the program. For example, by using Worksheet Insert commands, you can insert rows and columns for use as extra records and fields. Range Format and Range Label commands can determine format and alignment. The Copy and Move commands are extremely useful. You can use the Edit mode to correct errors made in data entries. Formulas and functions also have a place in database construction and management. In addition to these many other familiar commands and features, VIP Professional has the Data commands to deal with specific data base operations. The five main Data commands are: Data Sort, Data Query, Data Table, Data Fill and Data Distribution. Data Sort The Data Sort command allows you to change the order of database records or any other series of data in your worksheet. For example, you can use it to alphabetize a set of records by last name. This command only changes the order of records; the order of fields in the database is not affected by it. When you select the Sort command from the Data menu (/DS), you call up a menu of subsidiary commands. These commands are: Data-Range, Primary-key, Secondary-key, Reset, Go and Quit. Sorting a database requires the following steps. First, you must specify the range to be sorted with the Data Range command. Next, you have to set the field which is to be sorted using the Primary-key command. The third step, which is optional, is to set a second field which serves to further sort any duplicates in the primary field. Finally, you select Go to actually sort your database. Before going on to discuss each of these steps, it is necessary to explain two aspects of the sort feature which you should be aware of. The first aspect has to do with the effect of sorting a database. Once you have used the Data Sort command, there is usually no way to restore the order of the records, as the Professional does not recall the original order. To avoid such a problem, you may create an extra field for numbering the records in sequence before you issue the command. That way, you can always resort your database using this field as the primary field when you are ready to return to the original order. When you are numbering each record, you may do it manually if there are just a few records in the database, or you may use the Data Fill command (discussed later in the chapter) if there are more records. The other aspect has to do with the relation of formulas to your database. The Data Sort command changes the position of records and this can affect entries which contain formulas with cell references. (Using cell references is discussed in the chapter, "Building Formulas Using Operators and Functions".) However, there are some general rules pertaining to the use of formula references in database entries where the Data Sort command is used: All references to cells outside the range to be sorted should be absolute. Within the range, references to cells in the same records can be left relative, especially in regard to column number. References to cells in different rows of a range should not be used. Page 118 Data-Range The range or portion of the record, which you want to sort must be specified first. You may to choose to sort the entire database or just one section of it. When you specify the range, do not include field names located in the top row or they will also be sorted. First, select the Data-Range command from the Data Sort menu (D). Specify and enter the range. Once you have entered a range for the Data Sort command, VIP Professional remembers it. The next time you use this command, VIP will automatically display it when you choose the Data-Range command from the submenu. If you use the Data Sort command several times, the most recently used range will be displayed. If you accept this, simply press [Return]. If not, press [Escape] and respecify the range. Primary-Key This is the second mandatory command from the submenu. It chooses the primary-key field and, through a prompt, the order (highest to lowest or lowest to highest) in which the primary-key field will be sorted. The primary-key field and the way it is sorted determines the order of the records. To select the command, choose Primary-key from the Data Sort menu (P). Use your mouse or arrow keys to move the cell indicator anywhere in the column of the field that you want as the primary-key field and press [Return]. Now decide on the order of the primary-key field. You can choose ascending (A) or desending (D). Asending puts records in order from the lowest to the highest number or letter. Desending puts them in reverse order. The order is decided according to the following rules of precedence: 1. Blank cells. 2. Label cells. The alignment prefixes are ignored, but the rest of the labels' characters are used to put the labels into ASCII order. ASCII is a standard computer code which assigns a number to each character available on the keyboard. For a complete list of the ASCII code, please see Appendix C 3. All other cells in the order of their number or formula value. If you have used the Primary-key command before, VIP Professional remembers your most recent choices and you will not have to respecify the primary-key field again unless you want to change your choices. Press [Return] to accept the choices displayed in response to the Primary-key command selection. To change them, specify the primary key field and sorting order of your choice. Do not use [Escape]. Professional will display and use your most recent selections. Page 119 Secondary-Key If there is more than one record in the primary field with the same primary-key field, the order of those records after the sort will be unpredictable since records with identical primary-key fields are considered equal. To help with this problem, the Secondary-key command is provided. It is used to sort the order of records with identical primary-key fields. For instance, if you want to sort a list of names and addresses by last name in alphabetical order, you may decide to sort the list further by sorting the records of those who have the same last name by also sorting the first names. To do this, you would choose the last-name field as primary key and the first-name field as secondary key. After selecting the Secondary-key command from the Data Sort menu (S), use this command as you did the Primary-key command. The sorting order is decided the same as it os for the primary-key command. The next time you use Data Sort, the secondary-key choices you made will be displayed if you use the Secondary-key command. Accept it or revise it as you would the Primary-key command. Reset The Reset command is used when you wish to erase all the choices you made concerning the Data-Range, and Primary-key and Secondary-key commands. You can use this command to erase choices made just before or to erase choices made during a previous Data Sort operation. Select the Reset command from the Data Sort menu (R). Your choices for the Data-Range, Primary- and Secondary-key commands are erased. Naturally, if you wish to continue with the Data Sort command, you will have to make new choices. Go The Go command is used when you have made all necessary choices for the Data-Range, Primary and Secondary-key commands, and feel that you are ready for the records to be sorted. Select the Go command from the Data Sort menu (G). VIP Professional sorts the records that you selected in the way that you specified. Once the records are sorted, VIP returns to the Ready mode. Quit The Quit command is used to return you to the Ready mode in the same position that you were in before using Data Sort. This command can be used at any point between selecting Data Sort and issuing the Go command. Data Query The Data Query command allows you to find all records in a database or range which meet certain conditions or criteria that you specify beforehand. For example, you might want to find all customers who live within a certain zip code area, or all sales people on the East Coast who sold items totaling under $50,000. What the Data Query command does with these records depends on which one of four subsidiary commands you choose. These subsidiary commands are: Find, Extract, Unique and Delete. Page 120 To use the Data Query command you need to prepare your worksheet by creating special ranges. The first range for the Data Query command is the input range. The input range consists of your database or the portion of it that you wish to use. The second range, called the criterion range, is created to contain the criteria by which you select records. Finally, if you plan to use the Extract and Unique commands, you will also need an empty range, headed by field names, which will be a receptacle for the data copied (duplicated) from the input range. This is called the output range. All three ranges are created on the same worksheet. Input Range The input range is the entire database or any range in it which you wish to use as the object of the Data Query command. Unlike the Data Sort command, the field names at the top row of the database are included when you decide on the input range. For the purpose of the Data Query command, upper and lowercase letters are considered alike in field names. [Space] characters count, even if they are invisible. Criterion Range The criterion range provides the criteria by which records are selected. It is constructed in an empty area of your worksheet. Like a database, the criterion range uses the columns and rows of the worksheet for organization. The first row is used for field names. The field names can be all or only some of the same field names as those used in the input range. The only field names you need to include in the criterion range are those from the input range which head fields containing the information that is needed to meet the criteria. Below the first row of the criterion range, you place the criteria you wish to use in the appropriate fields. If you place all the criteria in one row of the criterion range, a record from the input range will have to match each criterion in the corresponding fields before it is selected. If you use two rows, then a record must match all the criteria of the first row or all the criteria of the second row before it is selected. Using one or more than one rows for the criteria defines whether you want an "and" or an "or" selection process. Using Labels as Criteria: The criteria you include in a criterion range can be labels, numbers, formulas, or a combination of them. If a criterion is a label, the label from the corresponding field of the input range must match it character for character (excluding the label prefix, but including any [Space] characters) before it is said to meet that criterion. However, there are three special characters which offer some leeway in matching. Page 121 These three characters are the question mark (?), the asterisk (*) and the tilde (~). The question mark is used in a criterion label to match any single character which is in the same position in the input label. For example, "ACCT?1" matches "ACCTG1" or "ACCTS1", but does not match "ACTG12". The asterisk is used to end a criterion label and matches remaining characters of an input label. For example, "ACCT*" matches "ACCTS" or "ACCTG1", but does not match "ACTSRVBL". The tilde character is used at the beginning of a criterion label and is used to match every input label except the one which has the same characters as does the criterion label after the tilde. For example, "~ACCTS" matches "ACCTG" or "ACCTS1", but it doesn't match "ACCTS". These three characters can be used singly or together. When used in combination, the input label must match all characters, including each special criterion label character. For example, "~ACCT*" matches "ACTG1" or "RCVBL", but it does not match "ACCTS" or "ACCTG1". Using Numbers as Criteria: If the criterion is a number, then the number from the criterion range must match the number or the current value in the corresponding field of the input range exactly before it meets the criterion. A zero in the criterion range will match a blank or a label in the correct field of the input range. Using Formulas as Criteria: If the criterion is a formula, it can be placed anywhere in the criterion range. It is constructed in a certain way which makes its location unimportant. Formulas are written as a test of a record - - to be specific, as a test of the first record of the input range. After it has tested the first record, VIP Professional will automatically test the following records sequentially. Criterion formulas use at least one, if not m It is important to make sure that when you import text, it has been standardized. With VIP Professional, you could still try to import non-standardized text, but the results are unpredictable and can be quite suprising. File Erase The File Erase command is used to delete a file from a disk. It is most often used to remove files one at a time from a disk so that there is more room for storage on the disk. Care must be taken when exercising this command because once a file hvalue of zero. If you construct a formula which refers to a cell in a record directly above the one it is in, the first testing will be inaccurate. This is because the formula is tested on the first record first and, since it refers to the row above the first record in which only field names are located, the reference has a value of zero. For all the following records, the testing will usually be valid. The criterion formulas have only two results: true or false. If the formula referring to the input record is true, then the record is considered to meet the criterion. If it is false, then the record does not meet that criterion. Page 122 Criterion formulas are usually written as a test of one of the record's fields to see if it is equal, or greater than, less than and so on. Therefore, they tend to follow a recognizable pattern. The first step of the formula is an operational sign, the most popular being a "+". This is followed by the cell address of the field to be tested. The cell address consists of the column letter of the field and the row number of the first record ("2"). If the row number is something other than 2, the testing will be inaccurate. (As an option, you can use the Range Name Label (Down) command which is described in the chapter, "Range Commands" to indicate the first record.) The next step is to indicate the way in which the value is to be tested by including another operational sign (frequently, "<", ">", or "=" signs are used). The last step is including a value, either by using a number or indicating another cell address as the value to be compared. As with all other formus, [Space] is never used. One of the simplest formulas you could write might look like this: +F2>70. This means the value of the field located at column F, of the first record, has to be greater than 70 before it can meet the criterion. After the first record is tested, VIP Professional automatically goes on to the second one (using the formula, "+F3>70") and so on. Another formula might look like this: +F2<>G2. This means the value of the field located at column F must be greater than or less than that of the field located at column G. Of course, as you become more experienced in using formulas as criterion, you may want to create more complex formulas. It's a good idea to remember that a formula is tested on each record of the input range and it should be general enough to be useable with each one. Output Range An output range only needs to be constructed if you intend to use the Extract or Unique commands with Data Query. The fields from the input range which are selected will then be copied into this range. The output range is constructed in an empty area of the worksheet. Anything that may have been entered in that area will be erased by the copies from the input range. The top row of the output range consists of the field names of the fields you want copied. Whether this is all the ones from the input range or just some of them depends on if you want to list entire records or just certain fields from the records. Below the field names, the following rows will be used for the duplicated entries which match the criteria from the criterion range. Using Data Query Now that you have an input range, a criterion range and, if necessary, an output range, you are ready to select the Query command from the Data menu (/DQ). The Data Query menu will now be displayed. There are nine subsidiary commands: Input, Criterion, Output, Find, Extract, Unique, Delete, Reset and Quit. The Input (I), Criterion (C) and Output (O) commands are used to specify the ranges you have constructed. Select each command in sequence. Specify and enter its range. When you specify the input and criterion ranges, you will need to specify the entire range - - including the field names. When you specify the output range, you need only specify the field names. If you have used the Data Query command before, VIP Professional remembers your most recent range specifications and displays them when you choose the commands. If you accept them, simply press [Return] and go on to the next step. Page 123 Choosing a Type of Query After specifying ranges, you will have to choose a type of Data Query. To do this, you have four command choices: Find, Extract, Unique and Delete. Find: Choose the Find command from the Data Query menu (F). Find lets you use the [UP] and [Down] keys to move to and highlight the selected records of the input range. When you've selected Find, the [Up] and [Down] keys only move from one selected record to the next. If there are no more selected records in that direction, the computer beeps at you and remains in the same position. The [Left] and [Right] keys move you left and right in the record you are in. [Home] and [End] move you to the first and last record of the database respectively, even if these records are not among the selected ones. Both [Escape] and [Return] will take you back to the Data Query menu. Extract: Choose the Extract command from the Data Query menu (E). It copies the fields of the records which match the selection criteria into your output range. If there are more records then there is room in the output range (for example, because of worksheet borders), the computer will beep and send you an error message. When this happens. you will have to reconstruct the output range where there is more room, and reissue the Data Query command. Unique: Choose the Unique command from the Data Query menu (U). It is the same as Extract, except that, where there are duplicate records, only the first is copied into the output range. If you ever wish to delete duplicate records in a database, this is an extremely useful command. By constructing a criterion range without criteria (leaving the rows below the field names blank), you can copy the entire database into the output range. Since the Unique command doesn't copy duplicates, you will have a database which is free from duplicates. Delete: Choose the Delete command from the Data Query menu. It erases selected records from the input range. The remaining records of the input range are moved up so there are no gaps left. Once the records are deleted, they cannot be restored. As a precaution, VIP Professional prompts you to confirm deletion. If you choose Yes (Y), the records are deleted. If you choose No (N), you are returned to your most recent position in the Ready mode. Reset: The Reset command is used when you are dissatisfied with the range choices you've just made or if you do not wish to use any of the ones from the previous Data Query command. It erases all the range specifications you have made. To use the Reset command, select Reset from the Data Query menu (R). Your range specifications are erased. Page 124 Quit At any point after selecting Data Query and before leaving the Data Query submenu, you can use the Quit command to return to the Ready mode. Choose Quit from the Data Query menu (Q). Using the Query Function If, after you used Data Query and then made changes in any of the ranges (input, criterion or output), you may use the special Query function [Function 7]. It will use all the specifications you just made for the last Data Query command to reapply a Data Query operation. If you have used the Reset command with Data Query, this operation cannot be completed unless you respecify the needed information with the Data Quert command before you use [Function 7]. Using Database @ Functions to Generate Statistics Seven database @ functions can be used to generate statistics on a database. These @ functions are excellent for the purpose of numeric analysis. Database @ functions are written as a type of formula. their definitions are very similar to the statistical @ functions discussed in the chapter, "Building Formulas Using Operators and Functions", except that they are designed specifically for database use. Instead of working on a database as a whole, they operate on one field of selected records in the database range. The database @ functions are entered as formulas in the following manner: @ function (input range, offset, criterion range). As with other formulas, a [Space] is never used when entering a function. The input range and the criterion range are exactly the same as they are with the Data Query command (see the previous section in this chapter). The input range specifies the area of the database to be analyzed, including both the records for the analysis and the field names. The criterion range consists of the selection criteria for the records, but, instead of selecting fields which meet the criteria, the @ function criterion range is used to select whole records. Like the criterion range of the Data Query command, the criteriorange of the dddatabase function is constructed in an empty section of the worksheet. It can contain one, some or all of the field names from the input range. The criteria itself can be numbers, formulas or labels (exactly like those used in Data Query). The major difference between a Data Query criterion range and a database @ function criterion range is that the latter can be used to select the entire input range (by not including criteria under the field names). Only specially selected records from the input range can be used in a database @ function. When you specify ranges as part of the @ function, type in the cell addresses or range names. Don't use your arrow keys or the mouse. If you use formulas in the ranges, make the ranges absolute by using a dollar sign (for example, "$ACCTSRCVBL" or "$B$10..$F$100"). The offset portion of the @ function is the number of the field from the input range which will be used for calculation by the @ function. To determine this number, count the columns of the input range from left to right, starting with "0" (zero) at the farthest left column, until you reach the field of your choice (the offset). Page 125 Once you've typed in your database @ function and pressed [Return] to enter it, the Professional will do the rest of the work for you. First, records are selected from the input range which match the criteria range. Then, the @ function operates on the offset of the selected rows. The seven database @ functions are as follows: @DCOUNT: This function counts all the entries from the offset field of selected records. @DSUM: This function finds the sum of all the entries from the offset field of selected records. @DAVG: This function finds the average value of all entries from the offset field of selected records. @DVAR: This function finds the variance value of all the entries from the offset field of selected records. @DSTD: This function finds the standard value of all the entries from the offset field of selected records. @DMAX: This function finds the largest value of all entries from the offset field of selected records. @DMIN: This function finds the smallest value of all the entries from the offset field of selected records. Data Table 1 and Data Table 2 The Data Table commands allow you to construct tables which show how changes from one or two cells of a database (called "input" cells) can change the value of other cells (called "output" cells) which depend on them through formulas. VIP Professional organizes and performs the calculations automatically for this what-if process once you have performed a simple set-up. With the Data Table 1 and the Data Table 2 options, you also have the option to reset (that is, erase the settings you have made for either of the Data Table options). Page 126 Data Table 1 The Data Table 1 command tries out a series of values (which you select) in place of the value of one input cell (the value cell which is used as a reference). All formulas of output cells with values that depend on this cell's value are included in the table so that you can see how the entire database is affected by changing the contents of the input cell. In the database itself, the input cell is not affected by this command. To prepare for the Data Table 1 command, first decide on an input cell from the database. Note which output cells have formulas depending on the input cell. Now find a clear area in your worksheet to use as the range for your data table. In the left column of the range and one row down, list the different values which you wish to try in place of that of the input cell. In the first row of the range and one column over, sequentially enter the formulas of the dependent output cells. Instead of entering the formulas, you could simply refer to the relevant output cells by typing a "+" and the cell address (no[Space] character may be included). Notice that the top left cell of the range has been left empty. This is reserved for the input cell which will be entered later. You are ready to use the Data Table 1 command to finish the project. Select the command by choosing 1 from the Data Table menu (/DT). The computer will prompt you to specify a table range. Specify and enter the range you have constructed. Now the computer will prompt you to specify the input cell. Type its cell address or point to it and press [Return]. VIP Professional finishes filling in the table by calculating the value substitution over each formula. If you have used either the Data Table 1 or the Data Table 2 command, VIP Professional automatically displays your most recent specifications for input cell(s) and table range. If you wish to continue using these, simply press [Return] as each one is displayed. Any of the specifications can be changed. To change a specification, you can press [Escape] to cancel the old one, then make a new selection using a mouse or movement keys, or by typing. VIP Professional has a special Table function which can be used. This Table function [Function 8] activates recalculation of the most recent table range, using the most recent input cells. The Table function is displayed if you have used the Reset command and have not yet specified a new table range and input cell(s). Reset If you wish to erase all specifications you made for either the Data Table 1 or the Data Table 2 command, you may use the Reset command from the Data Table menu (/DTR). If you wish to continue using one of the Data Table commands or the Table function, you will have to specify new input cell(s) and table range. Data Table 2 The Data Table command is similar to the Data Table 1 command. However, it is used to show the effects of changes in two input cell values on one formula's results. Therefore, it is set up a little differently. As with the Data Table 1 command, the values of the two input cells are not affected in the database. Page 127 Before using the Data Table command, you will have to prepare a table range in an empty area of the worksheet. In the farthest left column of the range and starting one row down, enter the values you wish to substitute for that of the first input cell. In the top row of the range and one column over, enter the values you wish to substitute for that of the second input cell. In the top left cell of the range, enter the formula whose results will be reflected in the table. As with the Data Table 1 command you may refer to the cell address where the formula is located instead of typing out the formula (e,g. "+C13"). Now, you are ready to calculate the table. Select 2 from the Data Table menu (/DT2). Specify the table range and first input cell in response to the prompts just as you did with the first Data Table command. Then specify a second input cell in the same manner as you did the first. After they have been specified, VIP Professional will calculate the table automatically. If you have used the Data Table commands before, VIP Professional will display your most recent specifications in response to the prompts. You may accept them by pressing [Return] or you may change them by specifying new choices. The table calculation can be repeated by using [Function 8] which is the special Table function. Of course, if you have used the Reset command to erase your specifications, this function will be disabled until you have entered new specifications. Data Fill The Data Fill command is used to enter a series of numbers at specified increments or decrements into a range. This command is frequently used to number your records sequentially or to prepare values for an X range of a graph. Before using the Data Fill command, you will need to decide on the range you want filled. Keep in mind that the ranges are filled columnwise; each column is filled in the order of first to last row before the next column to the right is begun. Frequently, you will be specifying only one column. You will have to decide on a "start", "step" and "stop" value. All three of these are numbers or formulas. A start value is the value at which the Data Fill command starts its sequence of numbers. It will be placed in the top left cell of the range. A step value is a positive or negative integer (or formula) which decides the increment or decrement by which each number of the range is further increased or decreased. A stop value is the last value you want to use in the sequence. Initially, Vip Professional is defaulted to these values: start value = 0, step value = 1 and stop value = 2047. When you are issuing the Data Fill command, VIP Professional will automatically display these in response to prompts. If you accept these values, simply press [Return] to enter each in turn. If you wish to use different values, specify and enter those instead. Select the Fill command from the Data menu (/DF). It is a good idea, although not strictly necessary, to have the cell indicator placed over the top of the left cell of the range. In response to the first prompt. specify the range and enter it. In response to the following prompts, type in the start, step and stop values you have decided on, pressing [Return] to enter each. VIP Professional will automatically fill in the specified range using your values. It will stop when it reaches the last cell of the range or uses the stop value; whichever comes first. Page 128 Data Distribution The Data Distribution command is used to find a frequency distribution for a range of values from a database. VIP Professional finds the frequency distribution by using a sequence of numbers increasing at a preset increment to organize groups of values from the range. It is similar to using a filing system where all values that fall within certain value limits are grouped together, all values which fall within the next, higher value limits are grouped together and so on. For example, to do the number of values from your worksheet which have a value between 1 and 100, and to find out how evenly distributed they are within those limits, you would use Data Distribution. When you construct the bin range, you will make its lowest value 1 and its highest value 100. You can set the increments of the bin range at 10, or, if you want a more exact record of distribution, you could set the increments at a smaller number such as 5. Then you would choose the part of your database from which you want your values distributed. VIP Professional considers both numbers and current formula results as values from the range when it executes the Data Distribution command. Before selecting the Data Distribution command,you will need to construct a bin range in an unused area of the worksheet. The bin range consists of the number sequence which is used to divide the groups of values from the range into levels (or bins, as they are sometimes called). The bin range is a one-column range which contains a series of numbers increasing incrementally. The column immediately to the right of the bin range, extending an extra row below it, needs to be left blank. This will be used as the results area and is not considered a part of the bin range. It is easier to use the Data Fill command (described in the last section), to construct the bin range. Select Distribution from the Data menu (/DD). In response to the first prompt, specify the range from which values are taken (the "values range") and enter it. In response to the second prompt, specify the bin range in the same manner. Do not include the results area in your specification. VIP Professional will use the results area to enter the number of values it considers as belonging in each bin. First, it counts all the values which are equal to or less than the first value entered in the bin range. The resulting number is placed in the column of the results area, in the cell directly to the right of the first bin cell. Then, VIP Professional counts all the values from the range which are greater than the first bin value, but equal to or less than the second bin value. The resulting value is placed in the results area column next to the second bin cell. This process is continued until all values in the bin cells have been used. The last row of the results area, the one that extends beyond the last row of the bin range, is used to enter the number of values which are greater than the last value (the largest value) of the bin range. As with many other data commands, VIP Professional remembers the range specifications most recently used and displays them in response to the prompts. To accept them, press [Return] and continue. To change them, press [Escape] and specify new ranges. Page 129 GRAPH COMMANDS Introduction Graph commands create visual presentations of your worksheet data. VIP Professional graphs are dramatic, effective in highlighting certain relationships among data that might be otherwise underplayed and, at the same time, easy to create. As in other areas managed by VIP Professional, the Graph commands are extensive and versatile enough to meet your particular needs and yet simple enough to use easily. There are five different types of graphs you can create, along with several different options available with each graph (such as adding titles or using color). You can even switch from one type of graph to another. VIP Professional offers you a tremendous amount of latitude in creating the type of graph that best suits your purpose. The graphs you create may be printed using the Graphprint program (described in Appendix A) and an appropriate printer. The commands from the Print menu cannot be used to print graphs. Creating and Viewing Graphs When you create a graph, there are only two decisions you are required to make. The first is what type of graph you want drawn (by using the Graph Type command) and the second is which range from the worksheet you want represented (most often by using the Graph A command). All other decisions and embellishments are optional. The first step in creating a graph is selecting Graph (/G) from the main menu. This calls up the Graph menu. It looks like this: TYPE X A B C D E F RESET VIEW SAVE OPTIONS NAME QUIT In the following sections of this chapter, we will discuss these graph commands in the above order. Their submenus are discussed in the order of probable use. When you are ready to view a graph, you may use the Graph View command or, if you are in the Ready mode, you may use [Function 10] (the Graph function). In the GEM version of VIP, a window is created on the screen and the graph is drawn inside of it. In the text version, the graph replaces the worksheet on the screen. Graph windows are similar to worksheet windows in several ways. Although you may move outside the window by using your cell pointer and mouse, you cannot move beyond the window borders with your arrow keys. Like worksheet windows, a graph window may be made smaller by using a Size box in the lower right corner. It may be moved around the screen by dragging the mouse while it is over the Title bar and it has a full box (upper right corner) which allows you to expand it to fill the screen. Then with the next click of the mouse over the Full box, you can return it to its former size. The Quit box in the upper left corner allows you to erase the graph window by clicking over it. VIP graphs have an interesting feature which ties in with the size of the graph window. If you change the graph window so that it is wide and short, your graph will change proportionately (within certain limits) so that it to is wide and short to fit in the window. If the graph window is thin and tall, your graph will also be thin and tall. Of course, if you make a graph window very small, it will start cutting off sections of the graph display. Page 130 After viewing a graph, you may erase it. To erase it, press any key while the graph window is active or click the mouse button over the graph window's Quit box. When you are ready to view it again, you may use the Graph View command or [Function 10] in the Ready mode to redraw it. Of course, if you are using a mouse there is no need to erase your graph when you are not viewing it. You simply switch from one window to another by moving the cell pointer to the window you want active and clicking the mouse button. The active window is always placed on top of the inactive window in the areas where they overlap. The details of the active window are also more defined than those of the inactive window. The Size, Full and Quit boxes cannot be found on inactive windows. It may appear as though a worksheet or graph disappears when it is not active because of the overlapping feature. If this should happen, make the active window small and use the Title bar to move it around the screen until you can see the inactive window beneath it. When you click the mouse button over the inactive window, it will become active again. Graph Type There are five types of graph offered by VIP Professional: Bar graph, Stacked-bar graph, Line graph, Pie chart, and XY graph. The first three types of graph can represent different values for up to six sets, or ranges, of related data. The Pie chart represents different data values for a single set of data. The XY graph represents two related values for each piece of data in the range. Instead of being one-dimensional like the other graphs, it is two dimensional. An XY graph can represent up to six different sets of data in one graph. Stacked-bar graphs and Pie charts should not be used to show both positive and negative values. Bar Graphs A Bar graph is probably the simplest type of graph you can draw and the easiest to represent different sets of data with. Bar Graphs compare one or more series of numbers. They use a horizontal basis to line up the sets of data. Each piece of data is represented by a rising vertical bar. Each bar is drawn to scale and is adjusted to the height which indicates its value or amount. Stacked-bar Graphs A Stacked-bar graph is similar to a Bar graph in that it uses rising vertical bars to represent data. However, only one set of data extends across the horizontal basis. The other sets of data are stacked on the first set. Its best use is for comparing values of data from several sets. Line Graphs A Line graph uses a scale to show amount or value in a vertical fashion. The sets os data are horizontally lined up below the graph. The values are indicated by lines, labels and/or symbols at the height (adjusted to scale) which represents their amount or value. Like the Bar graph, the Line graph is mainly used to compare one or more series of numbers. Page 131 10 Unprotect 93,109 Synchronizing Window Scrolling Ranges. Defining 103 36 Ranges, Resetting Graph 134 Tab 6,8,29 Ranges, Specifying 27,103 Table Function 51 For Graph Commands 38,133 Target Range 30,32 For Print Commands 43 Title Bar 4 Copying 32 Titles/Names, Worksheet 10 Recalculate Function 6,19,21,51, Selecting Graph 39 59,93 Type, Changing Graph 39 Recalculation Icon 5,59,93 Type, Selecting Graph 38 Recalculation 21,59 Unfreezing Titles 99 Automatic 21,59 Unlocking Titles 99 Manual 21,59 Unsynchronizing Split-Window Columnwise 21,59 Scrolling 36 Iteration 21,59 Values 12,47 Natural 21,59 As Criteria in Data Entry 122 Rowwise 21,59 Display of 12 Reference Works 152 Entering 16 Rotation of Anchor Cell 27,104 Prefixes 16 Records 117 Viewing a Graph 38,134 Relative Reference 6,31,55 Page 164 VIP Commands 87 Protection 93 Functions 88 Recalculation 93 Absolute 88 Automatic 93 Recalculate 88 Columnwise 93 Edit 88 Iteration 93 GoTo 88 Manual 6,93 Graph 88 Natural 93 Help 88 Rowwise 93 Name 88 Insert 33,98 Query 88 Columns 98 Table 88 Rows 33,98 Window 88 Status 101 Goodies 88 Titles 37,99 Font Size 88 Both 37,99 Grid On/Off 88 Columns 99 Window Function 35,51,100 Clear 37,100 Window 38 Rows 99 Active 38 Window 35,100 Inactive 38 Clear 37,100 Window, Worksheet 4 Horizontal 35,100 Windows, Split Worksheet 35 Synchronize 36,101 Worksheet Commands 89 Vertical 100 Column-width 25 Worksheet Display 4 Delete 98 Worksheet, Moving Around the 7 Columns 98 Worksheet Titles 10 Rows 98 Worksheet Window 4 Erase 101 X, Resetting Graph Range 134 Global X, Selecting Graph Range 39,133 Column-width (Set or Reset) /X Commands, Introducing 76 25,92,98 /XC Command 77 Default 94 /XG Command 77 Directory 95 /XI Command 76 Printer 95 /XL Command 78 Automatic Line Feed 96 /XM Command 77 Top Margin 96 /XN Command 79 Bottom Margin 96 /XQ Command 77 Left Margin 96 /XR Command 77 Right Margin 96 Page Length 97 Set-up String 97 Quit 97 Status 97 Update 97 Wait 97 Format 25,89 Comma (,) 91 Currency 90 Date 70,90 Fixed 90 General 90 Percent 90 Plus or Minus 91 Scientific 90 Text 90 Label Prefix 91 Center 91 Left 91 Right 91 Page 165Dz1HE1 đqH b)4C!$R|q >"o[p&W$N"I "ɗB1)tC?>]b*Qq_K^,FxDF$&Ru"tE&1tzꈤ񂥄M_hC*!(Y֕7{!DFK/Fk_Q0B.ȯJdIimj0\B  D1J  Z6կ"Pu-Eȣdj 8FWW)cGTI(?!L\BrL?:%2EħsZJD?1s>!%)WB!챔Z,VBb[v/QKK7^z#[SD&;y|w<ʅ?>~&?3Oy5BQ$q}#e\?È~-DWS ;j, +~y/:?[$;߼|_vfUW"EQ 5D>?-Be ,9SG>P ilUxKhU^|ߏG؅M)^"qp` _3D&?, K¥'6,"qϘ -D^s.2$hQ꣍ =3]/S$.[YK᨞#Q*>jR1(] W_m̜7Y,d1`],aC9QC|n5P 1N܋a,"YmjX&>c(68]!|B<*hw= -ղ'|=( ]_RuP,p,-[(TaZN=i?&Pg̘6³TmP("t¯(Y6Ռ|2]L\/ȿ8ig~j 55m P$],3È!j>xIaxT1F?E[Z'U=E6Wσ_ 9CcQ?/$h51ꫥωPUET6U4^a }yT_輙 c4UW=bj>~/E̜$¯$/Z[_@lꀩ+t<¦9 UєPUNU_@_ *?U_( "Zª,/WGxT1X㧾OH~:~- [DT< HaShў:EfƜ/{MPn,*{f={tP`X0"T(c*GސI ]xj4<+( \-p 2v?0$(?(04 [\Bx5 FT7y *H& 3>I$*?5)! - MU FJЫHr?4 O̪BR K:5P! ~e SHJ]*X]T * 6V!D_>1a,UԀUT@ %1tBT1t}5a2*" wPNq,}^0zbhz_ql`='&GOϙ8Y4{ gף~ixo4o7q4~iq4iߚ~:Njkk7W,ߚw94rlEf%pD#~DS3e3|# 0ñ0۱0z_`=ɤ`=0>b,1Q< ?[bV+!],z"N.b3Dx?^.ΈN=z (Am%GI<)]z'MñǢ=t@Q؂# SdO.dv PLz Pv Dv3N; iO:"M!b7D I!LOD%$#K z&tAT^hD#"/3q1B CFJN1R CSZ^1b CEjn1r Cvz~1 Ca C! !mA1*"Gn.C Qr1!"xZ?:z򎺟((08|nHP2X(`h|p)x#P#|U=!#Xӊ]!ZBj+w"Nbh ˁ(Ƿ#h 0S.f #@C 5u2{aWj\pB'!!u(b08!kH!PXb`h!pxbrBQQNunmlkjigeca_][XUROLIEA=d*$:741.+'$! ԯ_> !$'+.147:<>BDEFGHGFEDB><96p30.,*)('()*,.0369=AEILORUX[]_acegijklmno{p{qyX>+\s`zd(h+7\>+sH{P\+t5N?St"lfyEvY |L漿"|K)g$O,T{,\,StQxd5,h,3(0ʐ|Ì)L.TqPN,u02$~ UGrD!B!BP%T%'k^oKșeѧOl|a54Y'f\Tj)C%k<bj5`*D4CZH&6/PRE}SPACEY,9Z9=C('O$c-BgVQ#,PrAMTIz;WHILNLOAENYDOC+DKNB*'ENTEF IZRBR GHWTO(p)BE'dݯQ.3TIPOSUMxQDGEHOG_AXEL IICONSIST$ o',raAN$Doy';|l^p!!j(ԴHEL8B A9B `pV98nCPL33|.a N6H qހ \[   :O loOz~4z`q("A j`F |ߠ c>p`w8Q6ސ?aepk}/0X6^o8 BEMHPŹHfN6IElyO ¶Vۇ9#][ J`I0T& -?L,. |D$QK ǜ" NA`_(W*uPNqU?\>z. (1Vpe^?Lf 3z h3g|L#OYtg!zx&>F' W9+f*f;uR)"# 2$(%Q&[cHL>cPT>cX#)_$#C 4E1\a bx~NqJ\L`)QF%N zUr%"KD& ^+NTSCf&hH/v&& ^.(!l$Q`#QrxG'IH"1--b%Q\ SKjA$ A"d2BRb H2 qNbRNACDjET4[(72' [C_>GAAeu0dtP`AAqapyqArsdtuAvwdgWBGQ`Oh^)U?Ћ9Dbz"U:Oú:'pкVD/1^3EQ Ƣ3DRz5&#~K#j@D8". Gj\בXUxYc}/#LߊM^ y ~)LCuq/{K&'&'E..cq!xQd13G%ehJK `(yj&bEŜ}2kf&2+f3xN/xyj RbBMYb4@},abBLOxI(ILK/䨱I" Ib|&̸_Ty2-ވL=~r}(^WO,˜FQy^)<>h2>4EBY*"t& |V #Ԝf#,^W_)vK sbx6K9)T mM4G1IBL#tPn,R4}-Dr ]P Zc ^)4>/Rh) jl94Bqt)Tb u>AI'4DXıtU0Q (엊]X E,7(F8^)~_E,)|U\_JKHx!LRy,E•D 1^Y+x"eR,Rx.(^.xARx,R`89 D p;xH )%cGo+ y~/Dso+yz бF"y^]!,,K-bHb)8}2x/;0ESxZ/ǢR灈EhyX? <-uj!Mh"K&o/-? Gダ,RfZ%>hBv74I.-Q㢏&,ᗋ¤T㢞*z|?`RO+rC{J>n)<~} ! U()>,RaDQy/EƟ J[~)7Xr_js-?&5SXX%ohFOgQOv)<BJ-eHKӨy2? Î!wʧK$"* E'B_hQ]ÃN_!B~)4HO!<ĊԨ%E)<ԣx\Hpf _*GfEQfo^W .?)4k KX:&~$,X/Ě?"B/E1( Lbs#8?$KK%Ox?f)3S_ŊO(FI1K'J t,~ (,"DX) ƒxD<)R(L,)tmx#Izu /*,QL_r<qK 2iFOIC~iE/B( O,!J04S'Q|0)<4?$iE/ EI'xx<IsI:)(5 OS'bSǧIx$ OE<4,R'o"S'~9U$$E'9w otz*h]VzsbID?FF9x b3'o,RBE%HEwR T$?Ro()0I !Ic<&!wi  K:hI$8 1%HfRYx!J@*?GD H1$ވzH? @!k礀B2@.=@28 Q ~uoc #CעId\} dm$jH1{?t܏ @!k礀B2 <hP $FjHNp@*?GDIJ&>f j bT^=$J@I#I n#I #CעIx&:@>( #CעIͣ@~ D#{MdT^=$6\@?<G D0)BRGG @5s@!,JWC  @532@! b^=$v!UQ߈ zH3zH @5s@!jW4/~]423 ~ kBBqCעIBT&!& 2? ~ zH7I3>p!^!$}~ @"|C~ N b z zH+~s OU@53@!&u>zH=$ے}8_ġ* }| ~ ~!"FcC$ G?zJJuTvęlPDFU߈zH?p폄 !a:F @ @!"؀~ ("̶P DވzH?x\ƣ$kQ礀C{E~w }jLE6#*@B1WIx+>{$^oD Zlk[8U:=(f!(J?kgCx?(o?>bZ )$C]7f?l=;_wzݵ&~-!@ ~ ~"*PcG`F!RG dg*|@(V3@3@!x^E@V!\G>FH?65z3_ v@g!ړ?w 3@!𪏠?ςPz p8U=BjG={|z3V zt%NF(%lI?p0C*>x=?z?!DBp8V=/zW ~x#/{=CDAJ E?~#IC d$zCM >{@|!ʏ_3@!x:؀GU|T!姃XP^!WD~ ?x#C{ {}|ǗmI%{e\U{Doj> C{aO?l~H !@!տyC$b e P./E!自ͪ?@z 詰|~=?RH3'<"z S@|!dϯ݀Cuϻp̫D=ovҰnv4O?,9!x!@!uq?CcK$߷`!?Dy@!UT@~| 0~Y ̝:#ĞcW?p?{_<~n {B0w@b=Ww~x'yR$ d~-Fu?B4Ͽ67c_qc=uoc1%c>~ mɟ_%Bar>`*LA3XMH8G`T][3Eو,@ ZSbI/$(QL%;%IFYH-p`)H vH-O`)ʅY;??AUy-[%g,ʱXG ^Ikf =m Ee"^=C{IichQ<~15GM^ ֢MDF?Ao,rnGbQ\w& tF?R,ez-J+ ]ITcf?\'I?Y;O}gX$:= X,Ƣ O8VH4<.'X) #Dx[Mi~ z bL'qѧVf6"Z$I݇0Q<M6_LAa,C1Je-|S1ŢY|U*(zC3: Ɛ(0[3EE3z2,*UؙSj=1f3NNĚ`X[EjE=33OJ1Of|UZbQ0[YZYtQbϞxQ|Ish hOcG_z}T3hCV"߽ͣsٖY$s13(#>Ci i`)iii i`)iii@ C5iVb`j!t~b!m0z)QW6ZEQC ^mEKkHG| M0T'"!cĚU^/gb}v_ ZnEMcqXZ-UgP`SrtˑQLU>,jl]%UN,z "j^ H JѡWKH:BkغXjJnBM8%t̗KAYEo֩Lx]GH2TW`_.Ȣs鸃 (Yxv5_mLV b/Dn Kz%I&BN*.#SCIRC  SL?kCEI^w;<'KԞ5wh2;>vy?+L/:ZA&XELs!MrBCHԳPNODx7rjOK"?R LB8_~>lİZEQ%2XV )h1ުBECA MP]9OS )_R!2jZ3D[1&% Eh%u:OWDj:/%J=CO3|vr,-J]%FgS'ehjrat/E'#Y MME7 "/JCUIM5%LIFO皊x/An٨FZ6-/ jLj;NLU ]ſ ERVkᘾ9FAI_:Ң?ttxM/eRPL_/EJ5Jw_XP[d VOi0 ].JMN?d1R 5L?: hM 2E"uG!usb#کBMz.H%аi(R ݧEXtK,ϑoF R)Vja^%UAL=Gb 6Wx,F-aS+DR:T/S7GEs CjI%>C1'ß ~'!{WԱvLnY<.3H1}vy3Q'h"NO.2FYq/GO-l-YE:ɢ/2ABzYk4cKI@AX)/aBl҉PICXA /TLyP:kGoV=[wA=j,MD^D쥢7' mR5[Il'_mY^Nqb}1 8E~SϫpBT`!Dt#IF'-A`EO+Z I GtxWZ|'_fmGbrLc]}!zY5aXPO-EN'.A՘S'̡zG,S/5IY/QG1 w7 žCFOLzFjNu(5B .pAB#\WJ!hH)O DUS$/I=3 ICAUTO0MWBL WIZOB BZ6jUMF 'UjL12WJUMP_F ]SHC+'zzKkzTU2_CH\LHLhGo!<~ CvнSP"G!US,݅ RLݘEZ7 MQTԛ >G%KgIMUN{4Nj+158ZaD׸LDMTWa}6`H2P9JPA-i]R:IB9NIFRAS!'#REVTNOR(GIdT3Dr uKTIGO=J3KYE=#SCIhENCE ,WIGL-PU]CLUBpAND+ZODAC.?AXZ) 1s&GxTx'ZaWERE2a>ȯb~P?s Usy Ez?UI~ 0A1aT&# , !0LA#(*9" |I/ G-bЖ6a@]xTw (=hH@xUQ~ES4pt]戋RNy=AkT5 lpUUQJN`qT D*9&}h iKfW]=aW&% P3\Ury]Q% dȞ2 (rT'L*z~4P,SٜL*Oq fO|B˽j4hE(PP~  +L*j7OH*:*P?P?(UQqLJ'~kw~~&~|>xhT0u`%1e !ݙxrvBRIrtMp^ C`bd1f Chjl1n Bx*,1. C02416 C8:<1> CnCBDF1H CJLN1P CRTV1X CZl\8̎)QFTT_]t֬.WOS TWR9THE&RPORa@uUDLY-!jvTmDOCMSKJNUmf24-ADIhFcH]}mk"BAlKID"GwLbOND*:{T&QUIZPLU^KASANeTAU6TIJTbRAMEXUNIVE RS ' IMmiU.M.S.@SCER*SA1$2D3II4VIP PROFESIONAL5qT! GEWgw!Bsd+G"3 DUfw uyb.gg@pRQ 6D h}vL$m:C~j"h+kH'A!6GmX Ğ,x77[GXU?r~ F/)X-㘃 x!5oo~ l\8 mDub F&%O9H H!X΢)4[!){~_P0$Sso6 /<Dl WLmVJZ D~><m|\q:)F0|>>? ?.Abm'pe9G T@Dy}ýᇍ>d #y &?+Xxϼ07=cZ ibD-w^Z;;D' ޥ^/ƿ ٯExOВ @yhO혂Ġ \\1ssiXB/ᠴFh??A6apt~?r^Z¢96 L C |@(}?ĖWǼ84>9~_~ D RHXcśD, h8,1 QXy_y߇` t s@b`bbp` \z1/!f~׎^_A?bvNc%kw`idf7|Gp4*`Xub VEBC3'0?ڂ2?xN'xw9|b^ t@9? ӀXa/ "}%Oa2_A__A ~oݛ_^iX+5A> ?7manG\/b>3A 5#t?3_9:j_ `^_X-d#X#9?Տ/s.%80OAub0}h_P񠠏(|29 "Bb6#K ?>3yDObqqEz&\=8?79AaA? tC1w'%C|~|z6 /s8|,/A:(pb D }Bm?Zc@^dm?apF~~ ECCkw|Nw$l 6Zss #WN$?c3UsGxAf u~z}}-7 fwDJI'8;ɸ`Xc{ݏoAa0DD/ChfS we刟`wG !ڠX}F,,p wi bf>81>u~g{ﱠ[garC/ø?< A| ??@$Gx[j eWuA@A_"Xb5π^ᾜj;>fC\<n#?8,Jzu6!iEg'zO py=z!+No~ GA. b@ir|r8I8tA//'^ <]6Sۏ0DA,&34, 2$ l˃j$2_qA^ DZ8F ?\3D gXT-CMb*+ -Eap}y㹡6 Xd}fg m&16 #??1: +jk"ۜ$?, X`  ?&H?ۢɌA ^ tƔ'cZņ4]s pD F /W8uxwO#;0+ 70[iact; Vf d'7!ζsi#xbI�iSa ฃ8Gq$ dHާ ;LB. I>= Jg~)}bcz~"~C> oE緌 gB$R~H~Xp3,Aª0ɼF#Fx~5Ոjz4| <,x=KZy1 &@[┴Bq|/t1__g`ho 0 m -`C-1gMc3U0ntbDM eKOİ;@8`4B`3maG#B01~h$hN)趢G@N,^ߎ˛D&oEp#OӃ b-:)4b>>5 Zl"xC>p!tn bo p/$ z~4D!^6P2Z#/ֈeK@yt.qӨ_Ǣ9F?G wyg(;yOx^#4|hNJƌhy c %?{GpؾXA#17?S?øY@mzg4 T"|M+p'cYNDpW;,n.)y7?;ya~\H7  )UEc@,,-4$q~ @ IGQ?!C21wvqfp7usDm##@g.~DR$h/~K?0мi8G)F6ƈ|[Ub@1T Dh$o PV 'C?Wf9%ϗJr}X0jI84A1;D'o4*xe?>?,u}z <kF"ZCNO D) yS!3pIz!0yh E?[w",C?t2FaXh "S9=7͢C#N7~>6U"?|C6=z4 Z qŽAUMǾ7&?"x t}k»>F BcXc1OD,o[`qfMsAbvKC?}~{`U<è1LKW'Z- L' F1 xhf2"haP`CVa(wA.pxpX :0Dpt+~1`ǟD3m&H}8V49c1G;|H0RKQF=If0xܟ:d1wׇPUK3 ]X_@}e$+C%?m=|P`bA}},Z4XuLtiqp&LK3X~P@/Q?MSh (,Vf__@p'1I@wlRPK?|l | ЧS kxn-D$Bm Oc;4X^Ur`zX 30Xc?C>8 {G:~4!D@S-VcG腻Qqn&±njckQcpQtc GF1NF.?Nw㿣F{犻qGh(>(?ϣ (ǖ8i@ ?V!-D&"'F|n0x3:>n- /o~ ?a6 K `Ixf 3W__m?JreC>^^C r, 3e|?!,!DX=DooFE}|?o =siB|װw ޞea`0~47KwDG? G)+oV#DR)W/, w # g|W?4,{W7U8аڌEhJ1x"ܟ<71yxF1 X < ,~)}pP |3lTEm#8Vy3,#c]p,| &`O~ozoaЄz Ga'`'>˪!9978a-O~ew;_t5ND׃Uֈ -Q0'\b\ D7qC<#э)^4 YZV˰Ӿ8 lAh{Z&;0KW| ~9 SZy&pTc`oU^xZ?i ,TCh5qkfE5 4Q =$^ ŶBƱh}ULbXb(~MF < ˙f$ )#-/۶,CQk Zi$sЭ-tgcZI{v?a[ O3b TJF:T,K 9j@xG=OF"DٴgiXFG}>,p 0-zU_k`#uD 'K~Z1^~,Ԣ?;\cl䐣^yGfF6>_M4f,[8;^i=ُ@l}ތc$7.|9~ţ:": G  ߂(z84hCGT!o 6 3D+{Rcy 1@ޟh[jFU;u511-177d/<"xA8By1# miYXB?2|h4#A1XU!{9q n:/7yB;om? p((.Ah_q,V2hs:Q-#D՟4W̲jp}` b𳵾}8s`^Y, ǽ08fM;Kſ:1m|heb AqbRш5ё~5ߢU-ﯰ$?3 z?2 Ox8bEFP0?͖b; UئA)ID]`, =Cf}C aΏ  Q{ixCd< )0?X8Z-*& H#Dfwe/˼_8;E&?Oje,?|N9iA1[#}7bDnojX-`8d#YC6=Y,Y'Cb9~%~큃Ujxmk@R3KW8 ? K(~=4@QwDxnpw|e({n Dj>D1 77Qej6OgQPsYmG$Q ŵR>ɌC68VEʨ-+(^ (Nx hm[= H?nTMTAX/~\n-(z_ +踿G6\PDQ1"tb7<uzS/rt6g՛DFȿ%D ynqpx=? =I#oDV lmj"p[zl߳]Qj/On !yE|ڇ}f$TgWth?X"O yx&џ8XD ?ub"B9tg`d ` 4 qa[x 5(z!8΢>DQDY]8o:J_XH@/8+Sŀd{mz!3-?E^]B8R=a xhHCz\1xCtgQc`ww'ģ :>O#<@R:g|0PO&uj<5X,>,6 Z/F0>)|cC{`0Kv:ŸW/b D"gYa2_8O찻/Z`xR@7Kx>`8s>P  CC?SFޖMq.x82wQa3`2-D]c<#E#%dȘChh7cx5z4Zq5f\';tמ"D3xYүGPܟ|5~9&˫xL-@>.зc }F!?t8v_ߺ+@x?Ez~6,?TN-n-[<@B8 48~W5B?HBx~ø{^K>CY ,"E[ˊFD#C,o܂%p_aĐI >pS_ D#EBE L#2DaOrX<??NS^J~NuDKTKTm߉ϓ菒<)΃?A51r K,Zc,S؈20ly?X,2Bh"cb^Hk H3"T=@fvj"(g莲m? a4HcXB8? mA;uFx~L}A<Á^j"(@:ej(Z"P1-F \[첛q '+fc^@#'j;EEiFyدW!9?Ѻ|D}t'm'Ogc "~yQ5̴Z*? ҅-1<0ɦ*n1C? K?^`Erh1^P X33~0-Q%lZ*Կ^`e-?Oh$s._]N &"8@/o?{'GhǗQ)FUЬhC\-E>Cގc>@a0džA c?+9鎣3t|B_} ~PJbE괞F~˹fP,z94b1b FhS 70EO Xj4=%TE5?7Ԫ Hb??HG> <|g/ ]2t "WS\c(\0OhRrb1 |@mn~>Eo^F-!?Ĥ&<"&G$b­I E\ёx>:5{^Ơ_Ҏxʌ?b fF='#;T4EGјlgPH ׃=ƯkTqB(GCAf+FQH,@-XluX nODg~^Ǣ"KR}`18/z? PF4Wn ^ TV&3NnrCfD~HW*X-_XuGѾAP 7X-oU>'oj!Dx?{NAY9Xݠo^' g8,99‡{HY߈F~>%a|ߑ~x!t\W ;;UtnEs20,f|]?.bO ,HW~K EE1k}4K65~~F48Kn{QO]pBP`Pj#8DZ,Ո#L,ڋip /y-$@Dz -i#pq` _hBh'_+e; D88^: p%~L%(:?431wp[tJ?i3]]:9A!Agh_c ? Wi|xf6y'|nꨋ&>q %,e5utebU.?'"  A޺!W Z> r ec/ p/xߨ[бBMxf>"y^.pPl$$KLb? F ^\Rӿ2l)<2_g s@ը ?6xA??pO!`(l-#u: ;2? 4AY~<_~63b¥膒>@ cy`s11%,@ϫj!Svp-=yTPUM<~G"3z#н0Sv;<z;t/(5@<ȰZc4@8Z?*a"DhaE>^Ja{%g ,?GUI~~ 8_/?]s 2||F/{gw v$+bf6g̱B!/.4p]3r0`=As]! ,4 } D$m[$O1^\Pơ?1lKa',bh_XX@`h8^ @Y KDmF? %DX,n߆u"pf24 yZ4`;`? x,CQŅь;*?ࠡA)0~_:Mp9|[^I#gh~Zs0h? @hM(?ccx pl? %3+ ix;ĞZ#R888pV#7Ƹ8`c{p^z4$ B,BO87[O=DOF!xZ"Œ_7= 2/tN:nVwރ|T/E͝LygEyGG=n= D hj^5I?+/`YHp?C3X /s,15?yiW~gs\?Z;g A7xPRX???!tP0p]gj!/s0t S?hiX䖀Pc|kB28D/РnbDcыppV?r/su@x p^D9?!i]Y$?rF!ldg`9tbch7:V6Rkhxk0DF#me/z1]"Q{>&@I,:?lPV2Ds&6ązssYCaYE-;k$8otcP"~~]?;f6pce8v#0,Y7 tbQ0g&.] ֏a 8h77ms~Qz4(?> >>x?q{բDV+Xd;tX1XAdm=;~ƁƄqf#B!g+D8эs ~ƁLG 8Ǡj.ks@,G gہ~@$ य़9Y8pƹJݥqH0@,#6\&`S@-ʰI>??lr6X,w(P x/5>wF~i1x4f?~t h8*x)-?l] c݋ńcQl<,(k 4"?ncWYmYc2n2h?oF}0?*D - ^ 4hōC^5-[c0T^plfx cz )RE"pYr尩]tn` <%_$FKa,,Ӏ6)c .^iy1,Ӡzx EZiGG?`ugbƁ~V'8vL">0bveKt>c.M""1߯tpUes4 ñϦ`2{2{4 NYte;'K9:BWD),hch 4 O ̱c0F.he1M8& 6`e Rf |ɫt!q, M0c@Ďqx]pqx<#|Ky߆' 7A(^ 4Q/+>Ѹ1|40PE%D7߆Ey-,PUD;8}C"| $X F"8b~/oB/ g"(zab2a`NiRy=xC,1KG iךp _<1TA* 352,"݁E]?-џ`v>?D^?Z,uFD T<BY=l'oUN Jb_qTO7oc*5Kc?\y? g,Dx>ykm/?%ay\v*Sed -w xR #w8v 6 Z~[*h[i^0p1\B|`4CxERѐ"$ђ!#X%z80<7B015B2S+Ηf1315Nq<BP..HA PWaM8/LA8 <9`WV?#563/DF5"l(jaqNGFas[◈ˈ1\^pyĊa FAE c)"Hi,X!y!R!z1 Bc)6A( ^=LbB@V A$C()*1+ ,Ta*/: a9"b#$!%4v ᨞_P43U)6.'C, -L E..C8BƐ(Y,C8Be!DEdhD>ZLC4X5-Hz4j+ 6 L<}CΫ8<\,F~sFYbyաF 0I/g[y6'LLR1g_n=tN!^2MJ="!`I:%g܈(SLN3 'g6B%o&e 22qA  ҘqT\= =A( fn栢` u& I$R&"aP$. (60 * StbmS018=E2,0 TgSTk|2`R0'fBR23..mf&B`]2(V*AnOq5?q3>>lNuV81.0CHRISPYW'89J*P %!f 8QmDqDzS $[ EJQG:7?_0C'Zh_eL<.5 G5(Y3?lA[&h8f}LC6%R/zbRO響m$G1ch5pD(${I4-gGYd_%(ZǞMjeM49 RzJ%JLV#қ[1nelld1,6  ۜ VTEPtl %/tnu_Gש~k7 x, . /a#kQ  8`*5t>h%3]q-C CD0  ~6I$ ;gid(1xQK*&Rta#fMD `l 'j pbw: D "8( RMk 0!c(f25 .U?k2a/. 8%H6(#x5ݜH'krjݍXL,`9%,ŭ RgZ/  tonc 41|,8CG(tKV&*NV.\/&~DޚtFM$4jIOv 2m*> Z$0eՇː0 *0 9..X _ ZL{&D&E B ",&qJth1-Nt|x& YBGeVG" ( v6.  (%^h蜶'U$ EeH~ 6Ad2=P ^55΅l3T.,`6"z &6  :oR>N **\B h ~rrT_r+CPpX3POPI